win32 library

Support for programming against the Win32 API on Windows operating systems.

This library provides a wrapper around many useful functions from the API, along with the necessary constants and structs that are supplied. With thousands of APIs and interfaces in the Win32 API, many of which cover areas that would be unlikely to be useful to a Dart or Flutter developer, this library is not intended to be exhaustive. Instead, we focus on the core Win32 APIs that are typically used for Windows development, along with Win32 and COM APIs that are likely to be wrapped by a Flutter plugin author.

Win32 is at its heart a C-based API, and accordingly adopts the style and idioms of that language, including heavy usage of pointers, structs allocated on the heap, and null-terminated strings. As a result, you may choose to wrap the exposed APIs in your application to make their invocation more idiomatic for a Dart consumer.

For more conceptual material about programming Win32 apps with Dart, consult the Dart | Windows documentation.

Classes

ACCEL struct
Defines an accelerator key used in an accelerator table.
ACL struct
The ACL structure is the header of an access control list (ACL). A complete ACL consists of an ACL structure followed by an ordered list of zero or more access control entries (ACEs).
ACTCTX struct
The ACTCTX structure is used by the CreateActCtx function to create the activation context.
ACTIVATEOPTIONS
Flags used to support design mode, debugging, and testing scenarios.
ADDJOB_INFO_1 struct
The ADDJOB_INFO_1 structure identifies a print job as well as the directory and file in which an application can store that job.
ALTTABINFO struct
Contains status information for the application-switching (ALT+TAB) window.
ApplicationActivationManager com
APPX_PACKAGE_SETTINGS struct
Represents package settings used to create a package.
AppxFactory com
APTTYPE enum
Specifies different types of apartments.
APTTYPEQUALIFIER enum
Specifies the set of possible COM apartment type qualifiers.
ARRAYDESC struct
Describes an array, its element type, and its dimension.
ASSEMBLYMETADATA struct
Contains information about the referenced assembly, including its version and its level of support for locales, processors, and operating systems.
AUDCLNT_BUFFERFLAGS enum
The AUDCLNT_BUFFERFLAGS enumeration defines flags that indicate the status of an audio endpoint buffer.
AUDCLNT_SHAREMODE enum
The AUDCLNT_SHAREMODE enumeration defines constants that indicate whether an audio stream will run in shared mode or in exclusive mode.
AUDCLNT_STREAMOPTIONS enum
Defines values that describe the characteristics of an audio stream.
AudioClientProperties struct
The AudioClientProperties structure is used to set the parameters that describe the properties of the client's audio stream.
AutomationElementMode enum
Contains values that specify the type of reference to use when returning UI Automation elements.
BIND_OPTS struct
Contains parameters used during a moniker-binding operation.
BITMAP struct
The BITMAP structure defines the type, width, height, color format, and bit values of a bitmap.
BITMAPFILEHEADER struct
The BITMAPFILEHEADER structure contains information about the type, size, and layout of a file that contains a DIB.
BITMAPINFO struct
The BITMAPINFO structure defines the dimensions and color information for a device-independent bitmap (DIB).
BITMAPINFOHEADER struct
The BITMAPINFOHEADER structure contains information about the dimensions and color format of a device-independent bitmap (DIB).
BLENDFUNCTION struct
The BLENDFUNCTION structure controls blending by specifying the blending functions for source and destination bitmaps.
BLUETOOTH_ADDRESS struct
The BLUETOOTH_ADDRESS structure provides the address of a Bluetooth device.
BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATE_RESPONSE struct
The BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATE_RESPONSE structure contains information passed in response to a BTH_REMOTE_AUTHENTICATE_REQUEST event.
BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_PARAMS struct
The BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_PARAMS structure contains specific configuration information about the Bluetooth device responding to an authentication request.
BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_METHOD enum
The BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_METHOD enumeration defines the supported authentication types during device pairing.
BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_REQUIREMENTS enum
The BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_REQUIREMENTS enumeration specifies the 'Man in the Middle' protection required for authentication.
BLUETOOTH_COD_PAIRS struct
The BLUETOOTH_COD_PAIRS structure provides for specification and retrieval of Bluetooth Class Of Device (COD) information.
BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO struct
The BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO structure provides information about a Bluetooth device.
BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SEARCH_PARAMS struct
The BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SEARCH_PARAMS structure specifies search criteria for Bluetooth device searches.
BLUETOOTH_FIND_RADIO_PARAMS struct
The BLUETOOTH_FIND_RADIO_PARAMS structure facilitates enumerating installed Bluetooth radios.
BLUETOOTH_GATT_VALUE_CHANGED_EVENT struct
The BLUETOOTH_GATT_VALUE_CHANGED_EVENT structure describes a changed attribute value.
BLUETOOTH_GATT_VALUE_CHANGED_EVENT_REGISTRATION struct
The BLUETOOTH_GATT_VALUE_CHANGED_EVENT_REGISTRATION structure describes one or more characteristics that have changed.
BLUETOOTH_IO_CAPABILITY enum
The BLUETOOTH_IO_CAPABILITY enumeration defines the input/output capabilities of a Bluetooth Device.
BLUETOOTH_NUMERIC_COMPARISON_INFO struct
The BLUETOOTH_NUMERIC_COMPARISON_INFO structure contains the numeric value used for authentication via numeric comparison.
BLUETOOTH_OOB_DATA_INFO struct
The BLUETOOTH_OOB_DATA_INFO structure contains data used to authenticate prior to establishing an Out-of-Band device pairing.
BLUETOOTH_PASSKEY_INFO struct
The BLUETOOTH_PASSKEY_INFO structure contains a passkey value used for authentication. A passkey is similar to a password, except that a passkey value is used for authentication only once.
BLUETOOTH_PIN_INFO struct
The BLUETOOTH_PIN_INFO structure contains information used for authentication via PIN.
BLUETOOTH_RADIO_INFO struct
The BLUETOOTH_RADIO_INFO structure provides information about a Bluetooth radio.
BLUETOOTH_SELECT_DEVICE_PARAMS struct
The BLUETOOTH_SELECT_DEVICE_PARAMS structure facilitates and manages the visibility, authentication, and selection of Bluetooth devices and services.
BSMINFO struct
Contains information about a window that denied a request from BroadcastSystemMessageEx.
BSTR
A string data type that is commonly used by OLE Automation, as well as some COM methods.
BTH_DEVICE_INFO struct
The BTH_DEVICE_INFO structure stores information about a Bluetooth device.
BTH_HCI_EVENT_INFO struct
The BTH_HCI_EVENT_INFO structure is used in connection with obtaining WM_DEVICECHANGE messages for Bluetooth.
BTH_L2CAP_EVENT_INFO struct
The BTH_L2CAP_EVENT_INFO structure contains data about events associated with an L2CAP channel.
BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC struct
The BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC structure describes a Bluetooth Low Energy (LE) generic attribute (GATT) profile characteristic.
BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE struct
The BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE structure describes a Bluetooth Low Energy (LE) generic attribute (GATT) profile characteristic value.
BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR struct
The BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR structure describes a Bluetooth Low Energy (LE) generic attribute (GATT) profile descriptor.
BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE struct
The BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE structure describes a parent characteristic.
BTH_LE_GATT_SERVICE struct
The BTH_LE_GATT_SERVICE structure describes a Bluetooth Low Energy (LE) generic attribute (GATT) profile service.
BTH_LE_UUID struct
The BTH_LE_UUID structure contains information about a Bluetooth Low Energy (LE) Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).
BTH_QUERY_DEVICE struct
The BTH_QUERY_DEVICE structure is used when querying for the presence of a Bluetooth device.
BTH_QUERY_SERVICE struct
The BTH_QUERY_SERVICE structure is used to query a Bluetooth service.
BTH_RADIO_IN_RANGE struct
The BTH_RADIO_IN_RANGE structure stores data about Bluetooth devices within communication range.
BTH_SET_SERVICE struct
The BTH_SET_SERVICE structure provides service information for the specified Bluetooth service.
BY_HANDLE_FILE_INFORMATION struct
Contains information that the GetFileInformationByHandle function retrieves.
CACHE_DESCRIPTOR struct
Describes the cache attributes.
CBT_CREATEWND struct
Contains information passed to a WH_CBT hook procedure, CBTProc, before a window is created.
CBTACTIVATESTRUCT struct
Contains information passed to a WH_CBT hook procedure, CBTProc, before a window is activated.
CERT_CONTEXT struct
The CERT_CONTEXT structure contains both the encoded and decoded representations of a certificate. A certificate context returned by one of the functions defined in Wincrypt.h must be freed by calling the CertFreeCertificateContext function. The CertDuplicateCertificateContext function can be called to make a duplicate copy (which also must be freed by calling CertFreeCertificateContext).
CERT_EXTENSION struct
The CERT_EXTENSION structure contains the extension information for a certificate, Certificate Revocation List (CRL) or Certificate Trust List (CTL).
CERT_INFO struct
The CERT_INFO structure contains the information of a certificate.
CERT_PUBLIC_KEY_INFO struct
The CERT_PUBLIC_KEY_INFO structure contains a public key and its algorithm.
CHANGEFILTERSTRUCT struct
Contains extended result information obtained by calling the ChangeWindowMessageFilterEx function.
CHAR_INFO struct
Specifies a Unicode or ANSI character and its attributes. This structure is used by console functions to read from and write to a console screen buffer.
CHOOSECOLOR struct
Contains information the ChooseColor function uses to initialize the Color dialog box. After the user closes the dialog box, the system returns information about the user's selection in this structure.
CHOOSEFONT struct
Contains information that the ChooseFont function uses to initialize the Font dialog box. After the user closes the dialog box, the system returns information about the user's selection in this structure.
CLIENT_ID struct
The CLIENT_ID structure contains identifiers of a process and a thread.
CoalesceEventsOptions enum
Contains possible values for the CoalesceEvents property, which indicates whether an accessible technology client receives all events, or a subset where duplicate events are detected and filtered.
COLORADJUSTMENT struct
The COLORADJUSTMENT structure defines the color adjustment values used by the StretchBlt and StretchDIBits functions when the stretch mode is HALFTONE. You can set the color adjustment values by calling the SetColorAdjustment function.
COMDLG_FILTERSPEC struct
Used generically to filter elements.
COMMCONFIG struct
Contains information about the configuration state of a communications device.
COMMPROP struct
Contains information about a communications driver.
COMMTIMEOUTS struct
Contains the time-out parameters for a communications device. The parameters determine the behavior of ReadFile, WriteFile, ReadFileEx, and WriteFileEx operations on the device.
COMObject com
A representation of a generic COM object. All Dart COM objects inherit from this class.
COMSTAT struct
Contains information about a communications device. This structure is filled by the ClearCommError function.
ConnectionRecoveryBehaviorOptions enum
Contains possible values for the ConnectionRecoveryBehavior property, which indicates whether an accessible technology client adjusts provider request timeouts when the provider is non-responsive.
CONSOLE_CURSOR_INFO struct
Contains information about the console cursor.
CONSOLE_READCONSOLE_CONTROL struct
Contains information for a console read operation.
CONSOLE_SCREEN_BUFFER_INFO struct
Contains information about a console screen buffer.
CONSOLE_SELECTION_INFO struct
Contains information for a console selection.
COORD struct
Defines the coordinates of a character cell in a console screen buffer. The origin of the coordinate system (0,0) is at the top, left cell of the buffer.
COR_FIELD_OFFSET struct
Stores the offset, within a class, of the specified field.
CorElementType
Specifies a common language runtime Type, a type modifier, or information about a type in a metadata type signature.
CorEventAttr
Contains values that describe the metadata of an event.
CorFieldAttr
Contains values that describe metadata about a field.
CorGenericParamAttr
Contains values that describe the Type parameters for generic types.
CorMethodAttr
Contains values that describe the features of a method.
CorMethodImpl
Contains values that describe method implementation features.
CorNativeType
Contains values that describe native unmanaged types.
CorOpenFlags enum
Contains flag values that control metadata behavior upon opening manifest files.
CorParamAttr
Contains values that describe the metadata of a method parameter.
CorPEKind
Contains values that describe a portable executable (PE) file.
CorPinvokeMap
Specifies options for a PInvoke call.
CorPropertyAttr
Contains values that describe the metadata of a property.
CORRECTIVE_ACTION enum
Identifies the type of corrective action to be taken for a spelling error.
CorTokenType
Indicates the type of a metadata token.
CorTypeAttr
Contains values that indicate type metadata.
CREATEFILE2_EXTENDED_PARAMETERS struct
Contains optional extended parameters for CreateFile2.
CREATESTRUCT struct
Defines the initialization parameters passed to the window procedure of an application. These members are identical to the parameters of the CreateWindowEx function.
CREDENTIAL struct
The CREDENTIAL structure contains an individual credential.
CREDENTIAL_ATTRIBUTE struct
The CREDENTIAL_ATTRIBUTE structure contains an application-defined attribute of the credential. An attribute is a keyword-value pair. It is up to the application to define the meaning of the attribute.
CRYPT_ALGORITHM_IDENTIFIER struct
The CRYPT_ALGORITHM_IDENTIFIER structure specifies an algorithm used to encrypt a private key. The structure includes the object identifier (OID) of the algorithm and any needed parameters for that algorithm. The parameters contained in its CRYPT_OBJID_BLOB are encoded.
CRYPT_BIT_BLOB struct
The CRYPT_BIT_BLOB structure contains a set of bits represented by an array of bytes.
CRYPT_INTEGER_BLOB struct
Contains an arbitrary array of bytes. The structure definition includes aliases appropriate to the various functions that use it.
CRYPTPROTECT_PROMPTSTRUCT struct
The CRYPTPROTECT_PROMPTSTRUCT structure provides the text of a prompt and information about when and where that prompt is to be displayed when using the CryptProtectData and CryptUnprotectData functions.
CUIAutomation com
CUIAutomation8 com
CURSORINFO struct
Contains global cursor information.
CWPRETSTRUCT struct
Defines the message parameters passed to a WH_CALLWNDPROCRET hook procedure, CallWndRetProc.
CWPSTRUCT struct
Defines the message parameters passed to a WH_CALLWNDPROC hook procedure, CallWndProc.
CY struct
A currency number stored as an 8-byte, two's complement integer, scaled by 10,000 to give a fixed-point number with 15 digits to the left of the decimal point and 4 digits to the right. This IDispatch::GetTypeInfo representation provides a range of 922337203685477.5807 to -922337203685477.5808.
DCB struct
Defines the control setting for a serial communications device.
DEBUGHOOKINFO struct
Contains debugging information passed to a WH_DEBUG hook procedure, DebugProc.
DECIMAL struct
Represents a decimal data type that provides a sign and scale for a number (as in coordinates.) Decimal variables are stored as 96-bit (12-byte) unsigned integers scaled by a variable power of 10. The power of 10 scaling factor specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal point, and ranges from 0 to 28.
DESIGNVECTOR struct
The DESIGNVECTOR structure is used by an application to specify values for the axes of a multiple master font.
DESKTOP_SLIDESHOW_DIRECTION enum
The direction that the slideshow should advance.
DESKTOP_SLIDESHOW_OPTIONS enum
Desktop wallpaper slideshow settings for shuffling images.
DESKTOP_SLIDESHOW_STATE enum
Gets the current status of the slideshow.
DESKTOP_WALLPAPER_POSITION enum
Specifies how the desktop wallpaper should be displayed.
DesktopWallpaper com
DEVMODE struct
The DEVMODE data structure contains information about the initialization and environment of a printer or a display device.
DIALOG_CONTROL_DPI_CHANGE_BEHAVIORS enum
Describes per-monitor DPI scaling behavior overrides for child windows within dialogs. The values in this enumeration are bitfields and can be combined.
DIALOG_DPI_CHANGE_BEHAVIORS enum
In Per Monitor v2 contexts, dialogs will automatically respond to DPI changes by resizing themselves and re-computing the positions of their child windows (here referred to as re-layouting). This enum works in conjunction with SetDialogDpiChangeBehavior in order to override the default DPI scaling behavior for dialogs.
DIBSECTION struct
The DIBSECTION structure contains information about a DIB created by calling the CreateDIBSection function. A DIBSECTION structure includes information about the bitmap's dimensions, color format, color masks, optional file mapping object, and optional bit values storage offset. An application can obtain a filled-in DIBSECTION structure for a given DIB by calling the GetObject function.
DISK_EXTENT struct
Represents a disk extent.
DISK_GEOMETRY struct
Describes the geometry of disk devices and media.
DISK_GEOMETRY_EX struct
Describes the extended geometry of disk devices and media.
DISPLAY_DEVICE struct
The DISPLAY_DEVICE structure receives information about the display device specified by the iDevNum parameter of the EnumDisplayDevices function.
DISPLAYCONFIG_2DREGION struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_2DREGION structure represents a point or an offset in a two-dimensional space.
DISPLAYCONFIG_DESKTOP_IMAGE_INFO struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_DESKTOP_IMAGE_INFO structure contains information about the image displayed on the desktop.
DISPLAYCONFIG_DEVICE_INFO_HEADER struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_DEVICE_INFO_HEADER structure contains display information about the device.
DISPLAYCONFIG_MODE_INFO struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_MODE_INFO structure contains either source mode or target mode information.
DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_INFO struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_INFO structure is used to describe a single path from a target to a source.
DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_SOURCE_INFO struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_SOURCE_INFO structure contains source information for a single path.
DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_TARGET_INFO struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_TARGET_INFO structure contains target information for a single path.
DISPLAYCONFIG_RATIONAL struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_RATIONAL structure describes a fractional value that represents vertical and horizontal frequencies of a video mode (that is, vertical sync and horizontal sync).
DISPLAYCONFIG_SOURCE_MODE struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_SOURCE_MODE structure represents a point or an offset in a two-dimensional space.
DISPLAYCONFIG_TARGET_MODE struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_TARGET_MODE structure describes a display path target mode.
DISPLAYCONFIG_VIDEO_SIGNAL_INFO struct
The DISPLAYCONFIG_VIDEO_SIGNAL_INFO structure contains information about the video signal for a display.
DISPPARAMS struct
Contains the arguments passed to a method or property.
DLGITEMTEMPLATE struct
Defines the dimensions and style of a control in a dialog box. One or more of these structures are combined with a DLGTEMPLATE structure to form a standard template for a dialog box.
DLGTEMPLATE struct
Defines the dimensions and style of a dialog box. This structure, always the first in a standard template for a dialog box, also specifies the number of controls in the dialog box and therefore specifies the number of subsequent DLGITEMTEMPLATE structures in the template.
DLLVERSIONINFO struct
Receives DLL-specific version information. It is used with the DllGetVersion function.
DOC_INFO_1 struct
The DOC_INFO_1 structure describes a document that will be printed.
DOT11_AUTH_CIPHER_PAIR struct
The DOT11_AUTH_CIPHER_PAIR structure defines a pair of 802.11 authentication and cipher algorithms that can be enabled at the same time on the 802.11 station.
DOT11_BSSID_LIST struct
The DOT11_BSSID_LIST structure contains a list of basic service set (BSS) identifiers.
DOT11_NETWORK struct
The DOT11_NETWORK structure contains information about an available wireless network.
DOT11_NETWORK_LIST struct
The DOT11_NETWORK_LIST structure contains a list of 802.11 wireless networks.
DOT11_SSID struct
A DOT11_SSID structure contains the SSID of an interface.
DPI_AWARENESS enum
Identifies the dots per inch (dpi) setting for a thread, process, or window.
DPI_HOSTING_BEHAVIOR enum
Identifies the DPI hosting behavior for a window. This behavior allows windows created in the thread to host child windows with a different DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT.
DRAWTEXTPARAMS struct
The DRAWTEXTPARAMS structure contains extended formatting options for the DrawTextEx function.
DSREG_JOIN_INFO struct
Contains information about how a device is joined to Microsoft Azure Active Directory.
DSREG_USER_INFO struct
Contains information about a user account that is used to join a device to Microsoft Azure Active Directory.
DTBGOPTS struct
Defines the options for the DrawThemeBackgroundEx function.
DTTOPTS struct
Defines the options for the DrawThemeTextEx function.
DWM_BLURBEHIND struct
Specifies Desktop Window Manager (DWM) blur-behind properties. Used by the DwmEnableBlurBehindWindow function.
DWM_WINDOW_CORNER_PREFERENCE
DWMWINDOWATTRIBUTE
Flags used by the DwmGetWindowAttribute and DwmSetWindowAttribute functions to specify window attributes for Desktop Window Manager (DWM) non-client rendering.
EAP_METHOD_TYPE struct
The EAP_METHOD_TYPE structure contains type, identification, and author information about an EAP method.
EAP_TYPE struct
The EAP_TYPE structure contains type and vendor identification information for an EAP method.
ELEMDESC struct
Contains the type description and process-transfer information for a variable, a function, or a function parameter.
ENUM_PAGE_FILE_INFORMATION struct
Contains information about a pagefile.
ENUM_SERVICE_STATUS struct
Contains the name of a service in a service control manager database and information about that service. It is used by the EnumDependentServices and EnumServicesStatus functions.
ENUM_SERVICE_STATUS_PROCESS struct
Contains the name of a service in a service control manager database and information about the service. It is used by the EnumServicesStatusEx function.
ENUMLOGFONTEX struct
The ENUMLOGFONTEX structure contains information about an enumerated font.
EVENTMSG struct
Contains information about a hardware message sent to the system message queue. This structure is used to store message information for the JournalPlaybackProc callback function.
EXCEPINFO struct
Describes an exception that occurred during IDispatch::Invoke.
ExtendedProperty struct
Contains information about an extended property.
FILE_SEGMENT_ELEMENT struct
Union that contains a 64-bit value that points to a page of data.
FileOpenDialog com
FILEOPENDIALOGOPTIONS enum
Common dialog constants & enumerations Defines the set of options available to an Open or Save dialog.
FileSaveDialog com
FILETIME struct
Contains a 64-bit value representing the number of 100-nanosecond intervals since January 1, 1601 (UTC).
FINDREPLACE struct
Contains information that the FindText and ReplaceText functions use to initialize the Find and Replace dialog boxes. The FINDMSGSTRING registered message uses this structure to pass the user's search or replacement input to the owner window of a Find or Replace dialog box.
FOCUS_EVENT_RECORD struct
Describes a focus event in a console INPUT_RECORD structure. These events are used internally and should be ignored.
FUNCDESC struct
Describes a function.
GESTURECONFIG struct
Gets and sets the configuration for enabling gesture messages and the type of this configuration.
GESTUREINFO struct
Stores information about a gesture.
GESTURENOTIFYSTRUCT struct
When transmitted with WM_GESTURENOTIFY messages, passes information about a gesture.
GUID struct
Represents a native globally unique identifier (GUID).
Guid
Represents an immutable GUID (globally unique identifier).
GUITHREADINFO struct
Contains information about a GUI thread.
HARDWAREINPUT struct
Contains information about a simulated message generated by an input device other than a keyboard or mouse.
HWAVEIN struct
Handle of an open waveform-audio input device.
IAgileObject com
Marks an interface as agile across apartments.
IApplicationActivationManager com
Provides methods which activate Windows Store apps for the Launch, File, and Protocol extensions. You will normally use this interface in debuggers and design tools.
IAppxFactory com
Creates objects for reading and writing app packages.
IAppxFile com
Retrieves information about a payload or footprint file in a package.
IAppxFilesEnumerator com
Enumerates the payload files in a package.
IAppxManifestApplication com
Provides access to attribute values of the application.
IAppxManifestApplicationsEnumerator com
Enumerates the applications defined in the package manifest.
IAppxManifestOSPackageDependency com
IAppxManifestPackageDependenciesEnumerator com
Enumerates the package dependencies defined in the package manifest.
IAppxManifestPackageDependency com
Describes the dependency of one package on another package.
IAppxManifestPackageId com
Provides access to the package identity.
IAppxManifestProperties com
Provides read-only access to the properties section of a package manifest.
IAppxManifestReader com
Represents an object model of the package manifest that provides methods to access manifest elements and attributes.
IAppxManifestReader2 com
Represents an object model of the package manifest that provides methods to access manifest elements and attributes.
IAppxManifestReader3 com
Represents an object model of the package manifest that provides methods to access manifest elements and attributes.
IAppxManifestReader4 com
Represents an object model of the package manifest that provides methods to access manifest elements and attributes.
IAppxManifestReader5 com
Represents an object model of the package manifest that provides methods to access manifest elements and attributes.
IAppxManifestReader6 com
Represents an object model of the package manifest that provides methods to access manifest elements and attributes.
IAppxManifestReader7 com
Represents an object model of the package manifest that provides methods to access manifest elements and attributes.
IAppxPackageReader com
Provides a read-only object model for app packages.
IAudioCaptureClient com
The IAudioCaptureClient interface enables a client to read input data from a capture endpoint buffer. The client obtains a reference to the IAudioCaptureClient interface on a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IAudioCaptureClient.
IAudioClient com
The IAudioClient interface enables a client to create and initialize an audio stream between an audio application and the audio engine (for a shared-mode stream) or the hardware buffer of an audio endpoint device (for an exclusive-mode stream).
IAudioClient2 com
The IAudioClient2 interface is derived from the IAudioClient interface, with a set of additional methods that enable a Windows Audio Session API (WASAPI) audio client to do the following: opt in for offloading, query stream properties, and get information from the hardware that handles offloading.
IAudioClient3 com
The IAudioClient3 interface is derived from the IAudioClient2 interface, with a set of additional methods that enable a Windows Audio Session API (WASAPI) audio client to query for the audio engine's supported periodicities and current periodicity as well as request initialization of a shared audio stream with a specified periodicity.
IAudioClientDuckingControl com
Provides a method, SetDuckingOptionsForCurrentStream, that allows an app to specify that the system shouldn't duck the audio of other streams when the app's audio render stream is active.
IAudioClock com
The IAudioClock interface enables a client to monitor a stream's data rate and the current position in the stream. The client obtains a reference to the IAudioClock interface of a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IAudioClock.
IAudioClock2 com
The IAudioClock2 interface is used to get the current device position. The client obtains a reference to the IAudioClock interface of a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IAudioClock.
IAudioClockAdjustment com
The IAudioClockAdjustment interface is used to adjust the sample rate of a stream. The client obtains a reference to the IAudioClockAdjustment interface of a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IAudioClockAdjustment. Adjusting the sample rate is not supported for exclusive mode streams.
IAudioRenderClient com
The IAudioRenderClient interface enables a client to write output data to a rendering endpoint buffer. The client obtains a reference to the IAudioRenderClient interface of a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IAudioRenderClient.
IAudioSessionControl com
The IAudioSessionControl interface enables a client to configure the control parameters for an audio session and to monitor events in the session. The IAudioClient::Initialize method initializes a stream object and assigns the stream to an audio session. The client obtains a reference to the IAudioSessionControl interface on a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IAudioSessionControl.
IAudioSessionManager com
The IAudioSessionManager interface enables a client to access the session controls and volume controls for both cross-process and process-specific audio sessions. The client obtains a reference to an IAudioSessionManager interface by calling the IMMDevice::Activate method with parameter iid set to REFIID IID_IAudioSessionManager.
IAudioStreamVolume com
The IAudioStreamVolume interface enables a client to control and monitor the volume levels for all of the channels in an audio stream. The client obtains a reference to the IAudioStreamVolume interface on a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IAudioStreamVolume.
IBindCtx com
Provides access to a bind context, which is an object that stores information about a particular moniker binding operation.
IChannelAudioVolume com
The IChannelAudioVolume interface enables a client to control and monitor the volume levels for all of the channels in the audio session that the stream belongs to. This is the session that the client assigned the stream to during the call to the IAudioClient::Initialize method. The client obtains a reference to the IChannelAudioVolume interface on a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_IChannelAudioVolume.
IClassFactory com
Creates a call object for processing calls to the methods of an asynchronous interface.
ICONINFO struct
Contains information about an icon or a cursor.
ICONINFOEX struct
Contains information about an icon or a cursor. Extends ICONINFO. Used by GetIconInfoEx.
IConnectionPoint com
Supports connection points for connectable objects.
IConnectionPointContainer com
Supports connection points for connectable objects.
IDesktopWallpaper com
Provides methods for managing the desktop wallpaper.
IDispatch com
Exposes objects, methods and properties to programming tools and other applications that support Automation.
IDLDESC struct
Contains the IDL attributes of a type.
IEnumIDList com
Exposes a standard set of methods used to enumerate the pointers to item identifier lists (PIDLs) of the items in a Shell folder. When a folder's IShellFolder::EnumObjects method is called, it creates an enumeration object and passes a pointer to the object's IEnumIDList interface back to the calling application.
IEnumMoniker com
Enumerates the components of a moniker or the monikers in a table of monikers.
IEnumNetworkConnections com
The IEnumNetworkConnections interface provides a standard enumerator for network connections. It enumerates active, disconnected, or all network connections within a network. This interface can be obtained from the INetwork interface.
IEnumNetworks com
The IEnumNetworks interface is a standard enumerator for networks. It enumerates all networks available on the local machine. This interface can be obtained from the INetworkListManager interface.
IEnumResources com
Exposes resource enumeration methods.
IEnumSpellingError com
An enumeration of the spelling errors.
IEnumString com
Enumerate strings. LPWSTR is the type that indicates a pointer to a zero-terminated string of wide, or Unicode, characters.
IEnumVARIANT com
Provides a method for enumerating a collection of variants, including heterogeneous collections of objects and intrinsic types. Callers of this interface do not need to know the specific type (or types) of the elements in the collection.
IEnumWbemClassObject com
The IEnumWbemClassObject interface is used to enumerate Common Information Model (CIM) objects and is similar to a standard COM enumerator.
IErrorInfo com
IErrorInfo is defined by Automation; the following describes how the interface is used in OLE DB. IErrorInfo returns information about an error in addition to the return code. It returns the error message, name of the component and GUID of the interface in which the error occurred, and the name and topic of the Help file that applies to the error.
IFileDialog com
Exposes methods that initialize, show, and get results from the common file dialog.
IFileDialog2 com
Extends the IFileDialog interface by providing methods that allow the caller to name a specific, restricted location that can be browsed in the common file dialog as well as to specify alternate text to display as a label on the Cancel button.
IFileDialogCustomize com
Exposes methods that allow an application to add controls to a common file dialog.
IFileIsInUse com
Exposes methods that can be called to get information on or close a file that is in use by another application. When an application attempts to access a file and finds that file already in use, it can use the methods of this interface to gather information to present to the user in a dialog box.
IFileOpenDialog com
Extends the IFileDialog interface by adding methods specific to the open dialog.
IFileSaveDialog com
Extends the IFileDialog interface by adding methods specific to the save dialog, which include those that provide support for the collection of metadata to be persisted with the file.
IInitializeWithWindow com
Exposes a method through which a client can provide an owner window to a Windows Runtime (WinRT) object used in a desktop application.
IInspectable com
Provides functionality required for all Windows Runtime classes.
IKnownFolder com
Exposes methods that allow an application to retrieve information about a known folder's category, type, GUID, pointer to an item identifier list (PIDL) value, redirection capabilities, and definition. It provides a method for the retrieval of a known folder's IShellItem object. It also provides methods to get or set the path of the known folder.
IKnownFolderManager com
Exposes methods that create, enumerate or manage existing known folders.
IMetaDataAssemblyImport com
Provides methods to access and examine the contents of an assembly manifest.
IMetaDataDispenser com
Provides methods to create a new metadata scope, or open an existing one.
IMetaDataDispenserEx com
Extends the IMetaDataDispenser Interface interface to provide the capability to control how the metadata APIs operate on the current metadata scope.
IMetaDataImport com
Provides methods for importing and manipulating existing metadata from a portable executable (PE) file or other source, such as a type library or a stand-alone, run-time metadata binary.
IMetaDataImport2 com
Extends the IMetaDataImport interface to provide the capability of working with generic types.
IMetaDataTables com
Provides methods for the storage and retrieval of metadata information in tables.
IMetaDataTables2 com
Extends IMetaDataTables to include methods for working with metadata streams.
IMMDevice com
The IMMDevice interface encapsulates the generic features of a multimedia device resource.
IMMDeviceCollection com
The IMMDeviceCollection interface represents a collection of multimedia device resources.
IMMDeviceEnumerator com
The IMMDeviceEnumerator interface provides methods for enumerating multimedia device resources.
IMMEndpoint com
The IMMEndpoint interface represents an audio endpoint device.
IMMNotificationClient com
The IMMNotificationClient interface provides notifications when an audio endpoint device is added or removed, when the state or properties of an endpoint device change, or when there is a change in the default role assigned to an endpoint device.
IModalWindow com
Exposes a method that represents a modal window.
IMoniker com
Enables you to use a moniker object, which contains information that uniquely identifies a COM object. An object that has a pointer to the moniker object's IMoniker interface can locate, activate, and get access to the identified object without having any other specific information on where the object is actually located in a distributed system. Monikers are used as the basis for linking in COM. A linked object contains a moniker that identifies its source. When the user activates the linked object to edit it, the moniker is bound; this loads the link source into memory.
INetwork com
The INetwork interface represents a network on the local machine. It can also represent a collection of network connections with a similar network signature.
INetworkConnection com
The INetworkConnection interface represents a single network connection.
INetworkListManager com
The INetworkListManager interface provides a set of methods to perform network list management functions.
INetworkListManagerEvents com
INetworkListManagerEvents is a message sink interface that a client implements to get overall machine state related events. Applications that are interested on higher-level events, for example internet connectivity, implement this interface.
INITCOMMONCONTROLSEX struct
Carries information used to load common control classes from the dynamic-link library (DLL). This structure is used with the InitCommonControlsEx function.
INPUT struct
Used by SendInput to store information for synthesizing input events such as keystrokes, mouse movement, and mouse clicks.
INPUT_RECORD struct
Describes an input event in the console input buffer. These records can be read from the input buffer by using the ReadConsoleInput or PeekConsoleInput function, or written to the input buffer by using the WriteConsoleInput function.
INPUT_TRANSFORM struct
Defines the matrix that represents a transform on a message consumer. This matrix can be used to transform pointer input data from client coordinates to screen coordinates, while the inverse can be used to transform pointer input data from screen coordinates to client coordinates.
IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH struct
The IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES structure is the header node for a linked list of addresses for a particular adapter. This structure can simultaneously be used as part of a linked list of IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES structures.
IP_ADAPTER_ANYCAST_ADDRESS_XP struct
The IP_ADAPTER_ANYCAST_ADDRESS structure stores a single anycast IP address in a linked list of addresses for a particular adapter.
IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SERVER_ADDRESS_XP struct
The IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SERVER_ADDRESS structure stores a single DNS server address in a linked list of DNS server addresses for a particular adapter.
IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SUFFIX struct
The IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SUFFIX structure stores a DNS suffix in a linked list of DNS suffixes for a particular adapter.
IP_ADAPTER_GATEWAY_ADDRESS_LH struct
The IP_ADAPTER_GATEWAY_ADDRESS structure stores a single gateway address in a linked list of gateway addresses for a particular adapter.
IP_ADAPTER_INDEX_MAP struct
The IP_ADAPTER_INDEX_MAP structure stores the interface index associated with a network adapter with IPv4 enabled together with the name of the network adapter.
IP_ADAPTER_MULTICAST_ADDRESS_XP struct
The IP_ADAPTER_MULTICAST_ADDRESS structure stores a single multicast address in a linked-list of addresses for a particular adapter.
IP_ADAPTER_PREFIX_XP struct
The IP_ADAPTER_PREFIX structure stores an IP address prefix.
IP_ADAPTER_UNICAST_ADDRESS_LH struct
The IP_ADAPTER_UNICAST_ADDRESS structure stores a single unicast IP address in a linked list of IP addresses for a particular adapter.
IP_ADAPTER_WINS_SERVER_ADDRESS_LH struct
The IP_ADAPTER_WINS_SERVER_ADDRESS structure stores a single Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server address in a linked list of WINS server addresses for a particular adapter.
IP_ADDR_STRING struct
The IP_ADDR_STRING structure represents a node in a linked-list of IPv4 addresses.
IP_ADDRESS_STRING struct
The IP_ADDRESS_STRING structure stores an IPv4 address in dotted decimal notation. The IP_ADDRESS_STRING structure definition is also the type definition for the IP_MASK_STRING structure.
IP_INTERFACE_INFO struct
The IP_INTERFACE_INFO structure contains a list of the network interface adapters with IPv4 enabled on the local system.
IP_PER_ADAPTER_INFO_W2KSP1 struct
The IP_PER_ADAPTER_INFO structure contains information specific to a particular adapter.
IPersist com
Provides the CLSID of an object that can be stored persistently in the system. Allows the object to specify which object handler to use in the client process, as it is used in the default implementation of marshaling.
IPersistFile com
Enables an object to be loaded from or saved to a disk file, rather than a storage object or stream. Because the information needed to open a file varies greatly from one application to another, the implementation of IPersistFile::Loadon the object must also open its disk file.
IPersistMemory com
Saves and loads objects from a stream.
IPersistStream com
Enables the saving and loading of objects that use a simple serial stream for their storage needs.
IPropertyStore com
This interface exposes methods used to enumerate and manipulate property values.
IProvideClassInfo com
Provides access to the type information for an object's coclass entry in its type library.
IRestrictedErrorInfo com
Represents the details of an error, including restricted error information.
IRunningObjectTable com
Manages access to the running object table (ROT), a globally accessible look-up table on each workstation. A workstation's ROT keeps track of those objects that can be identified by a moniker and that are currently running on the workstation. When a client tries to bind a moniker to an object, the moniker checks the ROT to see if the object is already running; this allows the moniker to bind to the current instance instead of loading a new one.
ISensor com
Represents a sensor.
ISensorCollection com
Represents a collection of sensors, such as all the sensors connected to a computer.
ISensorDataReport com
Represents a sensor data report. Sensor data reports contain data field values generated by a sensor and a time stamp that indicates when the data report was created.
ISensorManager com
Provides methods for discovering and retrieving available sensors and a method to request sensor manager events.
ISequentialStream com
The ISequentialStream interface supports simplified sequential access to stream objects. The IStream interface inherits its Read and Write methods from ISequentialStream.
IShellFolder com
Exposed by all Shell namespace folder objects, its methods are used to manage folders.
IShellItem com
Exposes methods that retrieve information about a Shell item. IShellItem and IShellItem2 are the preferred representations of items in any new code.
IShellItem2 com
Extends IShellItem with methods that retrieve various property values of the item. IShellItem and IShellItem2 are the preferred representations of items in any new code.
IShellItemArray com
Exposes methods that create and manipulate Shell item arrays.
IShellItemFilter com
Exposed by a client to specify how to filter the enumeration of a Shell item by a server application.
IShellItemImageFactory com
Exposes a method to return either icons or thumbnails for Shell items. If no thumbnail or icon is available for the requested item, a per-class icon may be provided from the Shell.
IShellItemResources com
Exposes methods to manipulate and query Shell item resources.
Exposes methods that create, modify, and resolve Shell links.
IShellLinkDataList com
Exposes methods that allow an application to attach extra data blocks to a Shell link. These methods add, copy, or remove data blocks.
IShellLinkDual com
IShellService com
IShellService Exposes one method that declares ownership when a service component implementing a certain interface is shared among multiple clients, such as Windows Internet Explorer and Windows Explorer.
ISimpleAudioVolume com
The ISimpleAudioVolume interface enables a client to control the master volume level of an audio session. The IAudioClient::Initialize method initializes a stream object and assigns the stream to an audio session. The client obtains a reference to the ISimpleAudioVolume interface on a stream object by calling the IAudioClient::GetService method with parameter riid set to REFIID IID_ISimpleAudioVolume.
ISpeechAudioFormat com
ISpeechBaseStream com
The ISpeechBaseStream automation interface defines properties and methods for manipulating data streams.
ISpeechObjectToken com
ISpeechObjectTokens com
The ISpeechObjectTokens automation interface represents a collection of SpObjectToken objects.
ISpeechVoice com
ISpeechVoiceStatus com
The ISpeechVoiceStatus automation interface defines the types of information returned by the SpVoice.Status method.
ISpeechWaveFormatEx com
ISpellChecker com
Represents a particular spell checker for a particular language. The ISpellChecker can be used to check text, get suggestions, update user dictionaries, and maintain options.
ISpellChecker2 com
Represents a particular spell checker for a particular language, with the added ability to remove words from the added words dictionary, or from the ignore list. The ISpellChecker2 can also be used to check text, get suggestions, update user dictionaries, and maintain options, as can ISpellChecker from which it is derived.
ISpellCheckerChangedEventHandler com
Allows the caller to create a handler for notifications that the state of the speller has changed.
ISpellCheckerFactory com
A factory for instantiating a spell checker ISpellChecker as well as providing functionality for determining which languages are supported.
ISpellingError com
Provides information about a spelling error.
ISpEventSource com
Using the methods on ISpNotifySource an application can specify the mechanism by which it receives notifications. Applications can configure which events should trigger notifications and which events retrieve queued events. ISpEventSource inherits from the ISpNotifySource interface.
ISpNotifySource com
In both speech synthesis and speech recognition, applications receive notifications when words have been spoken or when phrases have been recognized. SAPI components that generate notifications implement an ISpNotifySource.
ISpVoice com
The ISpVoice interface enables an application to perform speech synthesis operations. Applications can speak text strings and text files, or play audio files through this interface. All of these can be done synchronously or asynchronously.
IStream com
The IStream interface lets you read and write data to stream objects. Stream objects contain the data in a structured storage object, where storages provide the structure. Simple data can be written directly to a stream but, most frequently, streams are elements nested within a storage object. They are similar to standard files.
ISupportErrorInfo com
Ensures that error information can be propagated up the call chain correctly. Automation objects that use the error handling interfaces must implement ISupportErrorInfo.
ITEMIDLIST struct
Contains a list of item identifiers.
ITypeInfo com
This section describes ITypeInfo, an interface typically used for reading information about objects. For example, an object browser tool can use ITypeInfo to extract information about the characteristics and capabilities of objects from type libraries.
IUIAutomation com
Exposes methods that enable Microsoft UI Automation client applications to discover, access, and filter UI Automation elements.
IUIAutomation2 com
Extends the IUIAutomation interface to expose additional methods for controlling Microsoft UI Automation functionality.
IUIAutomation3 com
Extends the IUIAutomation2 interface to expose additional methods for controlling Microsoft UI Automation functionality.
IUIAutomation4 com
Extends the IUIAutomation3 interface to expose additional methods for controlling Microsoft UI Automation functionality.
IUIAutomation5 com
Extends the IUIAutomation4 interface to expose additional methods for controlling Microsoft UI Automation functionality.
IUIAutomation6 com
Extends the IUIAutomation5 interface to expose additional methods for controlling Microsoft UI Automation functionality.
IUIAutomationAndCondition com
Exposes properties and methods that Microsoft UI Automation client applications can use to retrieve information about an AND-based property condition.
IUIAutomationAnnotationPattern com
Provides access to the properties of an annotation in a document.
IUIAutomationBoolCondition com
Represents a condition that can be either TRUE (selects all elements) or FALSE (selects no elements).
IUIAutomationCacheRequest com
Exposes properties and methods of a cache request. Client applications use this interface to specify the properties and control patterns to be cached when a Microsoft UI Automation element is obtained.
IUIAutomationCondition com
This is the primary interface for conditions used in filtering when searching for elements in the UI Automation tree.
IUIAutomationCustomNavigationPattern com
Exposes a method to support access by a Microsoft UI Automation client to controls that support a custom navigation order.
IUIAutomationDockPattern com
Provides access to a control that enables child elements to be arranged horizontally and vertically, relative to each other.
IUIAutomationDragPattern com
Provides access to information exposed by a UI Automation provider for an element that can be dragged as part of a drag-and-drop operation.
IUIAutomationDropTargetPattern com
Provides access to drag-and-drop information exposed by a Microsoft UI Automation provider for an element that can be the drop target of a drag-and-drop operation.
IUIAutomationElement com
Exposes methods and properties for a UI Automation element, which represents a UI item.
IUIAutomationElement2 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement interface.
IUIAutomationElement3 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement2 interface.
IUIAutomationElement4 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement3 interface.
IUIAutomationElement5 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement4 interface to provide access to current and cached landmark data.
IUIAutomationElement6 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement5 interface to provide access to current and cached full descriptions.
IUIAutomationElement7 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement6 interface.
IUIAutomationElement8 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement7 interface.
IUIAutomationElement9 com
Extends the IUIAutomationElement8 interface.
IUIAutomationElementArray com
Represents a collection of UI Automation elements.
IUIAutomationExpandCollapsePattern com
Provides access to a control that can visually expand to display content, and collapse to hide content.
IUIAutomationGridItemPattern com
Provides access to a child control in a grid-style container that supports the IUIAutomationGridPattern interface.
IUIAutomationGridPattern com
Provides access to a control that acts as a container for a collection of child controls that are organized in a two-dimensional logical coordinate system that can be traversed by row and column.
IUIAutomationInvokePattern com
Exposes a method that enables a client application to invoke the action of a control (typically a button).
IUIAutomationItemContainerPattern com
Exposes a method that retrieves an item from a container, such as a virtual list.
IUIAutomationLegacyIAccessiblePattern com
Exposes methods and properties that enable Microsoft UI Automation clients to retrieve UI information from Microsoft Active Accessibility (MSAA) servers.
IUIAutomationMultipleViewPattern com
Provides access to a control that can switch between multiple representations of the same information or set of child controls.
IUIAutomationNotCondition com
Represents a condition that is the negative of another condition.
IUIAutomationObjectModelPattern com
Provides access to the underlying object model implemented by a control or application.
IUIAutomationOrCondition com
Represents a condition made up of multiple conditions, at least one of which must be true.
IUIAutomationPropertyCondition com
Represents a condition based on a property value that is used to find UI Automation elements.
IUIAutomationProxyFactory com
Exposes properties and methods of an object that creates a Microsoft UI Automation provider for UI elements that do not have native support for UI Automation. This interface is implemented by proxies.
IUIAutomationProxyFactoryEntry com
Represents a proxy factory in the table maintained by Microsoft UI Automation, and exposes properties and methods that can be used by client applications to interact with IUIAutomationProxyFactory objects.
IUIAutomationProxyFactoryMapping com
Exposes properties and methods for a table of proxy factories. Each table entry is represented by an IUIAutomationProxyFactoryEntry interface. The entries are in the order in which the system will attempt to use the proxies.
IUIAutomationRangeValuePattern com
Provides access to a control that presents a range of values.
IUIAutomationScrollItemPattern com
Exposes a method that enables an item in a scrollable view to be placed in a visible portion of the view.
IUIAutomationScrollPattern com
Provides access to a control that acts as a scrollable container for a collection of child elements.
IUIAutomationSelectionItemPattern com
Provides access to the selectable child items of a container control that supports IUIAutomationSelectionPattern.
IUIAutomationSelectionPattern com
Provides access to a control that contains selectable child items. The children of this element support IUIAutomationSelectionItemPattern.
IUIAutomationSelectionPattern2 com
Extends the IUIAutomationSelectionPattern interface to provide information about selected items.
IUIAutomationSpreadsheetItemPattern com
Enables a client application to retrieve information about an item (cell) in a spreadsheet.
IUIAutomationSpreadsheetPattern com
Enables a client application to access the items (cells) in a spreadsheet.
IUIAutomationStylesPattern com
Enables Microsoft UI Automation clients to retrieve the visual styles associated with an element in a document.
IUIAutomationSynchronizedInputPattern com
Provides access to the keyboard or mouse input of a control.
IUIAutomationTableItemPattern com
Provides access to a child element in a container that supports IUIAutomationTablePattern.
IUIAutomationTablePattern com
Provides access to a control that acts as a container for a collection of child elements.
IUIAutomationTextChildPattern com
Provides access a text-based control (or an object embedded in text) that is a child or descendant of another text-based control.
IUIAutomationTextEditPattern com
Provides access to a control that modifies text, for example a control that performs auto-correction or enables input composition through an Input Method Editor (IME).
IUIAutomationTextPattern com
Provides access to a control that contains text.
IUIAutomationTextPattern2 com
Extends the IUIAutomationTextPattern interface.
IUIAutomationTextRange com
Provides access to a span of continuous text in a container that supports the IUIAutomationTextPattern interface. Client applications can use the IUIAutomationTextRange interface to select, compare, and retrieve embedded objects from the text span.
IUIAutomationTextRange2 com
Extends the IUIAutomationTextRange interface to enable Microsoft UI Automation clients to programmatically invoke context menus.
IUIAutomationTextRange3 com
Extends the IUIAutomationTextRange2 interface to support faster access to the underlying rich text data on a text range.
IUIAutomationTextRangeArray com
Represents a collection of IUIAutomationTextRange objects.
IUIAutomationTogglePattern com
Provides access to a control that can cycle through a set of states, and maintain a state after it is set.
IUIAutomationTransformPattern com
Provides access to a control that can be moved, resized, or rotated.
IUIAutomationTransformPattern2 com
Extends the IUIAutomationTransformPattern interface to enable Microsoft UI Automation clients to programmatically access the viewport zooming functionality of a control.
IUIAutomationTreeWalker com
Exposes properties and methods that UI Automation client applications use to view and navigate the UI Automation elements on the desktop.
IUIAutomationValuePattern com
Provides access to a control that contains a value that does not span a range and that can be represented as a string.
IUIAutomationVirtualizedItemPattern com
Represents a virtualized item, which is an item that is represented by a placeholder automation element in the Microsoft UI Automation tree.
IUIAutomationWindowPattern com
Provides access to the fundamental functionality of a window.
IUnknown com
Enables clients to get pointers to other interfaces on a given object through the QueryInterface method, and manage the existence of the object through the AddRef and Release methods. All other COM interfaces are inherited, directly or indirectly, from IUnknown. Therefore, the three methods in IUnknown are the first entries in the vtable for every interface.
IUri com
Exposes methods and properties used to parse and build Uniform Resource Identifiers (URIs).
IVirtualDesktopManager com
Exposes methods that enable an application to interact with groups of windows that form virtual workspaces.
IWbemClassObject com
The IWbemClassObject interface contains and manipulates both class definitions and class object instances.
IWbemConfigureRefresher com
The IWbemConfigureRefresher interface is used by client code to add enumerators, objects, and nested refreshers into a refresher.
IWbemContext com
The IWbemContext interface is optionally used to communicate additional context information to providers when submitting IWbemServices calls to WMI. All primary calls in IWbemServices take an optional parameter pointing to an object of this type.
IWbemHiPerfEnum com
The IWbemHiPerfEnum interface is used in refresher operations to provide rapid access to enumerations of instance objects. WMI provides an implementation of this interface, which it passes to providers when IWbemHiPerfProvider::CreateRefreshableEnum is called, and it returns to clients when IWbemConfigureRefresher::AddEnum is called.
IWbemLocator com
Use the IWbemLocator interface to obtain the initial namespace pointer to the IWbemServices interface for WMI on a specific host computer. You can access Windows Management itself using the IWbemServices pointer, which is returned by the IWbemLocator::ConnectServer method.
IWbemObjectAccess com
The IWbemObjectAccess interface provides access to the methods and properties of an object. An IWbemObjectAccess object is a container for an instance updated by a refresher. With the IWbemObjectAccess interface, you can get and set properties by using property handles instead of object property names.
IWbemRefresher com
The IWbemRefresher interface provides an entry point through which refreshable objects such as enumerators or refresher objects, can be refreshed. Implementers of IWbemHiPerfProvider must provide an implementation of this interface.
IWbemServices com
The IWbemServices interface is used by clients and providers to access WMI services. The interface is implemented by WMI and WMI providers, and is the primary WMI interface.
IWebAuthenticationCoreManagerInterop com
Provides Win32 apps with access to certain functions of WebAuthenticationCoreManager that are otherwise available only to UWP apps.
IWinHttpRequest com
The IWinHttpRequest interface provides all of the nonevent methods for Microsoft Windows HTTP Services (WinHTTP).
JOB_INFO_1 struct
The JOB_INFO_1 structure specifies print-job information such as the job-identifier value, the name of the printer for which the job is spooled, the name of the machine that created the print job, the name of the user that owns the print job, and so on.
JOBOBJECT_IO_RATE_CONTROL_INFORMATION struct
Contains information used to control the I/O rate for a job.
KBDLLHOOKSTRUCT struct
Contains information about a low-level keyboard input event.
KEY_EVENT_RECORD struct
Describes a keyboard input event in a console INPUT_RECORD structure.
KEYBDINPUT struct
Contains information about a simulated keyboard event.
KNOWNFOLDER_DEFINITION struct
Defines the specifics of a known folder.
KnownFolderManager com
L2_NOTIFICATION_DATA struct
The L2_NOTIFICATION_DATA structure is used by the IHV Extensions DLL to send notifications to any service or applications that has registered for the notification.
LASTINPUTINFO struct
Contains the time of the last input.
LOGBRUSH struct
The LOGBRUSH structure defines the style, color, and pattern of a physical brush. It is used by the CreateBrushIndirect and ExtCreatePen functions.
LOGFONT struct
The LOGFONT structure defines the attributes of a font.
LOGPALETTE struct
The LOGPALETTE structure defines a logical palette.
LUID struct
A Locally Unique Identifier (LUID). This is a value guaranteed to be unique only on the system on which it was generated. The uniqueness of a locally unique identifier is guaranteed only until the system is restarted.
MAGCOLOREFFECT struct
Describes a color transformation matrix that a magnifier control uses to apply a color effect to magnified screen content.
MAGIMAGEHEADER struct
Describes an image format.
MAGTRANSFORM struct
Describes a transformation matrix that a magnifier control uses to magnify screen content.
MARGINS struct
Returned by the GetThemeMargins function to define the margins of windows that have visual styles applied.
MC_COLOR_TEMPERATURE enum
Describes a monitor's color temperature.
MC_DISPLAY_TECHNOLOGY_TYPE enum
Identifies monitor display technologies.
MC_DRIVE_TYPE enum
Specifies whether to set or get a monitor's red, green, or blue drive.
MC_GAIN_TYPE enum
Specifies whether to get or set a monitor's red, green, or blue gain.
MC_POSITION_TYPE enum
Specifies whether to get or set the vertical or horizontal position of a monitor's display area.
MC_SIZE_TYPE enum
Specifies whether to get or set the width or height of a monitor's display area.
MCI_OPEN_PARMS struct
The MCI_OPEN_PARMS structure contains information for the MCI_OPEN command.
MCI_PLAY_PARMS struct
The MCI_PLAY_PARMS structure contains positioning information for the MCI_PLAY command.
MCI_SEEK_PARMS struct
The MCI_SEEK_PARMS structure contains positioning information for the MCI_SEEK command.
MCI_STATUS_PARMS struct
The MCI_STATUS_PARMS structure contains information for the MCI_STATUS command.
MEMORY_BASIC_INFORMATION struct
Contains information about a range of pages in the virtual address space of a process. The VirtualQuery and VirtualQueryEx functions use this structure.
MEMORYSTATUSEX struct
Contains information about the current state of both physical and virtual memory, including extended memory. The GlobalMemoryStatusEx function stores information in this structure.
Describes a menu event in a console INPUT_RECORD structure. These events are used internally and should be ignored.
Contains menu bar information.
Contains information about a menu.
Contains information about a menu item.
Defines a menu item in a menu template.
Defines the header for a menu template. A complete menu template consists of a header and one or more menu item lists.
METAFILEPICT struct
Defines the metafile picture format used for exchanging metafile data through the clipboard.
MIDIEVENT struct
The MIDIEVENT structure describes a MIDI event in a stream buffer.
MIDIHDR struct
The MIDIHDR structure defines the header used to identify a MIDI system-exclusive or stream buffer.
MIDIINCAPS struct
The MIDIINCAPS structure describes the capabilities of a MIDI input device.
MIDIOUTCAPS struct
The MIDIOUTCAPS structure describes the capabilities of a MIDI output device.
MIDIPROPTEMPO struct
The MIDIPROPTEMPO structure contains the tempo property for a stream.
MIDIPROPTIMEDIV struct
The MIDIPROPTIMEDIV structure contains the time division property for a stream.
MIDISTRMBUFFVER struct
The MIDISTRMBUFFVER structure contains version information for a long MIDI event of the MEVT_VERSION type.
MINMAXINFO struct
Contains information about a window's maximized size and position and its minimum and maximum tracking size.
MMDeviceEnumerator com
MMTIME struct
The MMTIME structure contains timing information for different types of multimedia data.
MODEMDEVCAPS struct
Contains information about the capabilities of a modem.
MODEMSETTINGS struct
Contains information about a modem's configuration.
MODLOAD_DATA struct
Contains module data.
MODULEINFO struct
Contains the module load address, size, and entry point.
MONITOR_DPI_TYPE enum
Identifies the dots per inch (dpi) setting for a monitor.
MONITORINFO struct
The MONITORINFO structure contains information about a display monitor.
MONITORINFOEX struct
The MONITORINFOEX structure contains information about a display monitor.
MOUSE_EVENT_RECORD struct
Describes a mouse input event in a console INPUT_RECORD structure.
MOUSEHOOKSTRUCT struct
Contains information about a mouse event passed to a WH_MOUSE hook procedure, MouseProc.
MOUSEHOOKSTRUCTEX struct
Contains information about a mouse event passed to a WH_MOUSE hook procedure, MouseProc. This is an extension of the MOUSEHOOKSTRUCT structure that includes information about wheel movement or the use of the X button.
MOUSEINPUT struct
Contains information about a simulated mouse event.
MOUSEMOVEPOINT struct
Contains information about the mouse's location in screen coordinates.
MSG struct
Contains message information from a thread's message queue.
MSLLHOOKSTRUCT struct
Contains information about a low-level mouse input event.
NCCALCSIZE_PARAMS struct
Contains information that an application can use while processing the WM_NCCALCSIZE message to calculate the size, position, and valid contents of the client area of a window.
NDIS_OBJECT_HEADER struct
The NDIS_OBJECT_HEADER structure packages the object type, version, and size information that is required in many NDIS 6.0 structures.
NET_LUID_LH struct
The NET_LUID union is the locally unique identifier (LUID) for a network interface.
NetworkListManager com
NEWTEXTMETRIC struct
The NEWTEXTMETRIC structure contains data that describes a physical font.
NLM_SIMULATED_PROFILE_INFO struct
Used to specify values that are used by SetSimulatedProfileInfo to override current internet connection profile values in an RDP Child Session to support the simulation of specific metered internet connection conditions.
NONCLIENTMETRICS struct
Contains the scalable metrics associated with the nonclient area of a nonminimized window. This structure is used by the SPI_GETNONCLIENTMETRICS and SPI_SETNONCLIENTMETRICS actions of the SystemParametersInfo function.
NOTIFYICONDATA struct
Contains information that the system needs to display notifications in the notification area. Used by Shell_NotifyIcon.
OPENCARD_SEARCH_CRITERIA struct
The OPENCARD_SEARCH_CRITERIA structure is used by the SCardUIDlgSelectCard function in order to recognize cards that meet the requirements set forth by the caller. You can, however, call SCardUIDlgSelectCard without using this structure.
OPENCARDNAME struct
The OPENCARDNAME structure contains the information that the GetOpenCardName function uses to initialize a smart card Select Card dialog box. Calling SCardUIDlgSelectCard with OPENCARDNAME_EX is recommended over calling GetOpenCardName with OPENCARDNAME. OPENCARDNAME is provided for backward compatibility.
OPENCARDNAME_EX struct
The OPENCARDNAME_EX structure contains the information that the SCardUIDlgSelectCard function uses to initialize a smart card Select Card dialog box.
OPENFILENAME struct
Contains information that the GetOpenFileName and GetSaveFileName functions use to initialize an Open or Save As dialog box. After the user closes the dialog box, the system returns information about the user's selection in this structure.
OSINFO struct
Contains details about the operating system for an assembly or module.
OSVERSIONINFO struct
Contains operating system version information. The information includes major and minor version numbers, a build number, a platform identifier, and descriptive text about the operating system. This structure is used with the GetVersionEx function.
OSVERSIONINFOEX struct
Contains operating system version information. The information includes major and minor version numbers, a build number, a platform identifier, and information about product suites and the latest Service Pack installed on the system. This structure is used with the GetVersionEx and VerifyVersionInfo functions.
OVERLAPPED struct
Contains information used in asynchronous (or overlapped) input and output (I/O).
OVERLAPPED_ENTRY struct
Contains the information returned by a call to the GetQueuedCompletionStatusEx function.
PAINTSTRUCT struct
The PAINTSTRUCT structure contains information for an application. This information can be used to paint the client area of a window owned by that application.
PALETTEENTRY struct
The PALETTEENTRY structure specifies the color and usage of an entry in a logical palette. A logical palette is defined by a LOGPALETTE structure.
PARAMDESC struct
Contains information needed for transferring a structure element, parameter, or function return value between processes.
PARAMDESCEX struct
Contains information about the default value of a parameter.
PERFORMANCE_INFORMATION struct
Contains performance information.
PHYSICAL_MONITOR struct
Contains a handle and text description corresponding to a physical monitor.
POINT struct
The POINT structure defines the x- and y-coordinates of a point.
POINTER_INFO struct
Contains basic pointer information common to all pointer types. Applications can retrieve this information using the GetPointerInfo, GetPointerFrameInfo, GetPointerInfoHistory and GetPointerFrameInfoHistory functions.
POINTER_PEN_INFO struct
Defines basic pen information common to all pointer types.
POINTER_TOUCH_INFO struct
Defines basic touch information common to all pointer types.
POINTL struct
The POINTL structure defines the x- and y-coordinates of a point.
POINTS struct
The POINTS structure defines the x- and y-coordinates of a point.
POLYTEXT struct
The POLYTEXT structure describes how the PolyTextOut function should draw a string of text.
PORT_INFO_1 struct
The PORT_INFO_1 structure identifies a supported printer port.
PORT_INFO_2 struct
The PORT_INFO_2 structure identifies a supported printer port.
POWERBROADCAST_SETTING struct
Sent with a power setting event and contains data about the specific change.
Contains the execution context of the printer driver that calls GetPrintExecutionData.
PRINTER_DEFAULTS struct
The PRINTER_DEFAULTS structure specifies the default data type, environment, initialization data, and access rights for a printer.
PRINTER_INFO_1 struct
The PRINTER_INFO_1 structure specifies general printer information.
PRINTER_INFO_2 struct
The PRINTER_INFO_2 structure specifies detailed printer information.
PRINTER_INFO_3 struct
The PRINTER_INFO_3 structure specifies printer security information.
PRINTER_INFO_4 struct
The PRINTER_INFO_4 structure specifies general printer information. The structure can be used to retrieve minimal printer information on a call to EnumPrinters. Such a call is a fast and easy way to retrieve the names and attributes of all locally installed printers on a system and all remote printer connections that a user has established.
PRINTER_INFO_5 struct
The PRINTER_INFO_5 structure specifies detailed printer information.
PRINTER_INFO_6 struct
The PRINTER_INFO_6 specifies the status value of a printer.
PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO struct
The PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO structure contains printer information returned by the FindNextPrinterChangeNotification function. The function returns this information after a wait operation on a printer change notification object has been satisfied.
PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO_DATA struct
The PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO_DATA structure identifies a job or printer information field and provides the current data for that field.
PRINTER_OPTIONS struct
Represents printer options.
PROCESS_DPI_AWARENESS enum
Identifies dots per inch (dpi) awareness values. DPI awareness indicates how much scaling work an application performs for DPI versus how much is done by the system.
PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY struct
Contains information about a heap element. The HeapWalk function uses a PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY structure to enumerate the elements of a heap.
PROCESS_INFORMATION struct
Contains information about a newly created process and its primary thread. It is used with the CreateProcess, CreateProcessAsUser, CreateProcessWithLogonW, or CreateProcessWithTokenW function.
PropertyConditionFlags enum
The PropertyConditionFlags (uiautomationclient.h) enumeration contains values used in creating property conditions.
PROPERTYKEY struct
Specifies the FMTID/PID identifier that programmatically identifies a property.
PROPSPEC struct
The PROPSPEC structure is used by many of the methods of IPropertyStorage to specify a property either by its property identifier (ID) or the associated string name.
PROPVARIANT struct
The PROPVARIANT structure is used in the ReadMultiple and WriteMultiple methods of IPropertyStorage to define the type tag and the value of a property in a property set.
QUERY_SERVICE_CONFIG struct
Contains configuration information for an installed service. It is used by the QueryServiceConfig function.
QUERY_SERVICE_LOCK_STATUS struct
Contains information about the lock status of a service control manager database. It is used by the QueryServiceLockStatus function.
RAWHID struct
Describes the format of the raw input from a Human Interface Device (HID).
RAWINPUT struct
Contains the raw input from a device.
RAWINPUTDEVICE struct
Defines information for the raw input devices.
RAWINPUTDEVICELIST struct
Contains information about a raw input device.
RAWINPUTHEADER struct
Contains the header information that is part of the raw input data.
RAWKEYBOARD struct
Contains information about the state of the keyboard.
RAWMOUSE struct
Contains information about the state of the mouse.
RECT struct
The RECT structure defines a rectangle by the coordinates of its upper-left and lower-right corners.
RECTL struct
The RECTL structure defines a rectangle by the coordinates of its upper-left and lower-right corners.
RGBQUAD struct
The RGBQUAD structure describes a color consisting of relative intensities of red, green, and blue.
RO_INIT_TYPE enum
Determines the concurrency model used for incoming calls to the objects created by this thread.
SAFEARRAY struct
Represents a safe array.
SAFEARRAYBOUND struct
Represents the bounds of one dimension of the array.
SC_ACTION struct
Represents an action that the service control manager can perform.
SCARD_ATRMASK struct
The SCARD_ATRMASK structure is used by the SCardLocateCardsByATR function to locate cards.
SCARD_IO_REQUEST struct
The SCARD_IO_REQUEST structure begins a protocol control information structure. Any protocol-specific information then immediately follows this structure. The entire length of the structure must be aligned with the underlying hardware architecture word size. For example, in Win32 the length of any PCI information must be a multiple of four bytes so that it aligns on a 32-bit boundary.
SCARD_READERSTATE struct
The SCARD_READERSTATE structure is used by functions for tracking smart cards within readers.
ScrollAmount enum
Contains values that specify the direction and distance to scroll.
SCROLLBARINFO struct
The SCROLLBARINFO structure contains scroll bar information.
SCROLLINFO struct
The SCROLLINFO structure contains scroll bar parameters to be set by the SetScrollInfo function (or SBM_SETSCROLLINFO message), or retrieved by the GetScrollInfo function (or SBM_GETSCROLLINFO message)
SDP_ELEMENT_DATA struct
The SDP_ELEMENT_DATA structure stores SDP element data.
SDP_LARGE_INTEGER_16 struct
The union member for a 128-bit integer.
SDP_STRING_TYPE_DATA struct
The SDP_STRING_TYPE_DATA structure stores information about SDP string types.
SDP_ULARGE_INTEGER_16 struct
The union member for a 128-bit unsigned integer.
SdpAttributeRange struct
The SdpAttributeRange structure is used in a Bluetooth query to constrain the set of attributes to return in the query.
SdpQueryUuid struct
The SdpQueryUuid structure facilitates searching for UUIDs.
SdpQueryUuidUnion struct
The SdpQueryUuidUnion union contains the UUID on which to perform an SDP query. Used in conjunction with the SdpQueryUuid structure.
SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES struct
The SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES structure contains the security descriptor for an object and specifies whether the handle retrieved by specifying this structure is inheritable. This structure provides security settings for objects created by various functions, such as CreateFile, CreatePipe, CreateProcess, RegCreateKeyEx, or RegSaveKeyEx.
SECURITY_DESCRIPTOR struct
The SECURITY_DESCRIPTOR structure contains the security information associated with an object. Applications use this structure to set and query an object's security status.
Sensor com
SensorCollection com
SensorDataReport com
SensorManager com
SERVICE_CONTROL_STATUS_REASON_PARAMS struct
Contains service control parameters.
SERVICE_DELAYED_AUTO_START_INFO struct
Contains the delayed auto-start setting of an auto-start service.
SERVICE_DESCRIPTION struct
Contains a service description.
SERVICE_FAILURE_ACTIONS struct
Represents the action the service controller should take on each failure of a service. A service is considered failed when it terminates without reporting a status of SERVICE_STOPPED to the service controller.
SERVICE_FAILURE_ACTIONS_FLAG struct
Contains the failure actions flag setting of a service. This setting determines when failure actions are to be executed.
SERVICE_LAUNCH_PROTECTED_INFO struct
Indicates a service protection type.
SERVICE_NOTIFY_2 struct
Represents service status notification information. It is used by the NotifyServiceStatusChange function.
SERVICE_PREFERRED_NODE_INFO struct
Represents the preferred node on which to run a service.
SERVICE_PRESHUTDOWN_INFO struct
Contains preshutdown settings.
SERVICE_REQUIRED_PRIVILEGES_INFO struct
Represents the required privileges for a service.
SERVICE_SID_INFO struct
Represents a service security identifier (SID).
SERVICE_STATUS struct
Contains status information for a service. The ControlService, EnumDependentServices, EnumServicesStatus, and QueryServiceStatus functions use this structure. A service uses this structure in the SetServiceStatus function to report its current status to the service control manager.
SERVICE_STATUS_PROCESS struct
Contains process status information for a service. The ControlServiceEx, EnumServicesStatusEx, NotifyServiceStatusChange, and QueryServiceStatusEx functions use this structure.
SERVICE_TABLE_ENTRY struct
Specifies the ServiceMain function for a service that can run in the calling process. It is used by the StartServiceCtrlDispatcher function.
SERVICE_TIMECHANGE_INFO struct
Contains system time change settings.
SERVICE_TRIGGER struct
Represents a service trigger event. This structure is used by the SERVICE_TRIGGER_INFO structure.
SERVICE_TRIGGER_INFO struct
Contains trigger event information for a service. This structure is used by the ChangeServiceConfig2 and QueryServiceConfig2 functions.
SERVICE_TRIGGER_SPECIFIC_DATA_ITEM struct
Contains trigger-specific data for a service trigger event. This structure is used by the SERVICE_TRIGGER structure for SERVICE_TRIGGER_TYPE_CUSTOM, SERVICE_TRIGGER_TYPE_DEVICE_ARRIVAL, SERVICE_TRIGGER_TYPE_FIREWALL_PORT_EVENT, or SERVICE_TRIGGER_TYPE_NETWORK_ENDPOINT trigger events.
SHELL_ITEM_RESOURCE struct
Defines Shell item resource.
SHELLEXECUTEINFO struct
Contains information used by ShellExecuteEx.
ShellItem com
SHFILEINFO struct
Contains information about a file object.
SHFILEOPSTRUCT struct
Contains information that the SHFileOperation function uses to perform file operations.
SHITEMID struct
Defines an item identifier.
SHQUERYRBINFO struct
Contains the size and item count information retrieved by the SHQueryRecycleBin function.
SIZE struct
The SIZE structure defines the width and height of a rectangle.
SMALL_RECT struct
Defines the coordinates of the upper left and lower right corners of a rectangle.
SOCKADDR_BTH struct
The SOCKADDR_BTH structure is used in conjunction with Bluetooth socket operations, defined by address family AF_BTH.
SOCKET_ADDRESS struct
The SOCKET_ADDRESS structure stores protocol-specific address information.
SOLE_AUTHENTICATION_SERVICE struct
Identifies an authentication service that a server is willing to use to communicate to a client.
SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA struct
An SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA structure defines a device interface in a device information set.
SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA_ struct
An SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA structure defines a device interface in a device information set.
SP_DEVINFO_DATA struct
An SP_DEVINFO_DATA structure defines a device instance that is a member of a device information set.
SPDRP enum
Device registry property codes.
SPEAKFLAGS
SpeechAudioFormatType enum
The SpeechAudioFormatType enumeration lists the supported stream formats.
SpeechRunState enum
The SpeechRunState enumeration lists the running states of a TTS voice.
SpeechStreamSeekPositionType enum
The SpeechStreamSeekPositionType enumeration lists the types of positioning from which a Seek method can be performed.
SpeechVoiceEvents enum
The SpeechVoiceEvents enumeration lists the types of events which a text-to-speech (TTS) engine can send to an SpVoice object.
SpeechVoicePriority enum
The SpeechVoicePriority enumeration lists the possible Priority settings of an SpVoice object.
SpeechVoiceSpeakFlags enum
The SpeechVoiceSpeakFlags enumeration lists flags that control the SpVoice.Speak method.
SpellCheckerFactory com
SPEVENT struct
SPEVENT contains information about an event. Events are passed from the text-to-speech (TTS) or speech recognition (SR) engines or audio devices back to applications.
SPEVENTSOURCEINFO struct
SPEVENTSOURCEINFO is used by ISpEventSource::GetInfo to pass back information about the event source. Event sources contain a queue, which hold events until a caller retrieves the events using ::GetEvents.
SpVoice com
SPVOICESTATUS struct
SPVOICESTATUS contains voice status information. This structure is returned by ISpVoice::GetStatus.
STARTUPINFO struct
Specifies the window station, desktop, standard handles, and appearance of the main window for a process at creation time.
STARTUPINFOEX struct
Specifies the window station, desktop, standard handles, and attributes for a new process. It is used with the CreateProcess and CreateProcessAsUser functions.
STATPROPSETSTG struct
The STATPROPSETSTG structure contains information about a property set.
STATPROPSTG struct
The STATPROPSTG structure contains data about a single property in a property set. This data is the property ID and type tag, and the optional string name that may be associated with the property.
STATSTG struct
The STATSTG structure contains statistical data about an open storage, stream, or byte-array object. This structure is used in the IEnumSTATSTG, ILockBytes, IStorage, and IStream interfaces.
STGM enum
The STGM constants are flags that indicate conditions for creating and deleting the object and access modes for the object.
STORAGE_DEVICE_NUMBER struct
Contains information about a device. This structure is used by the IOCTL_STORAGE_GET_DEVICE_NUMBER control code.
STRRET struct
Contains strings returned from the IShellFolder interface methods.
STYLESTRUCT struct
Contains the styles for a window.
SYMBOL_INFO struct
Contains symbol information.
SYSTEM_BASIC_INFORMATION struct
The SYSTEM_BASIC_INFORMATION structure contains information about the number of processors present in the system.
SYSTEM_BATTERY_STATE struct
Contains information about the current state of the system battery.
SYSTEM_CODEINTEGRITY_INFORMATION struct
The SYSTEM_CODEINTEGRITY_INFORMATION structure contains information about the code integrity policy.
SYSTEM_EXCEPTION_INFORMATION struct
SYSTEM_INFO struct
Contains information about the current computer system. This includes the architecture and type of the processor, the number of processors in the system, the page size, and other such information.
SYSTEM_INFORMATION_CLASS enum
Indicates the kind of system information to be retrieved.
SYSTEM_INTERRUPT_INFORMATION struct
SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION struct
Describes the relationship between the specified processor set. This structure is used with the GetLogicalProcessorInformation function.
SYSTEM_LOOKASIDE_INFORMATION struct
SYSTEM_PERFORMANCE_INFORMATION struct
SYSTEM_POLICY_INFORMATION struct
SYSTEM_POWER_STATUS struct
Contains information about the power status of the system.
SYSTEM_PROCESS_INFORMATION struct
The SYSTEM_PROCESS_INFORMATION structure contains information about a system process.
SYSTEM_PROCESSOR_PERFORMANCE_INFORMATION struct
The SYSTEM_PROCESSOR_PERFORMANCE_INFORMATION structure contains performance information for a processor.
SYSTEM_REGISTRY_QUOTA_INFORMATION struct
SYSTEM_THREAD_INFORMATION struct
The SYSTEM_THREAD_INFORMATION structure contains information about a thread running on a system.
SYSTEM_TIMEOFDAY_INFORMATION struct
SYSTEMTIME struct
Specifies a date and time, using individual members for the month, day, year, weekday, hour, minute, second, and millisecond. The time is either in coordinated universal time (UTC) or local time, depending on the function that is being called.
TASKDIALOG_BUTTON struct
The TASKDIALOG_BUTTON structure contains information used to display a button in a task dialog. The TASKDIALOGCONFIG structure uses this structure.
TASKDIALOGCONFIG struct
The TASKDIALOGCONFIG structure contains information used to display a task dialog. The TaskDialogIndirect function uses this structure.
TEXTMETRIC struct
The TEXTMETRIC structure contains basic information about a physical font. All sizes are specified in logical units; that is, they depend on the current mapping mode of the display context.
TITLEBARINFO struct
Contains title bar information.
TITLEBARINFOEX struct
Expands on the information described in the TITLEBARINFO structure by including the coordinates of each element of the title bar. This structure is sent with the WM_GETTITLEBARINFOEX message.
ToggleState enum
Contains values that specify the toggle state of a Microsoft UI Automation element that implements the Toggle control pattern.
TOKEN_APPCONTAINER_INFORMATION struct
The TOKEN_APPCONTAINER_INFORMATION structure specifies all the information in a token that is necessary for an app container.
TOKEN_INFORMATION_CLASS struct
The TOKEN_INFORMATION_CLASS enumeration contains values that specify the type of information being assigned to or retrieved from an access token.
TOUCHINPUT struct
Encapsulates data for touch input.
TOUCHPREDICTIONPARAMETERS struct
Contains hardware input details that can be used to predict touch targets and help compensate for hardware latency when processing touch and gesture input that contains distance and velocity data.
TPMPARAMS struct
Contains extended parameters for the TrackPopupMenuEx function.
TreeScope
The TreeScope enumeration contains values that specify the scope of various operations in the Microsoft UI Automation tree.
TreeTraversalOptions enum
The TreeTraversalOptions enumeration defines values that can be used to customize tree navigation order.
TYPEATTR struct
Contains attributes of a type.
TYPEDESC struct
Describes the type of a variable, the return type of a function, or the type of a function parameter.
UNICODE_STRING struct
The UNICODE_STRING structure is used by various Local Security Authority (LSA) functions to specify a Unicode string.
UNSIGNED_RATIO struct
Defines a data type used by the Desktop Window Manager (DWM) APIs. It represents a generic ratio and is used for different purposes and units even within a single API.
UPDATELAYEREDWINDOWINFO struct
Used by UpdateLayeredWindowIndirect to provide position, size, shape, content, and translucency information for a layered window.
VALENT struct
Contains information about a registry value. The RegQueryMultipleValues function uses this structure.
VARDESC struct
Describes a variable, constant, or data member.
VARENUM enum
Specifies the variant types.
VARIANT struct
The VARIANT type is used in Win32 to represent a dynamic type. It is represented as a struct containing a union of the types that could be stored.
VirtualDesktopManager com
VOLUME_DISK_EXTENTS struct
Represents a physical location on a disk. It is the output buffer for the IOCTL_VOLUME_GET_VOLUME_DISK_EXTENTS control code.
VS_FIXEDFILEINFO struct
Contains version information for a file. This information is language and code page independent.
WAVEFORMATEX struct
The WAVEFORMATEX structure defines the format of waveform-audio data. Only format information common to all waveform-audio data formats is included in this structure. For formats that require additional information, this structure is included as the first member in another structure, along with the additional information.
WAVEFORMATEXTENSIBLE struct
The WAVEFORMATEXTENSIBLE structure defines the format of waveform-audio data for formats having more than two channels or higher sample resolutions than allowed by WAVEFORMATEX. It can also be used to define any format that can be defined by WAVEFORMATEX.
WAVEHDR struct
The WAVEHDR structure defines the header used to identify a waveform-audio buffer.
WAVEINCAPS struct
The WAVEINCAPS structure describes the capabilities of a waveform-audio input device.
WAVEOUTCAPS struct
The WAVEOUTCAPS structure describes the capabilities of a waveform-audio output device.
WbemClassObject com
WbemContext com
WbemLocator com
WbemRefresher com
WIN32_FIND_DATA struct
Contains information about the file that is found by the FindFirstFile, FindFirstFileEx, or FindNextFile function.
WINDOW_BUFFER_SIZE_RECORD struct
Describes a change in the size of the console screen buffer.
WINDOWINFO struct
Contains window information.
WindowInteractionState enum
Contains values that specify the current state of the window for purposes of user interaction.
WINDOWPLACEMENT struct
Contains information about the placement of a window on the screen.
WINDOWPOS struct
Contains information about the size and position of a window.
WINDOWTHEMEATTRIBUTETYPE
Specifies the type of visual style attribute to set on a window.
WindowVisualState enum
Contains values that specify the visual state of a window.
WinHttpRequest com
WinHttpRequestAutoLogonPolicy enum
Possible settings for the Automatic Logon Policy.
WinHttpRequestOption enum
Options that can be set or retrieved for the current WinHTTP session.
WLAN_ASSOCIATION_ATTRIBUTES struct
The WLAN_ASSOCIATION_ATTRIBUTES structure contains association attributes for a connection.
WLAN_AUTH_CIPHER_PAIR_LIST struct
The WLAN_AUTH_CIPHER_PAIR_LIST structure contains a list of authentication and cipher algorithm pairs.
WLAN_AVAILABLE_NETWORK struct
The WLAN_AVAILABLE_NETWORK structure contains information about an available wireless network.
WLAN_AVAILABLE_NETWORK_LIST struct
The WLAN_AVAILABLE_NETWORK_LIST structure contains an array of information about available networks.
WLAN_BSS_ENTRY struct
The WLAN_BSS_ENTRY structure contains information about a basic service set (BSS).
WLAN_BSS_LIST struct
The WLAN_BSS_LIST structure contains a list of basic service set (BSS) entries.
WLAN_CONNECTION_ATTRIBUTES struct
The WLAN_CONNECTION_ATTRIBUTES structure defines the attributes of a wireless connection.
WLAN_CONNECTION_NOTIFICATION_DATA struct
The WLAN_CONNECTION_NOTIFICATION_DATA structure contains information about connection related notifications.
WLAN_CONNECTION_PARAMETERS struct
The WLAN_CONNECTION_PARAMETERS structure specifies the parameters used when using the WlanConnect function.
WLAN_COUNTRY_OR_REGION_STRING_LIST struct
A WLAN_COUNTRY_OR_REGION_STRING_LIST structure contains a list of supported country or region strings.
WLAN_DEVICE_SERVICE_GUID_LIST struct
Contains an array of device service GUIDs.
WLAN_DEVICE_SERVICE_NOTIFICATION_DATA struct
A structure that represents a device service notification.
WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_CONNECTION_SETTINGS struct
The WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_CONNECTION_SETTINGS structure contains information about the connection settings on the wireless Hosted Network.
WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_DATA_PEER_STATE_CHANGE struct
The WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_DATA_PEER_STATE_CHANGE structure contains information about a network state change for a data peer on the wireless Hosted Network.
WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_PEER_STATE struct
The WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_PEER_STATE structure contains information about the peer state for a peer on the wireless Hosted Network.
WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_RADIO_STATE struct
The WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_RADIO_STATE structure contains information about the radio state on the wireless Hosted Network.
WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_SECURITY_SETTINGS struct
The WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_SECURITY_SETTINGS structure contains information about the security settings on the wireless Hosted Network.
WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_STATE_CHANGE struct
The WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_STATE_CHANGE structure contains information about a network state change on the wireless Hosted Network.
WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_STATUS struct
The WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_STATUS structure contains information about the status of the wireless Hosted Network.
WLAN_INTERFACE_CAPABILITY struct
The WLAN_INTERFACE_CAPABILITY structure contains information about the capabilities of an interface.
WLAN_INTERFACE_INFO struct
The WLAN_INTERFACE_INFO structure contains information about a wireless LAN interface.
WLAN_INTERFACE_INFO_LIST struct
The WLAN_INTERFACE_INFO_LIST structure contains an array of NIC interface information.
WLAN_MAC_FRAME_STATISTICS struct
The WLAN_MAC_FRAME_STATISTICS structure contains information about sent and received MAC frames.
WLAN_MSM_NOTIFICATION_DATA struct
The WLAN_MSM_NOTIFICATION_DATA structure contains information about media specific module (MSM) connection related notifications.
WLAN_PHY_FRAME_STATISTICS struct
The WLAN_PHY_FRAME_STATISTICS structure contains information about sent and received PHY frames.
WLAN_PHY_RADIO_STATE struct
The WLAN_PHY_RADIO_STATE structure specifies the radio state on a specific physical layer (PHY) type.
WLAN_PROFILE_INFO struct
The WLAN_PROFILE_INFO structure contains basic information about a profile.
WLAN_PROFILE_INFO_LIST struct
The WLAN_PROFILE_INFO_LIST structure contains a list of wireless profile information.
WLAN_RADIO_STATE struct
The WLAN_RADIO_STATE structure specifies the radio state on a list of physical layer (PHY) types.
WLAN_RATE_SET struct
The set of supported data rates.
WLAN_RAW_DATA struct
The WLAN_RAW_DATA structure contains raw data in the form of a blob that is used by some Native Wifi functions.
WLAN_RAW_DATA_LIST struct
The WLAN_RAW_DATA_LIST structure contains raw data in the form of an array of data blobs that are used by some Native Wifi functions.
WLAN_SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES struct
The WLAN_SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES structure defines the security attributes for a wireless connection.
WLAN_STATISTICS struct
The WLAN_STATISTICS structure contains assorted statistics about an interface.
WNDCLASS struct
Contains the window class attributes that are registered by the RegisterClass function.
WNDCLASSEX struct
Contains window class information. It is used with the RegisterClassEx and GetClassInfoEx functions. The WNDCLASSEX structure is similar to the WNDCLASS structure. There are two differences. WNDCLASSEX includes the cbSize member, which specifies the size of the structure, and the hIconSm member, which contains a handle to a small icon associated with the window class.
WSL_DISTRIBUTION_FLAGS enum
The WSL_DISTRIBUTION_FLAGS enumeration specifies the behavior of a distribution in the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL).
WTA_OPTIONS struct
Defines options that are used to set window visual style attributes.
XFORM struct
The XFORM structure specifies a world-space to page-space transformation.
XINPUT_BATTERY_INFORMATION struct
Contains information on battery type and charge state.
XINPUT_CAPABILITIES struct
Describes the capabilities of a connected controller. The XInputGetCapabilities function returns XINPUT_CAPABILITIES.
XINPUT_GAMEPAD struct
Describes the current state of the controller.
XINPUT_KEYSTROKE struct
Specifies keystroke data returned by XInputGetKeystroke.
XINPUT_STATE struct
Represents the state of a controller.
XINPUT_VIBRATION struct
Specifies motor speed levels for the vibration function of a controller.

Enums

TrustLevel enum
Represents the trust level of an activatable class.

Extensions

BLUETOOTH_ADDRESS_Extension on BLUETOOTH_ADDRESS
BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATE_RESPONSE_Extension on BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATE_RESPONSE
BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_PARAMS_Extension on BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_PARAMS
BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE
BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension_1 on BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE
BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension_2 on BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE
BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension_3 on BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE
BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE_Extension on BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE
BTH_LE_UUID_Extension on BTH_LE_UUID
CHAR_INFO_Extension on CHAR_INFO
CY_Extension on CY
DECIMAL__Anonymous1_e__Union_Extension on DECIMAL
DECIMAL__Anonymous2_e__Union_Extension on DECIMAL
DECIMAL_Extension on DECIMAL
DECIMAL_Extension_1 on DECIMAL
DEVMODEW__Anonymous1_e__Union_Extension on DEVMODE
DEVMODEW__Anonymous1_e__Union_Extension_1 on DEVMODE
DEVMODEW_Extension on DEVMODE
DEVMODEW_Extension_1 on DEVMODE
DialogItemTemplateHelper on Pointer<DLGITEMTEMPLATE>
DialogTemplateHelper on Pointer<DLGTEMPLATE>
DISPLAYCONFIG_MODE_INFO_Extension on DISPLAYCONFIG_MODE_INFO
DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_SOURCE_INFO__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_SOURCE_INFO
DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_SOURCE_INFO_Extension on DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_SOURCE_INFO
DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_TARGET_INFO__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_TARGET_INFO
DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_TARGET_INFO_Extension on DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_TARGET_INFO
DISPLAYCONFIG_VIDEO_SIGNAL_INFO__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on DISPLAYCONFIG_VIDEO_SIGNAL_INFO
DISPLAYCONFIG_VIDEO_SIGNAL_INFO_Extension on DISPLAYCONFIG_VIDEO_SIGNAL_INFO
ELEMDESC_Extension on ELEMDESC
HexConversion on int
IN_ADDR__S_un_e__Union_Extension on IN_ADDR
IN_ADDR__S_un_e__Union_Extension_1 on IN_ADDR
IN_ADDR_Extension on IN_ADDR
INPUT_Extension on INPUT
INPUT_RECORD_Extension on INPUT_RECORD
INPUT_TRANSFORM__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on INPUT_TRANSFORM
INPUT_TRANSFORM_Extension on INPUT_TRANSFORM
IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH__Anonymous1_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH
IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH__Anonymous2_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH
IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH
IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH_Extension_1 on IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH
IP_ADAPTER_ANYCAST_ADDRESS_XP__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_ANYCAST_ADDRESS_XP
IP_ADAPTER_ANYCAST_ADDRESS_XP_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_ANYCAST_ADDRESS_XP
IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SERVER_ADDRESS_XP__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SERVER_ADDRESS_XP
IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SERVER_ADDRESS_XP_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_DNS_SERVER_ADDRESS_XP
IP_ADAPTER_GATEWAY_ADDRESS_LH__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_GATEWAY_ADDRESS_LH
IP_ADAPTER_GATEWAY_ADDRESS_LH_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_GATEWAY_ADDRESS_LH
IP_ADAPTER_MULTICAST_ADDRESS_XP__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_MULTICAST_ADDRESS_XP
IP_ADAPTER_MULTICAST_ADDRESS_XP_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_MULTICAST_ADDRESS_XP
IP_ADAPTER_PREFIX_XP__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_PREFIX_XP
IP_ADAPTER_PREFIX_XP_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_PREFIX_XP
IP_ADAPTER_UNICAST_ADDRESS_LH__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_UNICAST_ADDRESS_LH
IP_ADAPTER_UNICAST_ADDRESS_LH_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_UNICAST_ADDRESS_LH
IP_ADAPTER_WINS_SERVER_ADDRESS_LH__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_WINS_SERVER_ADDRESS_LH
IP_ADAPTER_WINS_SERVER_ADDRESS_LH_Extension on IP_ADAPTER_WINS_SERVER_ADDRESS_LH
KEY_EVENT_RECORD_Extension on KEY_EVENT_RECORD
MMTIME__u_e__Union_Extension on MMTIME
MMTIME__u_e__Union_Extension_1 on MMTIME
MMTIME_Extension on MMTIME
NET_LUID_LH_Extension on NET_LUID_LH
NOTIFYICONDATAW_Extension on NOTIFYICONDATA
OVERLAPPED__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on OVERLAPPED
OVERLAPPED_Extension on OVERLAPPED
PointerGUIDExtension on Pointer<GUID>
PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO_DATA__NotifyData_e__Union_Extension on PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO_DATA
PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO_DATA_Extension on PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO_DATA
PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY
PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension_1 on PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY
PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY_Extension on PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY
PROPSPEC_Extension on PROPSPEC
RAWINPUT_Extension on RAWINPUT
RAWMOUSE__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on RAWMOUSE
RAWMOUSE_Extension on RAWMOUSE
SDP_ELEMENT_DATA__data_e__Union_Extension on SDP_ELEMENT_DATA
SDP_ELEMENT_DATA__data_e__Union_Extension_1 on SDP_ELEMENT_DATA
SDP_ELEMENT_DATA__data_e__Union_Extension_2 on SDP_ELEMENT_DATA
SDP_ELEMENT_DATA__data_e__Union_Extension_3 on SDP_ELEMENT_DATA
SDP_ELEMENT_DATA_Extension on SDP_ELEMENT_DATA
SetString on Pointer<Utf16>
Sets the memory starting at the pointer location to the string supplied.
SetStringArray on List<String>
SHELLEXECUTEINFOW_Extension on SHELLEXECUTEINFO
StringUtf8Pointer on String
STRRET_Extension on STRRET
SYSTEM_INFO__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on SYSTEM_INFO
SYSTEM_INFO_Extension on SYSTEM_INFO
SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension on SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION
SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION__Anonymous_e__Union_Extension_1 on SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION
SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION_Extension on SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION
TASKDIALOGCONFIG_Extension on TASKDIALOGCONFIG
TASKDIALOGCONFIG_Extension_1 on TASKDIALOGCONFIG
TYPEDESC_Extension on TYPEDESC
Uint8ListBlobConversion on Uint8List
Utf16Conversion on Pointer<Utf16>
VARDESC_Extension on VARDESC
WAVEFORMATEXTENSIBLE_Extension on WAVEFORMATEXTENSIBLE
WinRTStringConversion on Pointer<HSTRING>

Constants

ACCESS_SYSTEM_SECURITY → const int
Specifies access to the system security portion of the security descriptor.
ALL_PROCESSOR_GROUPS → const int
All processor groups.
ASPECTX → const int
Relative width of a device pixel used for line drawing.
ASPECTXY → const int
Diagonal width of the device pixel used for line drawing.
ASPECTY → const int
Relative height of a device pixel used for line drawing.
AW_ACTIVATE → const int
Activates the window.
AW_BLEND → const int
Uses a fade effect.
AW_CENTER → const int
Makes the window appear to collapse inward if AW_HIDE is used or expand outward if the AW_HIDE is not used. The various direction flags have no effect.
AW_HIDE → const int
Hides the window. By default, the window is shown.
AW_HOR_NEGATIVE → const int
Animates the window from right to left. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation
AW_HOR_POSITIVE → const int
Animates the window from left to right. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation.
AW_SLIDE → const int
Uses slide animation. By default, roll animation is used.
AW_VER_NEGATIVE → const int
Animates the window from bottom to top. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation.
AW_VER_POSITIVE → const int
Animates the window from top to bottom. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation.
BI_BITFIELDS → const int
Specifies that the bitmap is not compressed and that the color masks for the red, green, and blue components of each pixel are specified in the bV5RedMask, bV5GreenMask, and bV5BlueMask members. This is valid when used with 16- and 32-bpp bitmaps.
BI_JPEG → const int
Specifies that the image is compressed using the JPEG file Interchange Format. JPEG compression trades off compression against loss; it can achieve a compression ratio of 20:1 with little noticeable loss.
BI_PNG → const int
Specifies that the image is compressed using the PNG file Interchange Format.
BI_RGB → const int
An uncompressed format.
BI_RLE4 → const int
An RLE format for bitmaps with 4 bpp. The compression format is a two-byte format consisting of a count byte followed by two word-length color indexes.
BI_RLE8 → const int
A run-length encoded (RLE) format for bitmaps with 8 bpp. The compression format is a two-byte format consisting of a count byte followed by a byte containing a color index. If bV5Compression is BI_RGB and the bV5BitCount member is 16, 24, or 32, the bitmap array specifies the actual intensities of blue, green, and red rather than using color table indexes.
BITSPIXEL → const int
Number of adjacent color bits for each pixel.
BLACKONWHITE → const int
Performs a Boolean AND operation using the color values for the eliminated and existing pixels. If the bitmap is a monochrome bitmap, this mode preserves black pixels at the expense of white pixels.
BLTALIGNMENT → const int
Preferred horizontal drawing alignment, expressed as a multiple of pixels. For best drawing performance, windows should be horizontally aligned to a multiple of this value. A value of zero indicates that the device is accelerated, and any alignment may be used.
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_CONNECTION_AUTHENTICATED → const int
The client requests the data to be transmitted over an authenticated channel.
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_CONNECTION_ENCRYPTED → const int
The client requests the data to be transmitted over an encrypted channel.
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_FORCE_READ_FROM_CACHE → const int
The characteristic value is to be read from the cache (regardless of whether it is present in the cache or not).
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_FORCE_READ_FROM_DEVICE → const int
The characteristic value is to be read directly from the device. This overwrites the one in the cache if one is already present.
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_NONE → const int
The client does not have specific GATT requirements (default).
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_RETURN_ALL → const int
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_SIGNED_WRITE → const int
Signed write. Profile drivers must use with BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_WRITE_WITHOUT_RESPONSE in order to produce signed write without a response.
BLUETOOTH_GATT_FLAG_WRITE_WITHOUT_RESPONSE → const int
Write without response.
BS_3STATE → const int
Creates a button that is the same as a check box, except that the box can be grayed as well as checked or cleared. Use the grayed state to show that the state of the check box is not determined.
BS_AUTO3STATE → const int
Creates a button that is the same as a three-state check box, except that the box changes its state when the user selects it. The state cycles through checked, indeterminate, and cleared.
BS_AUTOCHECKBOX → const int
Creates a button that is the same as a check box, except that the check state automatically toggles between checked and cleared each time the user selects the check box.
BS_AUTORADIOBUTTON → const int
Creates a button that is the same as a radio button, except that when the user selects it, the system automatically sets the button's check state to checked and automatically sets the check state for all other buttons in the same group to cleared.
BS_BITMAP → const int
Specifies that the button displays a bitmap. See the Remarks section for its interaction with BS_ICON.
BS_BOTTOM → const int
Places text at the bottom of the button rectangle.
BS_CENTER → const int
Centers text horizontally in the button rectangle.
BS_CHECKBOX → const int
Creates a small, empty check box with text. By default, the text is displayed to the right of the check box. To display the text to the left of the check box, combine this flag with the BS_LEFTTEXT style (or with the equivalent BS_RIGHTBUTTON style).
BS_DEFPUSHBUTTON → const int
Creates a push button that behaves like a BS_PUSHBUTTON style button, but has a distinct appearance. If the button is in a dialog box, the user can select the button by pressing the ENTER key, even when the button does not have the input focus. This style is useful for enabling the user to quickly select the most likely (default) option.
BS_DIBPATTERN → const int
A pattern brush defined by a device-independent bitmap (DIB) specification.
BS_DIBPATTERN8X8 → const int
A pattern brush defined by a device-independent bitmap (DIB) specification.
BS_DIBPATTERNPT → const int
A pattern brush defined by a device-independent bitmap (DIB) specification.
BS_FLAT → const int
Specifies that the button is two-dimensional; it does not use the default shading to create a 3-D image.
BS_GROUPBOX → const int
Creates a rectangle in which other controls can be grouped. Any text associated with this style is displayed in the rectangle's upper left corner.
BS_HATCHED → const int
Hatched brush.
BS_HOLLOW → const int
Hollow brush.
BS_ICON → const int
Specifies that the button displays an icon. See the Remarks section for its interaction with BS_BITMAP.
BS_LEFT → const int
Left-justifies the text in the button rectangle. However, if the button is a check box or radio button that does not have the BS_RIGHTBUTTON style, the text is left justified on the right side of the check box or radio button.
BS_LEFTTEXT → const int
Places text on the left side of the radio button or check box when combined with a radio button or check box style. Same as the BS_RIGHTBUTTON style.
BS_MULTILINE → const int
Wraps the button text to multiple lines if the text string is too long to fit on a single line in the button rectangle.
BS_NOTIFY → const int
Enables a button to send BN_KILLFOCUS and BN_SETFOCUS notification codes to its parent window. Note that buttons send the BN_CLICKED notification code regardless of whether it has this style. To get BN_DBLCLK notification codes, the button must have the BS_RADIOBUTTON or BS_OWNERDRAW style.
BS_NULL → const int
Hollow brush.
BS_OWNERDRAW → const int
Creates an owner-drawn button. The owner window receives a WM_DRAWITEM message when a visual aspect of the button has changed. Do not combine the BS_OWNERDRAW style with any other button styles.
BS_PATTERN → const int
Pattern brush defined by a memory bitmap.
BS_PATTERN8X8 → const int
Pattern brush defined by a memory bitmap.
BS_PUSHBOX → const int
Defines a push-box control, which is identical to a PUSHBUTTON, except that it does not display a button face or frame; only the text appears.
BS_PUSHBUTTON → const int
Creates a push button that posts a WM_COMMAND message to the owner window when the user selects the button.
BS_PUSHLIKE → const int
Makes a button (such as a check box, three-state check box, or radio button) look and act like a push button. The button looks raised when it isn't pushed or checked, and sunken when it is pushed or checked.
BS_RADIOBUTTON → const int
Creates a small circle with text. By default, the text is displayed to the right of the circle. To display the text to the left of the circle, combine this flag with the BS_LEFTTEXT style (or with the equivalent BS_RIGHTBUTTON style). Use radio buttons for groups of related, but mutually exclusive choices.
BS_RIGHT → const int
Right-justifies text in the button rectangle. However, if the button is a check box or radio button that does not have the BS_RIGHTBUTTON style, the text is right justified on the right side of the check box or radio button.
BS_RIGHTBUTTON → const int
Positions a radio button's circle or a check box's square on the right side of the button rectangle. Same as the BS_LEFTTEXT style.
BS_SOLID → const int
Solid brush.
BS_TEXT → const int
Specifies that the button displays text.
BS_TOP → const int
Places text at the top of the button rectangle.
BS_TYPEMASK → const int
Do not use this style. A composite style bit that results from using the OR operator on BS_* style bits. It can be used to mask out valid BS_* bits from a given bitmask. Note that this is out of date and does not correctly include all valid styles. Thus, you should not use this style.
BS_USERBUTTON → const int
Obsolete, but provided for compatibility with 16-bit versions of Windows. Applications should use BS_OWNERDRAW instead.
BS_VCENTER → const int
Places text in the middle (vertically) of the button rectangle.
CALLBACK_EVENT → const int
The dwCallback parameter is an event handle.
CALLBACK_FUNCTION → const int
The dwCallback parameter is a callback procedure address.
CALLBACK_NULL → const int
No callback mechanism. This is the default setting.
CALLBACK_THREAD → const int
The dwCallback parameter is a thread identifier.
CALLBACK_WINDOW → const int
The dwCallback parameter is a window handle.
CBR_110 → const int
110 bps.
CBR_115200 → const int
115200 bps.
CBR_1200 → const int
1200 bps.
CBR_128000 → const int
128000 bps.
CBR_14400 → const int
14400 bps.
CBR_19200 → const int
19200 bps.
CBR_2400 → const int
2400 bps.
CBR_256000 → const int
256000 bps.
CBR_300 → const int
300 bps.
CBR_38400 → const int
38400 bps.
CBR_4800 → const int
4800 bps.
CBR_56000 → const int
56000 bps.
CBR_57600 → const int
57600 bps.
CBR_600 → const int
600 bps.
CBR_9600 → const int
9600 bps.
CC_ANYCOLOR → const int
Causes the dialog box to display all available colors in the set of basic colors.
CC_ENABLEHOOK → const int
Enables the hook procedure specified in the lpfnHook member of this structure. This flag is used only to initialize the dialog box.
CC_ENABLETEMPLATE → const int
The hInstance and lpTemplateName members specify a dialog box template to use in place of the default template. This flag is used only to initialize the dialog box.
CC_ENABLETEMPLATEHANDLE → const int
The hInstance member identifies a data block that contains a preloaded dialog box template. The system ignores the lpTemplateName member if this flag is specified. This flag is used only to initialize the dialog box.
CC_FULLOPEN → const int
Causes the dialog box to display the additional controls that allow the user to create custom colors. If this flag is not set, the user must click the Define Custom Color button to display the custom color controls.
CC_PREVENTFULLOPEN → const int
Disables the Define Custom Color button.
CC_RGBINIT → const int
Causes the dialog box to use the color specified in the rgbResult member as the initial color selection.
CC_SHOWHELP → const int
Causes the dialog box to display the Help button. The hwndOwner member must specify the window to receive the HELPMSGSTRING registered messages that the dialog box sends when the user clicks the Help button.
CC_SOLIDCOLOR → const int
Causes the dialog box to display only solid colors in the set of basic colors.
CF_ANSIONLY → const int
This flag is obsolete.
CF_APPLY → const int
Causes the dialog box to display the Apply button. You should provide a hook procedure to process WM_COMMAND messages for the Apply button. The hook procedure can send the WM_CHOOSEFONT_GETLOGFONT message to the dialog box to retrieve the address of the structure that contains the current selections for the font.
CF_BITMAP → const int
A handle to a bitmap (HBITMAP).
CF_BOTH → const int
This flag is ignored for font enumeration.
CF_DIB → const int
A memory object containing a BITMAPINFO structure followed by the bitmap bits.
CF_DIBV5 → const int
A memory object containing a BITMAPV5HEADER structure followed by the bitmap color space information and the bitmap bits.
CF_DIF → const int
Software Arts' Data Interchange Format.
CF_DSPBITMAP → const int
Bitmap display format associated with a private format.
CF_DSPENHMETAFILE → const int
Enhanced metafile display format associated with a private format.
CF_DSPMETAFILEPICT → const int
Metafile-picture display format associated with a private format.
CF_DSPTEXT → const int
Text display format associated with a private format.
CF_EFFECTS → const int
Causes the dialog box to display the controls that allow the user to specify strikeout, underline, and text color options. If this flag is set, you can use the rgbColors member to specify the initial text color. You can use the lfStrikeOut and lfUnderline members of the structure pointed to by lpLogFont to specify the initial settings of the strikeout and underline check boxes. ChooseFont can use these members to return the user's selections.
CF_ENABLEHOOK → const int
Enables the hook procedure specified in the lpfnHook member of this structure.
CF_ENABLETEMPLATE → const int
Indicates that the hInstance and lpTemplateName members specify a dialog box template to use in place of the default template.
CF_ENABLETEMPLATEHANDLE → const int
Indicates that the hInstance member identifies a data block that contains a preloaded dialog box template. The system ignores the lpTemplateName member if this flag is specified.
CF_ENHMETAFILE → const int
A handle to an enhanced metafile (HENHMETAFILE).
CF_FIXEDPITCHONLY → const int
ChooseFont should enumerate and allow selection of only fixed-pitch fonts.
CF_FORCEFONTEXIST → const int
ChooseFont should indicate an error condition if the user attempts to select a font or style that is not listed in the dialog box.
CF_GDIOBJFIRST → const int
Start of a range of integer values for application-defined GDI object clipboard formats. The range ends with CF_GDIOBJLAST.
CF_GDIOBJLAST → const int
End of a range of integer values for application-defined GDI object clipboard formats.
CF_HDROP → const int
A handle to type HDROP that identifies a list of files. An application can retrieve information about the files by passing the handle to the DragQueryFile function.
CF_INACTIVEFONTS → const int
ChooseFont should additionally display fonts that are set to Hide in Fonts Control Panel.
CF_INITTOLOGFONTSTRUCT → const int
ChooseFont should use the structure pointed to by the lpLogFont member to initialize the dialog box controls.
CF_LIMITSIZE → const int
ChooseFont should select only font sizes within the range specified by the nSizeMin and nSizeMax members.
CF_LOCALE → const int
The data is a handle (HGLOBAL) to the locale identifier (LCID) associated with text in the clipboard. When you close the clipboard, if it contains CF_TEXT data but no CF_LOCALE data, the system automatically sets the CF_LOCALE format to the current input language. You can use the CF_LOCALE format to associate a different locale with the clipboard text.
CF_METAFILEPICT → const int
Handle to a metafile picture format as defined by the METAFILEPICT structure. When passing a CF_METAFILEPICT handle by means of DDE, the application responsible for deleting hMem should also free the metafile referred to by the CF_METAFILEPICT handle.
CF_NOFACESEL → const int
When using a LOGFONT structure to initialize the dialog box controls, use this flag to prevent the dialog box from displaying an initial selection for the font name combo box. This is useful when there is no single font name that applies to the text selection.
CF_NOOEMFONTS → const int
Same as the CF_NOVECTORFONTS flag.
CF_NOSCRIPTSEL → const int
Disables the Script combo box. When this flag is set, the lfCharSet member of the LOGFONT structure is set to DEFAULT_CHARSET when ChooseFont returns. This flag is used only to initialize the dialog box.
CF_NOSIMULATIONS → const int
ChooseFont should not display or allow selection of font simulations.
CF_NOSIZESEL → const int
When using a structure to initialize the dialog box controls, use this flag to prevent the dialog box from displaying an initial selection for the Font Size combo box. This is useful when there is no single font size that applies to the text selection.
CF_NOSTYLESEL → const int
When using a LOGFONT structure to initialize the dialog box controls, use this flag to prevent the dialog box from displaying an initial selection for the Font Style combo box. This is useful when there is no single font style that applies to the text selection.
CF_NOVECTORFONTS → const int
ChooseFont should not allow vector font selections.
CF_NOVERTFONTS → const int
Causes the Font dialog box to list only horizontally oriented fonts.
CF_OEMTEXT → const int
Text format containing characters in the OEM character set. Each line ends with a carriage return/linefeed (CR-LF) combination. A null character signals the end of the data.
CF_OWNERDISPLAY → const int
Owner-display format. The clipboard owner must display and update the clipboard viewer window, and receive the WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME, WM_HSCROLLCLIPBOARD, WM_PAINTCLIPBOARD, WM_SIZECLIPBOARD, and WM_VSCROLLCLIPBOARD messages.
CF_PALETTE → const int
Handle to a color palette. Whenever an application places data in the clipboard that depends on or assumes a color palette, it should place the palette on the clipboard as well.
CF_PENDATA → const int
Data for the pen extensions to the Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing.
CF_PRINTERFONTS → const int
This flag is ignored for font enumeration. In Windows Vista or below, it caused the dialog box to list only the fonts supported by the printer associated with the device context or information context identified by the hDC member.
CF_PRIVATEFIRST → const int
Start of a range of integer values for private clipboard formats. The range ends with CF_PRIVATELAST.
CF_PRIVATELAST → const int
End of a range of integer values for private clipboard formats.
CF_RIFF → const int
Represents audio data more complex than can be represented in a CF_WAVE standard wave format.
CF_SCALABLEONLY → const int
Specifies that ChooseFont should allow only the selection of scalable fonts. Scalable fonts include vector fonts, scalable printer fonts, TrueType fonts, and fonts scaled by other technologies.
CF_SCREENFONTS → const int
This flag is ignored for font enumeration. In Windows Vista or below, it caused the dialog box to list only the screen fonts supported by the system.
CF_SCRIPTSONLY → const int
ChooseFont should allow selection of fonts for all non-OEM and Symbol character sets, as well as the ANSI character set.
CF_SELECTSCRIPT → const int
When specified on input, only fonts with the character set identified in the lfCharSet member of the LOGFONT structure are displayed. The user will not be allowed to change the character set specified in the Scripts combo box.
CF_SHOWHELP → const int
Causes the dialog box to display the Help button. The hwndOwner member must specify the window to receive the HELPMSGSTRING registered messages that the dialog box sends when the user clicks the Help button.
CF_SYLK → const int
Microsoft Symbolic Link (SYLK) format.
CF_TEXT → const int
Text format. Each line ends with a carriage return/linefeed (CR-LF) combination. A null character signals the end of the data. Use this format for ANSI text.
CF_TIFF → const int
CF_TTONLY → const int
ChooseFont should only enumerate and allow the selection of TrueType fonts.
CF_UNICODETEXT → const int
Unicode text format. Each line ends with a carriage return/linefeed (CR-LF) combination. A null character signals the end of the data.
CF_USESTYLE → const int
The lpszStyle member is a pointer to a buffer that contains style data that ChooseFont should use to initialize the Font Style combo box. When the user closes the dialog box, ChooseFont copies style data for the user's selection to this buffer.
CF_WAVE → const int
Represents audio data in one of the standard wave formats, such as 11 kHz or 22 kHz PCM.
CF_WYSIWYG → const int
Obsolete. ChooseFont ignores this flag.
CLIPCAPS → const int
Flag that indicates the clipping capabilities of the device. If the device can clip to a rectangle, it is 1. Otherwise, it is 0.
CLSCTX_ALL → const int
The combination of CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER, CLSCTX_INPROC_HANDLER, CLSCTX_LOCAL_SERVER, and CLSCTX_REMOTE_SERVER.
CLSCTX_INPROC_HANDLER → const int
The code that manages objects of this class is an in-process handler. This is a DLL that runs in the client process and implements client-side structures of this class when instances of the class are accessed remotely.
CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER → const int
The code that creates and manages objects of this class is a DLL that runs in the same process as the caller of the function specifying the class context.
CLSCTX_LOCAL_SERVER → const int
The EXE code that creates and manages objects of this class runs on same machine but is loaded in a separate process space.
CLSCTX_REMOTE_SERVER → const int
A remote context. The LocalServer32 or LocalService code that creates and manages objects of this class is run on a different computer.
COINIT_APARTMENTTHREADED → const int
COINIT_DISABLE_OLE1DDE → const int
Disables DDE for OLE1 support.
COINIT_MULTITHREADED → const int
COINIT_SPEED_OVER_MEMORY → const int
Increase memory usage in an attempt to increase performance.
COINITBASE_MULTITHREADED → const int
Initializes the thread for multithreaded object concurrency
COLOR_ACTIVEBORDER → const int
Active window border.
COLOR_ACTIVECAPTION → const int
Active window title bar.
COLOR_APPWORKSPACE → const int
Background color of multiple document interface (MDI) applications.
COLOR_BACKGROUND → const int
Desktop.
COLOR_BTNFACE → const int
Face color for three-dimensional display elements and for dialog box backgrounds.
COLOR_BTNHIGHLIGHT → const int
Highlight color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing the light source.)
COLOR_BTNSHADOW → const int
Shadow color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing away from the light source).
COLOR_BTNTEXT → const int
Text on push buttons.
COLOR_CAPTIONTEXT → const int
Text in caption, size box, and scroll bar arrow box.
COLOR_GRAYTEXT → const int
Grayed (disabled) text.
COLOR_HIGHLIGHT → const int
Item(s) selected in a control.
COLOR_HIGHLIGHTTEXT → const int
Text of item(s) selected in a control.
COLOR_INACTIVEBORDER → const int
Inactive window border.
COLOR_INACTIVECAPTION → const int
Inactive window caption.
COLOR_INACTIVECAPTIONTEXT → const int
Color of text in an inactive caption.
COLOR_MENU → const int
Menu background.
COLOR_MENUTEXT → const int
Text in menus.
COLOR_SCROLLBAR → const int
Scroll bar gray area.
COLOR_WINDOW → const int
Window background.
COLOR_WINDOWFRAME → const int
Window frame.
COLOR_WINDOWTEXT → const int
Text in windows.
COLORMGMTCAPS → const int
Value that indicates the color management capabilities of the device.
COLORONCOLOR → const int
Deletes the pixels. This mode deletes all eliminated lines of pixels without trying to preserve their information.
COLORRES → const int
Actual color resolution of the device, in bits per pixel. This index is valid only if the device driver sets the RC_PALETTE bit in the RASTERCAPS index and is available only if the driver is compatible with 16-bit Windows.
CREATE_ALWAYS → const int
Creates a new file, always.
CREATE_NEW → const int
Creates a new file, only if it does not already exist.
CS_BYTEALIGNCLIENT → const int
Aligns the window's client area on a byte boundary (in the x direction). This style affects the width of the window and its horizontal placement on the display.
CS_BYTEALIGNWINDOW → const int
Aligns the window on a byte boundary (in the x direction). This style affects the width of the window and its horizontal placement on the display.
CS_CLASSDC → const int
Allocates one device context to be shared by all windows in the class. Because window classes are process specific, it is possible for multiple threads of an application to create a window of the same class. It is also possible for the threads to attempt to use the device context simultaneously. When this happens, the system allows only one thread to successfully finish its drawing operation.
CS_DBLCLKS → const int
Sends a double-click message to the window procedure when the user double-clicks the mouse while the cursor is within a window belonging to the class.
CS_DROPSHADOW → const int
Enables the drop shadow effect on a window. The effect is turned on and off through SPI_SETDROPSHADOW. Typically, this is enabled for small, short-lived windows such as menus to emphasize their Z-order relationship to other windows. Windows created from a class with this style must be top-level windows; they may not be child windows.
CS_GLOBALCLASS → const int
Indicates that the window class is an application global class.
CS_HREDRAW → const int
Redraws the entire window if a movement or size adjustment changes the width of the client area.
CS_NOCLOSE → const int
Disables Close on the window menu.
CS_OWNDC → const int
Allocates a unique device context for each window in the class.
CS_PARENTDC → const int
Sets the clipping rectangle of the child window to that of the parent window so that the child can draw on the parent. A window with the CS_PARENTDC style bit receives a regular device context from the system's cache of device contexts. It does not give the child the parent's device context or device context settings. Specifying CS_PARENTDC enhances an application's performance.
CS_SAVEBITS → const int
Saves, as a bitmap, the portion of the screen image obscured by a window of this class. When the window is removed, the system uses the saved bitmap to restore the screen image, including other windows that were obscured. Therefore, the system does not send WM_PAINT messages to windows that were obscured if the memory used by the bitmap has not been discarded and if other screen actions have not invalidated the stored image.
CS_VREDRAW → const int
Redraws the entire window if a movement or size adjustment changes the height of the client area.
CURVECAPS → const int
Value that indicates the curve capabilities of the device.
DBT_CONFIGCHANGECANCELED → const int
A request to change the current configuration (dock or undock) has been canceled.
DBT_CONFIGCHANGED → const int
The current configuration has changed, due to a dock or undock.
DBT_CUSTOMEVENT → const int
A custom event has occurred.
DBT_DEVICEARRIVAL → const int
A device or piece of media has been inserted and is now available.
DBT_DEVICEQUERYREMOVE → const int
Permission is requested to remove a device or piece of media. Any application can deny this request and cancel the removal.
DBT_DEVICEQUERYREMOVEFAILED → const int
A request to remove a device or piece of media has been canceled.
DBT_DEVICEREMOVECOMPLETE → const int
A device or piece of media has been removed.
DBT_DEVICEREMOVEPENDING → const int
A device or piece of media is about to be removed. Cannot be denied.
DBT_DEVICETYPESPECIFIC → const int
A device-specific event has occurred.
DBT_DEVNODES_CHANGED → const int
A device has been added to or removed from the system.
DBT_QUERYCHANGECONFIG → const int
Permission is requested to change the current configuration (dock or undock).
DBT_USERDEFINED → const int
The meaning of this message is user-defined.
DEACTIVATE_ACTCTX_FLAG_FORCE_EARLY_DEACTIVATION → const int
Indicates how the activation context is to be deactivated.
DELETE → const int
The right to delete the object.
DESKTOPHORZRES → const int
DESKTOPVERTRES → const int
DEVICE_NOTIFY_SERVICE_HANDLE → const int
Notifications are sent to the HandlerEx callback function with a dwControl parameter of SERVICE_CONTROL_POWEREVENT and a dwEventType of PBT_POWERSETTINGCHANGE.
DEVICE_NOTIFY_WINDOW_HANDLE → const int
Notifications are sent using WM_POWERBROADCAST messages with a wParam parameter of PBT_POWERSETTINGCHANGE.
DICS_FLAG_CONFIGGENERAL → const int
(Obsolete. Do not use.)
DICS_FLAG_CONFIGSPECIFIC → const int
Make the change in the specified profile only.
DICS_FLAG_GLOBAL → const int
Make the change in all hardware profiles.
DIGCF_ALLCLASSES → const int
Return a list of installed devices for all device setup classes or all device interface classes.
DIGCF_DEFAULT → const int
Return only the device that is associated with the system default device interface, if one is set, for the specified device interface classes.
DIGCF_DEVICEINTERFACE → const int
Return devices that support device interfaces for the specified device interface classes.
DIGCF_PRESENT → const int
Return only devices that are currently present in a system.
DIGCF_PROFILE → const int
Return only devices that are a part of the current hardware profile.
DIREG_BOTH → const int
Both hardware and software keys.
DIREG_DEV → const int
Hardware key for the device.
DIREG_DRV → const int
Software key for the device.
DISABLE_NEWLINE_AUTO_RETURN → const int
When writing with WriteFile or WriteConsole, this adds an additional state to end-of-line wrapping that can delay the cursor move and buffer scroll operations.
DISPATCH_METHOD → const int
The member is invoked as a method. If a property has the same name, both this and the DISPATCH_PROPERTYGET flag can be set.
DISPATCH_PROPERTYGET → const int
The member is retrieved as a property or data member.
DISPATCH_PROPERTYPUT → const int
The member is changed as a property or data member.
DISPATCH_PROPERTYPUTREF → const int
The member is changed by a reference assignment, rather than a value assignment. This flag is valid only when the property accepts a reference to an object.
DISPLAY_DEVICE_ACTIVE → const int
DISPLAY_DEVICE_ACTIVE specifies whether a monitor is presented as being "on" by the respective GDI view.
DISPLAY_DEVICE_MIRRORING_DRIVER → const int
Represents a pseudo device used to mirror application drawing for remoting or other purposes. An invisible pseudo monitor is associated with this device. For example, NetMeeting uses it. Note that GetSystemMetrics (SM_MONITORS) only accounts for visible display monitors.
DISPLAY_DEVICE_MODESPRUNED → const int
The device has more display modes than its output devices support.
DISPLAY_DEVICE_PRIMARY_DEVICE → const int
The primary desktop is on the device. For a system with a single display card, this is always set. For a system with multiple display cards, only one device can have this set.
DISPLAY_DEVICE_REMOVABLE → const int
The device is removable; it cannot be the primary display.
DISPLAY_DEVICE_VGA_COMPATIBLE → const int
The device is VGA compatible.
DONT_RESOLVE_DLL_REFERENCES → const int
If this value is used, and the executable module is a DLL, the system does not call DllMain for process and thread initialization and termination. Also, the system does not load additional executable modules that are referenced by the specified module.
DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_PER_MONITOR_AWARE → const int
Per monitor DPI aware. This window checks for the DPI when it is created and adjusts the scale factor whenever the DPI changes. These processes are not automatically scaled by the system.
DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_PER_MONITOR_AWARE_V2 → const int
Also known as Per Monitor v2. An advancement over the original per-monitor DPI awareness mode, which enables applications to access new DPI-related scaling behaviors on a per top-level window basis.
DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_SYSTEM_AWARE → const int
System DPI aware. This window does not scale for DPI changes. It will query for the DPI once and use that value for the lifetime of the process. If the DPI changes, the process will not adjust to the new DPI value. It will be automatically scaled up or down by the system when the DPI changes from the system value.
DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_UNAWARE → const int
DPI unaware. This window does not scale for DPI changes and is always assumed to have a scale factor of 100% (96 DPI). It will be automatically scaled by the system on any other DPI setting.
DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_UNAWARE_GDISCALED → const int
DPI unaware with improved quality of GDI-based content. This mode behaves similarly to DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_UNAWARE, but also enables the system to automatically improve the rendering quality of text and other GDI-based primitives when the window is displayed on a high-DPI monitor.
DRIVERVERSION → const int
The device driver version.
DS_3DLOOK → const int
Obsolete. Do not use.
DS_ABSALIGN → const int
Indicates that the coordinates of the dialog box are screen coordinates. If this style is not specified, the coordinates are client coordinates.
DS_CENTER → const int
Centers the dialog box in the working area of the monitor that contains the owner window. If no owner window is specified, the dialog box is centered in the working area of a monitor determined by the system. The working area is the area not obscured by the taskbar or any appbars.
DS_CENTERMOUSE → const int
Centers the dialog box on the mouse cursor.
DS_CONTEXTHELP → const int
Includes a question mark in the title bar of the dialog box. When the user clicks the question mark, the cursor changes to a question mark with a pointer.
DS_CONTROL → const int
Creates a dialog box that works well as a child window of another dialog box, much like a page in a property sheet. This style allows the user to tab among the control windows of a child dialog box, use its accelerator keys, and so on.
DS_FIXEDSYS → const int
Causes the dialog box to use the monospace SYSTEM_FIXED_FONT instead of the default SYSTEM_FONT.
DS_LOCALEDIT → const int
Obsolete. Do not use.
DS_MODALFRAME → const int
Creates a dialog box with a modal dialog-box frame that can be combined with a title bar and window menu by specifying the WS_CAPTION and WS_SYSMENU styles.
DS_NOFAILCREATE → const int
Creates the dialog box even if errors occur for example, if a child window cannot be created or if the system cannot create a special data segment for an edit control.
DS_NOIDLEMSG → const int
Suppresses WM_ENTERIDLE messages that the system would otherwise send to the owner of the dialog box while the dialog box is displayed.
DS_SETFONT → const int
Indicates that the header of the dialog box template (either standard or extended) contains additional data specifying the font to use for text in the client area and controls of the dialog box.
DS_SETFOREGROUND → const int
Causes the system to use the SetForegroundWindow function to bring the dialog box to the foreground. This style is useful for modal dialog boxes that require immediate attention from the user regardless of whether the owner window is the foreground window.
DS_SHELLFONT → const int
Indicates that the dialog box should use the system font. The typeface member of the extended dialog box template must be set to MS Shell Dlg. Otherwise, this style has no effect.
DS_SYSMODAL → const int
Obsolete. Do not use.
DT_BOTTOM → const int
Justifies the text to the bottom of the rectangle. This value is used only with the DT_SINGLELINE value.
DT_CALCRECT → const int
Determines the width and height of the rectangle. If there are multiple lines of text, DrawText uses the width of the rectangle pointed to by the lpRect parameter and extends the base of the rectangle to bound the last line of text. If the largest word is wider than the rectangle, the width is expanded. If the text is less than the width of the rectangle, the width is reduced. If there is only one line of text, DrawText modifies the right side of the rectangle so that it bounds the last character in the line. In either case, DrawText returns the height of the formatted text but does not draw the text.
DT_CENTER → const int
Centers text horizontally in the rectangle.
DT_EDITCONTROL → const int
Duplicates the text-displaying characteristics of a multiline edit control. Specifically, the average character width is calculated in the same manner as for an edit control, and the function does not display a partially visible last line.
DT_END_ELLIPSIS → const int
For displayed text, if the end of a string does not fit in the rectangle, it is truncated and ellipses are added. If a word that is not at the end of the string goes beyond the limits of the rectangle, it is truncated without ellipses.
DT_EXPANDTABS → const int
Expands tab characters. The default number of characters per tab is eight. The DT_WORD_ELLIPSIS, DT_PATH_ELLIPSIS, and DT_END_ELLIPSIS values cannot be used with the DT_EXPANDTABS value.
DT_EXTERNALLEADING → const int
Includes the font external leading in line height. Normally, external leading is not included in the height of a line of text.
DT_HIDEPREFIX → const int
Ignores the ampersand (&) prefix character in the text. The letter that follows will not be underlined, but other mnemonic-prefix characters are still processed.
DT_INTERNAL → const int
Uses the system font to calculate text metrics.
DT_LEFT → const int
Aligns text to the left.
DT_MODIFYSTRING → const int
Modifies the specified string to match the displayed text. This value has no effect unless DT_END_ELLIPSIS or DT_PATH_ELLIPSIS is specified.
DT_NOCLIP → const int
Draws without clipping. DrawText is somewhat faster when DT_NOCLIP is used.
DT_NOFULLWIDTHCHARBREAK → const int
Prevents a line break at a DBCS (double-wide character string), so that the line breaking rule is equivalent to SBCS strings. For example, this can be used in Korean windows, for more readability of icon labels. This value has no effect unless DT_WORDBREAK is specified.
DT_NOPREFIX → const int
Turns off processing of prefix characters. Normally, DrawText interprets the mnemonic-prefix character & as a directive to underscore the character that follows, and the mnemonic-prefix characters && as a directive to print a single &. By specifying DT_NOPREFIX, this processing is turned off.
DT_PATH_ELLIPSIS → const int
For displayed text, replaces characters in the middle of the string with ellipses so that the result fits in the specified rectangle. If the string contains backslash (\) characters, DT_PATH_ELLIPSIS preserves as much as possible of the text after the last backslash.
DT_PREFIXONLY → const int
Draws only an underline at the position of the character following the ampersand (&) prefix character. Does not draw any other characters in the string.
DT_RIGHT → const int
Aligns text to the right.
DT_RTLREADING → const int
Layout in right-to-left reading order for bidirectional text when the font selected into the hdc is a Hebrew or Arabic font. The default reading order for all text is left-to-right.
DT_SINGLELINE → const int
Displays text on a single line only. Carriage returns and line feeds do not break the line.
DT_TABSTOP → const int
Sets tab stops. Bits 15-8 (high-order byte of the low-order word) of the uFormat parameter specify the number of characters for each tab. The default number of characters per tab is eight. The DT_CALCRECT, DT_EXTERNALLEADING, DT_INTERNAL, DT_NOCLIP, and DT_NOPREFIX values cannot be used with the DT_TABSTOP value.
DT_TOP → const int
Justifies the text to the top of the rectangle.
DT_VCENTER → const int
Centers text vertically. This value is used only with the DT_SINGLELINE value.
DT_WORD_ELLIPSIS → const int
Truncates any word that does not fit in the rectangle and adds ellipses.
DT_WORDBREAK → const int
Breaks words. Lines are automatically broken between words if a word would extend past the edge of the rectangle specified by the lpRect parameter. A carriage return-line feed sequence also breaks the line.
DTR_CONTROL_DISABLE → const int
Disables the DTR line when the device is opened and leaves it disabled.
DTR_CONTROL_ENABLE → const int
Enables the DTR line when the device is opened and leaves it on.
DTR_CONTROL_HANDSHAKE → const int
Enables DTR handshaking. If handshaking is enabled, it is an error for the application to adjust the line by using the EscapeCommFunction function.
DTT_APPLYOVERLAY → const int
The fApplyOverlay member value is valid.
DTT_BORDERCOLOR → const int
The crBorder member value is valid.
DTT_BORDERSIZE → const int
The iBorderSize member value is valid.
DTT_CALCRECT → const int
The pRect parameter of the DrawThemeTextEx function that uses this structure will be used as both an in and an out parameter. After the function returns, the pRect parameter will contain the rectangle that corresponds to the region calculated to be drawn.
DTT_CALLBACK → const int
The pfnDrawTextCallback member value is valid.
DTT_COLORPROP → const int
The iColorPropId member value is valid.
DTT_COMPOSITED → const int
Draws text with antialiased alpha. Use of this flag requires a top-down DIB section. This flag works only if the HDC passed to function DrawThemeTextEx has a top-down DIB section currently selected in it.
DTT_FONTPROP → const int
The iFontPropId member value is valid.
DTT_GLOWSIZE → const int
The iGlowSize member value is valid.
DTT_SHADOWCOLOR → const int
The crShadow member value is valid.
DTT_SHADOWOFFSET → const int
The ptShadowOffset member value is valid.
DTT_SHADOWTYPE → const int
The iTextShadowType member value is valid.
DTT_STATEID → const int
The iStateId member value is valid.
DTT_TEXTCOLOR → const int
The crText member value is valid.
DTT_VALIDBITS → const int
All valid bits
EC_LEFTMARGIN → const int
Sets the left margin.
EC_RIGHTMARGIN → const int
Sets the right margin.
EC_USEFONTINFO → const int
Rich edit controls: Sets the left and right margins to a narrow width calculated using the text metrics of the control's current font.
EM_CANUNDO → const int
Determines whether there are any actions in an edit control's undo queue.
EM_CHARFROMPOS → const int
Gets information about the character closest to a specified point in the client area of an edit control.
EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER → const int
Resets the undo flag of an edit control.
EM_ENABLEFEATURE → const int
Allows enterprise data protection support and paste notifications to be set.
EM_FMTLINES → const int
Sets a flag that determines whether a multiline edit control includes soft line-break characters.
EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE → const int
Gets the zero-based index of the uppermost visible line in a multiline edit control.
EM_GETHANDLE → const int
Gets a handle of the memory currently allocated for a multiline edit control's text.
EM_GETIMESTATUS → const int
Gets a set of status flags that indicate how the edit control interacts with the Input Method Editor (IME).
EM_GETLIMITTEXT → const int
Gets the current text limit for an edit control.
EM_GETLINE → const int
Copies a line of text from an edit control and places it in a specified buffer.
EM_GETLINECOUNT → const int
Gets the number of lines in a multiline edit control.
EM_GETMARGINS → const int
Gets the widths of the left and right margins for an edit control.
EM_GETMODIFY → const int
Gets the state of an edit control's modification flag.
EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR → const int
Gets the password character that an edit control displays when the user enters text.
EM_GETRECT → const int
Gets the formatting rectangle of an edit control.
EM_GETSEL → const int
Gets the starting and ending character positions (in TCHARs) of the current selection in an edit control.
EM_GETTHUMB → const int
Gets the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the vertical scroll bar of a multiline edit control.
EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC → const int
Gets the address of the current Wordwrap function.
EM_LIMITTEXT → const int
Sets the text limit of an edit control.
EM_LINEFROMCHAR → const int
Gets the index of the line that contains the specified character index in a multiline edit control.
EM_LINEINDEX → const int
Gets the character index of the first character of a specified line in a multiline edit control.
EM_LINELENGTH → const int
Retrieves the length, in characters, of a line in an edit control.
EM_LINESCROLL → const int
Scrolls the text in a multiline edit control.
EM_POSFROMCHAR → const int
Retrieves the client area coordinates of a specified character in an edit control.
EM_REPLACESEL → const int
Replaces the selected text in an edit control or a rich edit control with the specified text.
EM_SCROLL → const int
Scrolls the text vertically in a multiline edit control.
EM_SCROLLCARET → const int
Scrolls the caret into view in an edit control.
EM_SETHANDLE → const int
Sets the handle of the memory that will be used by a multiline edit control.
EM_SETIMESTATUS → const int
Sets the status flags that determine how an edit control interacts with the Input Method Editor (IME).
EM_SETLIMITTEXT → const int
Sets the text limit of an edit control.
EM_SETMARGINS → const int
Sets the widths of the left and right margins for an edit control.
EM_SETMODIFY → const int
Sets or clears the modification flag for an edit control.
EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR → const int
Sets or removes the password character for an edit control.
EM_SETREADONLY → const int
Sets or removes the read-only style (ES_READONLY) of an edit control.
EM_SETRECT → const int
Sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control.
EM_SETRECTNP → const int
Sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control.
EM_SETSEL → const int
Selects a range of characters in an edit control.
EM_SETTABSTOPS → const int
The EM_SETTABSTOPS message sets the tab stops in a multiline edit control. When text is copied to the control, any tab character in the text causes space to be generated up to the next tab stop.
EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC → const int
Replaces an edit control's default Wordwrap function with an application-defined Wordwrap function.
EM_UNDO → const int
This message undoes the last edit control operation in the control's undo queue.
EN_ALIGN_LTR_EC → const int
Sent when the user has changed the edit control direction to left-to-right.
EN_ALIGN_RTL_EC → const int
Sent when the user has changed the edit control direction to right-to-left.
EN_CHANGE → const int
Sent when the user has taken an action that may have altered text in an edit control.
EN_ERRSPACE → const int
Sent when an edit control cannot allocate enough memory to meet a specific request.
EN_HSCROLL → const int
Sent when the user clicks an edit control's horizontal scroll bar.
EN_KILLFOCUS → const int
Sent when an edit control loses the keyboard focus.
EN_MAXTEXT → const int
Sent when the current text insertion has exceeded the specified number of characters for the edit control. The text insertion has been truncated.
EN_SETFOCUS → const int
Sent when an edit control receives the keyboard focus.
EN_UPDATE → const int
Sent when an edit control is about to redraw itself. This notification code is sent after the control has formatted the text, but before it displays the text. This makes it possible to resize the edit control window, if necessary.
EN_VSCROLL → const int
Sent when the user clicks an edit control's vertical scroll bar or when the user scrolls the mouse wheel over the edit control.
ENABLE_ECHO_INPUT → const int
Characters read by the ReadFile or ReadConsole function are written to the active screen buffer as they are read. This mode can be used only if the ENABLE_LINE_INPUT mode is also enabled.
ENABLE_EXTENDED_FLAGS → const int
Required to enable or disable extended flags. See ENABLE_INSERT_MODE and ENABLE_QUICK_EDIT_MODE.
ENABLE_INSERT_MODE → const int
When enabled, text entered in a console window will be inserted at the current cursor location and all text following that location will not be overwritten. When disabled, all following text will be overwritten.
ENABLE_LINE_INPUT → const int
The ReadFile or ReadConsole function returns only when a carriage return character is read. If this mode is disabled, the functions return when one or more characters are available.
ENABLE_LVB_GRID_WORLDWIDE → const int
The APIs for writing character attributes including WriteConsoleOutput and WriteConsoleOutputAttribute allow the usage of flags from character attributes to adjust the color of the foreground and background of text. Additionally, a range of DBCS flags was specified with the COMMON_LVB prefix. Historically, these flags only functioned in DBCS code pages for Chinese, Japanese, and Korean languages.
ENABLE_MOUSE_INPUT → const int
If the mouse pointer is within the borders of the console window and the window has the keyboard focus, mouse events generated by mouse movement and button presses are placed in the input buffer. These events are discarded by ReadFile or ReadConsole, even when this mode is enabled.
ENABLE_PROCESSED_INPUT → const int
CTRL+C is processed by the system and is not placed in the input buffer. If the input buffer is being read by ReadFile or ReadConsole, other control keys are processed by the system and are not returned in the ReadFile or ReadConsole buffer. If the ENABLE_LINE_INPUT mode is also enabled, backspace, carriage return, and line feed characters are handled by the system.
ENABLE_PROCESSED_OUTPUT → const int
Characters written by the WriteFile or WriteConsole function or echoed by the ReadFile or ReadConsole function are examined for ASCII control sequences and the correct action is performed. Backspace, tab, bell, carriage return, and line feed characters are processed.
ENABLE_QUICK_EDIT_MODE → const int
This flag enables the user to use the mouse to select and edit text.
ENABLE_VIRTUAL_TERMINAL_INPUT → const int
Setting this flag directs the Virtual Terminal processing engine to convert user input received by the console window into Console Virtual Terminal Sequences that can be retrieved by a supporting application through ReadFile or ReadConsole functions.
ENABLE_VIRTUAL_TERMINAL_PROCESSING → const int
When writing with WriteFile or WriteConsole, characters are parsed for VT100 and similar control character sequences that control cursor movement, color/font mode, and other operations that can also be performed via the existing Console APIs. For more information, see Console Virtual Terminal Sequences.
ENABLE_WINDOW_INPUT → const int
User interactions that change the size of the console screen buffer are reported in the console's input buffer. Information about these events can be read from the input buffer by applications using the ReadConsoleInput function, but not by those using ReadFile or ReadConsole.
ENABLE_WRAP_AT_EOL_OUTPUT → const int
When writing with WriteFile or WriteConsole or echoing with ReadFile or ReadConsole, the cursor moves to the beginning of the next row when it reaches the end of the current row. This causes the rows displayed in the console window to scroll up automatically when the cursor advances beyond the last row in the window. It also causes the contents of the console screen buffer to scroll up (discarding the top row of the console screen buffer) when the cursor advances beyond the last row in the console screen buffer. If this mode is disabled, the last character in the row is overwritten with any subsequent characters.
ERROR_ACCESS_DENIED → const int
Access is denied.
ERROR_ADAP_HDW_ERR → const int
A network adapter hardware error occurred.
ERROR_ALREADY_ASSIGNED → const int
The local device name is already in use.
ERROR_ARENA_TRASHED → const int
The storage control blocks were destroyed.
ERROR_BAD_COMMAND → const int
The device does not recognize the command.
ERROR_BAD_DEV_TYPE → const int
The network resource type is not correct.
ERROR_BAD_ENVIRONMENT → const int
The environment is incorrect.
ERROR_BAD_FORMAT → const int
An attempt was made to load a program with an incorrect format.
ERROR_BAD_LENGTH → const int
The program issued a command but the command length is incorrect.
ERROR_BAD_NET_NAME → const int
The network name cannot be found.
ERROR_BAD_NET_RESP → const int
The specified server cannot perform the requested operation.
ERROR_BAD_NETPATH → const int
The network path was not found.
ERROR_BAD_REM_ADAP → const int
The remote adapter is not compatible.
ERROR_BAD_UNIT → const int
The system cannot find the device specified.
ERROR_CANNOT_MAKE → const int
The directory or file cannot be created.
ERROR_CRC → const int
Data error (cyclic redundancy check).
ERROR_CURRENT_DIRECTORY → const int
The directory cannot be removed.
ERROR_DEV_NOT_EXIST → const int
The specified network resource or device is no longer available.
ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_CONNECTED → const int
The device is not connected.
ERROR_DUP_NAME → const int
You were not connected because a duplicate name exists on the network. If joining a domain, go to System in Control Panel to change the computer name and try again. If joining a workgroup, choose another workgroup name.
ERROR_EXCL_SEM_ALREADY_OWNED → const int
The exclusive semaphore is owned by another process.
ERROR_FAIL_I24 → const int
Fail on INT 24.
ERROR_FILE_EXISTS → const int
The file exists.
ERROR_FILE_NOT_FOUND → const int
The system cannot find the file specified.
ERROR_GEN_FAILURE → const int
A device attached to the system is not functioning.
ERROR_HANDLE_DISK_FULL → const int
The disk is full.
ERROR_HANDLE_EOF → const int
Reached the end of the file.
ERROR_INVALID_ACCESS → const int
The access code is invalid.
ERROR_INVALID_AT_INTERRUPT_TIME → const int
Cannot request exclusive semaphores at interrupt time.
ERROR_INVALID_BLOCK → const int
The storage control block address is invalid.
ERROR_INVALID_DATA → const int
The data is invalid.
ERROR_INVALID_DRIVE → const int
The system cannot find the drive specified.
ERROR_INVALID_FUNCTION → const int
Incorrect function.
ERROR_INVALID_HANDLE → const int
The handle is invalid.
ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER → const int
The parameter is incorrect.
ERROR_INVALID_PASSWORD → const int
The specified network password is not correct.
ERROR_LOCK_VIOLATION → const int
The process cannot access the file because another process has locked a portion of the file.
ERROR_NET_WRITE_FAULT → const int
A write fault occurred on the network.
ERROR_NETNAME_DELETED → const int
The specified network name is no longer available.
ERROR_NETWORK_ACCESS_DENIED → const int
Network access is denied.
ERROR_NETWORK_BUSY → const int
The network is busy.
ERROR_NO_MORE_FILES → const int
There are no more files.
ERROR_NO_PROC_SLOTS → const int
The system cannot start another process at this time.
ERROR_NO_SPOOL_SPACE → const int
Space to store the file waiting to be printed is not available on the server.
ERROR_NOT_DOS_DISK → const int
The specified disk or diskette cannot be accessed.
ERROR_NOT_ENOUGH_MEMORY → const int
Not enough memory resources are available to process this command.
ERROR_NOT_READY → const int
The device is not ready.
ERROR_NOT_SAME_DEVICE → const int
The system cannot move the file to a different disk drive.
ERROR_NOT_SUPPORTED → const int
The request is not supported.
ERROR_OUT_OF_PAPER → const int
The printer is out of paper.
ERROR_OUT_OF_STRUCTURES → const int
Storage to process this request is not available.
ERROR_OUTOFMEMORY → const int
Not enough storage is available to complete this operation.
ERROR_PATH_NOT_FOUND → const int
The system cannot find the path specified.
ERROR_PRINT_CANCELLED → const int
Your file waiting to be printed was deleted.
ERROR_PRINTQ_FULL → const int
The printer queue is full.
ERROR_READ_FAULT → const int
The system cannot read from the specified device.
ERROR_REDIR_PAUSED → const int
The specified printer or disk device has been paused.
ERROR_REM_NOT_LIST → const int
Windows cannot find the network path. Verify that the network path is correct and the destination computer is not busy or turned off. If Windows still cannot find the network path, contact your network administrator.
ERROR_REQ_NOT_ACCEP → const int
No more connections can be made to this remote computer at this time because there are already as many connections as the computer can accept.
ERROR_SECTOR_NOT_FOUND → const int
The drive cannot find the sector requested.
ERROR_SEEK → const int
The drive cannot locate a specific area or track on the disk.
ERROR_SEM_IS_SET → const int
The semaphore is set and cannot be closed.
ERROR_SERVICE_NOT_ACTIVE → const int
The service has not been started.
ERROR_SHARING_BUFFER_EXCEEDED → const int
Too many files opened for sharing.
ERROR_SHARING_PAUSED → const int
The remote server has been paused or is in the process of being started.
ERROR_SHARING_VIOLATION → const int
The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process.
ERROR_SUCCESS → const int
The operation completed successfully.
ERROR_TOO_MANY_CMDS → const int
The network BIOS command limit has been reached.
ERROR_TOO_MANY_NAMES → const int
The name limit for the local computer network adapter card was exceeded.
ERROR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES → const int
The system cannot open the file.
ERROR_TOO_MANY_SEM_REQUESTS → const int
The semaphore cannot be set again.
ERROR_TOO_MANY_SEMAPHORES → const int
Cannot create another system semaphore.
ERROR_TOO_MANY_SESS → const int
The network BIOS session limit was exceeded.
ERROR_UNEXP_NET_ERR → const int
An unexpected network error occurred.
ERROR_WRITE_FAULT → const int
The system cannot write to the specified device.
ERROR_WRITE_PROTECT → const int
The media is write protected.
ERROR_WRONG_DISK → const int
The wrong diskette is in the drive.
ES_AUTOHSCROLL → const int
Automatically scrolls text to the right by 10 characters when the user types a character at the end of the line. When the user presses the ENTER key, the control scrolls all text back to position zero.
ES_AUTOVSCROLL → const int
Automatically scrolls text up one page when the user presses the ENTER key on the last line.
ES_AWAYMODE_REQUIRED → const int
Enables away mode. This value must be specified with ES_CONTINUOUS.
ES_CENTER → const int
Centers text in a single-line or multiline edit control.
ES_CONTINUOUS → const int
Informs the system that the state being set should remain in effect until the next call that uses ES_CONTINUOUS and one of the other state flags is cleared.
ES_DISPLAY_REQUIRED → const int
Forces the display to be on by resetting the display idle timer.
ES_LEFT → const int
Aligns text with the left margin.
ES_LOWERCASE → const int
Converts all characters to lowercase as they are typed into the edit control.
ES_MULTILINE → const int
Designates a multiline edit control. The default is single-line edit control.
ES_NOHIDESEL → const int
Negates the default behavior for an edit control. The default behavior hides the selection when the control loses the input focus and inverts the selection when the control receives the input focus. If you specify ES_NOHIDESEL, the selected text is inverted, even if the control does not have the focus.
ES_NUMBER → const int
Allows only digits to be entered into the edit control. Note that, even with this set, it is still possible to paste non-digits into the edit control.
ES_OEMCONVERT → const int
Converts text entered in the edit control. The text is converted from the Windows character set to the OEM character set and then back to the Windows character set. This ensures proper character conversion when the application calls the CharToOem function to convert a Windows string in the edit control to OEM characters. This style is most useful for edit controls that contain file names that will be used on file systems that do not support Unicode.
ES_PASSWORD → const int
Displays an asterisk (*) for each character typed into the edit control. This style is valid only for single-line edit controls.
ES_READONLY → const int
Prevents the user from typing or editing text in the edit control.
ES_RIGHT → const int
Right-aligns text in a single-line or multiline edit control.
ES_SYSTEM_REQUIRED → const int
Forces the system to be in the working state by resetting the system idle timer.
ES_UPPERCASE → const int
Converts all characters to uppercase as they are typed into the edit control.
ES_USER_PRESENT → const int
This value is not supported. If ES_USER_PRESENT is combined with other esFlags values, the call will fail and none of the specified states will be set.
ES_WANTRETURN → const int
Specifies that a carriage return be inserted when the user presses the ENTER key while entering text into a multiline edit control in a dialog box. If you do not specify this style, pressing the ENTER key has the same effect as pressing the dialog box's default push button. This style has no effect on a single-line edit control.
EVENPARITY → const int
Even parity.
FACILITY_CERT → const int
The source of the error code is a certificate client or server
FACILITY_CONTROL → const int
The source of the error code is the control mechanism.
FACILITY_DISPATCH → const int
For late-binding IDispatch interface errors.
FACILITY_INTERNET → const int
The source of the error code is Wininet related.
FACILITY_ITF → const int
For most status codes returned from interface methods. The actual meaning of the error is defined by the interface. That is, two HRESULTs with exactly the same 32-bit value returned from two different interfaces might have different meanings.
FACILITY_NULL → const int
For broadly applicable common status codes such as S_OK.
FACILITY_RPC → const int
For status codes returned from remote procedure calls.
FACILITY_SECURITY → const int
The source of the error code is the Security API layer.
FACILITY_SSPI → const int
The source of the error code is the Security API layer.
FACILITY_STORAGE → const int
For status codes returned from IStorage or IStream method calls relating to structured storage. Status codes whose code (lower 16 bits) value is in the range of MS-DOS error codes (that is, less than 256) have the same meaning as the corresponding MS-DOS error.
FACILITY_WIN32 → const int
Used to provide a means of handling error codes from functions in the Windows API as an HRESULT. Error codes in 16-bit OLE that duplicated system error codes have also been changed to FACILITY_WIN32.
FACILITY_WINDOWS → const int
Used for additional error codes from Microsoft-defined interfaces.
FALSE → const int
Boolean false value returned from the Win32 API
FILE_CASE_PRESERVED_NAMES → const int
The file system supports preserved case of file names when it places a name on disk.
The file system supports case-sensitive file names.
FILE_DAX_VOLUME → const int
The specified volume is a direct access (DAX) volume.
FILE_FILE_COMPRESSION → const int
The file system supports file-based compression.
FILE_FLAG_BACKUP_SEMANTICS → const int
The file is being opened or created for a backup or restore operation. The system ensures that the calling process overrides file security checks when the process has SE_BACKUP_NAME and SE_RESTORE_NAME privileges.
FILE_FLAG_DELETE_ON_CLOSE → const int
The file is to be deleted immediately after all of its handles are closed, which includes the specified handle and any other open or duplicated handles.
FILE_FLAG_FIRST_PIPE_INSTANCE → const int
If you attempt to create multiple instances of a pipe with this flag, creation of the first instance succeeds, but creation of the next instance fails with ERROR_ACCESS_DENIED.
FILE_FLAG_NO_BUFFERING → const int
The file or device is being opened with no system caching for data reads and writes. This flag does not affect hard disk caching or memory mapped files
FILE_FLAG_OPEN_NO_RECALL → const int
The file data is requested, but it should continue to be located in remote storage. It should not be transported back to local storage. This flag is for use by remote storage systems.
FILE_FLAG_OPEN_REPARSE_POINT → const int
Normal reparse point processing will not occur; CreateFile will attempt to open the reparse point. When a file is opened, a file handle is returned, whether or not the filter that controls the reparse point is operational.
FILE_FLAG_OVERLAPPED → const int
The file or device is being opened or created for asynchronous I/O. When subsequent I/O operations are completed on this handle, the event specified in the OVERLAPPED structure will be set to the signaled state. If this flag is specified, the file can be used for simultaneous read and write operations. If this flag is not specified, then I/O operations are serialized, even if the calls to the read and write functions specify an OVERLAPPED structure.
FILE_FLAG_POSIX_SEMANTICS → const int
Access will occur according to POSIX rules. This includes allowing multiple files with names, differing only in case, for file systems that support that naming.
FILE_FLAG_RANDOM_ACCESS → const int
Access is intended to be random. The system can use this as a hint to optimize file caching.
FILE_FLAG_SEQUENTIAL_SCAN → const int
Access is intended to be sequential from beginning to end. The system can use this as a hint to optimize file caching.
FILE_FLAG_SESSION_AWARE → const int
The file or device is being opened with session awareness. If this flag is not specified, then per-session devices (such as a device using RemoteFX USB Redirection) cannot be opened by processes running in session 0. This flag has no effect for callers not in session 0. This flag is supported only on server editions of Windows.
FILE_FLAG_WRITE_THROUGH → const int
Write operations will not go through any intermediate cache, they will go directly to disk.
FILE_NAMED_STREAMS → const int
The file system supports named data streams for a file.
FILE_PERSISTENT_ACLS → const int
The file system preserves and enforces access control lists (ACL). For example, the NTFS file system preserves and enforces ACLs, and the FAT file system does not.
FILE_READ_ONLY_VOLUME → const int
The specified volume is read-only.
FILE_RETURNS_CLEANUP_RESULT_INFO → const int
On a successful cleanup operation, the file system returns information that describes additional actions taken during cleanup, such as deleting the file. File system filters can examine this information in their post-cleanup callback.
FILE_SEQUENTIAL_WRITE_ONCE → const int
The specified volume can be written to one time only. The write must be performed in sequential order.
FILE_SUPPORTS_BLOCK_REFCOUNTING → const int
The file system supports block cloning, that is, sharing logical clusters between files on the same volume. The file system reallocates on writes to shared clusters.
FILE_SUPPORTS_ENCRYPTION → const int
The file system supports the Encrypted File System (EFS).
FILE_SUPPORTS_EXTENDED_ATTRIBUTES → const int
The specified volume supports extended attributes. An extended attribute is a piece of application-specific metadata that an application can associate with a file and is not part of the file's data.
FILE_SUPPORTS_GHOSTING → const int
The file system supports ghosting.
The file system supports direct links to other devices and partitions.
FILE_SUPPORTS_INTEGRITY_STREAMS → const int
The file system supports integrity streams.
FILE_SUPPORTS_OBJECT_IDS → const int
The specified volume supports object identifiers.
FILE_SUPPORTS_OPEN_BY_FILE_ID → const int
The file system supports open by FileID.
The file system supports POSIX-style delete and rename operations.
FILE_SUPPORTS_REMOTE_STORAGE → const int
The file system supports remote storage.
FILE_SUPPORTS_REPARSE_POINTS → const int
The file system supports reparse points.
FILE_SUPPORTS_SPARSE_FILES → const int
The file system supports sparse files.
FILE_SUPPORTS_SPARSE_VDL → const int
The file system tracks whether each cluster of a file contains valid data (either from explicit file writes or automatic zeros) or invalid data (has not yet been written to or zeroed). File systems that use sparse valid data length (VDL) do not store a valid data length and do not require that valid data be contiguous within a file.
FILE_SUPPORTS_TRANSACTIONS → const int
The file system supports transaction processing.
FILE_SUPPORTS_USN_JOURNAL → const int
The specified volume supports update sequence number (USN) journals.
FILE_UNICODE_ON_DISK → const int
The file system supports Unicode in file names as they appear on disk.
FILE_VOLUME_IS_COMPRESSED → const int
The file system is a compressed volume. This does not affect how data is transferred over the network.
FILE_VOLUME_QUOTAS → const int
The file system supports disk quotas.
FO_COPY → const int
Copy the files specified in the pFrom member to the location specified in the pTo member.
FO_DELETE → const int
Delete the files specified in pFrom.
FO_MOVE → const int
Move the files specified in pFrom to the location specified in pTo.
FO_RENAME → const int
Rename the file specified in pFrom. You cannot use this flag to rename multiple files with a single function call. Use FO_MOVE instead.
FOF_ALLOWUNDO → const int
Preserve undo information, if possible.
FOF_FILESONLY → const int
Perform the operation only on files (not on folders) if a wildcard file name (.) is specified.
FOF_MULTIDESTFILES → const int
The pTo member specifies multiple destination files (one for each source file in pFrom) rather than one directory where all source files are to be deposited.
FOF_NO_CONNECTED_ELEMENTS → const int
Do not move connected files as a group. Only move the specified files.
FOF_NO_UI → const int
Perform the operation silently, presenting no UI to the user.
FOF_NOCONFIRMATION → const int
Respond with Yes to All for any dialog box that is displayed.
FOF_NOCONFIRMMKDIR → const int
Do not ask the user to confirm the creation of a new directory if the operation requires one to be created.
FOF_NOCOPYSECURITYATTRIBS → const int
Do not copy the security attributes of the file. The destination file receives the security attributes of its new folder.
FOF_NOERRORUI → const int
Do not display a dialog to the user if an error occurs.
FOF_NORECURSION → const int
Only perform the operation in the local directory. Do not operate recursively into subdirectories, which is the default behavior.
FOF_RENAMEONCOLLISION → const int
Give the file being operated on a new name in a move, copy, or rename operation if a file with the target name already exists at the destination.
FOF_SILENT → const int
Do not display a progress dialog box.
FOF_SIMPLEPROGRESS → const int
Display a progress dialog box but do not show individual file names as they are operated on.
FOF_WANTMAPPINGHANDLE → const int
If FOF_RENAMEONCOLLISION is specified and any files were renamed, assign a name mapping object that contains their old and new names to the hNameMappings member. This object must be freed using SHFreeNameMappings when it is no longer needed.
FOF_WANTNUKEWARNING → const int
Send a warning if a file is being permanently destroyed during a delete operation rather than recycled. This flag partially overrides FOF_NOCONFIRMATION.
FORMAT_MESSAGE_ARGUMENT_ARRAY → const int
The Arguments parameter is not a va_list structure, but is a pointer to an array of values that represent the arguments.
FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_HMODULE → const int
The lpSource parameter is a module handle containing the message-table resource(s) to search. If this lpSource handle is NULL, the current process's application image file will be searched. This flag cannot be used with FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_STRING.
FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_STRING → const int
The lpSource parameter is a pointer to a null-terminated string that contains a message definition. The message definition may contain insert sequences, just as the message text in a message table resource may. This flag cannot be used with FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_HMODULE or FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM.
FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM → const int
The function should search the system message-table resource(s) for the requested message. If this flag is specified with FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_HMODULE, the function searches the system message table if the message is not found in the module specified by lpSource. This flag cannot be used with FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_STRING.
FORMAT_MESSAGE_IGNORE_INSERTS → const int
Insert sequences in the message definition are to be ignored and passed through to the output buffer unchanged. This flag is useful for fetching a message for later formatting. If this flag is set, the Arguments parameter is ignored.
FORMAT_MESSAGE_MAX_WIDTH_MASK → const int
The function ignores regular line breaks in the message definition text. The function stores hard-coded line breaks in the message definition text into the output buffer. The function generates no new line breaks.
FR_DIALOGTERM → const int
If set in a FINDMSGSTRING message, indicates that the dialog box is closing. When you receive a message with this flag set, the dialog box handle returned by the FindText or ReplaceText function is no longer valid.
FR_DOWN → const int
If set, the Down button of the direction radio buttons in a Find dialog box is selected indicating that you should search from the current location to the end of the document. If not set, the Up button is selected so you should search to the beginning of the document. You can set this flag to initialize the dialog box. If set in a FINDMSGSTRING message, indicates the user's selection.
FR_ENABLEHOOK → const int
Enables the hook function specified in the lpfnHook member. This flag is used only to initialize the dialog box.
FR_ENABLETEMPLATE → const int
Indicates that the hInstance and lpTemplateName members specify a dialog box template to use in place of the default template. This flag is used only to initialize the dialog box.
FR_ENABLETEMPLATEHANDLE → const int
Indicates that the hInstance member identifies a data block that contains a preloaded dialog box template. The system ignores the lpTemplateName member if this flag is specified.
FR_FINDNEXT → const int
If set in a FINDMSGSTRING message, indicates that the user clicked the Find Next button in a Find or Replace dialog box. The lpstrFindWhat member specifies the string to search for.
FR_HIDEMATCHCASE → const int
If set when initializing a Find or Replace dialog box, hides the Match Case check box.
FR_HIDEUPDOWN → const int
If set when initializing a Find dialog box, hides the search direction radio buttons.
FR_HIDEWHOLEWORD → const int
If set when initializing a Find or Replace dialog box, hides the Match Whole Word Only check box.
FR_MATCHALEFHAMZA → const int
If set, the search differentiates between Arabic and Hebrew alefs with different accents. If not set, all alefs are matched by the alef character alone.
FR_MATCHCASE → const int
If set, the Match Case check box is selected indicating that the search should be case-sensitive. If not set, the check box is unselected so the search should be case-insensitive. You can set this flag to initialize the dialog box. If set in a FINDMSGSTRING message, indicates the user's selection.
FR_MATCHDIAC → const int
If set, the search operation considers Arabic and Hebrew diacritical marks. If not set, diacritical marks are ignored.
FR_MATCHKASHIDA → const int
If set, the search operation considers Arabic and Hebrew kashidas. If not set, kashidas are ignored.
FR_NOMATCHCASE → const int
If set when initializing a Find or Replace dialog box, disables the Match Case check box.
FR_NOUPDOWN → const int
If set when initializing a Find dialog box, disables the search direction radio buttons.
FR_NOWHOLEWORD → const int
If set when initializing a Find or Replace dialog box, disables the Whole Word check box.
FR_REPLACE → const int
If set in a FINDMSGSTRING message, indicates that the user clicked the Replace button in a Replace dialog box. The lpstrFindWhat member specifies the string to be replaced and the lpstrReplaceWith member specifies the replacement string.
FR_REPLACEALL → const int
If set in a FINDMSGSTRING message, indicates that the user clicked the Replace All button in a Replace dialog box. The lpstrFindWhat member specifies the string to be replaced and the lpstrReplaceWith member specifies the replacement string.
FR_SHOWHELP → const int
Causes the dialog box to display the Help button. The hwndOwner member must specify the window to receive the HELPMSGSTRING registered messages that the dialog box sends when the user clicks the Help button.
FR_WHOLEWORD → const int
If set, the Match Whole Word Only check box is selected indicating that you should search only for whole words that match the search string. If not set, the check box is unselected so you should also search for word fragments that match the search string. You can set this flag to initialize the dialog box. If set in a FINDMSGSTRING message, indicates the user's selection.
GCL_CBCLSEXTRA → const int
Sets the size, in bytes, of the extra memory associated with the class. Setting this value does not change the number of extra bytes already allocated.
GCL_CBWNDEXTRA → const int
Sets the size, in bytes, of the extra window memory associated with each window in the class. Setting this value does not change the number of extra bytes already allocated.
GCL_HBRBACKGROUND → const int
Replaces a handle to the background brush associated with the class.
GCL_HCURSOR → const int
Replaces a handle to the cursor associated with the class.
GCL_HICON → const int
Replaces a handle to the icon associated with the class.
GCL_HMODULE → const int
Replaces a handle to the module that registered the class.
GCL_MENUNAME → const int
Replaces the address of the menu name string. The string identifies the menu resource associated with the class.
GCL_STYLE → const int
Replaces the window-class style bits.
GCL_WNDPROC → const int
Replaces the address of the window procedure associated with the class.
GCW_ATOM → const int
Retrieves an ATOM value that uniquely identifies the window class.
GENERIC_ALL → const int
Specifies all defined access control on the object.
GENERIC_EXECUTE → const int
Specifies access control suitable for executing an action on the object.
GENERIC_READ → const int
Specifies access control suitable for reading the object.
GENERIC_WRITE → const int
Specifies access control suitable for updating attributes on the object.
GHND → const int
Combines GMEM_MOVABLE and GMEM_ZEROINIT.
GMEM_FIXED → const int
Allocates fixed memory. The return value is a pointer.
GMEM_MOVABLE → const int
Allocates movable memory. Memory blocks are never moved in physical memory, but they can be moved within the default heap. The return value is a handle to the memory object. To translate the handle into a pointer, use the GlobalLock function.
GMEM_ZEROINIT → const int
Initializes memory contents to zero.
GPTR → const int
Combines GMEM_FIXED and GMEM_ZEROINIT.
GUID_BLUETOOTH_GATT_SERVICE_DEVICE_INTERFACE → const String
Bluetooth LE Service device interface GUID
GUID_BLUETOOTHLE_DEVICE_INTERFACE → const String
Bluetooth LE device interface GUID
GUID_CLASS_MONITOR → const String
GW_CHILD → const int
The retrieved handle identifies the child window at the top of the Z order, if the specified window is a parent window; otherwise, the retrieved handle is NULL. The function examines only child windows of the specified window. It does not examine descendant windows.
GW_ENABLEDPOPUP → const int
The retrieved handle identifies the enabled popup window owned by the specified window (the search uses the first such window found using GW_HWNDNEXT); otherwise, if there are no enabled popup windows, the retrieved handle is that of the specified window.
GW_HWNDFIRST → const int
The retrieved handle identifies the window of the same type that is highest in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies a topmost window. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies a top-level window. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies a sibling window.
GW_HWNDLAST → const int
The retrieved handle identifies the window of the same type that is lowest in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies a topmost window. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies a top-level window. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies a sibling window.
GW_HWNDNEXT → const int
The retrieved handle identifies the window below the specified window in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies a topmost window. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies a top-level window. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies a sibling window.
GW_HWNDPREV → const int
The retrieved handle identifies the window above the specified window in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies a topmost window. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies a top-level window. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies a sibling window.
GW_OWNER → const int
The retrieved handle identifies the specified window's owner window, if any. For more information, see Owned Windows.
GWL_EXSTYLE → const int
Gets/sets the extended window styles.
GWL_HINSTANCE → const int
Gets/sets a new application instance handle.
GWL_ID → const int
Gets/sets a new identifier of the child window. The window cannot be a top-level window.
GWL_STYLE → const int
Gets/sets a new window style.
GWL_USERDATA → const int
Gets/sets the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero.
GWL_WNDPROC → const int
Sets a new address for the window procedure. You cannot change this attribute if the window does not belong to the same process as the calling thread.
GWLP_HINSTANCE → const int
Sets a new application instance handle.
GWLP_HWNDPARENT → const int
Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one.
GWLP_ID → const int
Sets a new identifier of the child window. The window cannot be a top-level window.
GWLP_USERDATA → const int
Sets the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero.
GWLP_WNDPROC → const int
Sets a new address for the window procedure.
HALFTONE → const int
Maps pixels from the source rectangle into blocks of pixels in the destination rectangle. The average color over the destination block of pixels approximates the color of the source pixels.
HANDLE_FLAG_INHERIT → const int
If this flag is set, a child process created with the bInheritHandles parameter of CreateProcess set to TRUE will inherit the object handle.
HANDLE_FLAG_PROTECT_FROM_CLOSE → const int
If this flag is set, calling the CloseHandle function will not close the object handle.
HEAP_CREATE_ENABLE_EXECUTE → const int
All memory blocks that are allocated from this heap allow code execution, if the hardware enforces data execution prevention.
HEAP_GENERATE_EXCEPTIONS → const int
The system will raise an exception to indicate a function failure, such as an out-of-memory condition, instead of returning NULL.
HEAP_NO_SERIALIZE → const int
Serialized access will not be used for this allocation.
HEAP_REALLOC_IN_PLACE_ONLY → const int
There can be no movement when reallocating a memory block.
HEAP_ZERO_MEMORY → const int
The allocated memory will be initialized to zero. Otherwise, the memory is not initialized to zero.
HORZRES → const int
Width, in pixels, of the screen; or for printers, the width, in pixels, of the printable area of the page.
HORZSIZE → const int
Width, in millimeters, of the physical screen.
HS_BDIAGONAL → const int
45-degree upward left-to-right hatch
HS_CROSS → const int
Horizontal and vertical crosshatch
HS_DIAGCROSS → const int
45-degree crosshatch
HS_FDIAGONAL → const int
45-degree downward left-to-right hatch
HS_HORIZONTAL → const int
Horizontal hatch
HS_VERTICAL → const int
Vertical hatch
HTBORDER → const int
In the border of a window that does not have a sizing border.
HTBOTTOM → const int
In the lower-horizontal border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window vertically).
HTBOTTOMLEFT → const int
In the lower-left corner of a border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window diagonally).
HTBOTTOMRIGHT → const int
In the lower-right corner of a border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window diagonally).
HTCAPTION → const int
In a title bar.
HTCLIENT → const int
In a client area.
HTCLOSE → const int
In a Close button.
HTERROR → const int
On the screen background or on a dividing line between windows (same as HTNOWHERE, except that the DefWindowProc function produces a system beep to indicate an error).
HTGROWBOX → const int
In a size box (same as HTSIZE).
HTHELP → const int
In a Help button.
HTHSCROLL → const int
In a horizontal scroll bar.
HTLEFT → const int
In the left border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window horizontally).
HTMAXBUTTON → const int
In a Maximize button.
HTMENU → const int
In a menu.
HTMINBUTTON → const int
In a Minimize button.
HTNOWHERE → const int
On the screen background or on a dividing line between windows.
HTREDUCE → const int
In a Minimize button.
HTRIGHT → const int
In the right border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window horizontally).
HTSIZE → const int
In a size box (same as HTGROWBOX).
HTSYSMENU → const int
In a window menu or in a Close button in a child window.
HTTOP → const int
In the upper-horizontal border of a window.
HTTOPLEFT → const int
In the upper-left corner of a window border.
HTTOPRIGHT → const int
In the upper-right corner of a window border.
HTTPREQUEST_PROXYSETTING_DEFAULT → const int
Default proxy setting. Equivalent to HTTPREQUEST_PROXYSETTING_PRECONFIG.
HTTPREQUEST_PROXYSETTING_DIRECT → const int
Indicates that all HTTP and HTTPS servers should be accessed directly.
HTTPREQUEST_PROXYSETTING_PRECONFIG → const int
Indicates that the proxy settings should be obtained from the registry.
HTTPREQUEST_PROXYSETTING_PROXY → const int
When HTTPREQUEST_PROXYSETTING_PROXY is specified, varProxyServer should be set to a proxy server string and varBypassList should be set to a domain bypass list string.
HTTPREQUEST_SETCREDENTIALS_FOR_PROXY → const int
Credentials are passed to a proxy.
HTTPREQUEST_SETCREDENTIALS_FOR_SERVER → const int
Credentials are passed to a server.
HTTRANSPARENT → const int
In a window currently covered by another window in the same thread (the message will be sent to underlying windows in the same thread until one of them returns a code that is not HTTRANSPARENT).
HTVSCROLL → const int
In the vertical scroll bar.
HTZOOM → const int
In a Maximize button.
HWND_BOTTOM → const int
Places the window at the bottom of the Z order. If the hWnd parameter identifies a topmost window, the window loses its topmost status and is placed at the bottom of all other windows.
HWND_BROADCAST → const int
Special HWND value for use with PostMessage() and SendMessage(). The message is sent to all top-level windows in the system, including disabled or invisible unowned windows, overlapped windows, and pop-up windows; but the message is not sent to child windows.
HWND_MESSAGE → const int
A message-only window enables you to send and receive messages. It is not visible, has no z-order, cannot be enumerated, and does not receive broadcast messages. The window simply dispatches messages.
HWND_NOTOPMOST → const int
Places the window above all non-topmost windows (that is, behind all topmost windows). This flag has no effect if the window is already a non-topmost window.
HWND_TOP → const int
Places the window at the top of the Z order.
HWND_TOPMOST → const int
Places the window above all non-topmost windows. The window maintains its topmost position even when it is deactivated.
ICON_BIG → const int
Retrieve the large icon for the window.
ICON_SMALL → const int
Retrieve the small icon for the window.
ICON_SMALL2 → const int
Retrieves the small icon provided by the application. If the application does not provide one, the system uses the system-generated icon for that window.
IMAGE_BITMAP → const int
Loads a bitmap.
IMAGE_CURSOR → const int
Loads a cursor.
IMAGE_ENHMETAFILE → const int
Loads an enhanced metafile.
IMAGE_ICON → const int
Loads an icon.
INFINITE → const int
Return only when the object is signaled.
KEY_ALL_ACCESS → const int
Combines the STANDARD_RIGHTS_REQUIRED, KEY_QUERY_VALUE, KEY_SET_VALUE, KEY_CREATE_SUB_KEY, KEY_ENUMERATE_SUB_KEYS, KEY_NOTIFY, and KEY_CREATE_LINK access rights.
Reserved for system use.
KEY_CREATE_SUB_KEY → const int
Required to create a subkey of a registry key.
KEY_ENUMERATE_SUB_KEYS → const int
Required to enumerate the subkeys of a registry key.
KEY_EXECUTE → const int
Equivalent to KEY_READ.
KEY_NOTIFY → const int
Required to request change notifications for a registry key or for subkeys of a registry key.
KEY_QUERY_VALUE → const int
Required to query the values of a registry key.
KEY_READ → const int
Combines the STANDARD_RIGHTS_READ, KEY_QUERY_VALUE, KEY_ENUMERATE_SUB_KEYS, and KEY_NOTIFY values.
KEY_SET_VALUE → const int
Required to create, delete, or set a registry value.
KEY_WOW64_32KEY → const int
Indicates that an application on 64-bit Windows should operate on the 32-bit registry view. This flag is ignored by 32-bit Windows.
KEY_WOW64_64KEY → const int
Indicates that an application on 64-bit Windows should operate on the 64-bit registry view. This flag is ignored by 32-bit Windows.
KEY_WRITE → const int
Combines the STANDARD_RIGHTS_WRITE, KEY_SET_VALUE, and KEY_CREATE_SUB_KEY access rights.
KF_ALTDOWN → const int
Manipulates the context code flag.
KF_DLGMODE → const int
Manipulates the dialog mode flag, which indicates whether a dialog box is active.
KF_EXTENDED → const int
Manipulates the extended key flag.
KF_MENUMODE → const int
Manipulates the menu mode flag, which indicates whether a menu is active.
KF_REPEAT → const int
Manipulates the previous key state flag.
KF_UP → const int
Manipulates the transition state flag.
LINECAPS → const int
Value that indicates the line capabilities of the device.
LLKHF_ALTDOWN → const int
Test the context code.
LLKHF_EXTENDED → const int
Test the extended-key flag.
LLKHF_INJECTED → const int
Test the event-injected (from any process) flag.
LLKHF_LOWER_IL_INJECTED → const int
Test the event-injected (from a process running at lower integrity level) flag.
LLKHF_UP → const int
Test the transition-state flag.
LLMHF_INJECTED → const int
Test the event-injected (from any process) flag.
LLMHF_LOWER_IL_INJECTED → const int
Test the event-injected (from a process running at lower integrity level) flag.
LOAD_IGNORE_CODE_AUTHZ_LEVEL → const int
If this value is used, the system does not check AppLocker rules or apply Software Restriction Policies for the DLL. This action applies only to the DLL being loaded and not to its dependencies. This value is recommended for use in setup programs that must run extracted DLLs during installation.
LOAD_LIBRARY_AS_DATAFILE → const int
If this value is used, the system maps the file into the calling process's virtual address space as if it were a data file. Nothing is done to execute or prepare to execute the mapped file. Therefore, you cannot call functions like GetModuleFileName, GetModuleHandle or GetProcAddress with this DLL. Using this value causes writes to read-only memory to raise an access violation. Use this flag when you want to load a DLL only to extract messages or resources from it.
LOAD_LIBRARY_AS_DATAFILE_EXCLUSIVE → const int
Similar to LOAD_LIBRARY_AS_DATAFILE, except that the DLL file is opened with exclusive write access for the calling process. Other processes cannot open the DLL file for write access while it is in use. However, the DLL can still be opened by other processes.
LOAD_LIBRARY_AS_IMAGE_RESOURCE → const int
If this value is used, the system maps the file into the process's virtual address space as an image file. However, the loader does not load the static imports or perform the other usual initialization steps. Use this flag when you want to load a DLL only to extract messages or resources from it.
LOAD_LIBRARY_REQUIRE_SIGNED_TARGET → const int
Specifies that the digital signature of the binary image must be checked at load time.
LOAD_LIBRARY_SAFE_CURRENT_DIRS → const int
If this value is used, loading a DLL for execution from the current directory is only allowed if it is under a directory in the Safe load list.
LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_APPLICATION_DIR → const int
If this value is used, the application's installation directory is searched for the DLL and its dependencies. Directories in the standard search path are not searched. This value cannot be combined with LOAD_WITH_ALTERED_SEARCH_PATH.
LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_DEFAULT_DIRS → const int
This value is a combination of LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_APPLICATION_DIR, LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_SYSTEM32, and LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_USER_DIRS. Directories in the standard search path are not searched. This value cannot be combined with LOAD_WITH_ALTERED_SEARCH_PATH.
LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_DLL_LOAD_DIR → const int
If this value is used, the directory that contains the DLL is temporarily added to the beginning of the list of directories that are searched for the DLL's dependencies. Directories in the standard search path are not searched.
LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_SYSTEM32 → const int
If this value is used, %windows%\system32 is searched for the DLL and its dependencies. Directories in the standard search path are not searched. This value cannot be combined with LOAD_WITH_ALTERED_SEARCH_PATH.
LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH_USER_DIRS → const int
If this value is used, directories added using the AddDllDirectory or the SetDllDirectory function are searched for the DLL and its dependencies. If more than one directory has been added, the order in which the directories are searched is unspecified. Directories in the standard search path are not searched. This value cannot be combined with LOAD_WITH_ALTERED_SEARCH_PATH.
LOAD_WITH_ALTERED_SEARCH_PATH → const int
If this value is used and lpFileName specifies an absolute path, the system uses the alternate file search strategy discussed in the Remarks section to find associated executable modules that the specified module causes to be loaded. If this value is used and lpFileName specifies a relative path, the behavior is undefined.
LOCALE_SYSTEM_DEFAULT → const int
The default locale for the operating system.
LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT → const int
The default locale for the user or process.
LOGPIXELSX → const int
Number of pixels per logical inch along the screen width. In a system with multiple display monitors, this value is the same for all monitors.
LOGPIXELSY → const int
Number of pixels per logical inch along the screen height. In a system with multiple display monitors, this value is the same for all monitors.
LR_COPYDELETEORG → const int
Deletes the original image after creating the copy.
LR_COPYFROMRESOURCE → const int
Tries to reload an icon or cursor resource from the original resource file rather than simply copying the current image. This is useful for creating a different-sized copy when the resource file contains multiple sizes of the resource. Without this flag, CopyImage stretches the original image to the new size. If this flag is set, CopyImage uses the size in the resource file closest to the desired size.
LR_COPYRETURNORG → const int
Returns the original hImage if it satisfies the criteria for the copy—that is, correct dimensions and color depth—in which case the LR_COPYDELETEORG flag is ignored. If this flag is not specified, a new object is always created.
LR_CREATEDIBSECTION → const int
Causes the function to return a DIB section bitmap rather than a compatible bitmap. This flag is useful for loading a bitmap without mapping it to the colors of the display device.
LR_DEFAULTCOLOR → const int
The default flag; it does nothing.
LR_DEFAULTSIZE → const int
Uses the width or height specified by the system metric values for cursors or icons, if the cxDesired or cyDesired values are set to zero.
LR_LOADFROMFILE → const int
Loads the stand-alone image from the file specified by lpszName (icon, cursor, or bitmap file).
LR_LOADMAP3DCOLORS → const int
Searches the color table for the image and replaces shades of gray with the corresponding 3-D color.
LR_LOADTRANSPARENT → const int
Retrieves the color value of the first pixel in the image and replaces the corresponding entry in the color table with the default window color (COLOR_WINDOW). All pixels in the image that use that entry become the default window color. This value applies only to images that have corresponding color tables.
LR_MONOCHROME → const int
Loads the image in black and white.
LR_SHARED → const int
Shares the image handle if the image is loaded multiple times. If LR_SHARED is not set, a second call to LoadImage for the same resource will load the image again and return a different handle.
LR_VGACOLOR → const int
Uses true VGA colors.
LWA_ALPHA → const int
Use bAlpha to determine the opacity of the layered window.
LWA_COLORKEY → const int
Use crKey as the transparency color.
MARKPARITY → const int
Mark parity.
MAX_PATH → const int
MAXIMUM_ALLOWED → const int
Indicates that the caller is requesting the most access possible to the object.
MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE → const int
The message box contains three push buttons: Abort, Retry, and Ignore.
MB_APPLMODAL → const int
The user must respond to the message box before continuing work in the window identified by the hWnd parameter. However, the user can move to the windows of other threads and work in those windows.
MB_CANCELTRYCONTINUE → const int
The message box contains three push buttons: Cancel, Try Again, Continue. Use this message box type instead of MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE.
MB_DEFAULT_DESKTOP_ONLY → const int
Same as desktop of the interactive window station.
MB_DEFBUTTON1 → const int
The first button is the default button.
MB_DEFBUTTON2 → const int
The second button is the default button.
MB_DEFBUTTON3 → const int
The third button is the default button.
MB_DEFBUTTON4 → const int
The fourth button is the default button.
MB_HELP → const int
Adds a Help button to the message box. When the user clicks the Help button or presses F1, the system sends a WM_HELP message to the owner.
MB_ICONASTERISK → const int
An icon consisting of a lowercase letter i in a circle appears in the message box.
MB_ICONERROR → const int
A stop-sign icon appears in the message box.
MB_ICONEXCLAMATION → const int
An exclamation-point icon appears in the message box.
MB_ICONHAND → const int
A stop-sign icon appears in the message box.
MB_ICONINFORMATION → const int
An icon consisting of a lowercase letter i in a circle appears in the message box.
MB_ICONQUESTION → const int
A question-mark icon appears in the message box.
MB_ICONSTOP → const int
A stop-sign icon appears in the message box.
MB_ICONWARNING → const int
An exclamation-point icon appears in the message box.
MB_OK → const int
The message box contains one push button: OK. This is the default.
MB_OKCANCEL → const int
The message box contains two push buttons: OK and Cancel.
MB_RETRYCANCEL → const int
The message box contains two push buttons: Retry and Cancel.
MB_RIGHT → const int
The text is right-justified.
MB_RTLREADING → const int
Displays message and caption text using right-to-left reading order on Hebrew and Arabic systems.
MB_SERVICE_NOTIFICATION → const int
The caller is a service notifying the user of an event. The function displays a message box on the current active desktop, even if there is no user logged on to the computer.
MB_SETFOREGROUND → const int
The message box becomes the foreground window. Internally, the system calls the SetForegroundWindow function for the message box.
MB_SYSTEMMODAL → const int
Same as MB_APPLMODAL except that the message box has the WS_EX_TOPMOST style.
MB_TASKMODAL → const int
Same as MB_APPLMODAL except that all the top-level windows belonging to the current thread are disabled if the hWnd parameter is NULL.
MB_TOPMOST → const int
The message box is created with the WS_EX_TOPMOST window style.
MB_YESNO → const int
The message box contains two push buttons: Yes and No.
MB_YESNOCANCEL → const int
The message box contains three push buttons: Yes, No, and Cancel.
MEM_COALESCE_PLACEHOLDERS → const int
To coalesce two adjacent placeholders, specify MEM_RELEASE | MEM_COALESCE_PLACEHOLDERS. When you coalesce placeholders, lpAddress and dwSize must exactly match those of the placeholder.
MEM_COMMIT → const int
Allocates memory charges (from the overall size of memory and the paging files on disk) for the specified reserved memory pages. The function also guarantees that when the caller later initially accesses the memory, the contents will be zero. Actual physical pages are not allocated unless/until the virtual addresses are actually accessed.
MEM_DECOMMIT → const int
Decommits the specified region of committed pages. After the operation, the pages are in the reserved state.
MEM_FREE → const int
Indicates free pages not accessible to the calling process and available to be allocated.
MEM_IMAGE → const int
Indicates that the memory pages within the region are mapped into the view of an image section.
MEM_LARGE_PAGES → const int
Allocates memory using large page support.
MEM_MAPPED → const int
Indicates that the memory pages within the region are mapped into the view of a section.
MEM_PHYSICAL → const int
Reserves an address range that can be used to map Address Windowing Extensions (AWE) pages.
MEM_PRESERVE_PLACEHOLDER → const int
Frees an allocation back to a placeholder (after you've replaced a placeholder with a private allocation using VirtualAlloc2 or Virtual2AllocFromApp).
MEM_PRIVATE → const int
Indicates that the memory pages within the region are private (that is, not shared by other processes).
MEM_RELEASE → const int
Releases the specified region of pages, or placeholder (for a placeholder, the address space is released and available for other allocations). After this operation, the pages are in the free state.
MEM_REPLACE_PLACEHOLDER → const int
Replaces a placeholder with a mapped view. Only data/pf-backed section views are supported (no images, physical memory, etc.). When you replace a placeholder, BaseAddress and ViewSize must exactly match those of the placeholder.
MEM_RESERVE → const int
Reserves a range of the process's virtual address space without allocating any actual physical storage in memory or in the paging file on disk.
MEM_RESERVE_PLACEHOLDER → const int
A placeholder is a type of reserved memory region.
MEM_RESET → const int
Indicates that data in the memory range specified by lpAddress and dwSize is no longer of interest. The pages should not be read from or written to the paging file. However, the memory block will be used again later, so it should not be decommitted. This value cannot be used with any other value.
MEM_RESET_UNDO → const int
MEM_RESET_UNDO should only be called on an address range to which MEM_RESET was successfully applied earlier. It indicates that the data in the specified memory range specified by lpAddress and dwSize is of interest to the caller and attempts to reverse the effects of MEM_RESET. If the function succeeds, that means all data in the specified address range is intact. If the function fails, at least some of the data in the address range has been replaced with zeroes.
MEM_TOP_DOWN → const int
Reserves an address range that can be used to map Address Windowing Extensions (AWE) pages.
MEM_UNMAP_WITH_TRANSIENT_BOOST → const int
Specifies that the priority of the pages being unmapped should be temporarily boosted (with automatic short term decay) because the caller expects that these pages will be accessed again shortly from another thread.
MEM_WRITE_WATCH → const int
Causes the system to track pages that are written to in the allocated region.
MF_BITMAP → const int
Uses a bitmap as the menu item. The lpNewItem parameter contains a handle to the bitmap.
MF_BYCOMMAND → const int
Indicates that flag gives the identifier of the menu item.
MF_BYPOSITION → const int
Indicates that flag gives the zero-based relative position of the menu item.
MF_CHECKED → const int
Places a check mark next to the menu item.
MF_DISABLED → const int
Disables the menu item so that it cannot be selected, but the flag does not gray it.
MF_ENABLED → const int
Enables the menu item so that it can be selected, and restores it from its grayed state.
MF_GRAYED → const int
Disables the menu item and grays it so that it cannot be selected.
MF_HILITE → const int
Highlights the menu item. If this flag is not specified, the highlighting is removed from the item.
MF_MENUBARBREAK → const int
Functions the same as the MF_MENUBREAK flag for a menu bar. For a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu, the new column is separated from the old column by a vertical line.
MF_MENUBREAK → const int
Places the item on a new line (for a menu bar) or in a new column (for a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu) without separating columns.
MF_OWNERDRAW → const int
Specifies that the item is an owner-drawn item. Before the menu is displayed for the first time, the window that owns the menu receives a WM_MEASUREITEM message to retrieve the width and height of the menu item. The WM_DRAWITEM message is then sent to the window procedure of the owner window whenever the appearance of the menu item must be updated.
MF_POPUP → const int
Specifies that the menu item opens a drop-down menu or submenu. The uIDNewItem parameter specifies a handle to the drop-down menu or submenu. This flag is used to add a menu name to a menu bar, or a menu item that opens a submenu to a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu.
MF_SEPARATOR → const int
Draws a horizontal dividing line. This flag is used only in a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu. The line cannot be grayed, disabled, or highlighted. The lpNewItem and uIDNewItem parameters are ignored.
MF_STRING → const int
Specifies that the menu item is a text string; the lpNewItem parameter is a pointer to the string.
MF_UNCHECKED → const int
Does not place a check mark next to the item (default). If the application supplies check-mark bitmaps (see SetMenuItemBitmaps), this flag displays the clear bitmap next to the menu item.
MF_UNHILITE → const int
Removes highlighting from the menu item.
MIM_CLOSE → const int
The MIM_CLOSE message is sent to a MIDI input callback function when a MIDI input device is closed.
MIM_DATA → const int
The MIM_DATA message is sent to a MIDI input callback function when a MIDI message is received by a MIDI input device.
MIM_ERROR → const int
The MIM_ERROR message is sent to a MIDI input callback function when an invalid MIDI message is received.
MIM_LONGDATA → const int
The MIM_LONGDATA message is sent to a MIDI input callback function when a system-exclusive buffer has been filled with data and is being returned to the application.
MIM_LONGERROR → const int
The MIM_LONGERROR message is sent to a MIDI input callback function when an invalid or incomplete MIDI system-exclusive message is received.
MIM_MOREDATA → const int
The MIM_MOREDATA message is sent to a MIDI input callback function when a MIDI message is received by a MIDI input device but the application is not processing MIM_DATA messages fast enough to keep up with the input device driver. The callback function receives this message only when the application specifies MIDI_IO_STATUS in the call to the midiInOpen function.
MIM_OPEN → const int
The MIM_OPEN message is sent to a MIDI input callback function when a MIDI input device is opened.
MM_ANISOTROPIC → const int
Logical units are mapped to arbitrary units with arbitrarily scaled axes. Use the SetWindowExtEx and SetViewportExtEx functions to specify the units, orientation, and scaling.
MM_HIENGLISH → const int
Each logical unit is mapped to 0.001 inch. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up.
MM_HIMETRIC → const int
Each logical unit is mapped to 0.01 millimeter. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up.
MM_ISOTROPIC → const int
Logical units are mapped to arbitrary units with equally scaled axes; that is, one unit along the x-axis is equal to one unit along the y-axis. Use the SetWindowExtEx and SetViewportExtEx functions to specify the units and the orientation of the axes. Graphics device interface (GDI) makes adjustments as necessary to ensure the x and y units remain the same size (When the window extent is set, the viewport will be adjusted to keep the units isotropic).
MM_JOY1BUTTONDOWN → const int
The MM_JOY1BUTTONDOWN message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID1 that a button has been pressed.
MM_JOY1BUTTONUP → const int
The MM_JOY1BUTTONUP message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID1 that a button has been released.
MM_JOY1MOVE → const int
The MM_JOY1MOVE message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID1 that the joystick position has changed.
MM_JOY1ZMOVE → const int
The MM_JOY1ZMOVE message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID1 that the joystick position on the z-axis has changed.
MM_JOY2BUTTONDOWN → const int
The MM_JOY2BUTTONDOWN message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID2 that a button has been pressed.
MM_JOY2BUTTONUP → const int
The MM_JOY2BUTTONUP message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID2 that a button has been released.
MM_JOY2MOVE → const int
The MM_JOY2MOVE message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID2 that the joystick position has changed.
MM_JOY2ZMOVE → const int
The MM_JOY2ZMOVE message notifies the window that has captured joystick JOYSTICKID2 that the joystick position on the z-axis has changed.
MM_LOENGLISH → const int
Each logical unit is mapped to 0.01 inch. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up.
MM_LOMETRIC → const int
Each logical unit is mapped to 0.1 millimeter. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up.
MM_MCINOTIFY → const int
The MM_MCINOTIFY message notifies an application that an MCI device has completed an operation. MCI devices send this message only when the MCI_NOTIFY flag is used.
MM_MCISIGNAL → const int
The MM_MCISIGNAL message is sent to a window to notify an application that an MCI device has reached a position defined in a previous signal ( MCI_SIGNAL) command.
MM_MIM_CLOSE → const int
The MM_MIM_CLOSE message is sent to a window when a MIDI input device is closed.
MM_MIM_DATA → const int
The MM_MIM_DATA message is sent to a window when a complete MIDI message is received by a MIDI input device.
MM_MIM_ERROR → const int
The MM_MIM_ERROR message is sent to a window when an invalid MIDI message is received.
MM_MIM_LONGDATA → const int
The MM_MIM_LONGDATA message is sent to a window when either a complete MIDI system-exclusive message is received or when a buffer has been filled with system-exclusive data.
MM_MIM_LONGERROR → const int
The MM_MIM_LONGERROR message is sent to a window when an invalid or incomplete MIDI system-exclusive message is received.
MM_MIM_MOREDATA → const int
The MM_MIM_MOREDATA message is sent to a callback window when a MIDI message is received by a MIDI input device but the application is not processing MIM_DATA messages fast enough to keep up with the input device driver. The window receives this message only when the application specifies MIDI_IO_STATUS in the call to the midiInOpen function.
MM_MIM_OPEN → const int
The MM_MIM_OPEN message is sent to a window when a MIDI input device is opened.
MM_MIXM_CONTROL_CHANGE → const int
The MM_MIXM_CONTROL_CHANGE message is sent by a mixer device to notify an application that the state of a control associated with an audio line has changed. The application should refresh its display and cached values for the specified control.
MM_MIXM_LINE_CHANGE → const int
The MM_MIXM_LINE_CHANGE message is sent by a mixer device to notify an application that the state of an audio line on the specified device has changed. The application should refresh its display and cached values for the specified audio line.
MM_MOM_CLOSE → const int
The MM_MOM_CLOSE message is sent to a window when a MIDI output device is closed.
MM_MOM_DONE → const int
The MM_MOM_DONE message is sent to a window when the specified MIDI system-exclusive or stream buffer has been played and is being returned to the application.
MM_MOM_OPEN → const int
The MM_MOM_OPEN message is sent to a window when a MIDI output device is opened.
MM_MOM_POSITIONCB → const int
The MM_MOM_POSITIONCB message is sent to a window when an MEVT_F_CALLBACK event is reached in the MIDI output stream.
MM_TEXT → const int
Each logical unit is mapped to one device pixel. Positive x is to the right; positive y is down.
MM_TWIPS → const int
Each logical unit is mapped to one twentieth of a printer's point (1/1440 inch, also called a twip). Positive x is to the right; positive y is up.
MM_WIM_CLOSE → const int
The MM_WIM_CLOSE message is sent to a window when a waveform-audio input device is closed. The device handle is no longer valid after this message has been sent.
MM_WIM_DATA → const int
The MM_WIM_DATA message is sent to a window when waveform-audio data is present in the input buffer and the buffer is being returned to the application. The message can be sent either when the buffer is full or after the waveInReset function is called.
MM_WIM_OPEN → const int
The MM_WIM_OPEN message is sent to a window when a waveform-audio input device is opened.
MM_WOM_CLOSE → const int
The MM_WOM_CLOSE message is sent to a window when a waveform-audio output device is closed. The device handle is no longer valid after this message has been sent.
MM_WOM_DONE → const int
The MM_WOM_DONE message is sent to a window when the given output buffer is being returned to the application. Buffers are returned to the application when they have been played, or as the result of a call to the waveOutReset function.
MM_WOM_OPEN → const int
The MM_WOM_OPEN message is sent to a window when the given waveform-audio output device is opened.
MOM_CLOSE → const int
The MOM_CLOSE message is sent to a MIDI output callback function when a MIDI output device is closed.
MOM_DONE → const int
The MOM_DONE message is sent to a MIDI output callback function when the specified system-exclusive or stream buffer has been played and is being returned to the application.
MOM_OPEN → const int
The MOM_OPEN message is sent to a MIDI output callback function when a MIDI output device is opened.
MOM_POSITIONCB → const int
The MOM_POSITION message is sent when an MEVT_F_CALLBACK event is reached in the MIDI output stream.
MONITOR_DEFAULTTONEAREST → const int
If the point is not contained within any display monitor, return a handle to the display monitor that is nearest to the point.
MONITOR_DEFAULTTONULL → const int
If the point is not contained within any display monitor, return NULL.
MONITOR_DEFAULTTOPRIMARY → const int
If the point is not contained within any display monitor, return a handle to the primary display monitor.
MONITORINFOF_PRIMARY → const int
This is the primary display monitor.
MS_CLIPAROUNDCURSOR → const int
Clips the area of the magnifier window that surrounds the system cursor. This style enables the user to see screen content that is behind the magnifier window.
MS_INVERTCOLORS → const int
Displays the magnified screen content using inverted colors.
MS_SHOWMAGNIFIEDCURSOR → const int
Displays the magnified system cursor along with the magnified screen content.
MW_FILTERMODE_EXCLUDE → const int
Exclude the windows from magnification.
MW_FILTERMODE_INCLUDE → const int
Magnify the windows.
NIF_GUID → const int
Windows 7 and later: The guidItem is valid. Windows Vista and earlier: Reserved.
NIF_ICON → const int
The hIcon member is valid.
NIF_INFO → const int
To display the balloon notification, specify NIF_INFO and provide text in szInfo. To remove a balloon notification, specify NIF_INFO and provide an empty string through szInfo. To add a notification area icon without displaying a notification, do not set the NIF_INFO flag.
NIF_MESSAGE → const int
The uCallbackMessage member is valid.
NIF_REALTIME → const int
Windows Vista and later. If the balloon notification cannot be displayed immediately, discard it. Use this flag for notifications that represent real-time information which would be meaningless or misleading if displayed at a later time. For example, a message that states "Your telephone is ringing." NIF_REALTIME is meaningful only when combined with the NIF_INFO flag.
NIF_SHOWTIP → const int
Windows Vista and later. Use the standard tooltip. Normally, when uVersion is set to NOTIFYICON_VERSION_4, the standard tooltip is suppressed and can be replaced by the application-drawn, pop-up UI. If the application wants to show the standard tooltip with NOTIFYICON_VERSION_4, it can specify NIF_SHOWTIP to indicate the standard tooltip should still be shown.
NIF_STATE → const int
The dwState and dwStateMask members are valid.
NIF_TIP → const int
The szTip member is valid.
NIIF_ERROR → const int
An error icon.
NIIF_ICON_MASK → const int
Windows XP and later. Reserved.
NIIF_INFO → const int
An information icon.
NIIF_LARGE_ICON → const int
The large version of the icon should be used as the notification icon
NIIF_NONE → const int
No icon.
NIIF_NOSOUND → const int
Do not play the associated sound. Applies only to notifications.
NIIF_RESPECT_QUIET_TIME → const int
Do not display the balloon notification if the curr user is in "quiet time"
NIIF_USER → const int
Windows Vista and later: Use the icon identified in hBalloonIcon as the notification balloon's title icon.
NIIF_WARNING → const int
A warning icon.
NIM_ADD → const int
Adds an icon to the status area. The icon is given an identifier in the NOTIFYICONDATA structure pointed to by lpdata—either through its uID or guidItem member. This identifier is used in subsequent calls to Shell_NotifyIcon to perform later actions on the icon.
NIM_DELETE → const int
Deletes an icon from the status area. NOTIFYICONDATA structure pointed to by lpdata uses the ID originally assigned to the icon when it was added to the notification area (NIM_ADD) to identify the icon to be deleted.
NIM_MODIFY → const int
Modifies an icon in the status area. NOTIFYICONDATA structure pointed to by lpdata uses the ID originally assigned to the icon when it was added to the notification area (NIM_ADD) to identify the icon to be modified.
NIM_SETFOCUS → const int
Shell32.dll version 5.0 and later only. Returns focus to the taskbar notification area. Notification area icons should use this message when they have completed their UI operation. For example, if the icon displays a shortcut menu, but the user presses ESC to cancel it, use NIM_SETFOCUS to return focus to the notification area.
NIM_SETVERSION → const int
Shell32.dll version 5.0 and later only. Instructs the notification area to behave according to the version number specified in the uVersion member of the structure pointed to by lpdata. The version number specifies which members are recognized. NIM_SETVERSION must be called every time a notification area icon is added (NIM_ADD)>. It does not need to be called with NIM_MOFIDY. The version setting is not persisted once a user logs off.
NIN_BALLOONHIDE → const int
Sent when the balloon disappears. For example, when the icon is deleted. This message is not sent if the balloon is dismissed because of a timeout or if the user clicks the mouse. As of Windows 7, NIN_BALLOONHIDE is also sent when a notification with the NIIF_RESPECT_QUIET_TIME flag set attempts to display during quiet time (a user's first hour on a new computer). In that case, the balloon is never displayed at all.
NIN_BALLOONSHOW → const int
Sent when the balloon is shown (balloons are queued).
NIN_BALLOONTIMEOUT → const int
Sent when the balloon is dismissed because of a timeout.
NIN_BALLOONUSERCLICK → const int
Sent when the balloon is dismissed because the user clicked the mouse.
NIN_KEYSELECT → const int
If a user selects a notify icon with the keyboard and activates it with the SPACEBAR or ENTER key, the version 5.0 Shell sends the associated application an NIN_KEYSELECT notification. Earlier versions send WM_RBUTTONDOWN and WM_RBUTTONUP messages.
NIN_POPUPCLOSE → const int
Sent when a cursor no longer hovers over an icon to indicate that the rich pop-up UI should be closed.
NIN_POPUPOPEN → const int
Sent when the user hovers the cursor over an icon to indicate that the richer pop-up UI should be used in place of a standard textual tooltip.
NIN_SELECT → const int
If a user selects a notify icon with the mouse and activates it with the ENTER key, the Shell now sends the associated application an NIN_SELECT notification. Earlier versions send WM_RBUTTONDOWN and WM_RBUTTONUP messages.
NINF_KEY → const int
NIS_HIDDEN → const int
The icon is hidden.
NIS_SHAREDICON → const int
The icon resource is shared between multiple icons.
NO_ERROR → const int
The operation completed successfully.
NOPARITY → const int
No parity.
NOTIFYICON_VERSION → const int
NOTIFYICON_VERSION_4 → const int
NULL → const int
A zero value; used to represent an empty bitmask.
NUMBRUSHES → const int
Number of device-specific brushes.
NUMCOLORS → const int
Number of entries in the device's color table, if the device has a color depth of no more than 8 bits per pixel. For devices with greater color depths, 1 is returned.
NUMFONTS → const int
Number of device-specific fonts.
NUMMARKERS → const int
NUMPENS → const int
Number of device-specific pens.
NUMRESERVED → const int
Number of reserved entries in the system palette. This index is valid only if the device driver sets the RC_PALETTE bit in the RASTERCAPS index and is available only if the driver is compatible with 16-bit Windows.
ODDPARITY → const int
Odd parity.
OFN_ALLOWMULTISELECT → const int
The File Name list box allows multiple selections. If you also set the OFN_EXPLORER flag, the dialog box uses the Explorer-style user interface; otherwise, it uses the old-style user interface.
OFN_CREATEPROMPT → const int
If the user specifies a file that does not exist, this flag causes the dialog box to prompt the user for permission to create the file. If the user chooses to create the file, the dialog box closes and the function returns the specified name; otherwise, the dialog box remains open. If you use this flag with the OFN_ALLOWMULTISELECT flag, the dialog box allows the user to specify only one nonexistent file.
OFN_DONTADDTORECENT → const int
Prevents the system from adding a link to the selected file in the file system directory that contains the user's most recently used documents. To retrieve the location of this directory, call the SHGetSpecialFolderLocation function with the CSIDL_RECENT flag.
OFN_ENABLEHOOK → const int
Enables the hook function specified in the lpfnHook member.
OFN_ENABLEINCLUDENOTIFY → const int
Causes the dialog box to send CDN_INCLUDEITEM notification messages to your OFNHookProc hook procedure when the user opens a folder. The dialog box sends a notification for each item in the newly opened folder. These messages enable you to control which items the dialog box displays in the folder's item list.
OFN_ENABLESIZING → const int
Enables the Explorer-style dialog box to be resized using either the mouse or the keyboard. By default, the Explorer-style Open and Save As dialog boxes allow the dialog box to be resized regardless of whether this flag is set. This flag is necessary only if you provide a hook procedure or custom template. The old-style dialog box does not permit resizing.
OFN_ENABLETEMPLATE → const int
The lpTemplateName member is a pointer to the name of a dialog template resource in the module identified by the hInstance member. If the OFN_EXPLORER flag is set, the system uses the specified template to create a dialog box that is a child of the default Explorer-style dialog box. If the OFN_EXPLORER flag is not set, the system uses the template to create an old-style dialog box that replaces the default dialog box.
OFN_ENABLETEMPLATEHANDLE → const int
The hInstance member identifies a data block that contains a preloaded dialog box template. The system ignores lpTemplateName if this flag is specified. If the OFN_EXPLORER flag is set, the system uses the specified template to create a dialog box that is a child of the default Explorer-style dialog box. If the OFN_EXPLORER flag is not set, the system uses the template to create an old-style dialog box that replaces the default dialog box.
OFN_EX_NOPLACESBAR → const int
If this flag is set, the places bar is not displayed. If this flag is not set, Explorer-style dialog boxes include a places bar containing icons for commonly-used folders, such as Favorites and Desktop.
OFN_EXPLORER → const int
Indicates that any customizations made to the Open or Save As dialog box use the Explorer-style customization methods.
OFN_EXTENSIONDIFFERENT → const int
The user typed a file name extension that differs from the extension specified by lpstrDefExt. The function does not use this flag if lpstrDefExt is NULL.
OFN_FILEMUSTEXIST → const int
The user can type only names of existing files in the File Name entry field. If this flag is specified and the user enters an invalid name, the dialog box procedure displays a warning in a message box. If this flag is specified, the OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST flag is also used. This flag can be used in an Open dialog box. It cannot be used with a Save As dialog box.
OFN_FORCESHOWHIDDEN → const int
Forces the showing of system and hidden files, thus overriding the user setting to show or not show hidden files. However, a file that is marked both system and hidden is not shown.
OFN_HIDEREADONLY → const int
Hides the Read Only check box.
OFN_LONGNAMES → const int
For old-style dialog boxes, this flag causes the dialog box to use long file names. If this flag is not specified, or if the OFN_ALLOWMULTISELECT flag is also set, old-style dialog boxes use short file names (8.3 format) for file names with spaces. Explorer-style dialog boxes ignore this flag and always display long file names.
OFN_NOCHANGEDIR → const int
Restores the current directory to its original value if the user changed the directory while searching for files.
Directs the dialog box to return the path and file name of the selected shortcut (.LNK) file. If this value is not specified, the dialog box returns the path and file name of the file referenced by the shortcut.
OFN_NOLONGNAMES → const int
For old-style dialog boxes, this flag causes the dialog box to use short file names (8.3 format). Explorer-style dialog boxes ignore this flag and always display long file names.
OFN_NONETWORKBUTTON → const int
Hides and disables the Network button.
OFN_NOREADONLYRETURN → const int
The returned file does not have the Read Only check box selected and is not in a write-protected directory.
OFN_NOTESTFILECREATE → const int
The file is not created before the dialog box is closed. This flag should be specified if the application saves the file on a create-nonmodify network share. When an application specifies this flag, the library does not check for write protection, a full disk, an open drive door, or network protection. Applications using this flag must perform file operations carefully, because a file cannot be reopened once it is closed.
OFN_NOVALIDATE → const int
The common dialog boxes allow invalid characters in the returned file name. Typically, the calling application uses a hook procedure that checks the file name by using the FILEOKSTRING message. If the text box in the edit control is empty or contains nothing but spaces, the lists of files and directories are updated. If the text box in the edit control contains anything else, nFileOffset and nFileExtension are set to values generated by parsing the text. No default extension is added to the text, nor is text copied to the buffer specified by lpstrFileTitle. If the value specified by nFileOffset is less than zero, the file name is invalid. Otherwise, the file name is valid, and nFileExtension and nFileOffset can be used as if the OFN_NOVALIDATE flag had not been specified.
OFN_OVERWRITEPROMPT → const int
Causes the Save As dialog box to generate a message box if the selected file already exists. The user must confirm whether to overwrite the file.
OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST → const int
The user can type only valid paths and file names. If this flag is used and the user types an invalid path and file name in the File Name entry field, the dialog box function displays a warning in a message box.
OFN_READONLY → const int
Causes the Read Only check box to be selected initially when the dialog box is created. This flag indicates the state of the Read Only check box when the dialog box is closed.
OFN_SHAREAWARE → const int
Specifies that if a call to the OpenFile function fails because of a network sharing violation, the error is ignored and the dialog box returns the selected file name. If this flag is not set, the dialog box notifies your hook procedure when a network sharing violation occurs for the file name specified by the user. If you set the OFN_EXPLORER flag, the dialog box sends the CDN_SHAREVIOLATION message to the hook procedure. If you do not set OFN_EXPLORER, the dialog box sends the SHAREVISTRING registered message to the hook procedure.
OFN_SHOWHELP → const int
Causes the dialog box to display the Help button. The hwndOwner member must specify the window to receive the HELPMSGSTRING registered messages that the dialog box sends when the user clicks the Help button. An Explorer-style dialog box sends a CDN_HELP notification message to your hook procedure when the user clicks the Help button.
ONE5STOPBITS → const int
1.5 stop bits.
ONESTOPBIT → const int
1 stop bit.
OPEN_ALWAYS → const int
Opens a file, always.
OPEN_EXISTING → const int
Opens a file or device, only if it exists.
PAGE_ENCLAVE_DECOMMIT → const int
Indicates that the page will be protected to prevent further use in an enclave.
PAGE_ENCLAVE_THREAD_CONTROL → const int
The page contains a thread control structure (TCS).
PAGE_ENCLAVE_UNVALIDATED → const int
The page contents that you supply are excluded from measurement with the EEXTEND instruction of the Intel SGX programming model.
PAGE_EXECUTE → const int
Enables execute access to the committed region of pages. An attempt to write to the committed region results in an access violation.
PAGE_EXECUTE_READ → const int
Enables execute or read-only access to the committed region of pages. An attempt to write to the committed region results in an access violation.
PAGE_EXECUTE_READWRITE → const int
Enables execute, read-only, or read/write access to the committed region of pages.
PAGE_EXECUTE_WRITECOPY → const int
Enables execute, read-only, or copy-on-write access to a mapped view of a file mapping object. An attempt to write to a committed copy-on-write page results in a private copy of the page being made for the process. The private page is marked as PAGE_EXECUTE_READWRITE, and the change is written to the new page.
PAGE_GUARD → const int
Pages in the region become guard pages. Any attempt to access a guard page causes the system to raise a STATUS_GUARD_PAGE_VIOLATION exception and turn off the guard page status. Guard pages thus act as a one-time access alarm.
PAGE_NOACCESS → const int
Disables all access to the committed region of pages. An attempt to read from, write to, or execute the committed region results in an access violation.
PAGE_NOCACHE → const int
Sets all pages to be non-cachable. Applications should not use this attribute except when explicitly required for a device. Using the interlocked functions with memory that is mapped with SEC_NOCACHE can result in an EXCEPTION_ILLEGAL_INSTRUCTION exception.
PAGE_READONLY → const int
Enables read-only access to the committed region of pages. An attempt to write to the committed region results in an access violation. If Data Execution Prevention is enabled, an attempt to execute code in the committed region results in an access violation.
PAGE_READWRITE → const int
Enables read-only or read/write access to the committed region of pages. If Data Execution Prevention is enabled, attempting to execute code in the committed region results in an access violation.
PAGE_TARGETS_INVALID → const int
Sets all locations in the pages as invalid targets for CFG. Used along with any execute page protection like PAGE_EXECUTE, PAGE_EXECUTE_READ, PAGE_EXECUTE_READWRITE and PAGE_EXECUTE_WRITECOPY. Any indirect call to locations in those pages will fail CFG checks and the process will be terminated. The default behavior for executable pages allocated is to be marked valid call targets for CFG.
PAGE_TARGETS_NO_UPDATE → const int
Pages in the region will not have their CFG information updated while the protection changes for VirtualProtect. For example, if the pages in the region was allocated using PAGE_TARGETS_INVALID, then the invalid information will be maintained while the page protection changes. This flag is only valid when the protection changes to an executable type like PAGE_EXECUTE, PAGE_EXECUTE_READ, PAGE_EXECUTE_READWRITE and PAGE_EXECUTE_WRITECOPY. The default behavior for VirtualProtect protection change to executable is to mark all locations as valid call targets for CFG.
PAGE_WRITECOMBINE → const int
Sets all pages to be write-combined.
PAGE_WRITECOPY → const int
Enables read-only or copy-on-write access to a mapped view of a file mapping object. An attempt to write to a committed copy-on-write page results in a private copy of the page being made for the process. The private page is marked as PAGE_READWRITE, and the change is written to the new page. If Data Execution Prevention is enabled, attempting to execute code in the committed region results in an access violation.
PBM_DELTAPOS → const int
Advances the current position of a progress bar by a specified increment and redraws the bar to reflect the new position.
PBM_GETBARCOLOR → const int
Gets the color of the progress bar.
PBM_GETBKCOLOR → const int
Gets the background color of the progress bar.
PBM_GETPOS → const int
Retrieves the current position of the progress bar.
PBM_GETRANGE → const int
Retrieves information about the current high and low limits of a given progress bar control.
PBM_GETSTATE → const int
Gets the state of the progress bar.
PBM_GETSTEP → const int
Retrieves the step increment from a progress bar. The step increment is the amount by which the progress bar increases its current position whenever it receives a PBM_STEPIT message. By default, the step increment is set to 10.
PBM_SETBARCOLOR → const int
Sets the color of the progress indicator bar in the progress bar control.
PBM_SETBKCOLOR → const int
Sets the background color in the progress bar.
PBM_SETMARQUEE → const int
Sets the progress bar to marquee mode. This causes the progress bar to move like a marquee.
PBM_SETPOS → const int
Sets the current position for a progress bar and redraws the bar to reflect the new position.
PBM_SETRANGE → const int
Sets the minimum and maximum values for a progress bar and redraws the bar to reflect the new range.
PBM_SETRANGE32 → const int
Sets the minimum and maximum values for a progress bar to 32-bit values, and redraws the bar to reflect the new range
PBM_SETSTATE → const int
Sets the state of the progress bar.
PBM_SETSTEP → const int
Specifies the step increment for a progress bar. The step increment is the amount by which the progress bar increases its current position whenever it receives a PBM_STEPIT message. By default, the step increment is set to 10.
PBM_STEPIT → const int
Advances the current position for a progress bar by the step increment and redraws the bar to reflect the new position. An application sets the step increment by sending the PBM_SETSTEP message.
PBS_MARQUEE → const int
The progress indicator does not grow in size but instead moves repeatedly along the length of the bar, indicating activity without specifying what proportion of the progress is complete.
PBS_SMOOTH → const int
The progress bar displays progress status in a smooth scrolling bar instead of the default segmented bar.
PBS_SMOOTHREVERSE → const int
Determines the animation behavior that the progress bar should use when moving backward (from a higher value to a lower value). If this is set, then a "smooth" transition will occur, otherwise the control will "jump" to the lower value.
PBS_VERTICAL → const int
The progress bar displays progress status vertically, from bottom to top.
PBST_ERROR → const int
Error.
PBST_NORMAL → const int
In progress.
PBST_PAUSED → const int
Paused.
PBT_APMBATTERYLOW → const int
Notifies applications that the battery power is low.
PBT_APMPOWERSTATUSCHANGE → const int
Notifies applications of a change in the power status of the computer, such as a switch from battery power to A/C. The system also broadcasts this event when remaining battery power slips below the threshold specified by the user or if the battery power changes by a specified percentage.
PBT_APMRESUMEAUTOMATIC → const int
Notifies applications that the system is resuming from sleep or hibernation. This event is delivered every time the system resumes and does not indicate whether a user is present.
PBT_APMRESUMESUSPEND → const int
Notifies applications that the system has resumed operation after being suspended.
PBT_APMSUSPEND → const int
Notifies applications that the computer is about to enter a suspended state. This event is typically broadcast when all applications and installable drivers have returned TRUE to a previous PBT_APMQUERYSUSPEND event.
PBT_POWERSETTINGCHANGE → const int
Power setting change event sent with a WM_POWERBROADCAST window message or in a HandlerEx notification callback for services.
PDEVICESIZE → const int
Reserved.
PHYSICALHEIGHT → const int
For printing devices: the height of the physical page, in device units. For example, a printer set to print at 600 dpi on 8.5-by-11-inch paper has a physical height value of 6600 device units. Note that the physical page is almost always greater than the printable area of the page, and never smaller.
PHYSICALOFFSETX → const int
For printing devices: the distance from the left edge of the physical page to the left edge of the printable area, in device units. For example, a printer set to print at 600 dpi on 8.5-by-11-inch paper, that cannot print on the leftmost 0.25-inch of paper, has a horizontal physical offset of 150 device units.
PHYSICALOFFSETY → const int
For printing devices: the distance from the top edge of the physical page to the top edge of the printable area, in device units. For example, a printer set to print at 600 dpi on 8.5-by-11-inch paper, that cannot print on the topmost 0.5-inch of paper, has a vertical physical offset of 300 device units.
PHYSICALWIDTH → const int
For printing devices: the width of the physical page, in device units. For example, a printer set to print at 600 dpi on 8.5-x11-inch paper has a physical width value of 5100 device units. Note that the physical page is almost always greater than the printable area of the page, and never smaller.
PIPE_ACCEPT_REMOTE_CLIENTS → const int
Connections from remote clients can be accepted and checked against the security descriptor for the pipe.
PIPE_ACCESS_DUPLEX → const int
The pipe is bi-directional; both server and client processes can read from and write to the pipe. This mode gives the server the equivalent of GENERIC_READ and GENERIC_WRITE access to the pipe. The client can specify GENERIC_READ or GENERIC_WRITE, or both, when it connects to the pipe using the CreateFile function.
PIPE_ACCESS_INBOUND → const int
The flow of data in the pipe goes from client to server only. This mode gives the server the equivalent of GENERIC_READ access to the pipe. The client must specify GENERIC_WRITE access when connecting to the pipe. If the client must read pipe settings by calling the GetNamedPipeInfo or GetNamedPipeHandleState functions, the client must specify GENERIC_WRITE and FILE_READ_ATTRIBUTES access when connecting to the pipe.
PIPE_ACCESS_OUTBOUND → const int
The flow of data in the pipe goes from server to client only. This mode gives the server the equivalent of GENERIC_WRITE access to the pipe. The client must specify GENERIC_READ access when connecting to the pipe. If the client must change pipe settings by calling the SetNamedPipeHandleState function, the client must specify GENERIC_READ and FILE_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES access when connecting to the pipe.
PIPE_CLIENT_END → const int
The handle refers to the client end of a named pipe instance. This is the default.
PIPE_NOWAIT → const int
Nonblocking mode is enabled. In this mode, ReadFile, WriteFile, and ConnectNamedPipe always return immediately.
PIPE_READMODE_BYTE → const int
Data is read from the pipe as a stream of bytes. This mode can be used with either PIPE_TYPE_MESSAGE or PIPE_TYPE_BYTE.
PIPE_READMODE_MESSAGE → const int
Data is read from the pipe as a stream of messages. This mode can be only used if PIPE_TYPE_MESSAGE is also specified.
PIPE_REJECT_REMOTE_CLIENTS → const int
Connections from remote clients are automatically rejected.
PIPE_SERVER_END → const int
The handle refers to the server end of a named pipe instance. If this value is not specified, the handle refers to the client end of a named pipe instance.
PIPE_TYPE_BYTE → const int
The named pipe is a byte pipe. This is the default.
PIPE_TYPE_MESSAGE → const int
The named pipe is a message pipe. If this value is not specified, the pipe is a byte pipe.
PIPE_UNLIMITED_INSTANCES → const int
The number of pipe instances that can be created is limited only by the availability of system resources.
PIPE_WAIT → const int
Blocking mode is enabled. When the pipe handle is specified in the ReadFile, WriteFile, or ConnectNamedPipe function, the operations are not completed until there is data to read, all data is written, or a client is connected. Use of this mode can mean waiting indefinitely in some situations for a client process to perform an action.
PLANES → const int
Number of color planes.
PM_NOREMOVE → const int
Messages are not removed from the queue after processing by PeekMessage.
PM_NOYIELD → const int
Prevents the system from releasing any thread that is waiting for the caller to go idle.
PM_REMOVE → const int
Messages are removed from the queue after processing by PeekMessage.
POLYGONALCAPS → const int
Value that indicates the line capabilities of the device.
PRINTER_ENUM_CATEGORY_3D → const int
The function enumerates only 3D printers.
PRINTER_ENUM_CATEGORY_ALL → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_CATEGORY_ALL
PRINTER_ENUM_CONNECTIONS → const int
The function enumerates the list of printers to which the user has made previous connections.
PRINTER_ENUM_CONTAINER → const int
Indicates that the printer object is capable of containing enumerable objects. One such object is a print provider, which is a print server that contains printers.
PRINTER_ENUM_DEFAULT → const int
(Win9.x only) enumerates the default printer.
PRINTER_ENUM_EXPAND → const int
Indicates that the printer object contains further enumerable child objects.
PRINTER_ENUM_FAVORITE → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_HIDE → const int
Indicates that an application cannot display the printer object.
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON1 → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON2 → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON3 → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON4 → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON5 → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON6 → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON7 → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_ICON8 → const int
Indicates that, where appropriate, an application treats an object as a print server. A GUI application can<145> choose to display an icon of choice for this type of object.
PRINTER_ENUM_ICONMASK → const int
PRINTER_ENUM_LOCAL → const int
If the PRINTER_ENUM_NAME flag is not also passed, the function ignores the Name parameter, and enumerates the locally installed printers. If PRINTER_ENUM_NAME is also passed, the function enumerates the local printers on Name.
PRINTER_ENUM_NAME → const int
The function enumerates the printer identified by Name. This can be a server a domain, or a print provider. If Name is NULL, the function enumerates available print providers.
PRINTER_ENUM_NETWORK → const int
The function enumerates network printers in the computer's domain. This value is valid only if Level is 1.
PRINTER_ENUM_REMOTE → const int
The function enumerates network printers and print servers in the computer's domain. This value is valid only if Level is 1.
PRINTER_ENUM_SHARED → const int
The function enumerates printers that have the shared attribute. Cannot be used in isolation; use an OR operation to combine with another PRINTER_ENUM type.
PS_ALTERNATE → const int
The pen sets every other pixel. (This style is applicable only for cosmetic pens.)
PS_COSMETIC → const int
The pen is cosmetic.
PS_DASH → const int
The pen is dashed.
PS_DASHDOT → const int
The pen has alternating dashes and dots.
PS_DASHDOTDOT → const int
The pen has alternating dashes and double dots.
PS_DOT → const int
The pen is dotted.
PS_ENDCAP_FLAT → const int
End caps are flat.
PS_ENDCAP_MASK → const int
Mask for pen endcap styles.
PS_ENDCAP_ROUND → const int
End caps are round.
PS_ENDCAP_SQUARE → const int
End caps are square.
PS_GEOMETRIC → const int
The pen is geometric.
PS_INSIDEFRAME → const int
The pen is solid. When this pen is used in any GDI drawing function that takes a bounding rectangle, the dimensions of the figure are shrunk so that it fits entirely in the bounding rectangle, taking into account the width of the pen. This applies only to geometric pens.
PS_JOIN_BEVEL → const int
Line joins are beveled.
PS_JOIN_MASK → const int
Mask for pen join values.
PS_JOIN_MITER → const int
Line joins are mitered when they are within the current limit set by the SetMiterLimit function. A join is beveled when it would exceed the limit.
PS_JOIN_ROUND → const int
Line joins are round.
PS_NULL → const int
The pen is invisible.
PS_SOLID → const int
The pen is solid.
PS_STYLE_MASK → const int
PS_TYPE_MASK → const int
Mask for pen types.
PS_USERSTYLE → const int
The pen uses a styling array supplied by the user.
PURGE_RXABORT → const int
Terminates all outstanding overlapped read operations and returns immediately, even if the read operations have not been completed.
PURGE_RXCLEAR → const int
Clears the input buffer (if the device driver has one).
PURGE_TXABORT → const int
Terminates all outstanding overlapped write operations and returns immediately, even if the write operations have not been completed.
PURGE_TXCLEAR → const int
Clears the output buffer (if the device driver has one).
QS_ALLEVENTS → const int
An input, WM_TIMER, WM_PAINT, WM_HOTKEY, or posted message is in the queue.
QS_ALLINPUT → const int
Any message is in the queue.
QS_ALLPOSTMESSAGE → const int
A posted message (other than those listed here) is in the queue.
QS_HOTKEY → const int
A WM_HOTKEY message is in the queue.
QS_INPUT → const int
An input message is in the queue.
QS_KEY → const int
A WM_KEYUP, WM_KEYDOWN, WM_SYSKEYUP, or WM_SYSKEYDOWN message is in the queue.
QS_MOUSE → const int
A WM_MOUSEMOVE message or mouse-button message (WM_LBUTTONUP, WM_RBUTTONDOWN, and so on).
QS_MOUSEBUTTON → const int
A mouse-button message (WM_LBUTTONUP, WM_RBUTTONDOWN, and so on).
QS_MOUSEMOVE → const int
A WM_MOUSEMOVE message is in the queue.
QS_PAINT → const int
A WM_PAINT message is in the queue.
QS_POINTER → const int
A pointer message is in the queue.
QS_POSTMESSAGE → const int
A posted message (other than those listed here) is in the queue.
QS_RAWINPUT → const int
A raw input message is in the queue.
QS_SENDMESSAGE → const int
A message sent by another thread or application is in the queue.
QS_TIMER → const int
A WM_TIMER message is in the queue.
QS_TOUCH → const int
A touch message is in the queue.
RASTERCAPS → const int
Value that indicates the raster capabilities of the device.
READ_CONTROL → const int
The right to read the information in the object's security descriptor, not including the information in the system access control list (SACL).
REG_BINARY → const int
Binary data in any form.
REG_DWORD → const int
A 32-bit number.
REG_DWORD_BIG_ENDIAN → const int
A 32-bit number in big-endian format. Some UNIX systems support big-endian architectures.
REG_DWORD_LITTLE_ENDIAN → const int
A 32-bit number in little-endian format. Windows is designed to run on little-endian computer architectures. Therefore, this value is defined as REG_DWORD in the Windows header files.
REG_EXPAND_SZ → const int
A null-terminated string that contains unexpanded references to environment variables, for example, %PATH%. It's either a Unicode or an ANSI string, depending on whether you use the Unicode or ANSI functions
A null-terminated Unicode string that contains the target path of a symbolic link that was created by calling the RegCreateKeyEx function with REG_OPTION_CREATE_LINK.
REG_MULTI_SZ → const int
A sequence of null-terminated strings, terminated by an empty string (\0). The following is an example: String1\0String2\0String3\0LastString\0\0. The first \0 terminates the first string, the second-from-last \0 terminates the last string, and the final \0 terminates the sequence. Note that the final terminator must be factored into the length of the string.
REG_NONE → const int
No defined value type.
REG_NOTIFY_CHANGE_ATTRIBUTES → const int
Notify the caller of changes to the attributes of the key, such as the security descriptor information.
REG_NOTIFY_CHANGE_LAST_SET → const int
Notify the caller of changes to a value of the key. This can include adding or deleting a value, or changing an existing value.
REG_NOTIFY_CHANGE_NAME → const int
Notify the caller if a subkey is added or deleted.
REG_NOTIFY_CHANGE_SECURITY → const int
Notify the caller of changes to the security descriptor of the key.
REG_NOTIFY_THREAD_AGNOSTIC → const int
Indicates that the lifetime of the registration must not be tied to the lifetime of the thread issuing the RegNotifyChangeKeyValue call.
REG_QWORD → const int
A 64-bit number.
REG_QWORD_LITTLE_ENDIAN → const int
A 64-bit number in little-endian format. Windows is designed to run on little-endian computer architectures. Therefore, this value is defined as REG_QWORD in the Windows header files.
REG_SZ → const int
A null-terminated string. It's either a Unicode or an ANSI string, depending on whether you use the Unicode or ANSI functions.
RID_HEADER → const int
Get the header information from the RAWINPUT structure.
RID_INPUT → const int
Get the raw data from the RAWINPUT structure.
RIDEV_APPKEYS → const int
If set, the application command keys are handled. RIDEV_APPKEYS can be specified only if RIDEV_NOLEGACY is specified for a keyboard device.
RIDEV_CAPTUREMOUSE → const int
If set, the mouse button click does not activate the other window. RIDEV_CAPTUREMOUSE can be specified only if RIDEV_NOLEGACY is specified for a mouse device.
RIDEV_DEVNOTIFY → const int
If set, this enables the caller to receive WM_INPUT_DEVICE_CHANGE notifications for device arrival and device removal.
RIDEV_EXCLUDE → const int
If set, this specifies the top level collections to exclude when reading a complete usage page. This flag only affects a TLC whose usage page is already specified with RIDEV_PAGEONLY.
RIDEV_EXINPUTSINK → const int
If set, this enables the caller to receive input in the background only if the foreground application does not process it. In other words, if the foreground application is not registered for raw input, then the background application that is registered will receive the input.
RIDEV_INPUTSINK → const int
If set, this enables the caller to receive the input even when the caller is not in the foreground. Note that hwndTarget must be specified.
RIDEV_NOHOTKEYS → const int
If set, the application-defined keyboard device hotkeys are not handled. However, the system hotkeys; for example, ALT+TAB and CTRL+ALT+DEL, are still handled. By default, all keyboard hotkeys are handled. RIDEV_NOHOTKEYS can be specified even if RIDEV_NOLEGACY is not specified and hwndTarget is NULL.
RIDEV_NOLEGACY → const int
If set, this prevents any devices specified by usUsagePage or usUsage from generating legacy messages. This is only for the mouse and keyboard.
RIDEV_PAGEONLY → const int
If set, this specifies all devices whose top level collection is from the specified usUsagePage. Note that usUsage must be zero. To exclude a particular top level collection, use RIDEV_EXCLUDE.
RIDEV_REMOVE → const int
If set, this removes the top level collection from the inclusion list. This tells the operating system to stop reading from a device which matches the top level collection.
RIDI_DEVICEINFO → const int
pData points to an RID_DEVICE_INFO structure.
RIDI_DEVICENAME → const int
pData points to a string that contains the device interface name.
RIDI_PREPARSEDDATA → const int
pData is a PHIDP_PREPARSED_DATA pointer to a buffer for a top-level collection's preparsed data.
RO_E_CHANGE_NOTIFICATION_IN_PROGRESS → const int
Operation is prohibited during change notification.
RO_E_CLOSED → const int
The object has been closed.
RO_E_ERROR_STRING_NOT_FOUND → const int
The text associated with this error code could not be found.
RO_E_EXCLUSIVE_WRITE → const int
Only one thread may access the object during a write operation.
RO_E_INVALID_METADATA_FILE → const int
Metadata file is invalid or corrupted.
RO_E_METADATA_INVALID_TYPE_FORMAT → const int
Typename has an invalid format.
RO_E_METADATA_NAME_IS_NAMESPACE → const int
Name is an existing namespace rather than a typename.
RO_E_METADATA_NAME_NOT_FOUND → const int
Typename or Namespace was not found in metadata file.
RTS_CONTROL_DISABLE → const int
Disables the RTS line when the device is opened and leaves it disabled.
RTS_CONTROL_ENABLE → const int
Enables the RTS line when the device is opened and leaves it on.
RTS_CONTROL_HANDSHAKE → const int
Enables RTS handshaking. The driver raises the RTS line when the "type-ahead" (input) buffer is less than one-half full and lowers the RTS line when the buffer is more than three-quarters full. If handshaking is enabled, it is an error for the application to adjust the line by using the EscapeCommFunction function.
RTS_CONTROL_TOGGLE → const int
Specifies that the RTS line will be high if bytes are available for transmission. After all buffered bytes have been sent, the RTS line will be low.
S_FALSE → const int
Operation successful
S_OK → const int
Operation successful
SB_BOTH → const int
Apply to the window's standard horizontal and vertical scroll bars.
SB_BOTTOM → const int
Scrolls to the lower right.
SB_CTL → const int
Apply to a scroll bar control.
SB_ENDSCROLL → const int
Ends scroll.
SB_HORZ → const int
Apply to the window's standard horizontal scroll bar.
SB_LEFT → const int
Scrolls to the upper left.
SB_LINEDOWN → const int
Scrolls one line down.
SB_LINELEFT → const int
Scrolls left by one unit.
SB_LINERIGHT → const int
Scrolls right by one unit.
SB_LINEUP → const int
Scrolls one line up.
SB_PAGEDOWN → const int
Scrolls one page down.
SB_PAGELEFT → const int
Scrolls left by the width of the window.
SB_PAGERIGHT → const int
Scrolls right by the width of the window.
SB_PAGEUP → const int
Scrolls one page up.
SB_RIGHT → const int
Scrolls to the lower right.
SB_THUMBPOSITION → const int
The user has dragged the scroll box (thumb) and released the mouse button.
SB_THUMBTRACK → const int
The user is dragging the scroll box. This message is sent repeatedly until the user releases the mouse button.
SB_TOP → const int
Scrolls to the upper left.
SB_VERT → const int
Apply to the window's standard vertical scroll bar.
SC_CLOSE → const int
Closes the window.
SC_CONTEXTHELP → const int
Changes the cursor to a question mark with a pointer. If the user then clicks a control in the dialog box, the control receives a WM_HELP message.
SC_DEFAULT → const int
Selects the default item; the user double-clicked the window menu.
SC_DLG_FORCE_UI → const int
Connects to the card selected by the user from the smart card Select Card dialog box.
SC_DLG_MINIMAL_UI → const int
Selects the smart card if only one smart card meets the criteria, or returns information about the user's selection if more than one smart card meets the criteria.
SC_DLG_NO_UI → const int
Selects the first available card.
SC_HOTKEY → const int
Activates the window associated with the application-specified hot key. The lParam parameter identifies the window to activate.
SC_HSCROLL → const int
Scrolls horizontally.
SC_KEYMENU → const int
Retrieves the window menu as a result of a keystroke.
SC_MAXIMIZE → const int
Maximizes the window.
SC_MINIMIZE → const int
Minimizes the window.
SC_MONITORPOWER → const int
Sets the state of the display. This command supports devices that have power-saving features, such as a battery-powered personal computer.
SC_MOUSEMENU → const int
Retrieves the window menu as a result of a mouse click.
SC_MOVE → const int
Moves the window.
SC_NEXTWINDOW → const int
Moves to the next window.
SC_PREVWINDOW → const int
Moves to the previous window.
SC_RESTORE → const int
Restores the window to its normal position and size.
SC_SCREENSAVE → const int
Executes the screen saver application.
SC_SIZE → const int
Sizes the window.
SC_TASKLIST → const int
Activates the Start menu.
SC_VSCROLL → const int
Scrolls vertically.
SCALINGFACTORX → const int
Scaling factor for the x-axis of the printer.
SCALINGFACTORY → const int
Scaling factor for the y-axis of the printer.
SCARD_ABSENT → const int
There is no card in the reader.
SCARD_AUDIT_CHV_FAILURE → const int
A smart card holder verification (CHV) attempt failed.
SCARD_AUDIT_CHV_SUCCESS → const int
A smart card holder verification (CHV) attempt succeeded.
SCARD_COLD_RESET → const int
Power down the smart card and power it up again.
SCARD_EJECT_CARD → const int
Eject the card on close.
SCARD_LEAVE_CARD → const int
Don't do anything special on close.
SCARD_NEGOTIABLE → const int
The card has been reset and is awaiting PTS negotiation.
SCARD_POWER_DOWN → const int
Remove power from the smart card.
SCARD_POWERED → const int
Power is being provided to the card, but the reader driver is unaware of the mode of the card.
SCARD_PRESENT → const int
There is a card in the reader, but it has not been moved into position for use.
SCARD_PROTOCOL_DEFAULT → const int
Use the implicit protocol of the card with standard parameters.
SCARD_PROTOCOL_OPTIMAL → const int
Use the best possible communication parameters.
SCARD_PROTOCOL_RAW → const int
The Raw Transfer protocol is in use.
SCARD_PROTOCOL_T0 → const int
The ISO 7816/3 T=0 protocol is in use.
SCARD_PROTOCOL_T1 → const int
The ISO 7816/3 T=1 protocol is in use.
SCARD_PROTOCOL_Tx → const int
Bitwise OR combination of both of the two International Standards Organization (IS0) transmission protocols SCARD_PROTOCOL_T0 and SCARD_PROTOCOL_T1.
SCARD_PROTOCOL_UNDEFINED → const int
No transmission protocol is active.
SCARD_PROVIDER_CARD_MODULE → const int
The function retrieves the name of the card module.
SCARD_PROVIDER_CSP → const int
The function retrieves the name of the cryptographic service provider.
SCARD_PROVIDER_KSP → const int
The function retrieves the name of the smart card key storage provider (KSP).
SCARD_PROVIDER_PRIMARY → const int
The function retrieves the name of the smart card's primary service provider as a GUID string.
SCARD_RESET_CARD → const int
Reset the card on close.
SCARD_SCOPE_SYSTEM → const int
Database operations are performed within the domain of the system. The calling application must have appropriate access permissions for any database actions.
SCARD_SCOPE_TERMINAL → const int
Database operations are performed within the domain of the current terminal.
SCARD_SCOPE_USER → const int
Database operations are performed within the domain of the user.
SCARD_SHARE_DIRECT → const int
This application is allocating the reader for its private use, and will be controlling it directly. No other applications are allowed access to it.
SCARD_SHARE_EXCLUSIVE → const int
This application is not willing to share the card with other applications.
SCARD_SHARE_SHARED → const int
This application is willing to share the card with other applications.
SCARD_SPECIFIC → const int
The card has been reset and specific communication protocols have been established.
SCARD_SWALLOWED → const int
There is a card in the reader in position for use. The card is not powered.
SCARD_UNKNOWN → const int
The reader driver has no information concerning the current state of the reader.
SCARD_UNPOWER_CARD → const int
Power down the card on close.
SCARD_WARM_RESET → const int
Reset the smart card without removing power.
SCF_ISSECURE → const int
Indicates whether the screen saver is secure.
SCS_32BIT_BINARY → const int
A 32-bit Windows-based application
SCS_64BIT_BINARY → const int
A 64-bit Windows-based application.
SCS_DOS_BINARY → const int
An MS-DOS – based application
SCS_OS216_BINARY → const int
A 16-bit OS/2-based application
SCS_PIF_BINARY → const int
A PIF file that executes an MS-DOS–based application
SCS_POSIX_BINARY → const int
A POSIX–based application
SCS_WOW_BINARY → const int
A 16-bit Windows-based application
SDC_ALLOW_CHANGES → const int
If required, the function can modify the specified source and target mode information in order to create a functional display path set.
SDC_ALLOW_PATH_ORDER_CHANGES → const int
A modifier to the SDC_TOPOLOGY_SUPPLIED flag that indicates that SetDisplayConfig should ignore the path order of the supplied topology when searching the database. When this flag is set, the topology set is the most recent topology that contains all the paths regardless of the path order.
SDC_APPLY → const int
The resulting topology, source, and target mode is set.
SDC_FORCE_MODE_ENUMERATION → const int
The caller requests that the driver is given an opportunity to update the GDI mode list while SetDisplayConfig sets the new display configuration. This flag value is only valid when the SDC_USE_SUPPLIED_DISPLAY_CONFIG and SDC_APPLY flag values are also specified.
SDC_NO_OPTIMIZATION → const int
A modifier to the SDC_APPLY flag. This causes the change mode to be forced all the way down to the driver for each active display.
SDC_PATH_PERSIST_IF_REQUIRED → const int
When the function processes a SDC_TOPOLOGY_XXX request, it can force path persistence on a target to satisfy the request if necessary. For information about the other flags that this flag can be combined with, see the following list.
SDC_SAVE_TO_DATABASE → const int
The resulting topology, source, and target mode are saved to the database.
SDC_TOPOLOGY_CLONE → const int
The caller requests the last clone configuration from the persistence database.
SDC_TOPOLOGY_EXTEND → const int
The caller requests the last extended configuration from the persistence database.
SDC_TOPOLOGY_EXTERNAL → const int
The caller requests the last external configuration from the persistence database.
SDC_TOPOLOGY_INTERNAL → const int
The caller requests the last internal configuration from the persistence database.
SDC_TOPOLOGY_SUPPLIED → const int
The caller provides the path data so the function only queries the persistence database to find and use the source and target mode.
SDC_USE_DATABASE_CURRENT → const int
The caller requests a combination of all four SDC_TOPOLOGY_XXX configurations. This value informs the API to set the last known display configuration for the current connected monitors.
SDC_USE_SUPPLIED_DISPLAY_CONFIG → const int
The topology, source, and target mode information that are supplied in the pathArray and the modeInfoArray parameters are used, rather than looking up the configuration in the database.
SDC_VALIDATE → const int
The system tests for the requested topology, source, and target mode information to determine whether it can be set.
SDC_VIRTUAL_MODE_AWARE → const int
A modifier to the SDC_USE_SUPPLIED_DISPLAY_CONFIG and SDC_TOPOLOGY_SUPPLIED flags that the caller is aware of virtual modes. Supported starting in Windows 10.
SDC_VIRTUAL_REFRESH_RATE_AWARE → const int
A modifier to the SDC_USE_SUPPLIED_DISPLAY_CONFIG and SDC_TOPOLOGY_SUPPLIED flags that the caller is aware of virtual refresh rates. Supported starting in Windows 11.
SEC_E_OK → const int
The operation completed successfully.
SEM_FAILCRITICALERRORS → const int
The system does not display the critical-error-handler message box. Instead, the system sends the error to the calling thread.
SEM_NOALIGNMENTFAULTEXCEPT → const int
The system automatically fixes memory alignment faults and makes them invisible to the application. It does this for the calling process and any descendant processes. This feature is only supported by certain processor architectures.
SEM_NOGPFAULTERRORBOX → const int
The system does not display the Windows Error Reporting dialog.
SEM_NOOPENFILEERRORBOX → const int
The OpenFile function does not display a message box when it fails to find a file. Instead, the error is returned to the caller. This error mode overrides the OF_PROMPT flag.
SHADEBLENDCAPS → const int
Value that indicates the shading and blending capabilities of the device.
SHUTDOWN_FORCE_OTHERS → const int
All sessions are forcefully logged off. If this flag is not set and users other than the current user are logged on to the computer specified by the lpMachineName parameter, this function fails with a return value of ERROR_SHUTDOWN_USERS_LOGGED_ON.
SHUTDOWN_FORCE_SELF → const int
Specifies that the originating session is logged off forcefully. If this flag is not set, the originating session is shut down interactively, so a shutdown is not guaranteed even if the function returns successfully.
SHUTDOWN_GRACE_OVERRIDE → const int
Overrides the grace period so that the computer is shut down immediately.
SHUTDOWN_HYBRID → const int
Beginning with InitiateShutdown running on Windows 8, you must include the SHUTDOWN_HYBRID flag with one or more of the flags in this table to specify options for the shutdown.
SHUTDOWN_INSTALL_UPDATES → const int
The computer installs any updates before starting the shutdown.
SHUTDOWN_NOREBOOT → const int
The computer is shut down but is not powered down or rebooted.
SHUTDOWN_POWEROFF → const int
The computer is shut down and powered down.
SHUTDOWN_RESTART → const int
The computer is shut down and rebooted.
SHUTDOWN_RESTARTAPPS → const int
The system is rebooted using the ExitWindowsEx function with the EWX_RESTARTAPPS flag. This restarts any applications that have been registered for restart using the RegisterApplicationRestart function.
SIF_ALL → const int
Combines SIF_RANGE, SIF_PAGE, SIF_POS and SIF_TRACKPOS.
SIF_DISABLENOSCROLL → const int
Disables the scroll bar instead of removing it, if the scroll bar's new parameters make the scroll bar unnecessary.
SIF_PAGE → const int
Copies the scroll page to the nPage member of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi.
SIF_POS → const int
Copies the scroll position to the nPos member of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi.
SIF_RANGE → const int
Copies the scroll range to the nMin and nMax members of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi.
SIF_TRACKPOS → const int
Copies the current scroll box tracking position to the nTrackPos member of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi.
SIZE_MAXHIDE → const int
Message is sent to all pop-up windows when some other window is maximized.
SIZE_MAXIMIZED → const int
The window has been maximized.
SIZE_MAXSHOW → const int
Message is sent to all pop-up windows when some other window has been restored to its former size.
SIZE_MINIMIZED → const int
The window has been minimized.
SIZE_RESTORED → const int
The window has been resized, but neither the SIZE_MINIMIZED nor SIZE_MAXIMIZED value applies.
SIZEPALETTE → const int
Number of entries in the system palette. This index is valid only if the device driver sets the RC_PALETTE bit in the RASTERCAPS index and is available only if the driver is compatible with 16-bit Windows.
SM_ARRANGE → const int
The flags that specify how the system arranged minimized windows.
SM_CLEANBOOT → const int
The value that specifies how the system is started.
SM_CMONITORS → const int
The number of display monitors on a desktop.
SM_CMOUSEBUTTONS → const int
The number of buttons on a mouse, or zero if no mouse is installed.
SM_CONVERTIBLESLATEMODE → const int
Reflects the state of the laptop or slate mode, 0 for Slate Mode and non-zero otherwise.
SM_CXBORDER → const int
The width of a window border, in pixels.
SM_CXCURSOR → const int
The width of a cursor, in pixels.
SM_CXDLGFRAME → const int
This value is the same as SM_CXFIXEDFRAME.
SM_CXDOUBLECLK → const int
The width of the rectangle around the location of a first click in a double-click sequence, in pixels. The second click must occur within the rectangle that is defined by SM_CXDOUBLECLK and SM_CYDOUBLECLK for the system to consider the two clicks a double-click.
SM_CXDRAG → const int
The number of pixels on either side of a mouse-down point that the mouse pointer can move before a drag operation begins. This allows the user to click and release the mouse button easily without unintentionally starting a drag operation. If this value is negative, it is subtracted from the left of the mouse-down point and added to the right of it.
SM_CXEDGE → const int
The width of a 3-D border, in pixels.
SM_CXFIXEDFRAME → const int
The thickness of the frame around the perimeter of a window that has a caption but is not sizable, in pixels. SM_CXFIXEDFRAME is the height of the horizontal border, and SM_CYFIXEDFRAME is the width of the vertical border.
SM_CXFOCUSBORDER → const int
The width of the left and right edges of the focus rectangle that the DrawFocusRect draws. This value is in pixels.
SM_CXFRAME → const int
This value is the same as SM_CXSIZEFRAME.
SM_CXFULLSCREEN → const int
The width of the client area for a full-screen window on the primary display monitor, in pixels.
SM_CXHSCROLL → const int
The width of the arrow bitmap on a horizontal scroll bar, in pixels.
SM_CXHTHUMB → const int
The width of the thumb box in a horizontal scroll bar, in pixels.
SM_CXICON → const int
The default width of an icon, in pixels.
SM_CXICONSPACING → const int
The width of a grid cell for items in large icon view, in pixels. Each item fits into a rectangle of size SM_CXICONSPACING by SM_CYICONSPACING when arranged. This value is always greater than or equal to SM_CXICON.
SM_CXMAXIMIZED → const int
The default width, in pixels, of a maximized top-level window on the primary display monitor.
SM_CXMAXTRACK → const int
The default maximum width of a window that has a caption and sizing borders, in pixels. This metric refers to the entire desktop. The user cannot drag the window frame to a size larger than these dimensions.
SM_CXMENUCHECK → const int
The width of the default menu check-mark bitmap, in pixels.
SM_CXMENUSIZE → const int
The width of menu bar buttons, such as the child window close button that is used in the multiple document interface, in pixels.
SM_CXMIN → const int
The minimum width of a window, in pixels.
SM_CXMINIMIZED → const int
The width of a minimized window, in pixels.
SM_CXMINSPACING → const int
The width of a grid cell for a minimized window, in pixels. Each minimized window fits into a rectangle this size when arranged. This value is always greater than or equal to SM_CXMINIMIZED.
SM_CXMINTRACK → const int
The minimum tracking width of a window, in pixels. The user cannot drag the window frame to a size smaller than these dimensions.
SM_CXPADDEDBORDER → const int
The amount of border padding for captioned windows, in pixels.
SM_CXSCREEN → const int
The width of the screen of the primary display monitor, in pixels.
SM_CXSIZE → const int
The width of a button in a window caption or title bar, in pixels.
SM_CXSIZEFRAME → const int
The thickness of the sizing border around the perimeter of a window that can be resized, in pixels. SM_CXSIZEFRAME is the width of the horizontal border, and SM_CYSIZEFRAME is the height of the vertical border.
SM_CXSMICON → const int
The recommended width of a small icon, in pixels. Small icons typically appear in window captions and in small icon view.
SM_CXSMSIZE → const int
The width of small caption buttons, in pixels.
SM_CXVIRTUALSCREEN → const int
The width of the virtual screen, in pixels. The virtual screen is the bounding rectangle of all display monitors. The SM_XVIRTUALSCREEN metric is the coordinates for the left side of the virtual screen.
SM_CXVSCROLL → const int
The width of a vertical scroll bar, in pixels.
SM_CYBORDER → const int
The height of a window border, in pixels.
SM_CYCAPTION → const int
The height of a caption area, in pixels.
SM_CYCURSOR → const int
The height of a cursor, in pixels.
SM_CYDLGFRAME → const int
This value is the same as SM_CYFIXEDFRAME.
SM_CYDOUBLECLK → const int
The height of the rectangle around the location of a first click in a double-click sequence, in pixels. The second click must occur within the rectangle defined by SM_CXDOUBLECLK and SM_CYDOUBLECLK for the system to consider the two clicks a double-click. The two clicks must also occur within a specified time.
SM_CYDRAG → const int
The number of pixels above and below a mouse-down point that the mouse pointer can move before a drag operation begins. This allows the user to click and release the mouse button easily without unintentionally starting a drag operation. If this value is negative, it is subtracted from above the mouse-down point and added below it.
SM_CYEDGE → const int
The height of a 3-D border, in pixels.
SM_CYFIXEDFRAME → const int
The thickness of the frame around the perimeter of a window that has a caption but is not sizable, in pixels. SM_CXFIXEDFRAME is the height of the horizontal border, and SM_CYFIXEDFRAME is the width of the vertical border.
SM_CYFOCUSBORDER → const int
The height of the top and bottom edges of the focus rectangle drawn by DrawFocusRect. This value is in pixels.
SM_CYFRAME → const int
This value is the same as SM_CYSIZEFRAME.
SM_CYFULLSCREEN → const int
The height of the client area for a full-screen window on the primary display monitor, in pixels.
SM_CYHSCROLL → const int
The height of a horizontal scroll bar, in pixels.
SM_CYICON → const int
The default height of an icon, in pixels.
SM_CYICONSPACING → const int
The height of a grid cell for items in large icon view, in pixels. Each item fits into a rectangle of size SM_CXICONSPACING by SM_CYICONSPACING when arranged. This value is always greater than or equal to SM_CYICON.
SM_CYKANJIWINDOW → const int
For double byte character set versions of the system, this is the height of the Kanji window at the bottom of the screen, in pixels.
SM_CYMAXIMIZED → const int
The default height, in pixels, of a maximized top-level window on the primary display monitor.
SM_CYMAXTRACK → const int
The default maximum height of a window that has a caption and sizing borders, in pixels. This metric refers to the entire desktop. The user cannot drag the window frame to a size larger than these dimensions.
SM_CYMENU → const int
The height of a single-line menu bar, in pixels.
SM_CYMENUCHECK → const int
The height of the default menu check-mark bitmap, in pixels.
SM_CYMENUSIZE → const int
The height of menu bar buttons, such as the child window close button that is used in the multiple document interface, in pixels.
SM_CYMIN → const int
The minimum height of a window, in pixels.
SM_CYMINIMIZED → const int
The height of a minimized window, in pixels.
SM_CYMINSPACING → const int
The height of a grid cell for a minimized window, in pixels. Each minimized window fits into a rectangle this size when arranged. This value is always greater than or equal to SM_CYMINIMIZED.
SM_CYMINTRACK → const int
The minimum tracking height of a window, in pixels. The user cannot drag the window frame to a size smaller than these dimensions.
SM_CYSCREEN → const int
The height of the screen of the primary display monitor, in pixels.
SM_CYSIZE → const int
The height of a button in a window caption or title bar, in pixels.
SM_CYSIZEFRAME → const int
The thickness of the sizing border around the perimeter of a window that can be resized, in pixels. SM_CXSIZEFRAME is the width of the horizontal border, and SM_CYSIZEFRAME is the height of the vertical border.
SM_CYSMCAPTION → const int
The height of a small caption, in pixels.
SM_CYSMICON → const int
The recommended height of a small icon, in pixels. Small icons typically appear in window captions and in small icon view.
SM_CYSMSIZE → const int
The height of small caption buttons, in pixels.
SM_CYVIRTUALSCREEN → const int
The height of the virtual screen, in pixels. The virtual screen is the bounding rectangle of all display monitors. The SM_YVIRTUALSCREEN metric is the coordinates for the top of the virtual screen.
SM_CYVSCROLL → const int
The height of the arrow bitmap on a vertical scroll bar, in pixels.
SM_CYVTHUMB → const int
The height of the thumb box in a vertical scroll bar, in pixels.
SM_DBCSENABLED → const int
Nonzero if User32.dll supports DBCS; otherwise, 0.
SM_DEBUG → const int
Nonzero if the debug version of User.exe is installed; otherwise, 0.
SM_DIGITIZER → const int
Nonzero if the current operating system is Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 and the Tablet PC Input service is started; otherwise, 0. The return value is a bitmask that specifies the type of digitizer input supported by the device.
SM_IMMENABLED → const int
Nonzero if Input Method Manager/Input Method Editor features are enabled; otherwise, 0.
SM_MAXIMUMTOUCHES → const int
Nonzero if there are digitizers in the system; otherwise, 0. SM_MAXIMUMTOUCHES returns the aggregate maximum of the maximum number of contacts supported by every digitizer in the system. If the system has only single-touch digitizers, the return value is 1. If the system has multi-touch digitizers, the return value is the number of simultaneous contacts the hardware can provide.
SM_MEDIACENTER → const int
Nonzero if the current operating system is the Windows XP, Media Center Edition, 0 if not.
SM_MENUDROPALIGNMENT → const int
Nonzero if drop-down menus are right-aligned with the corresponding menu-bar item; 0 if the menus are left-aligned.
SM_MIDEASTENABLED → const int
Nonzero if the system is enabled for Hebrew and Arabic languages, 0 if not.
SM_MOUSEHORIZONTALWHEELPRESENT → const int
Nonzero if a mouse with a horizontal scroll wheel is installed; otherwise 0.
SM_MOUSEPRESENT → const int
Nonzero if a mouse is installed; otherwise, 0. This value is rarely zero, because of support for virtual mice and because some systems detect the presence of the port instead of the presence of a mouse.
SM_MOUSEWHEELPRESENT → const int
Nonzero if a mouse with a vertical scroll wheel is installed; otherwise 0.
SM_NETWORK → const int
The least significant bit is set if a network is present; otherwise, it is cleared.
SM_PENWINDOWS → const int
Nonzero if the Microsoft Windows for Pen computing extensions are installed; zero otherwise.
SM_REMOTECONTROL → const int
This system metric is used in a Terminal Services environment to determine if the current Terminal Server session is being remotely controlled. Its value is nonzero if the current session is remotely controlled; otherwise, 0.
SM_REMOTESESSION → const int
This system metric is used in a Terminal Services environment. If the calling process is associated with a Terminal Services client session, the return value is nonzero. If the calling process is associated with the Terminal Services console session, the return value is 0
SM_SAMEDISPLAYFORMAT → const int
Nonzero if all the display monitors have the same color format, otherwise, 0. Two displays can have the same bit depth, but different color formats. For example, the red, green, and blue pixels can be encoded with different numbers of bits, or those bits can be located in different places in a pixel color value.
SM_SECURE → const int
This system metric should be ignored; it always returns 0.
SM_SERVERR2 → const int
The build number if the system is Windows Server 2003 R2; otherwise, 0.
SM_SHOWSOUNDS → const int
Nonzero if the user requires an application to present information visually in situations where it would otherwise present the information only in audible form; otherwise, 0.
SM_SHUTTINGDOWN → const int
Nonzero if the current session is shutting down; otherwise, 0.
SM_SLOWMACHINE → const int
Nonzero if the computer has a low-end (slow) processor; otherwise, 0.
SM_STARTER → const int
Nonzero if the current operating system is Windows 7 Starter Edition, Windows Vista Starter, or Windows XP Starter Edition; otherwise, 0.
SM_SWAPBUTTON → const int
Nonzero if the meanings of the left and right mouse buttons are swapped; otherwise, 0.
SM_SYSTEMDOCKED → const int
Reflects the state of the docking mode, 0 for Undocked Mode and non-zero otherwise.
SM_TABLETPC → const int
Nonzero if the current operating system is the Windows XP Tablet PC edition or if the current operating system is Windows Vista or Windows 7 and the Tablet PC Input service is started; otherwise, 0.
SM_XVIRTUALSCREEN → const int
The coordinates for the left side of the virtual screen. The virtual screen is the bounding rectangle of all display monitors. The SM_CXVIRTUALSCREEN metric is the width of the virtual screen.
SM_YVIRTUALSCREEN → const int
The coordinates for the top of the virtual screen. The virtual screen is the bounding rectangle of all display monitors. The SM_CYVIRTUALSCREEN metric is the height of the virtual screen.
SMTO_ABORTIFHUNG → const int
The function returns without waiting for the time-out period to elapse if the receiving thread appears to not respond or "hangs."
SMTO_BLOCK → const int
Prevents the calling thread from processing any other requests until the function returns.
SMTO_ERRORONEXIT → const int
The function should return 0 if the receiving window is destroyed or its owning thread dies while the message is being processed.
SMTO_NORMAL → const int
The calling thread is not prevented from processing other requests while waiting for the function to return.
SMTO_NOTIMEOUTIFNOTHUNG → const int
The function does not enforce the time-out period as long as the receiving thread is processing messages.
SND_ALIAS → const int
name is a registry alias
SND_ALIAS_ID → const int
alias is a predefined ID
SND_APPLICATION → const int
look for application specific association
SND_ASYNC → const int
play asynchronously
SND_FILENAME → const int
name is file name
SND_LOOP → const int
loop the sound until next sndPlaySound
SND_MEMORY → const int
pszSound points to a memory file
SND_NODEFAULT → const int
silence (!default) if sound not found
SND_NOSTOP → const int
don't stop any currently playing sound
SND_NOWAIT → const int
don't wait if the driver is busy
SND_PURGE → const int
purge non-static events for task
SND_RESOURCE → const int
name is resource name or atom
SND_RING → const int
Treat this as a "ring" from a communications app - don't duck me
SND_SENTRY → const int
Generate a SoundSentry event with this sound
SND_SYNC → const int
play synchronously (default)
SND_SYSTEM → const int
Treat this as a system sound
SPACEPARITY → const int
Space parity.
SPI_GETANIMATION → const int
Retrieves the animation effects associated with user actions. The pvParam parameter must point to an ANIMATIONINFO structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(ANIMATIONINFO).
SPI_GETBEEP → const int
Determines whether the warning beeper is on.
SPI_GETBORDER → const int
Retrieves the border multiplier factor that determines the width of a window's sizing border. The pvParamparameter must point to an integer variable that receives this value.
SPI_GETDEFAULTINPUTLANG → const int
Retrieves the input locale identifier for the system default input language.
SPI_GETDRAGFULLWINDOWS → const int
Determines whether dragging of full windows is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled, or FALSE otherwise.
SPI_GETFILTERKEYS → const int
Retrieves information about the FilterKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a FILTERKEYS structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(FILTERKEYS).
SPI_GETFONTSMOOTHING → const int
Determines whether the font smoothing feature is enabled. This feature uses font antialiasing to make font curves appear smoother by painting pixels at different gray levels.
SPI_GETHIGHCONTRAST → const int
Retrieves information about the HighContrast accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a HIGHCONTRAST structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(HIGHCONTRAST).
SPI_GETICONMETRICS → const int
Retrieves the metrics associated with icons. The pvParam parameter must point to an ICONMETRICS structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(ICONMETRICS).
SPI_GETICONTITLELOGFONT → const int
Retrieves the logical font information for the current icon-title font. The uiParam parameter specifies the size of a LOGFONT structure, and the pvParam parameter must point to the LOGFONT structure to fill in.
SPI_GETICONTITLEWRAP → const int
Determines whether icon-title wrapping is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled, or FALSE otherwise.
SPI_GETKEYBOARDDELAY → const int
Retrieves the keyboard repeat-delay setting, which is a value in the range from 0 (approximately 250 ms delay) through 3 (approximately 1 second delay).
SPI_GETKEYBOARDPREF → const int
Determines whether the user relies on the keyboard instead of the mouse, and wants applications to display keyboard interfaces that would otherwise be hidden. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if the user relies on the keyboard; or FALSE otherwise.
SPI_GETKEYBOARDSPEED → const int
Retrieves the keyboard repeat-speed setting, which is a value in the range from 0 (approximately 2.5 repetitions per second) through 31 (approximately 30 repetitions per second). The actual repeat rates are hardware-dependent and may vary from a linear scale by as much as 20%. The pvParam parameter must point to a DWORD variable that receives the setting.
SPI_GETLOWPOWERTIMEOUT → const int
This parameter is not supported.
SPI_GETMENUDROPALIGNMENT → const int
Determines whether pop-up menus are left-aligned or right-aligned, relative to the corresponding menu-bar item. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if right-aligned, or FALSE otherwise.
SPI_GETMINIMIZEDMETRICS → const int
Retrieves the metrics associated with minimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a MINIMIZEDMETRICS structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(MINIMIZEDMETRICS).
SPI_GETMOUSE → const int
Retrieves the two mouse threshold values and the mouse acceleration. The pvParam parameter must point to an array of three integers that receives these values. See mouse_event for further information.
SPI_GETMOUSEKEYS → const int
Retrieves information about the MouseKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a MOUSEKEYS structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(MOUSEKEYS).
SPI_GETMOUSETRAILS → const int
Determines whether the Mouse Trails feature is enabled. This feature improves the visibility of mouse cursor movements by briefly showing a trail of cursors and quickly erasing them.
SPI_GETNONCLIENTMETRICS → const int
Retrieves the metrics associated with the nonclient area of nonminimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a NONCLIENTMETRICS structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(NONCLIENTMETRICS).
SPI_GETPOWEROFFACTIVE → const int
This parameter is not supported.
SPI_GETPOWEROFFTIMEOUT → const int
This parameter is not supported.
SPI_GETSCREENREADER → const int
Determines whether a screen reviewer utility is running. A screen reviewer utility directs textual information to an output device, such as a speech synthesizer or Braille display. When this flag is set, an application should provide textual information in situations where it would otherwise present the information graphically.
SPI_GETSCREENSAVEACTIVE → const int
Determines whether screen saving is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if screen saving is enabled, or FALSE otherwise.
SPI_GETSCREENSAVETIMEOUT → const int
Retrieves the screen saver time-out value, in seconds. The pvParam parameter must point to an integer variable that receives the value.
SPI_GETTOGGLEKEYS → const int
Retrieves information about the ToggleKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a TOGGLEKEYS structure that receives the information. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(TOGGLEKEYS).
SPI_GETWORKAREA → const int
Retrieves the size of the work area on the primary display monitor. The work area is the portion of the screen not obscured by the system taskbar or by application desktop toolbars. The pvParam parameter must point to a RECT structure that receives the coordinates of the work area, expressed in physical pixel size. Any DPI virtualization mode of the caller has no effect on this output.
SPI_ICONHORIZONTALSPACING → const int
Sets or retrieves the width, in pixels, of an icon cell.
SPI_ICONVERTICALSPACING → const int
Sets or retrieves the height, in pixels, of an icon cell.
SPI_SETANIMATION → const int
Sets the animation effects associated with user actions. The pvParam parameter must point to an ANIMATIONINFO structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(ANIMATIONINFO).
SPI_SETBEEP → const int
Turns the warning beeper on or off. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on, or FALSE for off.
SPI_SETBORDER → const int
Sets the border multiplier factor that determines the width of a window's sizing border. The uiParam parameter specifies the new value.
SPI_SETCURSORS → const int
Reloads the system cursors. Set the uiParam parameter to zero and the pvParam parameter to NULL.
SPI_SETDEFAULTINPUTLANG → const int
Sets the default input language for the system shell and applications.
SPI_SETDESKPATTERN → const int
Sets the current desktop pattern.
SPI_SETDESKWALLPAPER → const int
Sets the desktop wallpaper.
SPI_SETDOUBLECLICKTIME → const int
Sets the double-click time for the mouse to the value of the uiParam parameter. If the uiParam value is greater than 5000 milliseconds, the system sets the double-click time to 5000 milliseconds.
SPI_SETDOUBLECLKHEIGHT → const int
Sets the height of the double-click rectangle to the value of the uiParam parameter.
SPI_SETDOUBLECLKWIDTH → const int
Sets the width of the double-click rectangle to the value of the uiParam parameter.
SPI_SETDRAGFULLWINDOWS → const int
Sets dragging of full windows either on or off. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on, or FALSE for off.
SPI_SETDRAGHEIGHT → const int
Sets the height, in pixels, of the rectangle used to detect the start of a drag operation. Set uiParam to the new value. To retrieve the drag height, call GetSystemMetrics with the SM_CYDRAG flag.
SPI_SETDRAGWIDTH → const int
Sets the width, in pixels, of the rectangle used to detect the start of a drag operation. Set uiParam to the new value. To retrieve the drag width, call GetSystemMetrics with the SM_CXDRAG flag.
SPI_SETFILTERKEYS → const int
Sets the parameters of the FilterKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a FILTERKEYS structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(FILTERKEYS).
SPI_SETFONTSMOOTHING → const int
Enables or disables the font smoothing feature, which uses font antialiasing to make font curves appear smoother by painting pixels at different gray levels.
SPI_SETHIGHCONTRAST → const int
Sets the parameters of the HighContrast accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a HIGHCONTRAST structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(HIGHCONTRAST).
SPI_SETICONMETRICS → const int
Sets the metrics associated with icons. The pvParam parameter must point to an ICONMETRICS structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(ICONMETRICS).
SPI_SETICONS → const int
Reloads the system icons. Set the uiParam parameter to zero and the pvParam parameter to NULL.
SPI_SETICONTITLELOGFONT → const int
Sets the font that is used for icon titles. The uiParam parameter specifies the size of a LOGFONT structure, and the pvParam parameter must point to a LOGFONT structure.
SPI_SETICONTITLEWRAP → const int
Turns icon-title wrapping on or off. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on, or FALSE for off.
SPI_SETKEYBOARDDELAY → const int
Sets the keyboard repeat-delay setting.
SPI_SETKEYBOARDPREF → const int
Sets the keyboard preference. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE if the user relies on the keyboard instead of the mouse, and wants applications to display keyboard interfaces that would otherwise be hidden; uiParam is FALSE otherwise.
SPI_SETKEYBOARDSPEED → const int
Sets the keyboard repeat-speed setting. The uiParam parameter must specify a value in the range from 0 (approximately 2.5 repetitions per second) through 31 (approximately 30 repetitions per second). The actual repeat rates are hardware-dependent and may vary from a linear scale by as much as 20%. If uiParam is greater than 31, the parameter is set to 31.
SPI_SETLANGTOGGLE → const int
Sets the hot key set for switching between input languages.
SPI_SETLOWPOWERACTIVE → const int
This parameter is not supported.
SPI_SETLOWPOWERTIMEOUT → const int
This parameter is not supported.
SPI_SETMENUDROPALIGNMENT → const int
Sets the alignment value of pop-up menus. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for right alignment, or FALSE for left alignment.
SPI_SETMINIMIZEDMETRICS → const int
Sets the metrics associated with minimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a MINIMIZEDMETRICS structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(MINIMIZEDMETRICS).
SPI_SETMOUSE → const int
Sets the two mouse threshold values and the mouse acceleration. The pvParam parameter must point to an array of three integers that specifies these values. See mouse_event for further information.
SPI_SETMOUSEBUTTONSWAP → const int
Swaps or restores the meaning of the left and right mouse buttons. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE to swap the meanings of the buttons, or FALSE to restore their original meanings.
SPI_SETMOUSEKEYS → const int
Sets the parameters of the MouseKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a MOUSEKEYS structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(MOUSEKEYS).
SPI_SETMOUSETRAILS → const int
Enables or disables the Mouse Trails feature, which improves the visibility of mouse cursor movements by briefly showing a trail of cursors and quickly erasing them.
SPI_SETNONCLIENTMETRICS → const int
Sets the metrics associated with the nonclient area of nonminimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a NONCLIENTMETRICS structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(NONCLIENTMETRICS). Also, the lfHeight member of the LOGFONT structure must be a negative value.
SPI_SETPOWEROFFACTIVE → const int
This parameter is not supported.
SPI_SETPOWEROFFTIMEOUT → const int
This parameter is not supported.
SPI_SETSCREENREADER → const int
Determines whether a screen review utility is running. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on, or FALSE for off.
SPI_SETSCREENSAVEACTIVE → const int
Sets the state of the screen saver. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE to activate screen saving, or FALSE to deactivate it.
SPI_SETSCREENSAVETIMEOUT → const int
Sets the screen saver time-out value to the value of the uiParam parameter. This value is the amount of time, in seconds, that the system must be idle before the screen saver activates.
SPI_SETTOGGLEKEYS → const int
Sets the parameters of the ToggleKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a TOGGLEKEYS structure that contains the new parameters. Set the cbSize member of this structure and the uiParam parameter to sizeof(TOGGLEKEYS).
SPI_SETWORKAREA → const int
Sets the size of the work area. The work area is the portion of the screen not obscured by the system taskbar or by application desktop toolbars. The pvParam parameter is a pointer to a RECT structure that specifies the new work area rectangle, expressed in virtual screen coordinates. In a system with multiple display monitors, the function sets the work area of the monitor that contains the specified rectangle.
SS_BITMAP → const int
A bitmap is to be displayed in the static control.
SS_BLACKFRAME → const int
A box with a frame drawn in the same color as the window frames. This color is black in the default color scheme.
SS_BLACKRECT → const int
A rectangle filled with the current window frame color. This color is black in the default color scheme.
SS_CENTER → const int
A simple rectangle and centers the text in the rectangle.
SS_CENTERIMAGE → const int
A bitmap is centered in the static control that contains it.
SS_EDITCONTROL → const int
The static control duplicates the text-displaying characteristics of a multiline edit control.
SS_ELLIPSISMASK → const int
Mask for text ellipsis styles.
SS_ENDELLIPSIS → const int
If the end of a string does not fit in the rectangle, it is truncated and ellipses are added.
SS_ENHMETAFILE → const int
An enhanced metafile is to be displayed in the static control.
SS_ETCHEDFRAME → const int
Draws the frame of the static control using the EDGE_ETCHED edge style.
SS_ETCHEDHORZ → const int
Draws the top and bottom edges of the static control using the EDGE_ETCHED edge style.
SS_ETCHEDVERT → const int
Draws the left and right edges of the static control using the EDGE_ETCHED edge style.
SS_GRAYFRAME → const int
A box with a frame drawn with the same color as the screen background (desktop). This color is gray in the default color scheme.
SS_GRAYRECT → const int
A rectangle filled with the current screen background color. This color is gray in the default color scheme.
SS_ICON → const int
An icon to be displayed in the dialog box.
SS_LEFT → const int
A simple rectangle and left-aligns the text in the rectangle.
SS_LEFTNOWORDWRAP → const int
A simple rectangle and left-aligns the text in the rectangle.
SS_NOPREFIX → const int
Prevents interpretation of any ampersand (&) characters in the control's text as accelerator prefix characters.
SS_NOTIFY → const int
Sends the parent window STN_CLICKED, STN_DBLCLK, STN_DISABLE, and STN_ENABLE notification codes when the user clicks or double-clicks the control.
SS_OWNERDRAW → const int
The owner of the static control is responsible for drawing the control. The owner window receives a WM_DRAWITEM message whenever the control needs to be drawn.
SS_PATHELLIPSIS → const int
Replaces characters in the middle of the string with ellipses so that the result fits in the specified rectangle.
SS_REALSIZECONTROL → const int
Adjusts the bitmap to fit the size of the static control.
SS_REALSIZEIMAGE → const int
Specifies that the actual resource width is used and the icon is loaded using LoadImage. SS_REALSIZEIMAGE is always used in conjunction with SS_ICON.
SS_RIGHT → const int
A simple rectangle and right-aligns the text in the rectangle.
SS_RIGHTJUST → const int
The lower right corner of a static control with the SS_BITMAP or SS_ICON style is to remain fixed when the control is resized.
SS_SIMPLE → const int
A simple rectangle and displays a single line of left-aligned text in the rectangle.
SS_SUNKEN → const int
Draws a half-sunken border around a static control.
SS_TYPEMASK → const int
A composite style bit that results from using the OR operator on SS_* style bits.
SS_USERITEM → const int
Specifies a user-defined item.
SS_WHITEFRAME → const int
A box with a frame drawn with the same color as the window background. This color is white in the default color scheme.
SS_WHITERECT → const int
A rectangle filled with the current window background color. This color is white in the default color scheme.
SS_WORDELLIPSIS → const int
Truncates any word that does not fit in the rectangle and adds ellipses. Using this style will force the control s text to be on one line with no word wrap.
STANDARD_RIGHTS_ALL → const int
Combines DELETE, READ_CONTROL, WRITE_DAC, WRITE_OWNER, and SYNCHRONIZE access.
STANDARD_RIGHTS_EXECUTE → const int
Currently defined to equal READ_CONTROL.
STANDARD_RIGHTS_READ → const int
Currently defined to equal READ_CONTROL.
STANDARD_RIGHTS_REQUIRED → const int
Combines DELETE, READ_CONTROL, WRITE_DAC, and WRITE_OWNER access.
STANDARD_RIGHTS_WRITE → const int
Currently defined to equal READ_CONTROL.
STARTF_FORCEOFFFEEDBACK → const int
Indicates that the feedback cursor is forced off while the process is starting. The Normal Select cursor is displayed.
STARTF_FORCEONFEEDBACK → const int
Indicates that the cursor is in feedback mode for two seconds after CreateProcess is called. The Working in Background cursor is displayed (see the Pointers tab in the Mouse control panel utility).
STARTF_PREVENTPINNING → const int
Indicates that any windows created by the process cannot be pinned on the taskbar.
STARTF_RUNFULLSCREEN → const int
Indicates that the process should be run in full-screen mode, rather than in windowed mode. This flag is only valid for console applications running on an x86 computer.
STARTF_TITLEISAPPID → const int
The lpTitle member contains an AppUserModelID. This identifier controls how the taskbar and Start menu present the application, and enables it to be associated with the correct shortcuts and Jump Lists. Generally, applications will use the SetCurrentProcessExplicitAppUserModelID and GetCurrentProcessExplicitAppUserModelID functions instead of setting this flag.
STARTF_TITLEISLINKNAME → const int
The lpTitle member contains the path of the shortcut file (.lnk) that the user invoked to start this process. This is typically set by the shell when a .lnk file pointing to the launched application is invoked. Most applications will not need to set this value.
STARTF_UNTRUSTEDSOURCE → const int
The command line came from an untrusted source.
STARTF_USECOUNTCHARS → const int
The dwXCountChars and dwYCountChars members contain additional information.
STARTF_USEFILLATTRIBUTE → const int
The dwFillAttribute member contains additional information.
STARTF_USEHOTKEY → const int
The hStdInput member contains additional information.
STARTF_USEPOSITION → const int
The dwX and dwY members contain additional information.
STARTF_USESHOWWINDOW → const int
The wShowWindow member contains additional information.
STARTF_USESIZE → const int
The dwXSize and dwYSize members contain additional information.
STARTF_USESTDHANDLES → const int
The hStdInput, hStdOutput, and hStdError members contain additional information.
STATUS_INFO_LENGTH_MISMATCH → const int
The specified information record length does not match the length that is required for the specified information class.
STATUS_INVALID_HANDLE → const int
An invalid HANDLE was specified.
STATUS_INVALID_INFO_CLASS → const int
The specified information class is not a valid information class for the specified object.
STATUS_NOT_IMPLEMENTED → const int
The requested operation is not implemented.
STATUS_SUCCESS → const int
The operation completed successfully.
STATUS_UNSUCCESSFUL → const int
The requested operation was unsuccessful.
STD_ERROR_HANDLE → const int
The standard error device. Initially, this is the active console screen buffer, CONOUT$.
STD_INPUT_HANDLE → const int
The standard input device. Initially, this is the console input buffer, CONIN$.
STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE → const int
The standard output device. Initially, this is the active console screen buffer, CONOUT$.
STILL_ACTIVE → const int
The thread is still active.
STRETCH_ANDSCANS → const int
Performs a Boolean AND operation using the color values for the eliminated and existing pixels. If the bitmap is a monochrome bitmap, this mode preserves black pixels at the expense of white pixels.
STRETCH_DELETESCANS → const int
Deletes the pixels. This mode deletes all eliminated lines of pixels without trying to preserve their information.
STRETCH_HALFTONE → const int
Maps pixels from the source rectangle into blocks of pixels in the destination rectangle. The average color over the destination block of pixels approximates the color of the source pixels.
STRETCH_ORSCANS → const int
Performs a Boolean OR operation using the color values for the eliminated and existing pixels. If the bitmap is a monochrome bitmap, this mode preserves white pixels at the expense of black pixels.
SW_FORCEMINIMIZE → const int
Minimizes a window, even if the thread that owns the window is not responding.
SW_HIDE → const int
Hides the window and activates another window.
SW_MAXIMIZE → const int
Maximizes the specified window.
SW_MINIMIZE → const int
Minimizes the specified window and activates the next top-level window in the Z order.
SW_NORMAL → const int
If the window is minimized or maximized, the system restores it to its original size and position.
SW_RESTORE → const int
Activates and displays the window.
SW_SHOW → const int
Activates the window and displays it in its current size and position.
SW_SHOWDEFAULT → const int
Sets the show state based on the SW_ value specified in the STARTUPINFO structure passed to the CreateProcess function by the program that started the application.
SW_SHOWMAXIMIZED → const int
Activates the window and displays it as a maximized window.
SW_SHOWMINIMIZED → const int
Activates the window and displays it as a minimized window.
SW_SHOWMINNOACTIVE → const int
Displays the window as a minimized window.
SW_SHOWNA → const int
Displays the window in its current size and position.
SW_SHOWNOACTIVATE → const int
Displays a window in its most recent size and position.
SW_SHOWNORMAL → const int
Activates and displays a window.
SWP_ASYNCWINDOWPOS → const int
If the calling thread and the thread that owns the window are attached to different input queues, the system posts the request to the thread that owns the window. This prevents the calling thread from blocking its execution while other threads process the request.
SWP_DEFERERASE → const int
Prevents generation of the WM_SYNCPAINT message.
SWP_DRAWFRAME → const int
Draws a frame (defined in the window's class description) around the window.
SWP_FRAMECHANGED → const int
Applies new frame styles set using the SetWindowLong function. Sends a WM_NCCALCSIZE message to the window, even if the window's size is not being changed. If this flag is not specified, WM_NCCALCSIZE is sent only when the window's size is being changed.
SWP_HIDEWINDOW → const int
Hides the window.
SWP_NOACTIVATE → const int
Does not activate the window. If this flag is not set, the window is activated and moved to the top of either the topmost or non-topmost group (depending on the setting of the hWndInsertAfter parameter).
SWP_NOCOPYBITS → const int
Discards the entire contents of the client area. If this flag is not specified, the valid contents of the client area are saved and copied back into the client area after the window is sized or repositioned.
SWP_NOMOVE → const int
Retains the current position (ignores X and Y parameters).
SWP_NOOWNERZORDER → const int
Does not change the owner window's position in the Z order.
SWP_NOREDRAW → const int
Does not redraw changes. If this flag is set, no repainting of any kind occurs. This applies to the client area, the nonclient area (including the title bar and scroll bars), and any part of the parent window uncovered as a result of the window being moved. When this flag is set, the application must explicitly invalidate or redraw any parts of the window and parent window that need redrawing.
SWP_NOREPOSITION → const int
Same as the SWP_NOOWNERZORDER flag.
SWP_NOSENDCHANGING → const int
Prevents the window from receiving the WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING message.
SWP_NOSIZE → const int
Retains the current size (ignores the cx and cy parameters).
SWP_NOZORDER → const int
Retains the current Z order (ignores the hWndInsertAfter parameter).
SWP_SHOWWINDOW → const int
Displays the window.
SYMFLAG_CLR_TOKEN → const int
The symbol is a CLR token.
SYMFLAG_CONSTANT → const int
The symbol is a constant.
SYMFLAG_EXPORT → const int
The symbol is from the export table.
SYMFLAG_FORWARDER → const int
The symbol is a forwarder.
SYMFLAG_FRAMEREL → const int
Offsets are frame relative.
SYMFLAG_FUNCTION → const int
The symbol is a known function.
SYMFLAG_ILREL → const int
The symbol address is an offset relative to the beginning of the intermediate language block. This applies to managed code only.
SYMFLAG_LOCAL → const int
The symbol is a local variable.
SYMFLAG_METADATA → const int
The symbol is managed metadata.
SYMFLAG_PARAMETER → const int
The symbol is a parameter.
SYMFLAG_REGISTER → const int
The symbol is a register. The Register member is used.
SYMFLAG_REGREL → const int
Offsets are register relative.
SYMFLAG_SLOT → const int
The symbol is a managed code slot.
SYMFLAG_THUNK → const int
The symbol is a thunk.
SYMFLAG_TLSREL → const int
The symbol is an offset into the TLS data area.
SYMFLAG_VALUEPRESENT → const int
The Value member is used.
SYMFLAG_VIRTUAL → const int
The symbol is a virtual symbol created by the SymAddSymbol function.
SYMOPT_ALLOW_ABSOLUTE_SYMBOLS → const int
This symbol option allows DbgHelp to read symbols that are stored at an absolute address in memory. This option is not needed in the vast majority of cases.
SYMOPT_ALLOW_ZERO_ADDRESS → const int
If there is both an uncompressed and a compressed file available, favor the compressed file. This option is good for slow connections.
SYMOPT_AUTO_PUBLICS → const int
This symbol option causes DbgHelp to search the public symbol table in a .pdb file only as a last resort. If any matches are found when searching the private symbol data, the public symbols will not be searched. This improves symbol search speed.
SYMOPT_CASE_INSENSITIVE → const int
This symbol option causes all searches for symbol names to be case-insensitive.
SYMOPT_DEBUG → const int
This symbol option turns on noisy symbol loading. This instructs the debugger to display information about its search for symbols.
SYMOPT_DEFERRED_LOADS → const int
This symbol option is called deferred symbol loading or lazy symbol loading. When it is active, symbols are not actually loaded when the target modules are loaded. Instead, symbols are loaded by the debugger as they are needed.
SYMOPT_DISABLE_SYMSRV_AUTODETECT → const int
Disables the auto-detection of symbol server stores in the symbol path, even without the "SRV*" designation, maintaining compatibility with previous behavior.
SYMOPT_EXACT_SYMBOLS → const int
This symbol option causes the debugger to perform a strict evaluation of all symbol files.
SYMOPT_FAIL_CRITICAL_ERRORS → const int
This symbol option causes file access error dialog boxes to be suppressed.
SYMOPT_FAVOR_COMPRESSED → const int
If there is both an uncompressed and a compressed file available, favor the compressed file. This option is good for slow connections.
SYMOPT_FLAT_DIRECTORY → const int
Symbols are stored in the root directory of the default downstream store.
SYMOPT_IGNORE_CVREC → const int
This symbol option causes the symbol handler to ignore the CV record in the loaded image header when searching for symbols.
SYMOPT_IGNORE_IMAGEDIR → const int
Ignore the image directory.
SYMOPT_IGNORE_NT_SYMPATH → const int
This symbol option causes the debugger to ignore the environment variable settings for the symbol path and the executable image path.
SYMOPT_INCLUDE_32BIT_MODULES → const int
When debugging on 64-bit Windows, include any 32-bit modules.
SYMOPT_LOAD_ANYTHING → const int
This symbol option reduces the pickiness of the symbol handler when it is attempting to match symbols.
SYMOPT_LOAD_LINES → const int
This symbol option allows line number information to be read from source files. This option must be on for source debugging to work correctly.
SYMOPT_NO_CPP → const int
This symbol option turns off C++ translation. When this symbol option is set, :: is replaced by __ in all symbols.
This symbol option prevents DbgHelp from searching the disk for a copy of the image when symbols are loaded.
SYMOPT_NO_PROMPTS → const int
This symbol option suppresses authentication dialog boxes from the proxy server. This may result in SymSrv being unable to access a symbol store on the internet.
SYMOPT_NO_PUBLICS → const int
This symbol option prevents DbgHelp from searching the public symbol table. This can make symbol enumeration and symbol searches much faster. If you are concerned solely with search speed, the SYMOPT_AUTO_PUBLICS option is generally preferable to this one.
SYMOPT_NO_UNQUALIFIED_LOADS → const int
This symbol option disables the symbol handler's automatic loading of modules. When this option is set and the debugger attempts to match a symbol, it will only search modules which have already been loaded.
SYMOPT_OMAP_FIND_NEAREST → const int
When code has been optimized and there is no symbol at the expected location, this option causes the nearest symbol to be used instead.
SYMOPT_OVERWRITE → const int
Overwrite the downlevel store from the symbol store.
SYMOPT_PUBLICS_ONLY → const int
This symbol option causes DbgHelp to ignore private symbol data, and search only the public symbol table for symbol information.
SYMOPT_SECURE → const int
(Kernel mode only) This symbol option indicates whether Secure Mode is active.
SYMOPT_UNDNAME → const int
This symbol option causes public symbol names to be undecorated when they are displayed, and causes searches for symbol names to ignore symbol decorations. Private symbol names are never decorated, regardless of whether this option is active.
SYNCHRONIZE → const int
The right to use the object for synchronization. This enables a thread to wait until the object is in the signaled state.
TECHNOLOGY → const int
Device technology
TEXTCAPS → const int
Value that indicates the text capabilities of the device.
TIME_BYTES → const int
Current byte offset from beginning of the file.
TIME_MIDI → const int
MIDI time.
TIME_MS → const int
Time in milliseconds.
TIME_SAMPLES → const int
Number of waveform-audio samples.
TIME_SMPTE → const int
SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) time.
TIME_TICKS → const int
Ticks within a MIDI stream.
TMT_CAPTIONFONT → const int
The font used by window captions.
TMT_ICONTITLEFONT → const int
The font used for icons.
TMT_MENUFONT → const int
The font used by menus.
TMT_MSGBOXFONT → const int
The font used to display messages in a message box.
TMT_SMALLCAPTIONFONT → const int
The font used by window small captions.
TMT_STATUSFONT → const int
The font used in status messages.
TOKEN_ADJUST_DEFAULT → const int
Required to change the default owner, primary group, or DACL of an access token.
TOKEN_ADJUST_GROUPS → const int
Required to adjust the attributes of the groups in an access token.
TOKEN_ADJUST_PRIVILEGES → const int
Required to enable or disable the privileges in an access token.
TOKEN_ADJUST_SESSIONID → const int
Required to adjust the session ID of an access token. The SE_TCB_NAME privilege is required.
TOKEN_ALL_ACCESS → const int
Combines all possible access rights for a token.
TOKEN_ASSIGN_PRIMARY → const int
Required to attach a primary token to a process. The SE_ASSIGNPRIMARYTOKEN_NAME privilege is also required to accomplish this task.
TOKEN_DUPLICATE → const int
Required to duplicate an access token.
TOKEN_EXECUTE → const int
Same as STANDARD_RIGHTS_EXECUTE.
TOKEN_IMPERSONATE → const int
Required to attach an impersonation access token to a process.
TOKEN_QUERY → const int
Required to query an access token.
TOKEN_QUERY_SOURCE → const int
Required to query the source of an access token.
TOKEN_READ → const int
Combines STANDARD_RIGHTS_READ and TOKEN_QUERY.
TOKEN_WRITE → const int
Combines STANDARD_RIGHTS_WRITE, TOKEN_ADJUST_PRIVILEGES, TOKEN_ADJUST_GROUPS, and TOKEN_ADJUST_DEFAULT.
TPM_BOTTOMALIGN → const int
Positions the shortcut menu so that its bottom side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the y parameter.
TPM_CENTERALIGN → const int
Centers the shortcut menu horizontally relative to the coordinate specified by the x parameter.
TPM_HORIZONTAL → const int
If the menu cannot be shown at the specified location without overlapping the excluded rectangle, the system tries to accommodate the requested horizontal alignment before the requested vertical alignment.
TPM_HORNEGANIMATION → const int
Animates the menu from right to left.
TPM_HORPOSANIMATION → const int
Animates the menu from left to right.
TPM_LAYOUTRTL → const int
For right-to-left text layout, use TPM_LAYOUTRTL. By default, the text layout is left-to-right.
TPM_LEFTALIGN → const int
Positions the shortcut menu so that its left side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the x parameter.
TPM_LEFTBUTTON → const int
The user can select menu items with only the left mouse button.
TPM_NOANIMATION → const int
Displays menu without animation.
TPM_NONOTIFY → const int
The function does not send notification messages when the user clicks a menu item.
TPM_RECURSE → const int
Use the TPM_RECURSE flag to display a menu when another menu is already displayed. This is intended to support context menus within a menu.
TPM_RETURNCMD → const int
The function returns the menu item identifier of the user's selection in the return value.
TPM_RIGHTALIGN → const int
Positions the shortcut menu so that its right side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the x parameter.
TPM_RIGHTBUTTON → const int
The user can select menu items with both the left and right mouse buttons.
TPM_TOPALIGN → const int
Positions the shortcut menu so that its top side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the y parameter.
TPM_VCENTERALIGN → const int
Centers the shortcut menu vertically relative to the coordinate specified by the y parameter.
TPM_VERNEGANIMATION → const int
Animates the menu from bottom to top.
TPM_VERPOSANIMATION → const int
Animates the menu from top to bottom.
TPM_VERTICAL → const int
If the menu cannot be shown at the specified location without overlapping the excluded rectangle, the system tries to accommodate the requested vertical alignment before the requested horizontal alignment.
TPM_WORKAREA → const int
Restricts the pop-up window to within the work area.
TRUE → const int
Boolean true value returned from the Win32 API
TRUNCATE_EXISTING → const int
Opens a file and truncates it so that its size is zero bytes, only if it exists.
TWOSTOPBITS → const int
2 stop bits.
UDS_ALIGNLEFT → const int
Positions the up-down control next to the left edge of the buddy window. The buddy window is moved to the right, and its width is decreased to accommodate the width of the up-down control.
UDS_ALIGNRIGHT → const int
Positions the up-down control next to the right edge of the buddy window. The width of the buddy window is decreased to accommodate the width of the up-down control.
UDS_ARROWKEYS → const int
Causes the up-down control to increment and decrement the position when the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys are pressed.
UDS_AUTOBUDDY → const int
Automatically selects the previous window in the z-order as the up-down control's buddy window.
UDS_HORZ → const int
Causes the up-down control's arrows to point left and right instead of up and down.
UDS_HOTTRACK → const int
Causes the control to exhibit "hot tracking" behavior. That is, it highlights the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW on the control as the pointer passes over them.
UDS_NOTHOUSANDS → const int
Does not insert a thousands separator between every three decimal digits.
UDS_SETBUDDYINT → const int
Causes the up-down control to set the text of the buddy window (using the WM_SETTEXT message) when the position changes. The text consists of the position formatted as a decimal or hexadecimal string.
UDS_WRAP → const int
Causes the position to "wrap" if it is incremented or decremented beyond the ending or beginning of the range.
UIA_AcceleratorKeyPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AcceleratorKey property, which is a string containing the accelerator key (also called shortcut key) combinations for the automation element.
UIA_AccessKeyPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AccessKey property, which is a string containing the access key character for the automation element.
UIA_AnnotationAnnotationTypeIdPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AnnotationTypeId property of the Annotation control pattern.
UIA_AnnotationAnnotationTypeNamePropertyId → const int
Identifies the AnnotationTypeName property of the Annotation control pattern.
UIA_AnnotationAuthorPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Author property of the Annotation control pattern.
UIA_AnnotationDateTimePropertyId → const int
Identifies the DateTime property of the Annotation control pattern.
UIA_AnnotationObjectsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AnnotationObjects property, which is a list of annotation objects in a document, such as comment, header, footer, and so on.
UIA_AnnotationPatternId → const int
Identifies the Annotation control pattern.
UIA_AnnotationTargetPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Target property of the Annotation control pattern.
UIA_AnnotationTypesPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AnnotationTypes property, which is a list of the types of annotations in a document, such as comment, header, footer, and so on.
UIA_AppBarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the AppBar control type.
UIA_AriaPropertiesPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AriaProperties property, which is a formatted string containing the Accessible Rich Internet Application (ARIA) property information for the automation element.
UIA_AriaRolePropertyId → const int
Identifies the AriaRole property, which is a string containing the Accessible Rich Internet Application (ARIA) role information for the automation element.
UIA_AutomationIdPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AutomationId property, which is a string containing the UI Automation identifier (ID) for the automation element.
UIA_BoundingRectanglePropertyId → const int
Identifies the BoundingRectangle property, which specifies the coordinates of the rectangle that completely encloses the automation element.
UIA_ButtonControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Button control type.
UIA_CalendarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Calendar control type.
UIA_CenterPointPropertyId → const int
Identifies the CenterPoint property, which specifies the center X and Y point coordinates of the automation element.
UIA_CheckBoxControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the CheckBox control type.
UIA_ClassNamePropertyId → const int
Identifies the ClassName property, which is a string containing the class name for the automation element as assigned by the control developer.
UIA_ClickablePointPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ClickablePoint property, which is a point on the automation element that can be clicked.
UIA_ComboBoxControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the ComboBox control type.
UIA_ControllerForPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ControllerFor property, which is an array of automation elements that are manipulated by the automation element that supports this property.
UIA_ControlTypePropertyId → const int
Identifies the ControlType property, which is a class that identifies the type of the automation element.
UIA_CulturePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Culture property, which contains a locale identifier for the automation element (for example, 0x0409 for "en-US" or English (United States)).
UIA_CustomControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Custom control type.
UIA_CustomNavigationPatternId → const int
Identifies the CustomNavigation control pattern.
UIA_DataGridControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the DataGrid control type.
UIA_DataItemControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the DataItem control type.
UIA_DescribedByPropertyId → const int
Identifies the DescribedBy property, which is an array of elements that provide more information about the automation element.
UIA_DockDockPositionPropertyId → const int
Identifies the DockPosition property of the Dock control pattern.
UIA_DockPatternId → const int
Identifies the Dock control pattern.
UIA_DocumentControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Document control type.
UIA_DragDropEffectPropertyId → const int
Identifies the DropEffect property of the Drag control pattern.
UIA_DragDropEffectsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the DropEffects property of the Drag control pattern.
UIA_DragGrabbedItemsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the GrabbedItems property of the Drag control pattern.
UIA_DragIsGrabbedPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsGrabbed property of the Drag control pattern.
UIA_DragPatternId → const int
Identifies the Drag control pattern.
UIA_DropTargetDropTargetEffectPropertyId → const int
Identifies the DropTargetEffect property of the DropTarget control pattern.
UIA_DropTargetDropTargetEffectsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the DropTargetEffects property of the DropTarget control pattern.
UIA_DropTargetPatternId → const int
Identifies the DropTarget control pattern.
UIA_E_ELEMENTNOTAVAILABLE → const int
Indicates that a method was called on a virtualized element, or on an element that no longer exists, usually because it has been destroyed.
UIA_E_ELEMENTNOTENABLED → const int
Indicates that a method that requires an enabled element, such as Select or Expand, was called on an element that was disabled.
UIA_E_INVALIDOPERATION → const int
Indicates that the method attempted an operation that was not valid.
UIA_E_NOCLICKABLEPOINT → const int
Indicates that the GetClickablePoint method was called on an element that has no clickable point.
UIA_E_NOTSUPPORTED → const int
Indicates that the provider explicitly does not support the specified property or control pattern. UI Automation will return this error code to the caller without attempting to provide a default value or falling back to another provider.
UIA_E_PROXYASSEMBLYNOTLOADED → const int
Indicates that a problem occurred when loading an assembly that contains a client-side (proxy) provider.
UIA_E_TIMEOUT → const int
Indicates that the time allotted for a process or operation has expired.
UIA_EditControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Edit control type.
UIA_ExpandCollapseExpandCollapseStatePropertyId → const int
Identifies the ExpandCollapseState property of the ExpandCollapse control pattern.
UIA_ExpandCollapsePatternId → const int
Identifies the ExpandCollapse control pattern.
UIA_FillColorPropertyId → const int
Identifies the FillColor property, which specifies the color used to fill the automation element. This attribute is specified as a COLORREF, a 32-bit value used to specify an RGB or RGBA color.
UIA_FillTypePropertyId → const int
Identifies the FillType property, which specifies the pattern used to fill the automation element, such as none, color, gradient, picture, pattern, and so on.
UIA_FlowsFromPropertyId → const int
Identifies the FlowsFrom property, which is an array of automation elements that suggests the reading order before the current automation element.
UIA_FlowsToPropertyId → const int
Identifies the FlowsTo property, which is an array of automation elements that suggests the reading order after the current automation element.
UIA_FrameworkIdPropertyId → const int
Identifies the FrameworkId property, which is a string containing the name of the underlying UI framework that the automation element belongs to.
UIA_FullDescriptionPropertyId → const int
Identifies the FullDescription property, which exposes a localized string that can contain extended description text for an element.
UIA_GridColumnCountPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ColumnCount property of the Grid control pattern.
UIA_GridItemColumnPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Column property of the GridItem control pattern.
UIA_GridItemColumnSpanPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ColumnSpan property of the GridItem control pattern.
UIA_GridItemContainingGridPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ContainingGrid property of the GridItem control pattern.
UIA_GridItemPatternId → const int
Identifies the GridItem control pattern.
UIA_GridItemRowPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Row property of the GridItem control pattern.
UIA_GridItemRowSpanPropertyId → const int
Identifies the RowSpan property of the GridItem control pattern.
UIA_GridPatternId → const int
Identifies the Grid control pattern.
UIA_GridRowCountPropertyId → const int
Identifies the RowCount property of the Grid control pattern.
UIA_GroupControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Group control type.
UIA_HasKeyboardFocusPropertyId → const int
Identifies the HasKeyboardFocus property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the automation element has keyboard focus.
UIA_HeaderControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Header control type.
UIA_HeaderItemControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the HeaderItem control type.
UIA_HeadingLevelPropertyId → const int
Identifies the HeadingLevel property, which indicates the heading level of a UI Automation element.
UIA_HelpTextPropertyId → const int
Identifies the HelpText property, which is a help text string associated with the automation element.
UIA_HyperlinkControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Hyperlink control type.
UIA_ImageControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Image control type.
UIA_InvokePatternId → const int
Identifies the Invoke control pattern.
UIA_IsAnnotationPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsAnnotationPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Annotation control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsContentElementPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsContentElement property, which is a Boolean value that specifies whether the element appears in the content view of the automation element tree.
UIA_IsControlElementPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsControlElement property, which is a Boolean value that specifies whether the element appears in the control view of the automation element tree.
UIA_IsCustomNavigationPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsCustomNavigationPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the CustomNavigation control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsDataValidForFormPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsDataValidForForm property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the entered or selected value is valid for the form rule associated with the automation element.
UIA_IsDialogPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsDialog property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the automation element is a dialog window.
UIA_IsDockPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsDockPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Dock control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsDragPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsDragPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Drag control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsDropTargetPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsDropTargetPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the DropTarget control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsEnabledPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsEnabled property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the UI item referenced by the automation element is enabled and can be interacted with.
UIA_IsExpandCollapsePatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsExpandCollapsePatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the ExpandCollapse control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsGridItemPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsGridItemPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the GridItem control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsGridPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsGridPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Grid control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsInvokePatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsInvokePatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Invoke control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsItemContainerPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsItemContainerPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the ItemContainer control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsKeyboardFocusablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsKeyboardFocusable property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the automation element can accept keyboard focus.
UIA_IsLegacyIAccessiblePatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsLegacyIAccessiblePatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the LegacyIAccessible control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsMultipleViewPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsMultipleViewPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the MultipleView control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsObjectModelPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsObjectModelPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the ObjectModel control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsOffscreenPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsOffscreen property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the automation element is entirely scrolled out of view or collapsed out of view.
UIA_IsPasswordPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsPassword property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the automation element contains protected content or a password.
UIA_IsPeripheralPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsPeripheral property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the automation element represents peripheral UI.
UIA_IsRangeValuePatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsRangeValuePatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the RangeValue control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsRequiredForFormPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsRequiredForForm property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the automation element is required to be filled out on a form.
UIA_IsScrollItemPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsScrollItemPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the ScrollItem control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsScrollPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsScrollPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Scroll control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsSelectionItemPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsSelectionItemPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the SelectionItem control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsSelectionPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsSelectionPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Selection control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsSpreadsheetItemPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsSpreadsheetItemPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the SpreadsheetItem control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsSpreadsheetPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsSpreadsheetPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Spreadsheet control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsStylesPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsStylesPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Styles control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsSynchronizedInputPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsSynchronizedInputPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the SynchronizedInput control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTableItemPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTableItemPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the TableItem control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTablePatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTablePatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Table control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTextChildPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTextChildPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the TextChild control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTextEditPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTextEditPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the TextEdit control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTextPattern2AvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTextPattern2Available property, which indicates whether version two of the Text control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTextPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTextPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Text control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTogglePatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTogglePatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Toggle control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTransformPattern2AvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTransformPattern2Available property, which indicates whether version two of the Transform control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsTransformPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTransformPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Transform control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsValuePatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsValuePatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Value control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsVirtualizedItemPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsVirtualizedItemPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the VirtualizedItem control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_IsWindowPatternAvailablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsWindowPatternAvailable property, which indicates whether the Window control pattern is available for the automation element.
UIA_ItemContainerPatternId → const int
Identifies the ItemContainer control pattern.
UIA_ItemStatusPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ItemStatus property, which is a text string describing the status of an item of the automation element.
UIA_ItemTypePropertyId → const int
Identifies the ItemType property, which is a text string describing the type of the automation element.
UIA_LabeledByPropertyId → const int
Identifies the LabeledBy property, which is an automation element that contains the text label for this element.
UIA_LandmarkTypePropertyId → const int
Identifies the LandmarkType property, which is a Landmark Type Identifier associated with an element.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleChildIdPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ChildId property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleDefaultActionPropertyId → const int
Identifies the DefaultAction property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleDescriptionPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Description property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleHelpPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Help property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleKeyboardShortcutPropertyId → const int
Identifies the KeyboardShortcut property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleNamePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Name property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessiblePatternId → const int
Identifies the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleRolePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Role property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleSelectionPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Selection property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleStatePropertyId → const int
Identifies the State property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LegacyIAccessibleValuePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Value property of the LegacyIAccessible control pattern.
UIA_LevelPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Level property, which is a 1-based integer associated with an automation element.
UIA_ListControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the List control type.
UIA_ListItemControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the ListItem control type.
UIA_LiveSettingPropertyId → const int
Identifies the LiveSetting property, which is supported by an automation element that represents a live region.
UIA_LocalizedControlTypePropertyId → const int
Identifies the LocalizedControlType property, which is a text string describing the type of control that the automation element represents.
UIA_LocalizedLandmarkTypePropertyId → const int
Identifies the LocalizedLandmarkType, which is a text string describing the type of landmark that the automation element represents.
UIA_MenuBarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the MenuBar control type.
UIA_MenuControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Menu control type.
UIA_MenuItemControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the MenuItem control type.
UIA_MultipleViewCurrentViewPropertyId → const int
Identifies the CurrentView property of the MultipleView control pattern.
UIA_MultipleViewPatternId → const int
Identifies the MultipleView control pattern.
UIA_MultipleViewSupportedViewsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the SupportedViews property of the MultipleView control pattern.
UIA_NamePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Name property, which is a string that holds the name of the automation element.
UIA_NativeWindowHandlePropertyId → const int
Identifies the NativeWindowHandle property, which is an integer that represents the handle (HWND) of the automation element window, if it exists; otherwise, this property is 0.
UIA_ObjectModelPatternId → const int
Identifies the ObjectModel control pattern.
UIA_OptimizeForVisualContentPropertyId → const int
Identifies the OptimizeForVisualContent property, which is a Boolean value that indicates whether the provider exposes only elements that are visible.
UIA_OrientationPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Orientation property, which indicates the orientation of the control represented by the automation element.
UIA_OutlineColorPropertyId → const int
Identifies the OutlineColor property, which specifies the color used for the outline of the automation element.
UIA_OutlineThicknessPropertyId → const int
Identifies the OutlineThickness property, which specifies the width for the outline of the automation element.
UIA_PaneControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Pane control type.
UIA_PositionInSetPropertyId → const int
Identifies the PositionInSet property, which is a 1-based integer associated with an automation element.
UIA_ProcessIdPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ProcessId property, which is an integer representing the process identifier (ID) of the automation element.
UIA_ProgressBarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the ProgressBar control type.
UIA_ProviderDescriptionPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ProviderDescription property, which is a formatted string containing the source information of the UI Automation provider for the automation element, including proxy information.
UIA_RadioButtonControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the RadioButton control type.
UIA_RangeValueIsReadOnlyPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsReadOnly property of the RangeValue control pattern.
UIA_RangeValueLargeChangePropertyId → const int
Identifies the LargeChange property of the RangeValue control pattern.
UIA_RangeValueMaximumPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Maximum property of the RangeValue control pattern.
UIA_RangeValueMinimumPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Minimum property of the RangeValue control pattern.
UIA_RangeValuePatternId → const int
Identifies the RangeValue control pattern.
UIA_RangeValueSmallChangePropertyId → const int
Identifies the SmallChange property of the RangeValue control pattern.
UIA_RangeValueValuePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Value property of the RangeValue control pattern.
UIA_RotationPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Rotation property, which specifies the angle of rotation in unspecified units.
UIA_RuntimeIdPropertyId → const int
Identifies the RuntimeId property, which is an array of integers representing the identifier for an automation element.
UIA_ScrollBarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the ScrollBar control type.
UIA_ScrollHorizontallyScrollablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the HorizontallyScrollable property of the Scroll control pattern.
UIA_ScrollHorizontalScrollPercentPropertyId → const int
Identifies the HorizontalScrollPercent property of the Scroll control pattern.
UIA_ScrollHorizontalViewSizePropertyId → const int
Identifies the HorizontalViewSize property of the Scroll control pattern.
UIA_ScrollItemPatternId → const int
Identifies the ScrollItem control pattern.
UIA_ScrollPatternId → const int
Identifies the Scroll control pattern.
UIA_ScrollVerticallyScrollablePropertyId → const int
Identifies the VerticallyScrollable property of the Scroll control pattern.
UIA_ScrollVerticalScrollPercentPropertyId → const int
Identifies the VerticalScrollPercent property of the Scroll control pattern.
UIA_ScrollVerticalViewSizePropertyId → const int
Identifies the VerticalViewSize property of the Scroll control pattern.
UIA_SelectionCanSelectMultiplePropertyId → const int
Identifies the CanSelectMultiple property of the Selection control pattern.
UIA_SelectionIsSelectionRequiredPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsSelectionRequired property of the Selection control pattern.
UIA_SelectionItemIsSelectedPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsSelected property of the SelectionItem control pattern.
UIA_SelectionItemPatternId → const int
Identifies the SelectionItem control pattern.
UIA_SelectionItemSelectionContainerPropertyId → const int
Identifies the SelectionContainer property of the SelectionItem control pattern.
UIA_SelectionPatternId → const int
Identifies the Selection control pattern.
UIA_SelectionSelectionPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Selection property of the Selection control pattern.
UIA_SemanticZoomControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the SemanticZoom control type.
UIA_SeparatorControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Separator control type.
UIA_SizeOfSetPropertyId → const int
Identifies the SizeOfSet property, which is a 1-based integer associated with an automation element.
UIA_SizePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Size property, which specifies the width and height of the automation element.
UIA_SliderControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Slider control type.
UIA_SpinnerControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Spinner control type.
UIA_SplitButtonControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the SplitButton control type.
UIA_SpreadsheetItemAnnotationObjectsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AnnotationObjects property of the SpreadsheetItem control pattern.
UIA_SpreadsheetItemAnnotationTypesPropertyId → const int
Identifies the AnnotationTypes property of the SpreadsheetItem control pattern.
UIA_SpreadsheetItemFormulaPropertyId → const int
Identifies the Formula property of the SpreadsheetItem control pattern.
UIA_SpreadsheetItemPatternId → const int
Identifies the SpreadsheetItem control pattern.
UIA_SpreadsheetPatternId → const int
Identifies the Spreadsheet control pattern.
UIA_StatusBarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the StatusBar control type.
UIA_StylesExtendedPropertiesPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ExtendedProperties property of the Styles control pattern.
UIA_StylesFillColorPropertyId → const int
Identifies the FillColor property of the Styles control pattern.
UIA_StylesFillPatternColorPropertyId → const int
Identifies the FillPatternColor property of the Styles control pattern.
UIA_StylesFillPatternStylePropertyId → const int
Identifies the FillPatternStyle property of the Styles control pattern.
UIA_StylesPatternId → const int
Identifies the Styles control pattern.
UIA_StylesShapePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Shape property of the Styles control pattern.
UIA_StylesStyleIdPropertyId → const int
Identifies the StyleId property of the Styles control pattern.
UIA_StylesStyleNamePropertyId → const int
Identifies the StyleName property of the Styles control pattern.
UIA_SynchronizedInputPatternId → const int
Identifies the SynchronizedInput control pattern.
UIA_TabControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Tab control type.
UIA_TabItemControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the TabItem control type.
UIA_TableColumnHeadersPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ColumnHeaders property of the Table control pattern.
UIA_TableControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Table control type.
UIA_TableItemColumnHeaderItemsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ColumnHeaderItems property of the TableItem control pattern.
UIA_TableItemPatternId → const int
Identifies the TableItem control pattern.
UIA_TableItemRowHeaderItemsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the RowHeaderItems property of the TableItem control pattern.
UIA_TablePatternId → const int
Identifies the Table control pattern.
UIA_TableRowHeadersPropertyId → const int
Identifies the RowHeaders property of the Table control pattern.
UIA_TableRowOrColumnMajorPropertyId → const int
Identifies the RowOrColumnMajor property of the Table control pattern.
UIA_TextChildPatternId → const int
Identifies the TextChild control pattern.
UIA_TextControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Text control type.
UIA_TextEditPatternId → const int
Identifies the TextEdit control pattern.
UIA_TextPattern2Id → const int
Identifies the second version of the Text control pattern.
UIA_TextPatternId → const int
Identifies the Text control pattern.
UIA_ThumbControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Thumb control type.
UIA_TitleBarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the TitleBar control type.
UIA_TogglePatternId → const int
Identifies the Toggle control pattern.
UIA_ToggleToggleStatePropertyId → const int
Identifies the ToggleState property of the Toggle control pattern.
UIA_ToolBarControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the ToolBar control type.
UIA_ToolTipControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the ToolTip control type.
UIA_Transform2CanZoomPropertyId → const int
Identifies the CanZoom property of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_Transform2ZoomLevelPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ZoomLevel property of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_Transform2ZoomMaximumPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ZoomMaximum property of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_Transform2ZoomMinimumPropertyId → const int
Identifies the ZoomMinimum property of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_TransformCanMovePropertyId → const int
Identifies the CanMove property of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_TransformCanResizePropertyId → const int
Identifies the CanResize property of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_TransformCanRotatePropertyId → const int
Identifies the CanRotate property of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_TransformPattern2Id → const int
Identifies the second version of the Transform control pattern.
UIA_TransformPatternId → const int
Identifies the Transform control pattern.
UIA_TreeControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Tree control type.
UIA_TreeItemControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the TreeItem control type.
UIA_ValueIsReadOnlyPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsReadOnly property of the Value control pattern.
UIA_ValuePatternId → const int
Identifies the Value control pattern.
UIA_ValueValuePropertyId → const int
Identifies the Value property of the Value control pattern.
UIA_VirtualizedItemPatternId → const int
Identifies the VirtualizedItem control pattern.
UIA_VisualEffectsPropertyId → const int
Identifies the VisualEffects property, which is a bit field that specifies effects on the automation element, such as shadow, reflection, glow, soft edges, or bevel.
UIA_WindowCanMaximizePropertyId → const int
Identifies the CanMaximize property of the Window control pattern.
UIA_WindowCanMinimizePropertyId → const int
Identifies the CanMinimize property of the Window control pattern.
UIA_WindowControlTypeId → const int
Identifies the Window control type.
UIA_WindowIsModalPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsModal property of the Window control pattern.
UIA_WindowIsTopmostPropertyId → const int
Identifies the IsTopmost property of the Window control pattern.
UIA_WindowPatternId → const int
Identifies the Window control pattern.
UIA_WindowWindowInteractionStatePropertyId → const int
Identifies the WindowInteractionState property of the Window control pattern.
UIA_WindowWindowVisualStatePropertyId → const int
Identifies the WindowVisualState property of the Window control pattern.
VARIANT_ALPHABOOL → const int
Converts a VT_BOOL value to a string containing either "True" or "False".
VARIANT_LOCALBOOL → const int
For conversions from VT_BOOL to VT_BSTR and back, uses the language specified by the locale in use on the local computer.
VARIANT_NOUSEROVERRIDE → const int
For conversions to or from VT_BSTR, passes LOCALE_NOUSEROVERRIDE to the core coercion routines.
VARIANT_NOVALUEPROP → const int
Prevents the function from attempting to coerce an object to a fundamental type by getting the Value property. Applications should set this flag only if necessary, because it makes their behavior inconsistent with other applications.
VER_AND → const int
All product suites specified in the wSuiteMask member must be present in the current system.
VER_EQUAL → const int
VER_GREATER → const int
The current value must be greater than the specified value.
VER_GREATER_EQUAL → const int
The current value must be greater than or equal to the specified value.
VER_LESS → const int
The current value must be less than the specified value.
VER_LESS_EQUAL → const int
The current value must be less than or equal to the specified value.
VER_OR → const int
At least one of the specified product suites must be present in the current system.
VERTRES → const int
Height, in raster lines, of the screen; or for printers, the height, in pixels, of the printable area of the page.
VERTSIZE → const int
Height, in millimeters, of the physical screen.
VREFRESH → const int
For display devices: the current vertical refresh rate of the device, in cycles per second (Hz). A vertical refresh rate value of 0 or 1 represents the display hardware's default refresh rate.
WAVE_ALLOWSYNC → const int
If this flag is specified, a synchronous waveform-audio device can be opened. If this flag is not specified while opening a synchronous driver, the device will fail to open.
WAVE_FORMAT_DIRECT → const int
If this flag is specified, the ACM driver does not perform conversions on the audio data.
WAVE_FORMAT_QUERY → const int
The function queries the device to determine whether it supports the given format, but it does not open the device.
WAVE_MAPPED → const int
If this flag is specified, the uDeviceID parameter specifies a waveform-audio device to be mapped to by the wave mapper.
WAVE_MAPPED_DEFAULT_COMMUNICATION_DEVICE → const int
If this flag is specified and the uDeviceID parameter is WAVE_MAPPER, the function opens the default communication device.
WDA_EXCLUDEFROMCAPTURE → const int
The window is displayed only on a monitor. Everywhere else, the window does not appear at all. One use for this affinity is for windows that show video recording controls, so that the controls are not included in the capture.
WDA_MONITOR → const int
The window content is displayed only on a monitor. Everywhere else, the window appears with no content.
WDA_NONE → const int
Imposes no restrictions on where the window can be displayed.
WH_CALLWNDPROC → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors messages before the system sends them to the destination window procedure.
WH_CALLWNDPROCRET → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors messages after they have been processed by the destination window procedure.
WH_CBT → const int
Installs a hook procedure that receives notifications useful to a CBT application.
WH_DEBUG → const int
Installs a hook procedure useful for debugging other hook procedures.
WH_FOREGROUNDIDLE → const int
Installs a hook procedure that will be called when the application's foreground thread is about to become idle. This hook is useful for performing low priority tasks during idle time.
WH_GETMESSAGE → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors messages posted to a message queue.
WH_JOURNALPLAYBACK → const int
Installs a hook procedure that posts messages previously recorded by a WH_JOURNALRECORD hook procedure.
WH_JOURNALRECORD → const int
Installs a hook procedure that records input messages posted to the system message queue.
WH_KEYBOARD → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors keystroke messages.
WH_KEYBOARD_LL → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors low-level keyboard input events.
WH_MOUSE → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors mouse messages.
WH_MOUSE_LL → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors low-level mouse input events.
WH_MSGFILTER → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors messages generated as a result of an input event in a dialog box, message box, menu, or scroll bar.
WH_SHELL → const int
Installs a hook procedure that receives notifications useful to shell applications.
WH_SYSMSGFILTER → const int
Installs a hook procedure that monitors messages generated as a result of an input event in a dialog box, message box, menu, or scroll bar. The hook procedure monitors these messages for all applications in the same desktop as the calling thread.
WHITEONBLACK → const int
Performs a Boolean OR operation using the color values for the eliminated and existing pixels. If the bitmap is a monochrome bitmap, this mode preserves white pixels at the expense of black pixels.
WM_ACTIVATE → const int
Sent to both the window being activated and the window being deactivated.
WM_ACTIVATEAPP → const int
Sent when a window belonging to a different application than the active window is about to be activated. The message is sent to the application whose window is being activated and to the application whose window is being deactivated.
WM_APP → const int
Used to define private messages, usually of the form WM_APP+x, where x is an integer value.
WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window to request the name of a CF_OWNERDISPLAY clipboard format.
WM_CANCELMODE → const int
Sent to cancel certain modes, such as mouse capture. For example, the system sends this message to the active window when a dialog box or message box is displayed. Certain functions also send this message explicitly to the specified window regardless of whether it is the active window. For example, the EnableWindow function sends this message when disabling the specified window.
WM_CHANGECBCHAIN → const int
Sent to the first window in the clipboard viewer chain when a window is being removed from the chain.
WM_CHANGEUISTATE → const int
An application sends the WM_CHANGEUISTATE message to indicate that the UI state should be changed.
WM_CHAR → const int
Posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_KEYDOWN message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. The WM_CHAR message contains the character code of the key that was pressed.
WM_CHARTOITEM → const int
Sent by a list box with the LBS_WANTKEYBOARDINPUT style to its owner in response to a WM_CHAR message.
WM_CHILDACTIVATE → const int
Sent to a child window when the user clicks the window's title bar or when the window is activated, moved, or sized.
WM_CLEAR → const int
An application sends a WM_CLEAR message to an edit control or combo box to delete (clear) the current selection, if any, from the edit control.
WM_CLIPBOARDUPDATE → const int
The WM_CLIPBOARDUPDATE message signifies that clipboard contents have changed. To listen for this message, create a Clipboard Format Listener using the AddClipboardFormatListener() API. This has replaced the old SetClipboardViewer() API, and is a simpler, more efficient method of monitoring for clipboard changes.
WM_CLOSE → const int
Sent as a signal that a window or an application should terminate.
WM_COMMAND → const int
Sent when the user selects a command item from a menu, when a control sends a notification message to its parent window, or when an accelerator keystroke is translated.
WM_COMMNOTIFY → const int
Deprecated. This message is not sent in modern versions of Windows.
WM_COMPACTING → const int
Sent to all top-level windows when the system detects more than 12.5 percent of system time over a 30- to 60-second interval is being spent compacting memory. This indicates that system memory is low.
WM_COMPAREITEM → const int
Sent to determine the relative position of a new item in the sorted list of an owner-drawn combo box or list box. Whenever the application adds a new item, the system sends this message to the owner of a combo box or list box created with the CBS_SORT or LBS_SORT style.
WM_CONTEXTMENU → const int
Notifies a window that the user clicked the right mouse button (right-clicked) in the window.
WM_COPY → const int
An application sends the WM_COPY message to an edit control or combo box to copy the current selection to the clipboard in CF_TEXT format.
WM_CREATE → const int
Sent when an application requests that a window be created by calling the CreateWindowEx or CreateWindow function.
WM_CUT → const int
An application sends a WM_CUT message to an edit control or combo box to delete (cut) the current selection, if any, in the edit control and copy the deleted text to the clipboard in CF_TEXT format.
WM_DEADCHAR → const int
Posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_KEYUP message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. WM_DEADCHAR specifies a character code generated by a dead key. A dead key is a key that generates a character, such as the umlaut (double-dot), that is combined with another character to form a composite character. For example, the umlaut-O character (Ö) is generated by typing the dead key for the umlaut character, and then typing the O key.
WM_DELETEITEM → const int
Sent to the owner of a list box or combo box when the list box or combo box is destroyed or when items are removed by the LB_DELETESTRING, LB_RESETCONTENT, CB_DELETESTRING, or CB_RESETCONTENT message. The system sends a WM_DELETEITEM message for each deleted item. The system sends the WM_DELETEITEM message for any deleted list box or combo box item with nonzero item data.
WM_DESTROY → const int
Sent when a window is being destroyed.
WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner when a call to the EmptyClipboard function empties the clipboard.
WM_DEVICECHANGE → const int
Notifies an application of a change to the hardware configuration of a device or the computer.
WM_DEVMODECHANGE → const int
The WM_DEVMODECHANGE message is sent to all top-level windows whenever the user changes device-mode settings.
WM_DISPLAYCHANGE → const int
The WM_DISPLAYCHANGE message is sent to all windows when the display resolution has changed.
WM_DPICHANGED → const int
Sent when the effective dots per inch (dpi) for a window has changed. Requires Windows 8.1 or above.
WM_DPICHANGED_AFTERPARENT → const int
For Per Monitor v2 top-level windows, this message is sent to all HWNDs in the child HWND tree of the window that is undergoing a DPI change. This message occurs after the top-level window receives WM_DPICHANGED, and traverses the child tree from the bottom up. Requires Windows 10, version 1703 or higher.
WM_DPICHANGED_BEFOREPARENT → const int
For Per Monitor v2 top-level windows, this message is sent to all HWNDs in the child HWND tree of the window that is undergoing a DPI change. This message occurs before the top-level window receives WM_DPICHANGED, and traverses the child tree from the bottom up. Requires Windows 10, version 1703 or higher.
WM_DRAWCLIPBOARD → const int
Sent to the first window in the clipboard viewer chain when the content of the clipboard changes. This enables a clipboard viewer window to display the new content of the clipboard.
WM_DRAWITEM → const int
Sent to the parent window of an owner-drawn button, combo box, list box, or menu when a visual aspect of the button, combo box, list box, or menu has changed.
WM_DWMCOLORIZATIONCOLORCHANGED → const int
Informs all top-level windows that the colorization color has changed.
WM_ENABLE → const int
Sent when an application changes the enabled state of a window.
WM_ENDSESSION → const int
The WM_ENDSESSION message is sent to an application after the system processes the results of the WM_QUERYENDSESSION message. The WM_ENDSESSION message informs the application whether the session is ending.
WM_ENTERIDLE → const int
Sent to the owner window of a modal dialog box or menu that is entering an idle state. A modal dialog box or menu enters an idle state when no messages are waiting in its queue after it has processed one or more previous messages.
WM_ERASEBKGND → const int
Sent when the window background must be erased (for example, when a window is resized). The message is sent to prepare an invalidated portion of a window for painting.
WM_FONTCHANGE → const int
An application sends the WM_FONTCHANGE message to all top-level windows in the system after changing the pool of font resources.
WM_GESTURE → const int
Passes information about a gesture.
WM_GESTURENOTIFY → const int
Gives you a chance to set the gesture configuration.
WM_GETDLGCODE → const int
Sent to the window procedure associated with a control. By default, the system handles all keyboard input to the control; the system interprets certain types of keyboard input as dialog box navigation keys. To override this default behavior, the control can respond to the WM_GETDLGCODE message to indicate the types of input it wants to process itself.
WM_GETDPISCALEDSIZE → const int
This message tells the operating system that the window will be sized to dimensions other than the default. Requires Windows 10, version 1703 or higher.
WM_GETFONT → const int
Retrieves the font with which the control is currently drawing its text.
WM_GETHOTKEY → const int
Sent to determine the hot key associated with a window.
WM_GETICON → const int
Sent to a window to retrieve a handle to the large or small icon associated with a window. The system displays the large icon in the ALT+TAB dialog, and the small icon in the window caption.
WM_GETMINMAXINFO → const int
Sent to a window when the size or position of the window is about to change. An application can use this message to override the window's default maximized size and position, or its default minimum or maximum tracking size.
WM_GETOBJECT → const int
Sent by both Microsoft Active Accessibility and Microsoft UI Automation to obtain information about an accessible object contained in a server application.
WM_GETTEXT → const int
Copies the text that corresponds to a window into a buffer provided by the caller.
WM_GETTEXTLENGTH → const int
Determines the length, in characters, of the text associated with a window.
WM_HELP → const int
Indicates that the user pressed the F1 key. If a menu is active when F1 is pressed, WM_HELP is sent to the window associated with the menu; otherwise, WM_HELP is sent to the window that has the keyboard focus. If no window has the keyboard focus, WM_HELP is sent to the currently active window.
WM_HOTKEY → const int
Posted when the user presses a hot key registered by the RegisterHotKey function. The message is placed at the top of the message queue associated with the thread that registered the hot key.
WM_HSCROLL → const int
The WM_HSCROLL message is sent to a window when a scroll event occurs in the window's standard horizontal scroll bar. This message is also sent to the owner of a horizontal scroll bar control when a scroll event occurs in the control.
WM_HSCROLLCLIPBOARD → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window. This occurs when the clipboard contains data in the CF_OWNERDISPLAY format and an event occurs in the clipboard viewer's horizontal scroll bar. The owner should scroll the clipboard image and update the scroll bar values.
WM_ICONERASEBKGND → const int
Deprecated. This message is not sent in modern versions of Windows.
WM_INITDIALOG → const int
Sent to the dialog box procedure immediately before a dialog box is displayed. Dialog box procedures typically use this message to initialize controls and carry out any other initialization tasks that affect the appearance of the dialog box.
WM_INITMENU → const int
Sent when a menu is about to become active. It occurs when the user clicks an item on the menu bar or presses a menu key. This allows the application to modify the menu before it is displayed.
WM_INITMENUPOPUP → const int
Sent when a drop-down menu or submenu is about to become active. This allows an application to modify the menu before it is displayed, without changing the entire menu.
WM_INPUT → const int
Sent to the window that is getting raw input.
WM_INPUT_DEVICE_CHANGE → const int
Sent to the window that registered to receive raw input.
WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE → const int
Sent to the topmost affected window after an application's input language has been changed. You should make any application-specific settings and pass the message to the DefWindowProc function, which passes the message to all first-level child windows. These child windows can pass the message to DefWindowProc to have it pass the message to their child windows, and so on.
WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST → const int
Posted to the window with the focus when the user chooses a new input language, either with the hotkey (specified in the Keyboard control panel application) or from the indicator on the system taskbar. An application can accept the change by passing the message to the DefWindowProc function or reject the change (and prevent it from taking place) by returning immediately.
WM_KEYDOWN → const int
Posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a nonsystem key is pressed. A nonsystem key is a key that is pressed when the ALT key is not pressed.
WM_KEYUP → const int
Posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a nonsystem key is released. A nonsystem key is a key that is pressed when the ALT key is not pressed, or a keyboard key that is pressed when a window has the keyboard focus.
WM_KILLFOCUS → const int
Sent to a window immediately before it loses the keyboard focus.
WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_LBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_LBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_MBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_MBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_MEASUREITEM → const int
Sent to the owner window of a combo box, list box, list-view control, or menu item when the control or menu is created.
WM_MENUCHAR → const int
Sent when a menu is active and the user presses a key that does not correspond to any mnemonic or accelerator key. This message is sent to the window that owns the menu.
WM_MENUCOMMAND → const int
Sent when the user makes a selection from a menu.c
WM_MENUDRAG → const int
Sent to the owner of a drag-and-drop menu when the user drags a menu item.
WM_MENUGETOBJECT → const int
Sent to the owner of a drag-and-drop menu when the mouse cursor enters a menu item or moves from the center of the item to the top or bottom of the item.
WM_MENURBUTTONUP → const int
Sent when the user releases the right mouse button while the cursor is on a menu item.
WM_MENUSELECT → const int
Sent to a menu's owner window when the user selects a menu item.
WM_MOUSEACTIVATE → const int
Sent when the cursor is in an inactive window and the user presses a mouse button. The parent window receives this message only if the child window passes it to the DefWindowProc function.
WM_MOUSEHWHEEL → const int
Sent to the active window when the mouse's horizontal scroll wheel is tilted or rotated. The DefWindowProc function propagates the message to the window's parent. There should be no internal forwarding of the message, since DefWindowProc propagates it up the parent chain until it finds a window that processes it.
WM_MOUSEMOVE → const int
Posted to a window when the cursor moves. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_MOUSEWHEEL → const int
Sent to the focus window when the mouse wheel is rotated. The DefWindowProc function propagates the message to the window's parent. There should be no internal forwarding of the message, since DefWindowProc propagates it up the parent chain until it finds a window that processes it.
WM_MOVE → const int
Sent after a window has been moved.
WM_NCACTIVATE → const int
Sent to a window when its nonclient area needs to be changed to indicate an active or inactive state.
WM_NCCALCSIZE → const int
Sent when the size and position of a window's client area must be calculated. By processing this message, an application can control the content of the window's client area when the size or position of the window changes.
WM_NCCREATE → const int
Sent prior to the WM_CREATE message when a window is first created.
WM_NCDESTROY → const int
Notifies a window that its nonclient area is being destroyed. The DestroyWindow function sends the WM_NCDESTROY message to the window following the WM_DESTROY message.WM_DESTROY is used to free the allocated memory object associated with the window.
WM_NCHITTEST → const int
Sent to a window in order to determine what part of the window corresponds to a particular screen coordinate. This can happen, for example, when the cursor moves, when a mouse button is pressed or released, or in response to a call to a function such as WindowFromPoint. If the mouse is not captured, the message is sent to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is sent to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_NCLBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the left mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the left mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCLBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the left mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCMBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCMBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCMBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCMOUSEMOVE → const int
Posted to a window when the cursor is moved within the nonclient area of the window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCPAINT → const int
The WM_NCPAINT message is sent to a window when its frame must be painted.
WM_NCRBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the right mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCRBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the right mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCXBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the first or second X button while the cursor is in the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCXBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the first or second X button while the cursor is in the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NCXBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the first or second X button while the cursor is in the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted.
WM_NEXTDLGCTL → const int
Sent to a dialog box procedure to set the keyboard focus to a different control in the dialog box.
WM_NOTIFY → const int
Sent by a common control to its parent window when an event has occurred or the control requires some information.
WM_NOTIFYFORMAT → const int
Determines if a window accepts ANSI or Unicode structures in the WM_NOTIFY notification message. WM_NOTIFYFORMAT messages are sent from a common control to its parent window and from the parent window to the common control.
WM_NULL → const int
Performs no operation.
WM_PAINT → const int
The WM_PAINT message is sent when the system or another application makes a request to paint a portion of an application's window.
WM_PAINTCLIPBOARD → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window when the clipboard contains data in the CF_OWNERDISPLAY format and the clipboard viewer's client area needs repainting.
WM_PAINTICON → const int
Deprecated. This message is not sent in modern versions of Windows.
WM_PALETTECHANGED → const int
The WM_PALETTECHANGED message is sent to all top-level and overlapped windows after the window with the keyboard focus has realized its logical palette, thereby changing the system palette. This message enables a window that uses a color palette but does not have the keyboard focus to realize its logical palette and update its client area.
WM_PALETTEISCHANGING → const int
The WM_PALETTEISCHANGING message informs applications that an application is going to realize its logical palette.
WM_PASTE → const int
An application sends a WM_PASTE message to an edit control or combo box to copy the current content of the clipboard to the edit control at the current caret position. Data is inserted only if the clipboard contains data in CF_TEXT format.
WM_POWER → const int
Notifies applications that the system, typically a battery-powered personal computer, is about to enter a suspended mode.
WM_POWERBROADCAST → const int
Notifies applications that a power-management event has occurred.
WM_QUERYDRAGICON → const int
Sent to a minimized (iconic) window. The window is about to be dragged by the user but does not have an icon defined for its class. An application can return a handle to an icon or cursor. The system displays this cursor or icon while the user drags the icon.
WM_QUERYENDSESSION → const int
The WM_QUERYENDSESSION message is sent when the user chooses to end the session or when an application calls one of the system shutdown functions.
WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE → const int
The WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE message informs a window that it is about to receive the keyboard focus, giving the window the opportunity to realize its logical palette when it receives the focus.
WM_QUERYOPEN → const int
Sent to an icon when the user requests that the window be restored to its previous size and position.
WM_QUERYUISTATE → const int
An application sends the WM_QUERYUISTATE message to retrieve the UI state for a window.
WM_QUEUESYNC → const int
Sent by a computer-based training (CBT) application to separate user-input messages from other messages sent through the WH_JOURNALPLAYBACK procedure.
WM_QUIT → const int
Indicates a request to terminate an application, and is generated when the application calls the PostQuitMessage function. This message causes the GetMessage function to return zero.
WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the right mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_RBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the right mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_RBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the right mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_RENDERALLFORMATS → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner before it is destroyed, if the clipboard owner has delayed rendering one or more clipboard formats. For the content of the clipboard to remain available to other applications, the clipboard owner must render data in all the formats it is capable of generating, and place the data on the clipboard by calling the SetClipboardData function.
WM_RENDERFORMAT → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner if it has delayed rendering a specific clipboard format and if an application has requested data in that format. The clipboard owner must render data in the specified format and place it on the clipboard by calling the SetClipboardData function.
WM_SETCURSOR → const int
Sent to a window if the mouse causes the cursor to move within a window and mouse input is not captured.
WM_SETFOCUS → const int
Sent to a window after it has gained the keyboard focus.
WM_SETFONT → const int
Sets the font that a control is to use when drawing text.
WM_SETHOTKEY → const int
Sent to a window to associate a hot key with the window. When the user presses the hot key, the system activates the window.
WM_SETICON → const int
Associates a new large or small icon with a window. The system displays the large icon in the ALT+TAB dialog box, and the small icon in the window caption.
WM_SETREDRAW → const int
An application sends the WM_SETREDRAW message to a window to allow changes in that window to be redrawn or to prevent changes in that window from being redrawn.
WM_SETTEXT → const int
Sets the text of a window.
WM_SETTINGCHANGE → const int
A message that is sent to all top-level windows when the SystemParametersInfo function changes a system-wide setting or when policy settings have changed.
WM_SHOWWINDOW → const int
Sent to a window when the window is about to be hidden or shown.
WM_SIZE → const int
Sent to a window after its size has changed.
WM_SIZECLIPBOARD → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window when the clipboard contains data in the CF_OWNERDISPLAY format and the clipboard viewer's client area has changed size.
WM_SPOOLERSTATUS → const int
The WM_SPOOLERSTATUS message is sent from Print Manager whenever a job is added to or removed from the Print Manager queue.
WM_STYLECHANGED → const int
Sent to a window after the SetWindowLong function has changed one or more of the window's styles.
WM_STYLECHANGING → const int
Sent to a window when the SetWindowLong function is about to change one or more of the window's styles.
WM_SYNCPAINT → const int
The WM_SYNCPAINT message is used to synchronize painting while avoiding linking independent GUI threads.
WM_SYSCHAR → const int
Posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_SYSKEYDOWN message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. It specifies the character code of a system character key that is, a character key that is pressed while the ALT key is down.
WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE → const int
The WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE message is sent to all top-level windows when a change is made to a system color setting.
WM_SYSCOMMAND → const int
A window receives this message when the user chooses a command from the Window menu (formerly known as the system or control menu) or when the user chooses the maximize button, minimize button, restore button, or close button.
WM_SYSDEADCHAR → const int
Sent to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_SYSKEYDOWN message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. WM_SYSDEADCHAR specifies the character code of a system dead key that is, a dead key that is pressed while holding down the ALT key.
WM_SYSKEYDOWN → const int
Posted to the window with the keyboard focus when the user presses the F10 key (which activates the menu bar) or holds down the ALT key and then presses another key. It also occurs when no window currently has the keyboard focus; in this case, the WM_SYSKEYDOWN message is sent to the active window. The window that receives the message can distinguish between these two contexts by checking the context code in the lParam parameter.
WM_SYSKEYUP → const int
Posted to the window with the keyboard focus when the user releases a key that was pressed while the ALT key was held down. It also occurs when no window currently has the keyboard focus; in this case, the WM_SYSKEYUP message is sent to the active window. The window that receives the message can distinguish between these two contexts by checking the context code in the lParam parameter.
WM_TCARD → const int
Sent to an application that has initiated a training card with Windows Help. The message informs the application when the user clicks an authorable button. An application initiates a training card by specifying the HELP_TCARD command in a call to the WinHelp function.
WM_TIMECHANGE → const int
A message that is sent whenever there is a change in the system time.
WM_TIMER → const int
Posted to the installing thread's message queue when a timer expires. The message is posted by the GetMessage or PeekMessage function.
WM_UNDO → const int
An application sends a WM_UNDO message to an edit control to undo the last operation. When this message is sent to an edit control, the previously deleted text is restored or the previously added text is deleted.
WM_UNINITMENUPOPUP → const int
Sent when a drop-down menu or submenu has been destroyed.
WM_UPDATEUISTATE → const int
An application sends the WM_UPDATEUISTATE message to change the UI state for the specified window and all its child windows.
WM_USER → const int
Used to define private messages for use by private window classes, usually in the form WM_USER+x, where x is an integer value.
WM_USERCHANGED → const int
Sent to all windows after the user has logged on or off. When the user logs on or off, the system updates the user-specific settings. The system sends this message immediately after updating the settings.
WM_VKEYTOITEM → const int
Sent by a list box with the LBS_WANTKEYBOARDINPUT style to its owner in response to a WM_KEYDOWN message.
WM_VSCROLL → const int
The WM_VSCROLL message is sent to a window when a scroll event occurs in the window's standard vertical scroll bar. This message is also sent to the owner of a vertical scroll bar control when a scroll event occurs in the control.
WM_VSCROLLCLIPBOARD → const int
Sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window when the clipboard contains data in the CF_OWNERDISPLAY format and an event occurs in the clipboard viewer's vertical scroll bar. The owner should scroll the clipboard image and update the scroll bar values.
WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED → const int
Sent to a window whose size, position, or place in the Z order has changed as a result of a call to the SetWindowPos function or another window-management function.
WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING → const int
Sent to a window whose size, position, or place in the Z order is about to change as a result of a call to the SetWindowPos function or another window-management function.
WM_WININICHANGE → const int
An application sends the WM_WININICHANGE message to all top-level windows after making a change to the WIN.INI file. The SystemParametersInfo function sends this message after an application uses the function to change a setting in WIN.INI.
WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK → const int
Posted when the user double-clicks the first or second X button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_XBUTTONDOWN → const int
Posted when the user presses the first or second X button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WM_XBUTTONUP → const int
Posted when the user releases the first or second X button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse.
WRITE_DAC → const int
The right to modify the discretionary access control list (DACL) in the object's security descriptor.
WRITE_OWNER → const int
The right to change the owner in the object's security descriptor.
WS_ACTIVECAPTION → const int
The window is active.
WS_BORDER → const int
The window has a thin-line border.
WS_CAPTION → const int
The window has a title bar (includes the WS_BORDER style).
WS_CHILD → const int
The window is a child window. A window with this style cannot have a menu bar. This style cannot be used with the WS_POPUP style.
WS_CHILDWINDOW → const int
Same as the WS_CHILD style.
WS_CLIPCHILDREN → const int
Excludes the area occupied by child windows when drawing occurs within the parent window. This style is used when creating the parent window.
WS_CLIPSIBLINGS → const int
Clips child windows relative to each other; that is, when a particular child window receives a WM_PAINT message, the WS_CLIPSIBLINGS style clips all other overlapping child windows out of the region of the child window to be updated. If WS_CLIPSIBLINGS is not specified and child windows overlap, it is possible, when drawing within the client area of a child window, to draw within the client area of a neighboring child window.
WS_DISABLED → const int
The window is initially disabled. A disabled window cannot receive input from the user. To change this after a window has been created, use the EnableWindow function.
WS_DLGFRAME → const int
The window has a border of a style typically used with dialog boxes. A window with this style cannot have a title bar.
WS_EX_ACCEPTFILES → const int
The window accepts drag-drop files.
WS_EX_APPWINDOW → const int
Forces a top-level window onto the taskbar when the window is visible.
WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE → const int
The window has a border with a sunken edge.
WS_EX_COMPOSITED → const int
Paints all descendants of a window in bottom-to-top painting order using double-buffering.
WS_EX_CONTEXTHELP → const int
The title bar of the window includes a question mark.
WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT → const int
The window itself contains child windows that should take part in dialog box navigation.
WS_EX_DLGMODALFRAME → const int
The window has a double border; the window can, optionally, be created with a title bar by specifying the WS_CAPTION style in the dwStyle parameter.
WS_EX_LAYERED → const int
The window is a layered window. This style cannot be used if the window has a class style of either CS_OWNDC or CS_CLASSDC.
WS_EX_LAYOUTRTL → const int
If the shell language is Hebrew, Arabic, or another language that supports reading order alignment, the horizontal origin of the window is on the right edge. Increasing horizontal values advance to the left.
WS_EX_LEFT → const int
The window has generic left-aligned properties. This is the default.
WS_EX_LEFTSCROLLBAR → const int
If the shell language is Hebrew, Arabic, or another language that supports reading order alignment, the vertical scroll bar (if present) is to the left of the client area. For other languages, the style is ignored.
WS_EX_LTRREADING → const int
The window text is displayed using left-to-right reading-order properties. This is the default.
WS_EX_MDICHILD → const int
The window is a MDI child window.
WS_EX_NOACTIVATE → const int
A top-level window created with this style does not become the foreground window when the user clicks it. The system does not bring this window to the foreground when the user minimizes or closes the foreground window.
WS_EX_NOINHERITLAYOUT → const int
The window does not pass its window layout to its child windows.
WS_EX_NOPARENTNOTIFY → const int
The child window created with this style does not send the WM_PARENTNOTIFY message to its parent window when it is created or destroyed.
WS_EX_NOREDIRECTIONBITMAP → const int
The window does not render to a redirection surface. This is for windows that do not have visible content or that use mechanisms other than surfaces to provide their visual.
WS_EX_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW → const int
The window is an overlapped window.
WS_EX_PALETTEWINDOW → const int
The window is palette window, which is a modeless dialog box that presents an array of commands.
WS_EX_RIGHT → const int
The window has generic "right-aligned" properties. This depends on the window class. This style has an effect only if the shell language is Hebrew, Arabic, or another language that supports reading-order alignment; otherwise, the style is ignored.
WS_EX_RIGHTSCROLLBAR → const int
The vertical scroll bar (if present) is to the right of the client area. This is the default.
WS_EX_RTLREADING → const int
If the shell language is Hebrew, Arabic, or another language that supports reading-order alignment, the window text is displayed using right-to-left reading-order properties. For other languages, the style is ignored.
WS_EX_STATICEDGE → const int
The window has a three-dimensional border style intended to be used for items that do not accept user input.
WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW → const int
The window is intended to be used as a floating toolbar. A tool window has a title bar that is shorter than a normal title bar, and the window title is drawn using a smaller font. A tool window does not appear in the taskbar or in the dialog that appears when the user presses ALT+TAB. If a tool window has a system menu, its icon is not displayed on the title bar. However, you can display the system menu by right-clicking or by typing ALT+SPACE.
WS_EX_TOPMOST → const int
The window should be placed above all non-topmost windows and should stay above them, even when the window is deactivated. To add or remove this style, use the SetWindowPos function.
WS_EX_TRANSPARENT → const int
The window should not be painted until siblings beneath the window (that were created by the same thread) have been painted. The window appears transparent because the bits of underlying sibling windows have already been painted.
WS_EX_WINDOWEDGE → const int
The window has a border with a raised edge.
WS_GROUP → const int
The window is the first control of a group of controls.
WS_HSCROLL → const int
The window has a horizontal scroll bar.
WS_ICONIC → const int
The window is initially minimized. Same as the WS_MINIMIZE style.
WS_MAXIMIZE → const int
The window is initially maximized.
WS_MAXIMIZEBOX → const int
The window has a maximize button. Cannot be combined with the WS_EX_CONTEXTHELP style. The WS_SYSMENU style must also be specified.
WS_MINIMIZE → const int
The window is initially minimized. Same as the WS_ICONIC style.
WS_MINIMIZEBOX → const int
The window has a minimize button. Cannot be combined with the WS_EX_CONTEXTHELP style. The WS_SYSMENU style must also be specified.
WS_OVERLAPPED → const int
The window is an overlapped window. An overlapped window has a title bar and a border. Same as the WS_TILED style.
WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW → const int
The window is an overlapped window. Same as the WS_TILEDWINDOW style.
WS_POPUP → const int
The window is a pop-up window. This style cannot be used with the WS_CHILD style.
WS_POPUPWINDOW → const int
The window is a pop-up window. The WS_CAPTION and WS_POPUPWINDOW styles must be combined to make the window menu visible.
WS_SIZEBOX → const int
The window has a sizing border. Same as the WS_THICKFRAME style.
WS_SYSMENU → const int
The window has a window menu on its title bar. The WS_CAPTION style must also be specified.
WS_TABSTOP → const int
The window is a control that can receive the keyboard focus when the user presses the TAB key.
WS_THICKFRAME → const int
The window has a sizing border. Same as the WS_SIZEBOX style.
WS_TILED → const int
The window is an overlapped window. An overlapped window has a title bar and a border. Same as the WS_OVERLAPPED style.
WS_TILEDWINDOW → const int
The window is an overlapped window. Same as the WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW style.
WS_VISIBLE → const int
The window is initially visible.
WS_VSCROLL → const int
The window has a vertical scroll bar.

Properties

E_ABORT → int
Operation aborted
final
E_ACCESSDENIED → int
General access denied error
final
E_FAIL → int
Unspecified failure
final
E_HANDLE → int
Handle that is not valid
final
E_INVALIDARG → int
One or more arguments are not valid
final
E_NOINTERFACE → int
No such interface supported
final
E_NOTIMPL → int
Not implemented
final
E_OUTOFMEMORY → int
Failed to allocate necessary memory
final
E_PENDING → int
The data necessary to complete this operation is not yet available.
final
E_POINTER → int
Pointer that is not valid
final
E_UNEXPECTED → int
Unexpected failure
final
IDC_APPSTARTING → Pointer<Utf16>
Standard arrow and small hourglass
final
IDC_ARROW → Pointer<Utf16>
Standard arrow
final
IDC_CROSS → Pointer<Utf16>
Crosshair
final
IDC_HAND → Pointer<Utf16>
Hand
final
IDC_HELP → Pointer<Utf16>
Arrow and question mark
final
IDC_IBEAM → Pointer<Utf16>
I-beam
final
IDC_NO → Pointer<Utf16>
Slashed circle
final
IDC_SIZEALL → Pointer<Utf16>
Four-pointed arrow pointing north, south, east, and west
final
IDC_SIZENESW → Pointer<Utf16>
Double-pointed arrow pointing northeast and southwest
final
IDC_SIZENS → Pointer<Utf16>
Double-pointed arrow pointing north and south
final
IDC_SIZENWSE → Pointer<Utf16>
Double-pointed arrow pointing northwest and southeast
final
IDC_SIZEWE → Pointer<Utf16>
Double-pointed arrow pointing west and east
final
IDC_UPARROW → Pointer<Utf16>
Vertical arrow
final
IDC_WAIT → Pointer<Utf16>
Hourglass
final
IDI_APPLICATION → Pointer<Utf16>
Default application icon.
final
IDI_ASTERISK → Pointer<Utf16>
Asterisk icon. Same as IDI_INFORMATION.
final
IDI_ERROR → Pointer<Utf16>
Hand-shaped icon.
final
IDI_EXCLAMATION → Pointer<Utf16>
Exclamation point icon. Same as IDI_WARNING.
final
IDI_HAND → Pointer<Utf16>
Hand-shaped icon. Same as IDI_ERROR.
final
IDI_INFORMATION → Pointer<Utf16>
Asterisk icon.
final
IDI_QUESTION → Pointer<Utf16>
Question mark icon.
final
IDI_SHIELD → Pointer<Utf16>
Security Shield icon.
final
IDI_WARNING → Pointer<Utf16>
Exclamation point icon.
final
Windows logo icon.
final
isCOMInitialized → bool
Determines whether the Component Object Model (COM) is initialized on the current thread.
no setter
RT_ACCELERATOR → Pointer<Utf16>
Accelerator table.
final
RT_ANICURSOR → Pointer<Utf16>
Animated cursor.
final
RT_ANIICON → Pointer<Utf16>
Animated icon.
final
RT_BITMAP → Pointer<Utf16>
Bitmap resource.
final
RT_CURSOR → Pointer<Utf16>
Hardware-dependent cursor resource.
final
RT_DIALOG → Pointer<Utf16>
Dialog box.
final
RT_DLGINCLUDE → Pointer<Utf16>
Allows a resource editing tool to associate a string with an .rc file.
final
RT_FONT → Pointer<Utf16>
Font resource.
final
RT_FONTDIR → Pointer<Utf16>
Font directory resource.
final
RT_GROUP_CURSOR → Pointer<Utf16>
Hardware-independent cursor resource.
final
RT_GROUP_ICON → Pointer<Utf16>
Hardware-independent icon resource.
final
RT_HTML → Pointer<Utf16>
HTML resource.
final
RT_ICON → Pointer<Utf16>
Hardware-dependent icon resource.
final
RT_MANIFEST → Pointer<Utf16>
Side-by-Side Assembly Manifest.
final
RT_MENU → Pointer<Utf16>
Menu resource.
final
RT_MESSAGETABLE → Pointer<Utf16>
Message-table entry.
final
RT_PLUGPLAY → Pointer<Utf16>
Plug and Play resource.
final
RT_RCDATA → Pointer<Utf16>
Application-defined resource (raw data).
final
RT_STRING → Pointer<Utf16>
String-table entry.
final
RT_VERSION → Pointer<Utf16>
Version resource.
final
RT_VXD → Pointer<Utf16>
VXD.
final
VARIANT_FALSE → int
typedef short VARIANT_BOOL: 0 == FALSE
final
VARIANT_TRUE → int
typedef short VARIANT_BOOL: -1 == TRUE
final

Functions

AbortPath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The AbortPath function closes and discards any paths in the specified device context.
AbortPrinter(int hPrinter) → int winspool
The AbortPrinter function deletes a printer's spool file if the printer is configured for spooling.
ActivateActCtx(int hActCtx, Pointer<IntPtr> lpCookie) → int kernel32
The ActivateActCtx function activates the specified activation context. It does this by pushing the specified activation context to the top of the activation stack. The specified activation context is thus associated with the current thread and any appropriate side-by-side API functions.
ActivateKeyboardLayout(int hkl, int Flags) → int user32
Sets the input locale identifier (formerly called the keyboard layout handle) for the calling thread or the current process. The input locale identifier specifies a locale as well as the physical layout of the keyboard.
AddClipboardFormatListener(int hwnd) → int user32
Places the given window in the system-maintained clipboard format listener list.
AddDllDirectory(Pointer<Utf16> NewDirectory) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Adds a directory to the process DLL search path.
AddFontResource(Pointer<Utf16> param0) → int gdi32
The AddFontResource function adds the font resource from the specified file to the system font table. The font can subsequently be used for text output by any application.
AddFontResourceEx(Pointer<Utf16> name, int fl, Pointer<NativeType> res) → int gdi32
The AddFontResourceEx function adds the font resource from the specified file to the system. Fonts added with the AddFontResourceEx function can be marked as private and not enumerable.
AddForm(int hPrinter, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pForm) → int winspool
The AddForm function adds a form to the list of available forms that can be selected for the specified printer.
AddIPAddress(int Address, int IpMask, int IfIndex, Pointer<Uint32> NTEContext, Pointer<Uint32> NTEInstance) → int iphlpapi
The AddIPAddress function adds the specified IPv4 address to the specified adapter.
AddJob(int hPrinter, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pData, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded) → int winspool
The AddJob function adds a print job to the list of print jobs that can be scheduled by the print spooler. The function retrieves the name of the file you can use to store the job.
AddPrinter(Pointer<Utf16> pName, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pPrinter) → int winspool
The AddPrinter function adds a printer to the list of supported printers for a specified server.
AddPrinterConnection(Pointer<Utf16> pName) → int winspool
The AddPrinterConnection function adds a connection to the specified printer for the current user.
AddPrinterConnection2(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> pszName, int dwLevel, Pointer<NativeType> pConnectionInfo) → int winspool
Adds a connection to the specified printer for the current user and specifies connection details.
AddRefActCtx(int hActCtx) → void kernel32
The AddRefActCtx function increments the reference count of the specified activation context.
AdjustWindowRect(Pointer<RECT> lpRect, int dwStyle, int bMenu) → int user32
Calculates the required size of the window rectangle, based on the desired client-rectangle size. The window rectangle can then be passed to the CreateWindow function to create a window whose client area is the desired size.
AdjustWindowRectEx(Pointer<RECT> lpRect, int dwStyle, int bMenu, int dwExStyle) → int user32
Calculates the required size of the window rectangle, based on the desired size of the client rectangle. The window rectangle can then be passed to the CreateWindowEx function to create a window whose client area is the desired size.
AdjustWindowRectExForDpi(Pointer<RECT> lpRect, int dwStyle, int bMenu, int dwExStyle, int dpi) → int user32
Calculates the required size of the window rectangle, based on the desired size of the client rectangle and the provided DPI. This window rectangle can then be passed to the CreateWindowEx function to create a window with a client area of the desired size.
AdvancedDocumentProperties(int hWnd, int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pDeviceName, Pointer<DEVMODE> pDevModeOutput, Pointer<DEVMODE> pDevModeInput) → int winspool
The AdvancedDocumentProperties function displays a printer-configuration dialog box for the specified printer, allowing the user to configure that printer.
AllocConsole() → int kernel32
Allocates a new console for the calling process.
AllowSetForegroundWindow(int dwProcessId) → int user32
Enables the specified process to set the foreground window using the SetForegroundWindow function. The calling process must already be able to set the foreground window.
AngleArc(int hdc, int x, int y, int r, double StartAngle, double SweepAngle) → int gdi32
The AngleArc function draws a line segment and an arc. The line segment is drawn from the current position to the beginning of the arc. The arc is drawn along the perimeter of a circle with the given radius and center. The length of the arc is defined by the given start and sweep angles.
AnimatePalette(int hPal, int iStartIndex, int cEntries, Pointer<PALETTEENTRY> ppe) → int gdi32
The AnimatePalette function replaces entries in the specified logical palette.
AnimateWindow(int hWnd, int dwTime, int dwFlags) → int user32
Enables you to produce special effects when showing or hiding windows. There are four types of animation: roll, slide, collapse or expand, and alpha-blended fade.
AnyPopup() → int user32
Indicates whether an owned, visible, top-level pop-up, or overlapped window exists on the screen. The function searches the entire screen, not just the calling application's client area.
AppendMenu(int hMenu, int uFlags, int uIDNewItem, Pointer<Utf16> lpNewItem) → int user32
Appends a new item to the end of the specified menu bar, drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu. You can use this function to specify the content, appearance, and behavior of the menu item.
Arc(int hdc, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int x3, int y3, int x4, int y4) → int gdi32
The Arc function draws an elliptical arc.
ArcTo(int hdc, int left, int top, int right, int bottom, int xr1, int yr1, int xr2, int yr2) → int gdi32
The ArcTo function draws an elliptical arc.
AreDpiAwarenessContextsEqual(int dpiContextA, int dpiContextB) → int user32
Determines whether two DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT values are identical.
AreFileApisANSI() → int kernel32
Determines whether the file I/O functions are using the ANSI or OEM character set code page. This function is useful for 8-bit console input and output operations.
ArrangeIconicWindows(int hWnd) → int user32
Arranges all the minimized (iconic) child windows of the specified parent window.
AssignProcessToJobObject(int hJob, int hProcess) → int kernel32
Assigns a process to an existing job object.
AttachConsole(int dwProcessId) → int kernel32
Attaches the calling process to the console of the specified process.
AttachThreadInput(int idAttach, int idAttachTo, int fAttach) → int user32
Attaches or detaches the input processing mechanism of one thread to that of another thread.
Beep(int dwFreq, int dwDuration) → int kernel32
Generates simple tones on the speaker. The function is synchronous; it performs an alertable wait and does not return control to its caller until the sound finishes.
BeginDeferWindowPos(int nNumWindows) → int user32
Allocates memory for a multiple-window- position structure and returns the handle to the structure.
BeginPaint(int hWnd, Pointer<PAINTSTRUCT> lpPaint) → int user32
The BeginPaint function prepares the specified window for painting and fills a PAINTSTRUCT structure with information about the painting.
BeginPath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The BeginPath function opens a path bracket in the specified device context.
BeginUpdateResource(Pointer<Utf16> pFileName, int bDeleteExistingResources) → int kernel32
Retrieves a handle that can be used by the UpdateResource function to add, delete, or replace resources in a binary module.
BitBlt(int hdc, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int hdcSrc, int x1, int y1, int rop) → int gdi32
The BitBlt function performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source device context into a destination device context.
BlockInput(int fBlockIt) → int user32
Blocks keyboard and mouse input events from reaching applications.
BluetoothAuthenticateDeviceEx(int hwndParentIn, int hRadioIn, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdiInout, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_OOB_DATA_INFO> pbtOobData, int authenticationRequirement) → int bthprops
The BluetoothAuthenticateDeviceEx function sends an authentication request to a remote Bluetooth device. Additionally, this function allows for out-of-band data to be passed into the function call for the device being authenticated.
BluetoothDisplayDeviceProperties(int hwndParent, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdi) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothDisplayDeviceProperties function opens the Control Panel device information property sheet.
BluetoothEnableDiscovery(int hRadio, int fEnabled) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothEnableDiscovery function changes the discovery state of a local Bluetooth radio or radios.
BluetoothEnableIncomingConnections(int hRadio, int fEnabled) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothEnableIncomingConnections function modifies whether a local Bluetooth radio accepts incoming connections.
BluetoothEnumerateInstalledServices(int hRadio, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdi, Pointer<Uint32> pcServiceInout, Pointer<GUID> pGuidServices) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothEnumerateInstalledServices function enumerates the services GUIDs (Globally Unique Identifiers) enabled on a Bluetooth device.
BluetoothFindDeviceClose(int hFind) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothFindDeviceClose function closes an enumeration handle associated with a device query.
BluetoothFindFirstDevice(Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SEARCH_PARAMS> pbtsp, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdi) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothFindFirstDevice function begins the enumeration Bluetooth devices.
BluetoothFindFirstRadio(Pointer<BLUETOOTH_FIND_RADIO_PARAMS> pbtfrp, Pointer<IntPtr> phRadio) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothFindFirstRadio function begins the enumeration of local Bluetooth radios.
BluetoothFindNextDevice(int hFind, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdi) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothFindNextDevice function finds the next Bluetooth device.
BluetoothFindNextRadio(int hFind, Pointer<IntPtr> phRadio) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothFindNextRadio function finds the next Bluetooth radio.
BluetoothFindRadioClose(int hFind) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothFindRadioClose function closes the enumeration handle associated with finding Bluetooth radios.
BluetoothGATTAbortReliableWrite(int hDevice, int ReliableWriteContext, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Specifies the end of reliable write procedures, and the writes should be aborted.
BluetoothGATTBeginReliableWrite(int hDevice, Pointer<Uint64> ReliableWriteContext, int Flags) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothGATTBeginReliableWrite function specifies that reliable writes are about to begin.
BluetoothGATTEndReliableWrite(int hDevice, int ReliableWriteContext, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Specifies the end of reliable writes, and the writes should be committed.
BluetoothGATTGetCharacteristics(int hDevice, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_SERVICE> Service, int CharacteristicsBufferCount, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC> CharacteristicsBuffer, Pointer<Uint16> CharacteristicsBufferActual, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Gets all the characteristics available for the specified service.
BluetoothGATTGetCharacteristicValue(int hDevice, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC> Characteristic, int CharacteristicValueDataSize, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE> CharacteristicValue, Pointer<Uint16> CharacteristicValueSizeRequired, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Gets the value of the specified characteristic.
BluetoothGATTGetDescriptors(int hDevice, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC> Characteristic, int DescriptorsBufferCount, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR> DescriptorsBuffer, Pointer<Uint16> DescriptorsBufferActual, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Gets all the descriptors available for the specified characteristic.
BluetoothGATTGetDescriptorValue(int hDevice, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR> Descriptor, int DescriptorValueDataSize, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE> DescriptorValue, Pointer<Uint16> DescriptorValueSizeRequired, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Gets the value of the specified descriptor.
BluetoothGATTGetIncludedServices(int hDevice, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_SERVICE> ParentService, int IncludedServicesBufferCount, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_SERVICE> IncludedServicesBuffer, Pointer<Uint16> IncludedServicesBufferActual, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Gets all the included services available for a given service.
BluetoothGATTGetServices(int hDevice, int ServicesBufferCount, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_SERVICE> ServicesBuffer, Pointer<Uint16> ServicesBufferActual, int Flags) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothGATTGetServices function gets all the primary services available for a server.
BluetoothGATTRegisterEvent(int hService, int EventType, Pointer<NativeType> EventParameterIn, Pointer<NativeFunction<PFNBLUETOOTH_GATT_EVENT_CALLBACK>> Callback, Pointer<NativeType> CallbackContext, Pointer<IntPtr> pEventHandle, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Registers a routine to be called back during a characteristic value change event on the given characteristic identified by its characteristic handle.
BluetoothGATTSetCharacteristicValue(int hDevice, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC> Characteristic, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE> CharacteristicValue, int ReliableWriteContext, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Writes the specified characteristic value to the Bluetooth device.
BluetoothGATTSetDescriptorValue(int hDevice, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR> Descriptor, Pointer<BTH_LE_GATT_DESCRIPTOR_VALUE> DescriptorValue, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Writes the specified descriptor value to the Bluetooth device.
BluetoothGATTUnregisterEvent(int EventHandle, int Flags) → int bluetooth
Unregisters the given characteristic value change event.
BluetoothGetDeviceInfo(int hRadio, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdi) → int bluetooth
TThe BluetoothGetDeviceInfo function retrieves information about a remote Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device must have been previously identified through a successful device inquiry function call.
BluetoothGetRadioInfo(int hRadio, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_RADIO_INFO> pRadioInfo) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothGetRadioInfo function obtains information about a Bluetooth radio.
BluetoothIsConnectable(int hRadio) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothIsConnectable function determines whether a Bluetooth radio or radios is connectable.
BluetoothIsDiscoverable(int hRadio) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothIsDiscoverable function determines whether a Bluetooth radio or radios is discoverable.
BluetoothIsVersionAvailable(int MajorVersion, int MinorVersion) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothIsVersionAvailable function indicates if the installed Bluetooth binary set supports the requested version.
BluetoothRegisterForAuthenticationEx(Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdiIn, Pointer<IntPtr> phRegHandleOut, Pointer<NativeFunction<PFN_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_EX>> pfnCallbackIn, Pointer<NativeType> pvParam) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothRegisterForAuthenticationEx function registers an application for a pin request, numeric comparison and callback function.
BluetoothRemoveDevice(Pointer<BLUETOOTH_ADDRESS> pAddress) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothRemoveDevice function removes authentication between a Bluetooth device and the computer and clears cached service information for the device.
BluetoothSdpEnumAttributes(Pointer<Uint8> pSDPStream, int cbStreamSize, Pointer<NativeFunction<PFN_BLUETOOTH_ENUM_ATTRIBUTES_CALLBACK>> pfnCallback, Pointer<NativeType> pvParam) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSdpEnumAttributes function enumerates through the SDP record stream, and calls the callback function for each attribute in the record.
BluetoothSdpGetAttributeValue(Pointer<Uint8> pRecordStream, int cbRecordLength, int usAttributeId, Pointer<SDP_ELEMENT_DATA> pAttributeData) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSdpGetAttributeValue function retrieves the attribute value for an attribute identifier.
BluetoothSdpGetContainerElementData(Pointer<Uint8> pContainerStream, int cbContainerLength, Pointer<IntPtr> pElement, Pointer<SDP_ELEMENT_DATA> pData) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSdpGetContainerElementData function iterates a container stream and returns each element contained within the container element.
BluetoothSdpGetElementData(Pointer<Uint8> pSdpStream, int cbSdpStreamLength, Pointer<SDP_ELEMENT_DATA> pData) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSdpGetElementData function retrieves and parses a single element from an SDP stream.
BluetoothSdpGetString(Pointer<Uint8> pRecordStream, int cbRecordLength, Pointer<SDP_STRING_TYPE_DATA> pStringData, int usStringOffset, Pointer<Utf16> pszString, Pointer<Uint32> pcchStringLength) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSdpGetString function converts a raw string embedded in the SDP record into a Unicode string.
BluetoothSelectDevices(Pointer<BLUETOOTH_SELECT_DEVICE_PARAMS> pbtsdp) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSelectDevices function enables Bluetooth device selection.
BluetoothSelectDevicesFree(Pointer<BLUETOOTH_SELECT_DEVICE_PARAMS> pbtsdp) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSelectDevicesFree function frees resources associated with a previous call to BluetoothSelectDevices.
BluetoothSendAuthenticationResponseEx(int hRadioIn, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATE_RESPONSE> pauthResponse) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSendAuthenticationResponseEx function is called when an authentication request to send the passkey or a Numeric Comparison response is made.
BluetoothSetServiceState(int hRadio, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdi, Pointer<GUID> pGuidService, int dwServiceFlags) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothSetServiceState function enables or disables services for a Bluetooth device.
BluetoothUnregisterAuthentication(int hRegHandle) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothUnregisterAuthentication function removes registration for a callback routine that was previously registered with a call to the BluetoothRegisterForAuthentication function.
BluetoothUpdateDeviceRecord(Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pbtdi) → int bluetooth
The BluetoothUpdateDeviceRecord function updates the local computer cache about a Bluetooth device.
BringWindowToTop(int hWnd) → int user32
Brings the specified window to the top of the Z order. If the window is a top-level window, it is activated. If the window is a child window, the top-level parent window associated with the child window is activated.
BroadcastSystemMessage(int flags, Pointer<Uint32> lpInfo, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Sends a message to the specified recipients. The recipients can be applications, installable drivers, network drivers, system-level device drivers, or any combination of these system components.
BroadcastSystemMessageEx(int flags, Pointer<Uint32> lpInfo, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam, Pointer<BSMINFO> pbsmInfo) → int user32
Sends a message to the specified recipients. The recipients can be applications, installable drivers, network drivers, system-level device drivers, or any combination of these system components.
BuildCommDCB(Pointer<Utf16> lpDef, Pointer<DCB> lpDCB) → int kernel32
Fills a specified DCB structure with values specified in a device-control string. The device-control string uses the syntax of the mode command.
BuildCommDCBAndTimeouts(Pointer<Utf16> lpDef, Pointer<DCB> lpDCB, Pointer<COMMTIMEOUTS> lpCommTimeouts) → int kernel32
Translates a device-definition string into appropriate device-control block codes and places them into a device control block. The function can also set up time-out values, including the possibility of no time-outs, for a device; the function's behavior in this regard depends on the contents of the device-definition string.
CalculatePopupWindowPosition(Pointer<POINT> anchorPoint, Pointer<SIZE> windowSize, int flags, Pointer<RECT> excludeRect, Pointer<RECT> popupWindowPosition) → int user32
Calculates an appropriate pop-up window position using the specified anchor point, pop-up window size, flags, and the optional exclude rectangle. When the specified pop-up window size is smaller than the desktop window size, use the CalculatePopupWindowPosition function to ensure that the pop-up window is fully visible on the desktop window, regardless of the specified anchor point.
CallMsgFilter(Pointer<MSG> lpMsg, int nCode) → int user32
Passes the specified message and hook code to the hook procedures associated with the WH_SYSMSGFILTER and WH_MSGFILTER hooks. A WH_SYSMSGFILTER or WH_MSGFILTER hook procedure is an application-defined callback function that examines and, optionally, modifies messages for a dialog box, message box, menu, or scroll bar.
CallNamedPipe(Pointer<Utf16> lpNamedPipeName, Pointer<NativeType> lpInBuffer, int nInBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> lpOutBuffer, int nOutBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpBytesRead, int nTimeOut) → int kernel32
Connects to a message-type pipe (and waits if an instance of the pipe is not available), writes to and reads from the pipe, and then closes the pipe.
CallNextHookEx(int hhk, int nCode, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Passes the hook information to the next hook procedure in the current hook chain. A hook procedure can call this function either before or after processing the hook information.
CallNtPowerInformation(int InformationLevel, Pointer<NativeType> InputBuffer, int InputBufferLength, Pointer<NativeType> OutputBuffer, int OutputBufferLength) → int powrprof
Sets or retrieves power information.
CallWindowProc(Pointer<NativeFunction<WNDPROC>> lpPrevWndFunc, int hWnd, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Passes message information to the specified window procedure.
CancelDC(int hdc) → int gdi32
The CancelDC function cancels any pending operation on the specified device context (DC).
CancelIo(int hFile) → int kernel32
Cancels all pending input and output (I/O) operations that are issued by the calling thread for the specified file. The function does not cancel I/O operations that other threads issue for a file handle.
CancelIoEx(int hFile, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Marks any outstanding I/O operations for the specified file handle. The function only cancels I/O operations in the current process, regardless of which thread created the I/O operation.
CancelSynchronousIo(int hThread) → int kernel32
Marks pending synchronous I/O operations that are issued by the specified thread as canceled.
CascadeWindows(int hwndParent, int wHow, Pointer<RECT> lpRect, int cKids, Pointer<IntPtr> lpKids) → int user32
Cascades the specified child windows of the specified parent window.
ChangeClipboardChain(int hWndRemove, int hWndNewNext) → int user32
Removes a specified window from the chain of clipboard viewers.
ChangeDisplaySettings(Pointer<DEVMODE> lpDevMode, int dwFlags) → int user32
The ChangeDisplaySettings function changes the settings of the default display device to the specified graphics mode.
ChangeDisplaySettingsEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpszDeviceName, Pointer<DEVMODE> lpDevMode, int hwnd, int dwflags, Pointer<NativeType> lParam) → int user32
The ChangeDisplaySettingsEx function changes the settings of the specified display device to the specified graphics mode.
ChangeServiceConfig2(int hService, int dwInfoLevel, Pointer<NativeType> lpInfo) → int advapi32
BOOL ChangeServiceConfig2W( [in] SC_HANDLE hService, [in] DWORD dwInfoLevel, [in, optional] LPVOID lpInfo );
ChangeWindowMessageFilter(int message, int dwFlag) → int user32
Adds or removes a message from the User Interface Privilege Isolation (UIPI) message filter.
ChangeWindowMessageFilterEx(int hwnd, int message, int action, Pointer<CHANGEFILTERSTRUCT> pChangeFilterStruct) → int user32
Modifies the User Interface Privilege Isolation (UIPI) message filter for a specified window.
CheckDlgButton(int hDlg, int nIDButton, int uCheck) → int user32
Changes the check state of a button control.
CheckRadioButton(int hDlg, int nIDFirstButton, int nIDLastButton, int nIDCheckButton) → int user32
Adds a check mark to (checks) a specified radio button in a group and removes a check mark from (clears) all other radio buttons in the group.
CheckRemoteDebuggerPresent(int hProcess, Pointer<Int32> pbDebuggerPresent) → int kernel32
Determines whether the specified process is being debugged.
ChildWindowFromPoint(int hWndParent, POINT Point) → int user32
Determines which, if any, of the child windows belonging to a parent window contains the specified point. The search is restricted to immediate child windows. Grandchildren, and deeper descendant windows are not searched.
ChildWindowFromPointEx(int hwnd, POINT pt, int flags) → int user32
Determines which, if any, of the child windows belonging to the specified parent window contains the specified point. The function can ignore invisible, disabled, and transparent child windows. Grandchildren and deeper descendants are not searched.
ChooseColor(Pointer<CHOOSECOLOR> param0) → int comdlg32
Creates a Color dialog box that enables the user to select a color.
ChooseFont(Pointer<CHOOSEFONT> param0) → int comdlg32
Creates a Font dialog box that enables the user to choose attributes for a logical font. These attributes include a font family and associated font style, a point size, effects (underline, strikeout, and text color), and a script (or character set).
Chord(int hdc, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int x3, int y3, int x4, int y4) → int gdi32
The Chord function draws a chord (a region bounded by the intersection of an ellipse and a line segment, called a secant). The chord is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush.
ClearCommBreak(int hFile) → int kernel32
Restores character transmission for a specified communications device and places the transmission line in a nonbreak state.
ClearCommError(int hFile, Pointer<Uint32> lpErrors, Pointer<COMSTAT> lpStat) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about a communications error and reports the current status of a communications device. The function is called when a communications error occurs, and it clears the device's error flag to enable additional input and output (I/O) operations.
ClientToScreen(int hWnd, Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
The ClientToScreen function converts the client-area coordinates of a specified point to screen coordinates.
ClipCursor(Pointer<RECT> lpRect) → int user32
Confines the cursor to a rectangular area on the screen. If a subsequent cursor position (set by the SetCursorPos function or the mouse) lies outside the rectangle, the system automatically adjusts the position to keep the cursor inside the rectangular area.
CloseClipboard() → int user32
Closes the clipboard.
CloseFigure(int hdc) → int gdi32
The CloseFigure function closes an open figure in a path.
CloseGestureInfoHandle(int hGestureInfo) → int user32
Closes resources associated with a gesture information handle.
CloseHandle(int hObject) → int kernel32
Closes an open object handle.
ClosePrinter(int hPrinter) → int winspool
The ClosePrinter function closes the specified printer object.
ClosePseudoConsole(int hPC) → void kernel32
Closes a pseudoconsole from the given handle.
CloseServiceHandle(int hSCObject) → int advapi32
Closes a handle to a service control manager or service object.
CloseSpoolFileHandle(int hPrinter, int hSpoolFile) → int winspool
The CloseSpoolFileHandle function closes a handle to a spool file associated with the print job currently submitted by the application.
CloseThemeData(int hTheme) → int uxtheme
Closes the theme data handle.
CloseTouchInputHandle(int hTouchInput) → int user32
Closes a touch input handle, frees process memory associated with it, and invalidates the handle.
CloseWindow(int hWnd) → int user32
Minimizes (but does not destroy) the specified window.
CLSIDFromProgID(Pointer<Utf16> lpszProgID, Pointer<GUID> lpclsid) → int ole32
Looks up a CLSID in the registry, given a ProgID.
CLSIDFromProgIDEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpszProgID, Pointer<GUID> lpclsid) → int ole32
Triggers automatic installation if the COMClassStore policy is enabled.
CLSIDFromString(Pointer<Utf16> lpsz, Pointer<GUID> pclsid) → int ole32
Converts a string generated by the StringFromCLSID function back into the original CLSID.
CoAddRefServerProcess() → int ole32
Increments a global per-process reference count.
CoCreateGuid(Pointer<GUID> pguid) → int ole32
Creates a GUID, a unique 128-bit integer used for CLSIDs and interface identifiers.
CoCreateInstance(Pointer<GUID> rclsid, Pointer<COMObject> pUnkOuter, int dwClsContext, Pointer<GUID> riid, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppv) → int ole32
Creates a single uninitialized object of the class associated with a specified CLSID. Call CoCreateInstance when you want to create only one object on the local system. To create a single object on a remote system, call the CoCreateInstanceEx function. To create multiple objects based on a single CLSID, call the CoGetClassObject function.
CoDecrementMTAUsage(int Cookie) → int ole32
Releases the increment made by a previous call to the CoIncrementMTAUsage function.
CoGetApartmentType(Pointer<Int32> pAptType, Pointer<Int32> pAptQualifier) → int ole32
Returns the current apartment type and type qualifier.
CoGetClassObject(Pointer<GUID> rclsid, int dwClsContext, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved, Pointer<GUID> riid, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppv) → int ole32
Provides a pointer to an interface on a class object associated with a specified CLSID. CoGetClassObject locates, and if necessary, dynamically loads the executable code required to do this.
CoGetCurrentProcess() → int ole32
Returns a value that is unique to the current thread. CoGetCurrentProcess can be used to avoid thread ID reuse problems.
CoIncrementMTAUsage(Pointer<IntPtr> pCookie) → int ole32
Keeps MTA support active when no MTA threads are running.
CoInitializeEx(Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved, int dwCoInit) → int ole32
Initializes the COM library for use by the calling thread, sets the thread's concurrency model, and creates a new apartment for the thread if one is required.
CoInitializeSecurity(Pointer<NativeType> pSecDesc, int cAuthSvc, Pointer<SOLE_AUTHENTICATION_SERVICE> asAuthSvc, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved1, int dwAuthnLevel, int dwImpLevel, Pointer<NativeType> pAuthList, int dwCapabilities, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved3) → int ole32
Registers security and sets the default security values for the process.
CommandLineToArgv(Pointer<Utf16> lpCmdLine, Pointer<Int32> pNumArgs) → Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> shell32
Retrieves the command-line string for the current process.
CommConfigDialog(Pointer<Utf16> lpszName, int hWnd, Pointer<COMMCONFIG> lpCC) → int kernel32
Displays a driver-supplied configuration dialog box.
CommitSpoolData(int hPrinter, int hSpoolFile, int cbCommit) → int winspool
The CommitSpoolData function notifies the print spooler that a specified amount of data has been written to a specified spool file and is ready to be rendered.
CompareObjectHandles(int hFirstObjectHandle, int hSecondObjectHandle) → int kernel32
Compares two object handles to determine if they refer to the same underlying kernel object.
ConfigurePort(Pointer<Utf16> pName, int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> pPortName) → int winspool
The ConfigurePort function displays the port-configuration dialog box for a port on the specified server.
ConnectNamedPipe(int hNamedPipe, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Enables a named pipe server process to wait for a client process to connect to an instance of a named pipe. A client process connects by calling either the CreateFile or CallNamedPipe function.
ConnectToPrinterDlg(int hwnd, int Flags) → int winspool
The ConnectToPrinterDlg function displays a dialog box that lets users browse and connect to printers on a network. If the user selects a printer, the function attempts to create a connection to it; if a suitable driver is not installed on the server, the user is given the option of creating a printer locally.
ContinueDebugEvent(int dwProcessId, int dwThreadId, int dwContinueStatus) → int kernel32
Enables a debugger to continue a thread that previously reported a debugging event.
ControlService(int hService, int dwControl, Pointer<SERVICE_STATUS> lpServiceStatus) → int advapi32
Sends a control code to a service.
ControlServiceEx(int hService, int dwControl, int dwInfoLevel, Pointer<NativeType> pControlParams) → int advapi32
Sends a control code to a service.
convertFromHString(int hstring) → String winrt
Takes a HSTRING (a WinRT String handle), and converts it to a Dart String.
ConvertInterfaceGuidToLuid(Pointer<GUID> InterfaceGuid, Pointer<NET_LUID_LH> InterfaceLuid) → int iphlpapi
The ConvertInterfaceGuidToLuid function converts a globally unique identifier (GUID) for a network interface to the locally unique identifier (LUID) for the interface.
convertToCLSID(String strCLSID, {Allocator allocator = calloc}) → Pointer<GUID> com
Converts a Dart string into an CLSID using the CLSIDFromString call.
convertToHString(String string) → int winrt
Takes a Dart String and converts it to an HSTRING (a WinRT String), returning an integer handle.
convertToIID(String strIID, {Allocator allocator = calloc}) → Pointer<GUID> com
Converts a Dart string into an IID using the IIDFromString call.
CopyAcceleratorTable(int hAccelSrc, Pointer<ACCEL> lpAccelDst, int cAccelEntries) → int user32
Copies the specified accelerator table. This function is used to obtain the accelerator-table data that corresponds to an accelerator-table handle, or to determine the size of the accelerator-table data.
CopyIcon(int hIcon) → int user32
Copies the specified icon from another module to the current module.
CopyImage(int h, int type, int cx, int cy, int flags) → int user32
Creates a new image (icon, cursor, or bitmap) and copies the attributes of the specified image to the new one. If necessary, the function stretches the bits to fit the desired size of the new image.
CopyRect(Pointer<RECT> lprcDst, Pointer<RECT> lprcSrc) → int user32
The CopyRect function copies the coordinates of one rectangle to another.
CoSetProxyBlanket(Pointer<COMObject> pProxy, int dwAuthnSvc, int dwAuthzSvc, Pointer<Utf16> pServerPrincName, int dwAuthnLevel, int dwImpLevel, Pointer<NativeType> pAuthInfo, int dwCapabilities) → int ole32
Sets the authentication information that will be used to make calls on the specified proxy. This is a helper function for IClientSecurity::SetBlanket.
CoTaskMemAlloc(int cb) → Pointer<NativeType> ole32
Allocates a block of task memory in the same way that IMalloc::Alloc does.
CoTaskMemFree(Pointer<NativeType> pv) → void ole32
Frees a block of task memory previously allocated through a call to the CoTaskMemAlloc or CoTaskMemRealloc function.
CoTaskMemRealloc(Pointer<NativeType> pv, int cb) → Pointer<NativeType> ole32
Changes the size of a previously allocated block of task memory.
CoUninitialize() → void ole32
Closes the COM library on the current thread, unloads all DLLs loaded by the thread, frees any other resources that the thread maintains, and forces all RPC connections on the thread to close.
CountClipboardFormats() → int user32
Retrieves the number of different data formats currently on the clipboard.
CoWaitForMultipleHandles(int dwFlags, int dwTimeout, int cHandles, Pointer<IntPtr> pHandles, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwindex) → int ole32
Waits for specified handles to be signaled or for a specified timeout period to elapse.
CoWaitForMultipleObjects(int dwFlags, int dwTimeout, int cHandles, Pointer<IntPtr> pHandles, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwindex) → int ole32
A replacement for CoWaitForMultipleHandles. This replacement API hides the options for CoWaitForMultipleHandles that are not supported in ASTA.
CreateAcceleratorTable(Pointer<ACCEL> paccel, int cAccel) → int user32
Creates an accelerator table.
CreateActCtx(Pointer<ACTCTX> pActCtx) → int kernel32
The CreateActCtx function creates an activation context.
CreateBitmap(int nWidth, int nHeight, int nPlanes, int nBitCount, Pointer<NativeType> lpBits) → int gdi32
The CreateBitmap function creates a bitmap with the specified width, height, and color format (color planes and bits-per-pixel).
CreateBitmapIndirect(Pointer<BITMAP> pbm) → int gdi32
The CreateBitmapIndirect function creates a bitmap with the specified width, height, and color format (color planes and bits-per-pixel).
CreateCaret(int hWnd, int hBitmap, int nWidth, int nHeight) → int user32
Creates a new shape for the system caret and assigns ownership of the caret to the specified window. The caret shape can be a line, a block, or a bitmap.
CreateCompatibleBitmap(int hdc, int cx, int cy) → int gdi32
The CreateCompatibleBitmap function creates a bitmap compatible with the device that is associated with the specified device context.
CreateCompatibleDC(int hdc) → int gdi32
The CreateCompatibleDC function creates a memory device context (DC) compatible with the specified device.
CreateConsoleScreenBuffer(int dwDesiredAccess, int dwShareMode, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes, int dwFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpScreenBufferData) → int kernel32
Creates a console screen buffer.
CreateCursor(int hInst, int xHotSpot, int yHotSpot, int nWidth, int nHeight, Pointer<NativeType> pvANDPlane, Pointer<NativeType> pvXORPlane) → int user32
Creates a monochrome cursor having the specified size, bit patterns, and hot spot.
CreateDC(Pointer<Utf16> pwszDriver, Pointer<Utf16> pwszDevice, Pointer<Utf16> pszPort, Pointer<DEVMODE> pdm) → int gdi32
The CreateDC function creates a device context (DC) for a device using the specified name.
CreateDesktop(Pointer<Utf16> lpszDesktop, Pointer<Utf16> lpszDevice, Pointer<DEVMODE> pDevmode, int dwFlags, int dwDesiredAccess, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpsa) → int user32
Creates a new desktop, associates it with the current window station of the calling process, and assigns it to the calling thread. The calling process must have an associated window station, either assigned by the system at process creation time or set by the SetProcessWindowStation function.
CreateDesktopEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpszDesktop, Pointer<Utf16> lpszDevice, Pointer<DEVMODE> pDevmode, int dwFlags, int dwDesiredAccess, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpsa, int ulHeapSize, Pointer<NativeType> pvoid) → int user32
Creates a new desktop with the specified heap, associates it with the current window station of the calling process, and assigns it to the calling thread. The calling process must have an associated window station, either assigned by the system at process creation time or set by the SetProcessWindowStation function.
CreateDialogIndirectParam(int hInstance, Pointer<DLGTEMPLATE> lpTemplate, int hWndParent, Pointer<NativeFunction<DLGPROC>> lpDialogFunc, int dwInitParam) → int user32
Creates a modeless dialog box from a dialog box template in memory. Before displaying the dialog box, the function passes an application-defined value to the dialog box procedure as the lParam parameter of the WM_INITDIALOG message. An application can use this value to initialize dialog box controls.
CreateDIBitmap(int hdc, Pointer<BITMAPINFOHEADER> pbmih, int flInit, Pointer<NativeType> pjBits, Pointer<BITMAPINFO> pbmi, int iUsage) → int gdi32
The CreateDIBitmap function creates a compatible bitmap (DDB) from a DIB and, optionally, sets the bitmap bits.
CreateDIBPatternBrushPt(Pointer<NativeType> lpPackedDIB, int iUsage) → int gdi32
The CreateDIBPatternBrushPt function creates a logical brush that has the pattern specified by the device-independent bitmap (DIB).
CreateDIBSection(int hdc, Pointer<BITMAPINFO> pbmi, int usage, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppvBits, int hSection, int offset) → int gdi32
The CreateDIBSection function creates a DIB that applications can write to directly. The function gives you a pointer to the location of the bitmap bit values. You can supply a handle to a file-mapping object that the function will use to create the bitmap, or you can let the system allocate the memory for the bitmap.
CreateDirectory(Pointer<Utf16> lpPathName, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes) → int kernel32
Creates a new directory. If the underlying file system supports security on files and directories, the function applies a specified security descriptor to the new directory.
CreateEllipticRgn(int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2) → int gdi32
The CreateEllipticRgn function creates an elliptical region.
CreateEvent(Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpEventAttributes, int bManualReset, int bInitialState, Pointer<Utf16> lpName) → int kernel32
Creates or opens a named or unnamed event object.
CreateEventEx(Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpEventAttributes, Pointer<Utf16> lpName, int dwFlags, int dwDesiredAccess) → int kernel32
Creates or opens a named or unnamed event object and returns a handle to the object.
CreateFile(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int dwDesiredAccess, int dwShareMode, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes, int dwCreationDisposition, int dwFlagsAndAttributes, int hTemplateFile) → int kernel32
Creates or opens a file or I/O device. The most commonly used I/O devices are as follows: file, file stream, directory, physical disk, volume, console buffer, tape drive, communications resource, mailslot, and pipe. The function returns a handle that can be used to access the file or device for various types of I/O depending on the file or device and the flags and attributes specified.
CreateFile2(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int dwDesiredAccess, int dwShareMode, int dwCreationDisposition, Pointer<CREATEFILE2_EXTENDED_PARAMETERS> pCreateExParams) → int kernel32
Creates or opens a file or I/O device. The most commonly used I/O devices are as follows: file, file stream, directory, physical disk, volume, console buffer, tape drive, communications resource, mailslot, and pipe. The function returns a handle that can be used to access the file or device for various types of I/O depending on the file or device and the flags and attributes specified.
CreateFontIndirect(Pointer<LOGFONT> lplf) → int gdi32
The CreateFontIndirect function creates a logical font that has the specified characteristics. The font can subsequently be selected as the current font for any device context.
CreateHalftonePalette(int hdc) → int gdi32
The CreateHalftonePalette function creates a halftone palette for the specified device context (DC).
CreateHatchBrush(int iHatch, int color) → int gdi32
The CreateHatchBrush function creates a logical brush that has the specified hatch pattern and color.
CreateIcon(int hInstance, int nWidth, int nHeight, int cPlanes, int cBitsPixel, Pointer<Uint8> lpbANDbits, Pointer<Uint8> lpbXORbits) → int user32
Creates an icon that has the specified size, colors, and bit patterns.
CreateIconFromResource(Pointer<Uint8> presbits, int dwResSize, int fIcon, int dwVer) → int user32
Creates an icon or cursor from resource bits describing the icon.
CreateIconFromResourceEx(Pointer<Uint8> presbits, int dwResSize, int fIcon, int dwVer, int cxDesired, int cyDesired, int Flags) → int user32
Creates an icon or cursor from resource bits describing the icon.
CreateIconIndirect(Pointer<ICONINFO> piconinfo) → int user32
Creates an icon or cursor from an ICONINFO structure.
CreateIoCompletionPort(int FileHandle, int ExistingCompletionPort, int CompletionKey, int NumberOfConcurrentThreads) → int kernel32
Creates an input/output (I/O) completion port and associates it with a specified file handle, or creates an I/O completion port that is not yet associated with a file handle, allowing association at a later time.
CreateJobObject(Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpJobAttributes, Pointer<Utf16> lpName) → int kernel32
Creates or opens a job object.
CreateMDIWindow(Pointer<Utf16> lpClassName, Pointer<Utf16> lpWindowName, int dwStyle, int X, int Y, int nWidth, int nHeight, int hWndParent, int hInstance, int lParam) → int user32
Creates a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window.
CreateMenu() → int user32
Creates a menu. The menu is initially empty, but it can be filled with menu items by using the InsertMenuItem, AppendMenu, and InsertMenu functions.
CreateNamedPipe(Pointer<Utf16> lpName, int dwOpenMode, int dwPipeMode, int nMaxInstances, int nOutBufferSize, int nInBufferSize, int nDefaultTimeOut, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes) → int kernel32
Creates an instance of a named pipe and returns a handle for subsequent pipe operations. A named pipe server process uses this function either to create the first instance of a specific named pipe and establish its basic attributes or to create a new instance of an existing named pipe.
CreatePen(int iStyle, int cWidth, int color) → int gdi32
The CreatePen function creates a logical pen that has the specified style, width, and color. The pen can subsequently be selected into a device context and used to draw lines and curves.
CreatePipe(Pointer<IntPtr> hReadPipe, Pointer<IntPtr> hWritePipe, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpPipeAttributes, int nSize) → int kernel32
Creates an anonymous pipe, and returns handles to the read and write ends of the pipe.
CreatePopupMenu() → int user32
Creates a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu. The menu is initially empty. You can insert or append menu items by using the InsertMenuItem function. You can also use the InsertMenu function to insert menu items and the AppendMenu function to append menu items.
CreateProcess(Pointer<Utf16> lpApplicationName, Pointer<Utf16> lpCommandLine, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpProcessAttributes, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpThreadAttributes, int bInheritHandles, int dwCreationFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpEnvironment, Pointer<Utf16> lpCurrentDirectory, Pointer<STARTUPINFO> lpStartupInfo, Pointer<PROCESS_INFORMATION> lpProcessInformation) → int kernel32
Creates a new process and its primary thread. The new process runs in the security context of the calling process.
CreatePseudoConsole(COORD size, int hInput, int hOutput, int dwFlags, Pointer<IntPtr> phPC) → int kernel32
Creates a new pseudoconsole object for the calling process.
CreateRemoteThread(int hProcess, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpThreadAttributes, int dwStackSize, Pointer<NativeFunction<LPTHREAD_START_ROUTINE>> lpStartAddress, Pointer<NativeType> lpParameter, int dwCreationFlags, Pointer<Uint32> lpThreadId) → int kernel32
Creates a thread that runs in the virtual address space of another process. Use the CreateRemoteThreadEx function to create a thread that runs in the virtual address space of another process and optionally specify extended attributes.
CreateRemoteThreadEx(int hProcess, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpThreadAttributes, int dwStackSize, Pointer<NativeFunction<LPTHREAD_START_ROUTINE>> lpStartAddress, Pointer<NativeType> lpParameter, int dwCreationFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpAttributeList, Pointer<Uint32> lpThreadId) → int kernel32
Creates a thread that runs in the virtual address space of another process and optionally specifies extended attributes such as processor group affinity.
CreateSolidBrush(int color) → int gdi32
The CreateSolidBrush function creates a logical brush that has the specified solid color.
CreateStreamOnHGlobal(Pointer<NativeType> hGlobal, int fDeleteOnRelease, Pointer<Pointer<COMObject>> ppstm) → int ole32
The CreateStreamOnHGlobal function creates a stream object that uses an HGLOBAL memory handle to store the stream contents. This object is the OLE-provided implementation of the IStream interface.
CreateThread(Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpThreadAttributes, int dwStackSize, Pointer<NativeFunction<LPTHREAD_START_ROUTINE>> lpStartAddress, Pointer<NativeType> lpParameter, int dwCreationFlags, Pointer<Uint32> lpThreadId) → int kernel32
Creates a thread to execute within the virtual address space of the calling process.
CreateWindow(Pointer<Utf16> lpClassName, Pointer<Utf16> lpWindowName, int dwStyle, int X, int Y, int nWidth, int nHeight, int hWndParent, int hMenu, int hInstance, Pointer<NativeType> lpParam) → int user32
Creates an overlapped, pop-up, or child window. It specifies the window class, window title, window style, and (optionally) the initial position and size of the window. The function also specifies the window's parent or owner, if any, and the window's menu.
CreateWindowEx(int dwExStyle, Pointer<Utf16> lpClassName, Pointer<Utf16> lpWindowName, int dwStyle, int X, int Y, int nWidth, int nHeight, int hWndParent, int hMenu, int hInstance, Pointer<NativeType> lpParam) → int user32
Creates an overlapped, pop-up, or child window. It specifies the window class, window title, window style, and (optionally) the initial position and size of the window. The function also specifies the window's parent or owner, if any, and the window's menu.
CreateWindowStation(Pointer<Utf16> lpwinsta, int dwFlags, int dwDesiredAccess, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpsa) → int user32
Creates a window station object, associates it with the calling process, and assigns it to the current session.
CredDelete(Pointer<Utf16> TargetName, int Type, int Flags) → int advapi32
The CredDelete function deletes a credential from the user's credential set. The credential set used is the one associated with the logon session of the current token. The token must not have the user's SID disabled.
CredFree(Pointer<NativeType> Buffer) → void advapi32
The CredFree function frees a buffer returned by any of the credentials management functions.
CredRead(Pointer<Utf16> TargetName, int Type, int Flags, Pointer<Pointer<CREDENTIAL>> Credential) → int advapi32
The CredRead function reads a credential from the user's credential set. The credential set used is the one associated with the logon session of the current token. The token must not have the user's SID disabled.
CredWrite(Pointer<CREDENTIAL> Credential, int Flags) → int advapi32
The CredWrite function creates a new credential or modifies an existing credential in the user's credential set. The new credential is associated with the logon session of the current token. The token must not have the user's security identifier (SID) disabled.
CryptProtectData(Pointer<CRYPT_INTEGER_BLOB> pDataIn, Pointer<Utf16> szDataDescr, Pointer<CRYPT_INTEGER_BLOB> pOptionalEntropy, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved, Pointer<CRYPTPROTECT_PROMPTSTRUCT> pPromptStruct, int dwFlags, Pointer<CRYPT_INTEGER_BLOB> pDataOut) → int crypt32
The CryptProtectData function performs encryption on the data in a DATA_BLOB structure. Typically, only a user with the same logon credential as the user who encrypted the data can decrypt the data. In addition, the encryption and decryption usually must be done on the same computer.
CryptProtectMemory(Pointer<NativeType> pDataIn, int cbDataIn, int dwFlags) → int crypt32
The CryptProtectMemory function encrypts memory to prevent others from viewing sensitive information in your process. For example, use the CryptProtectMemory function to encrypt memory that contains a password. Encrypting the password prevents others from viewing it when the process is paged out to the swap file. Otherwise, the password is in plaintext and viewable by others.
CryptUnprotectData(Pointer<CRYPT_INTEGER_BLOB> pDataIn, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> ppszDataDescr, Pointer<CRYPT_INTEGER_BLOB> pOptionalEntropy, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved, Pointer<CRYPTPROTECT_PROMPTSTRUCT> pPromptStruct, int dwFlags, Pointer<CRYPT_INTEGER_BLOB> pDataOut) → int crypt32
The CryptUnprotectData function decrypts and does an integrity check of the data in a DATA_BLOB structure. Usually, the only user who can decrypt the data is a user with the same logon credentials as the user who encrypted the data. In addition, the encryption and decryption must be done on the same computer.
CryptUnprotectMemory(Pointer<NativeType> pDataIn, int cbDataIn, int dwFlags) → int crypt32
The CryptUnprotectMemory function decrypts memory that was encrypted using the CryptProtectMemory function.
CryptUpdateProtectedState(Pointer<NativeType> pOldSid, Pointer<Utf16> pwszOldPassword, int dwFlags, Pointer<Uint32> pdwSuccessCount, Pointer<Uint32> pdwFailureCount) → int crypt32
The CryptUpdateProtectedState function migrates the current user's master keys after the user's security identifier (SID) has changed. This function can be used to preserve encrypted data after a user has been moved from one domain to another.
CTL_CODE(int DeviceType, int Function, int Method, int Access) → int
Maps a control code to a constant
DeactivateActCtx(int dwFlags, int ulCookie) → int kernel32
The DeactivateActCtx function deactivates the activation context corresponding to the specified cookie.
DebugBreak() → void kernel32
Causes a breakpoint exception to occur in the current process. This allows the calling thread to signal the debugger to handle the exception.
DebugBreakProcess(int Process) → int kernel32
Causes a breakpoint exception to occur in the specified process. This allows the calling thread to signal the debugger to handle the exception.
DebugSetProcessKillOnExit(int KillOnExit) → int kernel32
Sets the action to be performed when the calling thread exits.
DecryptFile(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int dwReserved) → int advapi32
Decrypts an encrypted file or directory.
DeferWindowPos(int hWinPosInfo, int hWnd, int hWndInsertAfter, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int uFlags) → int user32
Updates the specified multiple-window – position structure for the specified window. The function then returns a handle to the updated structure. The EndDeferWindowPos function uses the information in this structure to change the position and size of a number of windows simultaneously. The BeginDeferWindowPos function creates the structure.
DefineDosDevice(int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpDeviceName, Pointer<Utf16> lpTargetPath) → int kernel32
Defines, redefines, or deletes MS-DOS device names.
DefMDIChildProc(int hWnd, int uMsg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Provides default processing for any window message that the window procedure of a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window does not process. A window message not processed by the window procedure must be passed to the DefMDIChildProc function, not to the DefWindowProc function.
DefRawInputProc(Pointer<Pointer<RAWINPUT>> paRawInput, int nInput, int cbSizeHeader) → int user32
Unlike DefWindowProcA and DefWindowProcW, this function doesn't do any processing. DefRawInputProc only checks whether cbSizeHeader's value corresponds to the expected size of RAWINPUTHEADER.
DefSubclassProc(int hWnd, int uMsg, int wParam, int lParam) → int comctl32
Calls the next handler in a window's subclass chain. The last handler in the subclass chain calls the original window procedure for the window.
DefWindowProc(int hWnd, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Calls the default window procedure to provide default processing for any window messages that an application does not process. This function ensures that every message is processed. DefWindowProc is called with the same parameters received by the window procedure.
DeleteDC(int hdc) → int gdi32
The DeleteDC function deletes the specified device context (DC).
DeleteFile(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName) → int kernel32
Deletes an existing file.
DeleteForm(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pFormName) → int winspool
The DeleteForm function removes a form name from the list of supported forms.
DeleteIPAddress(int NTEContext) → int iphlpapi
The DeleteIPAddress function deletes an IP address previously added using AddIPAddress.
DeleteMenu(int hMenu, int uPosition, int uFlags) → int user32
Deletes an item from the specified menu. If the menu item opens a menu or submenu, this function destroys the handle to the menu or submenu and frees the memory used by the menu or submenu.
DeleteObject(int ho) → int gdi32
The DeleteObject function deletes a logical pen, brush, font, bitmap, region, or palette, freeing all system resources associated with the object. After the object is deleted, the specified handle is no longer valid.
DeletePrinter(int hPrinter) → int winspool
The DeletePrinter function deletes the specified printer object.
DeletePrinterConnection(Pointer<Utf16> pName) → int winspool
The DeletePrinterConnection function deletes a connection to a printer that was established by a call to AddPrinterConnection or ConnectToPrinterDlg.
DeletePrinterData(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pValueName) → int winspool
The DeletePrinterData function deletes specified configuration data for a printer. A printer's configuration data consists of a set of named and typed values. The DeletePrinterData function deletes one of these values, specified by its value name.
DeletePrinterDataEx(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pKeyName, Pointer<Utf16> pValueName) → int winspool
The DeletePrinterDataEx function deletes a specified value from the configuration data for a printer. A printer's configuration data consists of a set of named and typed values stored in a hierarchy of registry keys. The function deletes a specified value under a specified key.
DeletePrinterKey(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pKeyName) → int winspool
The DeletePrinterKey function deletes a specified key and all its subkeys for a specified printer.
DeleteService(int hService) → int advapi32
Marks the specified service for deletion from the service control manager database.
DeleteVolumeMountPoint(Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumeMountPoint) → int kernel32
Deletes a drive letter or mounted folder.
DestroyAcceleratorTable(int hAccel) → int user32
Destroys an accelerator table.
DestroyCaret() → int user32
Destroys the caret's current shape, frees the caret from the window, and removes the caret from the screen.
DestroyCursor(int hCursor) → int user32
Destroys a cursor and frees any memory the cursor occupied. Do not use this function to destroy a shared cursor.
DestroyIcon(int hIcon) → int user32
Destroys an icon and frees any memory the icon occupied.
DestroyMenu(int hMenu) → int user32
Destroys the specified menu and frees any memory that the menu occupies.
DestroyPhysicalMonitor(int hMonitor) → int dxva2
Closes a handle to a physical monitor. Call this function to close a monitor handle obtained from the GetPhysicalMonitorsFromHMONITOR or GetPhysicalMonitorsFromIDirect3DDevice9 function.
DestroyPhysicalMonitors(int dwPhysicalMonitorArraySize, Pointer<PHYSICAL_MONITOR> pPhysicalMonitorArray) → int dxva2
Closes an array of physical monitor handles. Call this function to close an array of monitor handles obtained from the GetPhysicalMonitorsFromHMONITOR or GetPhysicalMonitorsFromIDirect3DDevice9 function.
DestroyWindow(int hWnd) → int user32
Destroys the specified window. The function sends WM_DESTROY and WM_NCDESTROY messages to the window to deactivate it and remove the keyboard focus from it. The function also destroys the window's menu, flushes the thread message queue, destroys timers, removes clipboard ownership, and breaks the clipboard viewer chain (if the window is at the top of the viewer chain).
DeviceIoControl(int hDevice, int dwIoControlCode, Pointer<NativeType> lpInBuffer, int nInBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> lpOutBuffer, int nOutBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpBytesReturned, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Sends a control code directly to a specified device driver, causing the corresponding device to perform the corresponding operation.
DialogBoxIndirect(int hInstance, Pointer<DLGTEMPLATE> lpTemplate, int hWndParent, Pointer<NativeFunction<DLGPROC>> lpDialogFunc) → void user32
Creates a modal dialog box from a dialog box template in memory. DialogBoxIndirect does not return control until the specified callback function terminates the modal dialog box by calling the EndDialog function.
DialogBoxIndirectParam(int hInstance, Pointer<DLGTEMPLATE> hDialogTemplate, int hWndParent, Pointer<NativeFunction<DLGPROC>> lpDialogFunc, int dwInitParam) → int user32
Creates a modal dialog box from a dialog box template in memory. Before displaying the dialog box, the function passes an application-defined value to the dialog box procedure as the lParam parameter of the WM_INITDIALOG message. An application can use this value to initialize dialog box controls.
DisableProcessWindowsGhosting() → void user32
Disables the window ghosting feature for the calling GUI process. Window ghosting is a Windows Manager feature that lets the user minimize, move, or close the main window of an application that is not responding.
DisableThreadLibraryCalls(int hLibModule) → int kernel32
Disables the DLL_THREAD_ATTACH and DLL_THREAD_DETACH notifications for the specified dynamic-link library (DLL). This can reduce the size of the working set for some applications.
DisconnectNamedPipe(int hNamedPipe) → int kernel32
Disconnects the server end of a named pipe instance from a client process.
DispatchMessage(Pointer<MSG> lpMsg) → int user32
Dispatches a message to a window procedure. It is typically used to dispatch a message retrieved by the GetMessage function.
DnsHostnameToComputerName(Pointer<Utf16> Hostname, Pointer<Utf16> ComputerName, Pointer<Uint32> nSize) → int kernel32
Converts a DNS-style host name to a NetBIOS-style computer name.
DocumentProperties(int hWnd, int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pDeviceName, Pointer<DEVMODE> pDevModeOutput, Pointer<DEVMODE> pDevModeInput, int fMode) → int winspool
The DocumentProperties function retrieves or modifies printer initialization information or displays a printer-configuration property sheet for the specified printer.
DosDateTimeToFileTime(int wFatDate, int wFatTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpFileTime) → int kernel32
Converts MS-DOS date and time values to a file time.
DosDateTimeToVariantTime(int wDosDate, int wDosTime, Pointer<Double> pvtime) → int oleaut32
Converts the MS-DOS representation of time to the date and time representation stored in a variant.
DragDetect(int hwnd, POINT pt) → int user32
Captures the mouse and tracks its movement until the user releases the left button, presses the ESC key, or moves the mouse outside the drag rectangle around the specified point.
DrawAnimatedRects(int hwnd, int idAni, Pointer<RECT> lprcFrom, Pointer<RECT> lprcTo) → int user32
Animates the caption of a window to indicate the opening of an icon or the minimizing or maximizing of a window.
DrawCaption(int hwnd, int hdc, Pointer<RECT> lprect, int flags) → int user32
The DrawCaption function draws a window caption.
DrawEdge(int hdc, Pointer<RECT> qrc, int edge, int grfFlags) → int user32
The DrawEdge function draws one or more edges of rectangle.
DrawEscape(int hdc, int iEscape, int cjIn, Pointer<Utf8> lpIn) → int gdi32
The DrawEscape function provides drawing capabilities of the specified video display that are not directly available through the graphics device interface (GDI).
DrawFocusRect(int hDC, Pointer<RECT> lprc) → int user32
The DrawFocusRect function draws a rectangle in the style used to indicate that the rectangle has the focus.
DrawFrameControl(int param0, Pointer<RECT> param1, int param2, int param3) → int user32
The DrawFrameControl function draws a frame control of the specified type and style.
DrawIcon(int hDC, int X, int Y, int hIcon) → int user32
Draws an icon or cursor into the specified device context.
DrawState(int hdc, int hbrFore, Pointer<NativeFunction<DRAWSTATEPROC>> qfnCallBack, int lData, int wData, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int uFlags) → int user32
The DrawState function displays an image and applies a visual effect to indicate a state, such as a disabled or default state.
DrawStatusText(int hDC, Pointer<RECT> lprc, Pointer<Utf16> pszText, int uFlags) → void comctl32
The DrawStatusText function draws the specified text in the style of a status window with borders.
DrawText(int hdc, Pointer<Utf16> lpchText, int cchText, Pointer<RECT> lprc, int format) → int user32
The DrawText function draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. It formats the text according to the specified method (expanding tabs, justifying characters, breaking lines, and so forth).
DrawTextEx(int hdc, Pointer<Utf16> lpchText, int cchText, Pointer<RECT> lprc, int format, Pointer<DRAWTEXTPARAMS> lpdtp) → int user32
The DrawTextEx function draws formatted text in the specified rectangle.
DrawThemeBackground(int hTheme, int hdc, int iPartId, int iStateId, Pointer<RECT> pRect, Pointer<RECT> pClipRect) → int uxtheme
Draws the border and fill defined by the visual style for the specified control part.
DrawThemeEdge(int hTheme, int hdc, int iPartId, int iStateId, Pointer<RECT> pDestRect, int uEdge, int uFlags, Pointer<RECT> pContentRect) → int uxtheme
Draws one or more edges defined by the visual style of a rectangle.
DrawThemeIcon(int hTheme, int hdc, int iPartId, int iStateId, Pointer<RECT> pRect, int himl, int iImageIndex) → int uxtheme
Draws an image from an image list with the icon effect defined by the visual style.
DrawThemeParentBackground(int hwnd, int hdc, Pointer<RECT> prc) → int uxtheme
Draws the part of a parent control that is covered by a partially-transparent or alpha-blended child control.
DrawThemeParentBackgroundEx(int hwnd, int hdc, int dwFlags, Pointer<RECT> prc) → int uxtheme
Used by partially-transparent or alpha-blended child controls to draw the part of their parent in front of which they appear. Sends a WM_ERASEBKGND message followed by a WM_PRINTCLIENT.
DrawThemeTextEx(int hTheme, int hdc, int iPartId, int iStateId, Pointer<Utf16> pszText, int cchText, int dwTextFlags, Pointer<RECT> pRect, Pointer<DTTOPTS> pOptions) → int uxtheme
Draws text using the color and font defined by the visual style.
DuplicateHandle(int hSourceProcessHandle, int hSourceHandle, int hTargetProcessHandle, Pointer<IntPtr> lpTargetHandle, int dwDesiredAccess, int bInheritHandle, int dwOptions) → int kernel32
Duplicates an object handle.
DwmEnableBlurBehindWindow(int hWnd, Pointer<DWM_BLURBEHIND> pBlurBehind) → int dwmapi
Enables the blur effect on a specified window.
DwmEnableMMCSS(int fEnableMMCSS) → int dwmapi
Notifies the Desktop Window Manager (DWM) to opt in to or out of Multimedia Class Schedule Service (MMCSS) scheduling while the calling process is alive.
DwmExtendFrameIntoClientArea(int hWnd, Pointer<MARGINS> pMarInset) → int dwmapi
Extends the window frame into the client area.
DwmFlush() → int dwmapi
Issues a flush call that blocks the caller until the next present, when all of the Microsoft DirectX surface updates that are currently outstanding have been made. This compensates for very complex scenes or calling processes with very low priority.
DwmGetColorizationColor(Pointer<Uint32> pcrColorization, Pointer<Int32> pfOpaqueBlend) → int dwmapi
Retrieves the current color used for Desktop Window Manager (DWM) glass composition. This value is based on the current color scheme and can be modified by the user. Applications can listen for color changes by handling the WM_DWMCOLORIZATIONCOLORCHANGED notification.
DwmGetTransportAttributes(Pointer<Int32> pfIsRemoting, Pointer<Int32> pfIsConnected, Pointer<Uint32> pDwGeneration) → int dwmapi
Retrieves transport attributes.
DwmGetWindowAttribute(int hwnd, int dwAttribute, Pointer<NativeType> pvAttribute, int cbAttribute) → int dwmapi
Retrieves the current value of a specified Desktop Window Manager (DWM) attribute applied to a window.
DwmInvalidateIconicBitmaps(int hwnd) → int dwmapi
Called by an application to indicate that all previously provided iconic bitmaps from a window, both thumbnails and peek representations, should be refreshed.
DwmRenderGesture(int gt, int cContacts, Pointer<Uint32> pdwPointerID, Pointer<POINT> pPoints) → int dwmapi
Notifies Desktop Window Manager (DWM) that a touch contact has been recognized as a gesture, and that DWM should draw feedback for that gesture.
DwmSetWindowAttribute(int hwnd, int dwAttribute, Pointer<NativeType> pvAttribute, int cbAttribute) → int dwmapi
Sets the value of Desktop Window Manager (DWM) non-client rendering attributes for a window.
DwmShowContact(int dwPointerID, int eShowContact) → int dwmapi
Called by an app or framework to specify the visual feedback type to draw in response to a particular touch or pen contact.
Ellipse(int hdc, int left, int top, int right, int bottom) → int gdi32
The Ellipse function draws an ellipse. The center of the ellipse is the center of the specified bounding rectangle. The ellipse is outlined by using the current pen and is filled by using the current brush.
EmptyClipboard() → int user32
Empties the clipboard and frees handles to data in the clipboard. The function then assigns ownership of the clipboard to the window that currently has the clipboard open.
EmptyWorkingSet(int hProcess) → int kernel32
Removes as many pages as possible from the working set of the specified process.
EnableMenuItem(int hMenu, int uIDEnableItem, int uEnable) → int user32
Enables, disables, or grays the specified menu item.
EnableMouseInPointer(int fEnable) → int user32
Enables the mouse to act as a pointer input device and send WM_POINTER messages.
EnableNonClientDpiScaling(int hwnd) → int user32
In high-DPI displays, enables automatic display scaling of the non-client area portions of the specified top-level window. Must be called during the initialization of that window.
EnableScrollBar(int hWnd, int wSBflags, int wArrows) → int user32
The EnableScrollBar function enables or disables one or both scroll bar arrows.
EnableThemeDialogTexture(int hwnd, int dwFlags) → int uxtheme
Enables or disables the visual style of the background of a dialog window.
EnableWindow(int hWnd, int bEnable) → int user32
Enables or disables mouse and keyboard input to the specified window or control. When input is disabled, the window does not receive input such as mouse clicks and key presses. When input is enabled, the window receives all input.
EncryptFile(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName) → int advapi32
Encrypts a file or directory. All data streams in a file are encrypted. All new files created in an encrypted directory are encrypted.
EndDeferWindowPos(int hWinPosInfo) → int user32
Simultaneously updates the position and size of one or more windows in a single screen-refreshing cycle.
EndDialog(int hDlg, int nResult) → int user32
Destroys a modal dialog box, causing the system to end any processing for the dialog box.
EndDocPrinter(int hPrinter) → int winspool
The EndDocPrinter function ends a print job for the specified printer.
EndMenu() → int user32
Ends the calling thread's active menu.
EndPagePrinter(int hPrinter) → int winspool
The EndPagePrinter function notifies the print spooler that the application is at the end of a page in a print job.
EndPaint(int hWnd, Pointer<PAINTSTRUCT> lpPaint) → int user32
The EndPaint function marks the end of painting in the specified window. This function is required for each call to the BeginPaint function, but only after painting is complete.
EndPath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The EndPath function closes a path bracket and selects the path defined by the bracket into the specified device context.
EndUpdateResource(int hUpdate, int fDiscard) → int kernel32
Commits or discards changes made prior to a call to UpdateResource.
EnumChildWindows(int hWndParent, Pointer<NativeFunction<WNDENUMPROC>> lpEnumFunc, int lParam) → int user32
Enumerates the child windows that belong to the specified parent window by passing the handle to each child window, in turn, to an application-defined callback function. EnumChildWindows continues until the last child window is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE.
EnumClipboardFormats(int format) → int user32
Enumerates the data formats currently available on the clipboard.
EnumDependentServices(int hService, int dwServiceState, Pointer<ENUM_SERVICE_STATUS> lpServices, int cbBufSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBytesNeeded, Pointer<Uint32> lpServicesReturned) → int advapi32
Retrieves the name and status of each service that depends on the specified service; that is, the specified service must be running before the dependent services can run.
EnumDesktopWindows(int hDesktop, Pointer<NativeFunction<WNDENUMPROC>> lpfn, int lParam) → int user32
Enumerates all top-level windows associated with the specified desktop. It passes the handle to each window, in turn, to an application-defined callback function.
EnumDeviceDrivers(Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> lpImageBase, int cb, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbNeeded) → int kernel32
Retrieves the load address for each device driver in the system.
EnumDisplayDevices(Pointer<Utf16> lpDevice, int iDevNum, Pointer<DISPLAY_DEVICE> lpDisplayDevice, int dwFlags) → int user32
The EnumDisplayDevices function lets you obtain information about the display devices in the current session.
EnumDisplayMonitors(int hdc, Pointer<RECT> lprcClip, Pointer<NativeFunction<MONITORENUMPROC>> lpfnEnum, int dwData) → int user32
The EnumDisplayMonitors function enumerates display monitors (including invisible pseudo-monitors associated with the mirroring drivers) that intersect a region formed by the intersection of a specified clipping rectangle and the visible region of a device context. EnumDisplayMonitors calls an application-defined MonitorEnumProc callback function once for each monitor that is enumerated. Note that GetSystemMetrics (SM_CMONITORS) counts only the display monitors.
EnumDisplaySettings(Pointer<Utf16> lpszDeviceName, int iModeNum, Pointer<DEVMODE> lpDevMode) → int user32
The EnumDisplaySettings function retrieves information about one of the graphics modes for a display device. To retrieve information for all the graphics modes of a display device, make a series of calls to this function.
EnumDisplaySettingsEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpszDeviceName, int iModeNum, Pointer<DEVMODE> lpDevMode, int dwFlags) → int user32
The EnumDisplaySettingsEx function retrieves information about one of the graphics modes for a display device. To retrieve information for all the graphics modes for a display device, make a series of calls to this function.
EnumFontFamiliesEx(int hdc, Pointer<LOGFONT> lpLogfont, Pointer<NativeFunction<FONTENUMPROC>> lpProc, int lParam, int dwFlags) → int gdi32
The EnumFontFamiliesEx function enumerates all uniquely-named fonts in the system that match the font characteristics specified by the LOGFONT structure. EnumFontFamiliesEx enumerates fonts based on typeface name, character set, or both.
EnumForms(int hPrinter, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pForm, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded, Pointer<Uint32> pcReturned) → int winspool
The EnumForms function enumerates the forms supported by the specified printer.
EnumJobs(int hPrinter, int FirstJob, int NoJobs, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pJob, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded, Pointer<Uint32> pcReturned) → int winspool
The EnumJobs function retrieves information about a specified set of print jobs for a specified printer.
EnumPageFiles(Pointer<NativeFunction<PENUM_PAGE_FILE_CALLBACK>> pCallBackRoutine, Pointer<NativeType> pContext) → int kernel32
Calls the callback routine for each installed pagefile in the system.
EnumPrinterData(int hPrinter, int dwIndex, Pointer<Utf16> pValueName, int cbValueName, Pointer<Uint32> pcbValueName, Pointer<Uint32> pType, Pointer<Uint8> pData, int cbData, Pointer<Uint32> pcbData) → int winspool
The EnumPrinterData function enumerates configuration data for a specified printer.
EnumPrinterDataEx(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pKeyName, Pointer<Uint8> pEnumValues, int cbEnumValues, Pointer<Uint32> pcbEnumValues, Pointer<Uint32> pnEnumValues) → int winspool
The EnumPrinterDataEx function enumerates all value names and data for a specified printer and key.
EnumPrinterKey(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pKeyName, Pointer<Utf16> pSubkey, int cbSubkey, Pointer<Uint32> pcbSubkey) → int winspool
The EnumPrinterKey function enumerates the subkeys of a specified key for a specified printer.
EnumPrinters(int Flags, Pointer<Utf16> Name, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pPrinterEnum, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded, Pointer<Uint32> pcReturned) → int winspool
The EnumPrinters function enumerates available printers, print servers, domains, or print providers.
EnumProcesses(Pointer<Uint32> lpidProcess, int cb, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbNeeded) → int kernel32
Retrieves the process identifier for each process object in the system.
EnumProcessModules(int hProcess, Pointer<IntPtr> lphModule, int cb, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbNeeded) → int kernel32
Retrieves a handle for each module in the specified process.
EnumProcessModulesEx(int hProcess, Pointer<IntPtr> lphModule, int cb, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbNeeded, int dwFilterFlag) → int kernel32
Retrieves a handle for each module in the specified process that meets the specified filter criteria.
EnumResourceNames(int hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpType, Pointer<NativeFunction<ENUMRESNAMEPROC>> lpEnumFunc, int lParam) → int kernel32
Enumerates resources of a specified type within a binary module. For Windows Vista and later, this is typically a language-neutral Portable Executable (LN file), and the enumeration will also include resources from the corresponding language-specific resource files (.mui files) that contain localizable language resources. It is also possible for hModule to specify an .mui file, in which case only that file is searched for resources.
EnumResourceTypes(int hModule, Pointer<NativeFunction<ENUMRESTYPEPROC>> lpEnumFunc, int lParam) → int kernel32
Enumerates resource types within a binary module. Starting with Windows Vista, this is typically a language-neutral Portable Executable (LN file), and the enumeration also includes resources from one of the corresponding language-specific resource files (.mui files)—if one exists—that contain localizable language resources. It is also possible to use hModule to specify a .mui file, in which case only that file is searched for resource types.
EnumServicesStatus(int hSCManager, int dwServiceType, int dwServiceState, Pointer<ENUM_SERVICE_STATUS> lpServices, int cbBufSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBytesNeeded, Pointer<Uint32> lpServicesReturned, Pointer<Uint32> lpResumeHandle) → int advapi32
Enumerates services in the specified service control manager database. The name and status of each service are provided.
EnumServicesStatusEx(int hSCManager, int InfoLevel, int dwServiceType, int dwServiceState, Pointer<Uint8> lpServices, int cbBufSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBytesNeeded, Pointer<Uint32> lpServicesReturned, Pointer<Uint32> lpResumeHandle, Pointer<Utf16> pszGroupName) → int advapi32
Enumerates services in the specified service control manager database. The name and status of each service are provided, along with additional data based on the specified information level.
EnumSystemFirmwareTables(int FirmwareTableProviderSignature, Pointer<Uint8> pFirmwareTableEnumBuffer, int BufferSize) → int kernel32
Enumerates all system firmware tables of the specified type.
EnumThreadWindows(int dwThreadId, Pointer<NativeFunction<WNDENUMPROC>> lpfn, int lParam) → int user32
Enumerates all nonchild windows associated with a thread by passing the handle to each window, in turn, to an application-defined callback function. EnumThreadWindows continues until the last window is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE.
EnumWindows(Pointer<NativeFunction<WNDENUMPROC>> lpEnumFunc, int lParam) → int user32
Enumerates all top-level windows on the screen by passing the handle to each window, in turn, to an application-defined callback function. EnumWindows continues until the last top-level window is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE.
EqualRect(Pointer<RECT> lprc1, Pointer<RECT> lprc2) → int user32
The EqualRect function determines whether the two specified rectangles are equal by comparing the coordinates of their upper-left and lower-right corners.
EscapeCommFunction(int hFile, int dwFunc) → int kernel32
Directs the specified communications device to perform an extended function.
ExcludeUpdateRgn(int hDC, int hWnd) → int user32
The ExcludeUpdateRgn function prevents drawing within invalid areas of a window by excluding an updated region in the window from a clipping region.
ExitProcess(int uExitCode) → void kernel32
Ends the calling process and all its threads.
ExitThread(int dwExitCode) → void kernel32
Ends the calling thread.
ExtCreatePen(int iPenStyle, int cWidth, Pointer<LOGBRUSH> plbrush, int cStyle, Pointer<Uint32> pstyle) → int gdi32
The ExtCreatePen function creates a logical cosmetic or geometric pen that has the specified style, width, and brush attributes.
ExtractAssociatedIcon(int hInst, Pointer<Utf16> pszIconPath, Pointer<Uint16> piIcon) → int shell32
Gets a handle to an icon stored as a resource in a file or an icon stored in a file's associated executable file.
ExtTextOut(int hdc, int x, int y, int options, Pointer<RECT> lprect, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int c, Pointer<Int32> lpDx) → int gdi32
The ExtTextOut function draws text using the currently selected font, background color, and text color. You can optionally provide dimensions to be used for clipping, opaquing, or both.
FAILED(int result) → bool
Provides a generic test for failure on any status value.
FileEncryptionStatus(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, Pointer<Uint32> lpStatus) → int advapi32
Retrieves the encryption status of the specified file.
FileTimeToDosDateTime(Pointer<FILETIME> lpFileTime, Pointer<Uint16> lpFatDate, Pointer<Uint16> lpFatTime) → int kernel32
Converts a file time to MS-DOS date and time values.
FileTimeToSystemTime(Pointer<FILETIME> lpFileTime, Pointer<SYSTEMTIME> lpSystemTime) → int kernel32
Converts a file time to system time format. System time is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
FillConsoleOutputAttribute(int hConsoleOutput, int wAttribute, int nLength, COORD dwWriteCoord, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfAttrsWritten) → int kernel32
Sets the character attributes for a specified number of character cells, beginning at the specified coordinates in a screen buffer.
FillConsoleOutputCharacter(int hConsoleOutput, int cCharacter, int nLength, COORD dwWriteCoord, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfCharsWritten) → int kernel32
Writes a character to the console screen buffer a specified number of times, beginning at the specified coordinates.
FillMemory(Pointer<NativeType> destination, int length, int fill) → void kernel32
Fills a block of memory with a specified value.
FillPath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The FillPath function closes any open figures in the current path and fills the path's interior by using the current brush and polygon-filling mode.
FillRect(int hDC, Pointer<RECT> lprc, int hbr) → int user32
The FillRect function fills a rectangle by using the specified brush. This function includes the left and top borders, but excludes the right and bottom borders of the rectangle.
FindClose(int hFindFile) → int kernel32
Closes a file search handle opened by the FindFirstFile, FindFirstFileEx, FindFirstFileNameW, FindFirstFileNameTransactedW, FindFirstFileTransacted, FindFirstStreamTransactedW, or FindFirstStreamW functions.
FindCloseChangeNotification(int hChangeHandle) → int kernel32
Stops change notification handle monitoring.
FindClosePrinterChangeNotification(int hChange) → int winspool
The FindClosePrinterChangeNotification function closes a change notification object created by calling the FindFirstPrinterChangeNotification function. The printer or print server associated with the change notification object will no longer be monitored by that object.
FindExecutable(Pointer<Utf16> lpFile, Pointer<Utf16> lpDirectory, Pointer<Utf16> lpResult) → int shell32
Retrieves the name of and handle to the executable (.exe) file associated with a specific document file.
FindFirstChangeNotification(Pointer<Utf16> lpPathName, int bWatchSubtree, int dwNotifyFilter) → int kernel32
Creates a change notification handle and sets up initial change notification filter conditions. A wait on a notification handle succeeds when a change matching the filter conditions occurs in the specified directory or subtree. The function does not report changes to the specified directory itself.
FindFirstFile(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, Pointer<WIN32_FIND_DATA> lpFindFileData) → int kernel32
Searches a directory for a file or subdirectory with a name that matches a specific name (or partial name if wildcards are used).
FindFirstFileEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int fInfoLevelId, Pointer<NativeType> lpFindFileData, int fSearchOp, Pointer<NativeType> lpSearchFilter, int dwAdditionalFlags) → int kernel32
Searches a directory for a file or subdirectory with a name and attributes that match those specified.
FindFirstFileName(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int dwFlags, Pointer<Uint32> StringLength, Pointer<Utf16> LinkName) → int kernel32
Creates an enumeration of all the hard links to the specified file. The FindFirstFileNameW function returns a handle to the enumeration that can be used on subsequent calls to the FindNextFileNameW function.
FindFirstPrinterChangeNotification(int hPrinter, int fdwFilter, int fdwOptions, Pointer<NativeType> pPrinterNotifyOptions) → int winspool
The FindFirstPrinterChangeNotification function creates a change notification object and returns a handle to the object. You can then use this handle in a call to one of the wait functions to monitor changes to the printer or print server.
FindFirstStream(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int InfoLevel, Pointer<NativeType> lpFindStreamData, int dwFlags) → int kernel32
Enumerates the first stream with a ::$DATA stream type in the specified file or directory.
FindFirstVolume(Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumeName, int cchBufferLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves the name of a volume on a computer. FindFirstVolume is used to begin scanning the volumes of a computer.
FindNextChangeNotification(int hChangeHandle) → int kernel32
Requests that the operating system signal a change notification handle the next time it detects an appropriate change.
FindNextFile(int hFindFile, Pointer<WIN32_FIND_DATA> lpFindFileData) → int kernel32
Continues a file search from a previous call to the FindFirstFile, FindFirstFileEx, or FindFirstFileTransacted functions.
FindNextFileName(int hFindStream, Pointer<Uint32> StringLength, Pointer<Utf16> LinkName) → int kernel32
Continues enumerating the hard links to a file using the handle returned by a successful call to the FindFirstFileNameW function.
FindNextPrinterChangeNotification(int hChange, Pointer<Uint32> pdwChange, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppPrinterNotifyInfo) → int winspool
The FindNextPrinterChangeNotification function retrieves information about the most recent change notification for a change notification object associated with a printer or print server. Call this function when a wait operation on the change notification object is satisfied.
FindNextStream(int hFindStream, Pointer<NativeType> lpFindStreamData) → int kernel32
Continues a stream search started by a previous call to the FindFirstStreamW function.
FindNextVolume(int hFindVolume, Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumeName, int cchBufferLength) → int kernel32
Continues a volume search started by a call to the FindFirstVolume function. FindNextVolume finds one volume per call.
FindPackagesByPackageFamily(Pointer<Utf16> packageFamilyName, int packageFilters, Pointer<Uint32> count, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> packageFullNames, Pointer<Uint32> bufferLength, Pointer<Utf16> buffer, Pointer<Uint32> packageProperties) → int kernel32
Finds the packages with the specified family name for the current user.
FindResource(int hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpName, Pointer<Utf16> lpType) → int kernel32
Determines the location of a resource with the specified type and name in the specified module.
FindResourceEx(int hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpType, Pointer<Utf16> lpName, int wLanguage) → int kernel32
Determines the location of the resource with the specified type, name, and language in the specified module.
FindStringOrdinal(int dwFindStringOrdinalFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpStringSource, int cchSource, Pointer<Utf16> lpStringValue, int cchValue, int bIgnoreCase) → int kernel32
Locates a Unicode string (wide characters) in another Unicode string for a non-linguistic comparison.
FindText(Pointer<FINDREPLACE> param0) → int comdlg32
Creates a system-defined modeless Find dialog box that lets the user specify a string to search for and options to use when searching for text in a document.
FindVolumeClose(int hFindVolume) → int kernel32
Closes the specified volume search handle. The FindFirstVolume and FindNextVolume functions use this search handle to locate volumes.
FindWindow(Pointer<Utf16> lpClassName, Pointer<Utf16> lpWindowName) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the top-level window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. This function does not search child windows. This function does not perform a case-sensitive search.
FindWindowEx(int hWndParent, int hWndChildAfter, Pointer<Utf16> lpszClass, Pointer<Utf16> lpszWindow) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to a window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. The function searches child windows, beginning with the one following the specified child window. This function does not perform a case-sensitive search.
FlattenPath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The FlattenPath function transforms any curves in the path that is selected into the current device context (DC), turning each curve into a sequence of lines.
FlushConsoleInputBuffer(int hConsoleInput) → int kernel32
Flushes the console input buffer. All input records currently in the input buffer are discarded.
FlushPrinter(int hPrinter, Pointer<NativeType> pBuf, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcWritten, int cSleep) → int winspool
The FlushPrinter function sends a buffer to the printer in order to clear it from a transient state.
FormatMessage(int dwFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpSource, int dwMessageId, int dwLanguageId, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, int nSize, Pointer<Pointer<Int8>> Arguments) → int kernel32
Formats a message string. The function requires a message definition as input. The message definition can come from a buffer passed into the function. It can come from a message table resource in an already-loaded module. Or the caller can ask the function to search the system's message table resource(s) for the message definition. The function finds the message definition in a message table resource based on a message identifier and a language identifier. The function copies the formatted message text to an output buffer, processing any embedded insert sequences if requested.
FrameRect(int hDC, Pointer<RECT> lprc, int hbr) → int user32
The FrameRect function draws a border around the specified rectangle by using the specified brush. The width and height of the border are always one logical unit.
free(Pointer<NativeType> pointer) → void
Frees allocated memory.
FreeConsole() → int kernel32
Detaches the calling process from its console.
FreeLibrary(int hLibModule) → int kernel32
Frees the loaded dynamic-link library (DLL) module and, if necessary, decrements its reference count. When the reference count reaches zero, the module is unloaded from the address space of the calling process and the handle is no longer valid.
FreeLibraryAndExitThread(int hLibModule, int dwExitCode) → void kernel32
Decrements the reference count of a loaded dynamic-link library (DLL) by one, then calls ExitThread to terminate the calling thread. The function does not return.
FreeMemoryJobObject(Pointer<NativeType> Buffer) → void kernel32
Frees memory that a function related to job objects allocated.
FreePrinterNotifyInfo(Pointer<PRINTER_NOTIFY_INFO> pPrinterNotifyInfo) → int winspool
The FreePrinterNotifyInfo function frees a system-allocated buffer created by the FindNextPrinterChangeNotification function.
GET_SC_WPARAM(int wParam) → int user32
Retrieves the parameters to WM_SYSCOMMAND.
GetActiveObject(Pointer<GUID> rclsid, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved, Pointer<Pointer<COMObject>> ppunk) → int oleaut32
Retrieves a pointer to a running object that has been registered with OLE.
GetActiveProcessorCount(int GroupNumber) → int kernel32
Returns the number of active processors in a processor group or in the system.
GetActiveProcessorGroupCount() → int kernel32
Returns the number of active processor groups in the system.
GetActiveWindow() → int user32
Retrieves the window handle to the active window attached to the calling thread's message queue.
GetAdapterIndex(Pointer<Utf16> AdapterName, Pointer<Uint32> IfIndex) → int iphlpapi
The GetAdapterIndex function obtains the index of an adapter, given its name.
GetAdaptersAddresses(int Family, int Flags, Pointer<NativeType> Reserved, Pointer<IP_ADAPTER_ADDRESSES_LH> AdapterAddresses, Pointer<Uint32> SizePointer) → int iphlpapi
The GetAdaptersAddresses function retrieves the addresses associated with the adapters on the local computer.
GetAltTabInfo(int hwnd, int iItem, Pointer<ALTTABINFO> pati, Pointer<Utf16> pszItemText, int cchItemText) → int user32
Retrieves status information for the specified window if it is the application-switching (ALT+TAB) window.
GetAncestor(int hwnd, int gaFlags) → int user32
Retrieves the handle to the ancestor of the specified window.
GetAsyncKeyState(int vKey) → int user32
Determines whether a key is up or down at the time the function is called, and whether the key was pressed after a previous call to GetAsyncKeyState.
GetAwarenessFromDpiAwarenessContext(int value) → int user32
Retrieves the DPI_AWARENESS value from a DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT.
GetBinaryType(Pointer<Utf16> lpApplicationName, Pointer<Uint32> lpBinaryType) → int kernel32
Determines whether a file is an executable (.exe) file, and if so, which subsystem runs the executable file.
GetBValue(int rgb) → int
Retrieves an intensity value for the blue component of a red, green, blue (RGB) value.
GetCapture() → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the window (if any) that has captured the mouse. Only one window at a time can capture the mouse; this window receives mouse input whether or not the cursor is within its borders.
GetCaretBlinkTime() → int user32
Retrieves the time required to invert the caret's pixels. The user can set this value.
GetCaretPos(Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
Copies the caret's position to the specified POINT structure.
GetClassFile(Pointer<Utf16> szFilename, Pointer<GUID> pclsid) → int ole32
Returns the CLSID associated with the specified file name.
GetClassInfo(int hInstance, Pointer<Utf16> lpClassName, Pointer<WNDCLASS> lpWndClass) → int user32
Retrieves information about a window class.
GetClassInfoEx(int hInstance, Pointer<Utf16> lpszClass, Pointer<WNDCLASSEX> lpwcx) → int user32
Retrieves information about a window class, including a handle to the small icon associated with the window class. The GetClassInfo function does not retrieve a handle to the small icon.
GetClassLongPtr(int hWnd, int nIndex) → int user32
Retrieves the specified value from the WNDCLASSEX structure associated with the specified window.
GetClassName(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpClassName, int nMaxCount) → int user32
Retrieves the name of the class to which the specified window belongs.
getClassName(IInspectable object) → String
Gets the fully qualified name of the Windows Runtime object.
GetClientRect(int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> lpRect) → int user32
Retrieves the coordinates of a window's client area. The client coordinates specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the client area. Because client coordinates are relative to the upper-left corner of a window's client area, the coordinates of the upper-left corner are (0,0).
GetClipboardData(int uFormat) → int user32
Retrieves data from the clipboard in a specified format. The clipboard must have been opened previously.
GetClipboardFormatName(int format, Pointer<Utf16> lpszFormatName, int cchMaxCount) → int user32
Retrieves from the clipboard the name of the specified registered format. The function copies the name to the specified buffer.
GetClipboardOwner() → int user32
Retrieves the window handle of the current owner of the clipboard.
GetClipboardSequenceNumber() → int user32
Retrieves the clipboard sequence number for the current window station.
GetClipboardViewer() → int user32
Retrieves the handle to the first window in the clipboard viewer chain.
GetClipCursor(Pointer<RECT> lpRect) → int user32
Retrieves the screen coordinates of the rectangular area to which the cursor is confined.
GetCommandLine() → Pointer<Utf16> kernel32
Parses a Unicode command line string and returns an array of pointers to the command line arguments, along with a count of such arguments, in a way that is similar to the standard C run-time argv and argc values.
GetCommConfig(int hCommDev, Pointer<COMMCONFIG> lpCC, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the current configuration of a communications device.
GetCommMask(int hFile, Pointer<Uint32> lpEvtMask) → int kernel32
Retrieves the value of the event mask for a specified communications device.
GetCommModemStatus(int hFile, Pointer<Uint32> lpModemStat) → int kernel32
Retrieves the modem control-register values.
GetCommPorts(Pointer<Uint32> lpPortNumbers, int uPortNumbersCount, Pointer<Uint32> puPortNumbersFound) → int kernel32
Gets an array that contains the well-formed COM ports.
GetCommProperties(int hFile, Pointer<COMMPROP> lpCommProp) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the communications properties for a specified communications device.
GetCommState(int hFile, Pointer<DCB> lpDCB) → int kernel32
Retrieves the current control settings for a specified communications device.
GetCommTimeouts(int hFile, Pointer<COMMTIMEOUTS> lpCommTimeouts) → int kernel32
Retrieves the time-out parameters for all read and write operations on a specified communications device.
GetCompressedFileSize(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, Pointer<Uint32> lpFileSizeHigh) → int kernel32
Retrieves the actual number of bytes of disk storage used to store a specified file. If the file is located on a volume that supports compression and the file is compressed, the value obtained is the compressed size of the specified file. If the file is located on a volume that supports sparse files and the file is a sparse file, the value obtained is the sparse size of the specified file.
GetComputerName(Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the NetBIOS name of the local computer. This name is established at system startup, when the system reads it from the registry.
GetComputerNameEx(int NameType, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves a NetBIOS or DNS name associated with the local computer. The names are established at system startup, when the system reads them from the registry.
GetConsoleCP() → int kernel32
Retrieves the input code page used by the console associated with the calling process. A console uses its input code page to translate keyboard input into the corresponding character value.
GetConsoleCursorInfo(int hConsoleOutput, Pointer<CONSOLE_CURSOR_INFO> lpConsoleCursorInfo) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the size and visibility of the cursor for the specified console screen buffer.
GetConsoleMode(int hConsoleHandle, Pointer<Uint32> lpMode) → int kernel32
Retrieves the current input mode of a console's input buffer or the current output mode of a console screen buffer.
GetConsoleOutputCP() → int kernel32
Retrieves the output code page used by the console associated with the calling process. A console uses its output code page to translate the character values written by the various output functions into the images displayed in the console window.
GetConsoleScreenBufferInfo(int hConsoleOutput, Pointer<CONSOLE_SCREEN_BUFFER_INFO> lpConsoleScreenBufferInfo) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the specified console screen buffer.
GetConsoleSelectionInfo(Pointer<CONSOLE_SELECTION_INFO> lpConsoleSelectionInfo) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the current console selection.
GetConsoleTitle(Pointer<Utf16> lpConsoleTitle, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the title for the current console window.
GetConsoleWindow() → int kernel32
Retrieves the window handle used by the console associated with the calling process.
GetCurrentActCtx(Pointer<IntPtr> lphActCtx) → int kernel32
The GetCurrentActCtx function returns the handle to the active activation context of the calling thread.
GetCurrentProcess() → int kernel32
Retrieves a pseudo handle for the current process.
GetCurrentProcessId() → int kernel32
Retrieves the process identifier of the calling process.
GetCurrentProcessorNumber() → int kernel32
Retrieves the number of the processor the current thread was running on during the call to this function.
GetCurrentProcessToken() → int advapi32
Retrieves a pseudo-handle that you can use as a shorthand way to refer to the access token associated with a process.
GetCurrentThemeName(Pointer<Utf16> pszThemeFileName, int cchMaxNameChars, Pointer<Utf16> pszColorBuff, int cchMaxColorChars, Pointer<Utf16> pszSizeBuff, int cchMaxSizeChars) → int uxtheme
Retrieves the name of the current visual style, and optionally retrieves the color scheme name and size name.
GetCurrentThread() → int kernel32
Retrieves a pseudo handle for the calling thread.
GetCurrentThreadEffectiveToken() → int advapi32
Retrieves a pseudo-handle that you can use as a shorthand way to refer to the impersonation token that was assigned to the current thread.
GetCurrentThreadId() → int kernel32
Retrieves the thread identifier of the calling thread.
GetCurrentThreadToken() → int advapi32
Retrieves a pseudo-handle that you can use as a shorthand way to refer to the impersonation token that was assigned to the current thread.
GetCursor() → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the current cursor.
GetCursorInfo(Pointer<CURSORINFO> pci) → int user32
Retrieves information about the global cursor.
GetCursorPos(Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
Retrieves the position of the mouse cursor, in screen coordinates.
GetDC(int hWnd) → int user32
The GetDC function retrieves a handle to a device context (DC) for the client area of a specified window or for the entire screen. You can use the returned handle in subsequent GDI functions to draw in the DC. The device context is an opaque data structure, whose values are used internally by GDI.
GetDCEx(int hWnd, int hrgnClip, int flags) → int user32
The GetDCEx function retrieves a handle to a device context (DC) for the client area of a specified window or for the entire screen. You can use the returned handle in subsequent GDI functions to draw in the DC. The device context is an opaque data structure, whose values are used internally by GDI.
GetDefaultCommConfig(Pointer<Utf16> lpszName, Pointer<COMMCONFIG> lpCC, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the default configuration for the specified communications device.
GetDefaultPrinter(Pointer<Utf16> pszBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> pcchBuffer) → int winspool
The GetDefaultPrinter function retrieves the printer name of the default printer for the current user on the local computer.
GetDesktopWindow() → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the desktop window. The desktop window covers the entire screen. The desktop window is the area on top of which other windows are painted.
GetDeviceCaps(int hdc, int index) → int gdi32
The GetDeviceCaps function retrieves device-specific information for the specified device.
GetDeviceDriverBaseName(Pointer<NativeType> ImageBase, Pointer<Utf16> lpBaseName, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the base name of the specified device driver.
GetDeviceDriverFileName(Pointer<NativeType> ImageBase, Pointer<Utf16> lpFilename, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the path available for the specified device driver.
GetDialogBaseUnits() → int user32
Retrieves the system's dialog base units, which are the average width and height of characters in the system font. For dialog boxes that use the system font, you can use these values to convert between dialog template units, as specified in dialog box templates, and pixels. For dialog boxes that do not use the system font, the conversion from dialog template units to pixels depends on the font used by the dialog box.
GetDialogControlDpiChangeBehavior(int hWnd) → int user32
Retrieves and per-monitor DPI scaling behavior overrides of a child window in a dialog.
GetDialogDpiChangeBehavior(int hDlg) → int user32
Returns the flags that might have been set on a given dialog by an earlier call to SetDialogDpiChangeBehavior. If that function was never called on the dialog, the return value will be zero.
GetDIBits(int hdc, int hbm, int start, int cLines, Pointer<NativeType> lpvBits, Pointer<BITMAPINFO> lpbmi, int usage) → int gdi32
The GetDIBits function retrieves the bits of the specified compatible bitmap and copies them into a buffer as a DIB using the specified format.
GetDiskFreeSpace(Pointer<Utf16> lpRootPathName, Pointer<Uint32> lpSectorsPerCluster, Pointer<Uint32> lpBytesPerSector, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfFreeClusters, Pointer<Uint32> lpTotalNumberOfClusters) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the specified disk, including the amount of free space on the disk.
GetDiskFreeSpaceEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpDirectoryName, Pointer<Uint64> lpFreeBytesAvailableToCaller, Pointer<Uint64> lpTotalNumberOfBytes, Pointer<Uint64> lpTotalNumberOfFreeBytes) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the amount of space that is available on a disk volume, which is the total amount of space, the total amount of free space, and the total amount of free space available to the user that is associated with the calling thread.
GetDisplayAutoRotationPreferences(Pointer<Int32> pOrientation) → int user32
Retrieves the screen auto-rotation preferences for the current process.
GetDlgItem(int hDlg, int nIDDlgItem) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to a control in the specified dialog box.
GetDlgItemInt(int hDlg, int nIDDlgItem, Pointer<Int32> lpTranslated, int bSigned) → int user32
Translates the text of a specified control in a dialog box into an integer value.
GetDlgItemText(int hDlg, int nIDDlgItem, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int cchMax) → int user32
Retrieves the title or text associated with a control in a dialog box.
GetDllDirectory(int nBufferLength, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer) → int kernel32
Retrieves the application-specific portion of the search path used to locate DLLs for the application.
GetDoubleClickTime() → int user32
Retrieves the current double-click time for the mouse. A double-click is a series of two clicks of the mouse button, the second occurring within a specified time after the first. The double-click time is the maximum number of milliseconds that may occur between the first and second click of a double-click. The maximum double-click time is 5000 milliseconds.
GetDpiForMonitor(int hmonitor, int dpiType, Pointer<Uint32> dpiX, Pointer<Uint32> dpiY) → int user32
Queries the dots per inch (dpi) of a display.
GetDpiForSystem() → int user32
Returns the system DPI.
GetDpiForWindow(int hwnd) → int user32
Returns the dots per inch (dpi) value for the associated window.
GetDpiFromDpiAwarenessContext(int value) → int user32
Retrieves the DPI from a given DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT handle. This enables you to determine the DPI of a thread without needed to examine a window created within that thread.
GetDriveType(Pointer<Utf16> lpRootPathName) → int kernel32
Determines whether a disk drive is a removable, fixed, CD-ROM, RAM disk, or network drive.
GetEnvironmentVariable(Pointer<Utf16> lpName, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the contents of the specified variable from the environment block of the calling process.
GetExitCodeProcess(int hProcess, Pointer<Uint32> lpExitCode) → int kernel32
Retrieves the termination status of the specified process.
GetFileAttributes(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName) → int kernel32
Retrieves file system attributes for a specified file or directory.
GetFileAttributesEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int fInfoLevelId, Pointer<NativeType> lpFileInformation) → int kernel32
Retrieves attributes for a specified file or directory.
GetFileInformationByHandle(int hFile, Pointer<BY_HANDLE_FILE_INFORMATION> lpFileInformation) → int kernel32
Retrieves file information for the specified file.
GetFileSize(int hFile, Pointer<Uint32> lpFileSizeHigh) → int kernel32
Retrieves the size of the specified file, in bytes. It is recommended that you use GetFileSizeEx.
GetFileSizeEx(int hFile, Pointer<Int64> lpFileSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the size of the specified file.
GetFileType(int hFile) → int kernel32
Retrieves the file type of the specified file.
GetFileVersionInfo(Pointer<Utf16> lptstrFilename, int dwHandle, int dwLen, Pointer<NativeType> lpData) → int version
Retrieves version information for the specified file.
GetFileVersionInfoEx(int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpwstrFilename, int dwHandle, int dwLen, Pointer<NativeType> lpData) → int version
Retrieves version information for the specified file.
GetFileVersionInfoSize(Pointer<Utf16> lptstrFilename, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwHandle) → int version
Determines whether the operating system can retrieve version information for a specified file. If version information is available, GetFileVersionInfoSize returns the size, in bytes, of that information.
GetFileVersionInfoSizeEx(int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpwstrFilename, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwHandle) → int version
Determines whether the operating system can retrieve version information for a specified file. If version information is available, GetFileVersionInfoSizeEx returns the size, in bytes, of that information.
GetFinalPathNameByHandle(int hFile, Pointer<Utf16> lpszFilePath, int cchFilePath, int dwFlags) → int kernel32
Retrieves the final path for the specified file.
GetFocus() → int user32
Retrieves the handle to the window that has the keyboard focus, if the window is attached to the calling thread's message queue.
GetForegroundWindow() → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the foreground window (the window with which the user is currently working). The system assigns a slightly higher priority to the thread that creates the foreground window than it does to other threads.
GetForm(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pFormName, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pForm, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded) → int winspool
The GetForm function retrieves information about a specified form.
GetFullPathName(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int nBufferLength, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> lpFilePart) → int kernel32
Retrieves the full path and file name of the specified file.
GetGestureConfig(int hwnd, int dwReserved, int dwFlags, Pointer<Uint32> pcIDs, Pointer<GESTURECONFIG> pGestureConfig, int cbSize) → int user32
Retrieves the configuration for which Windows Touch gesture messages are sent from a window.
GetGestureExtraArgs(int hGestureInfo, int cbExtraArgs, Pointer<Uint8> pExtraArgs) → int user32
Retrieves additional information about a gesture from its GESTUREINFO handle.
GetGestureInfo(int hGestureInfo, Pointer<GESTUREINFO> pGestureInfo) → int user32
Retrieves a GESTUREINFO structure given a handle to the gesture information.
GetGUIThreadInfo(int idThread, Pointer<GUITHREADINFO> pgui) → int user32
Retrieves information about the active window or a specified GUI thread.
GetGValue(int rgb) → int
Retrieves an intensity value for the green component of a red, green, blue (RGB) value.
GetHandleInformation(int hObject, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwFlags) → int kernel32
Retrieves certain properties of an object handle.
GetHGlobalFromStream(Pointer<COMObject> pstm, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> phglobal) → int ole32
The GetHGlobalFromStream function retrieves the global memory handle to a stream that was created through a call to the CreateStreamOnHGlobal function.
GetIconInfo(int hIcon, Pointer<ICONINFO> piconinfo) → int user32
Retrieves information about the specified icon or cursor.
GetIconInfoEx(int hicon, Pointer<ICONINFOEX> piconinfo) → int user32
Retrieves the opacity and transparency color key of a layered window.
GetInputState() → int user32
Determines whether there are mouse-button or keyboard messages in the calling thread's message queue.
GetIntegratedDisplaySize(Pointer<Double> sizeInInches) → int kernel32
Retrieves the best estimate of the diagonal size of the built-in screen, in inches.
GetInterfaceInfo(Pointer<IP_INTERFACE_INFO> pIfTable, Pointer<Uint32> dwOutBufLen) → int iphlpapi
The GetInterfaceInfo function obtains the list of the network interface adapters with IPv4 enabled on the local system.
getInterfaces(IInspectable object) → List<String>
Returns the interface IDs that are implemented by the Windows Runtime object.
GetJob(int hPrinter, int JobId, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pJob, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded) → int winspool
The GetJob function retrieves information about a specified print job.
GetKeyboardLayout(int idThread) → int user32
Retrieves the active input locale identifier (formerly called the keyboard layout).
GetKeyboardLayoutList(int nBuff, Pointer<IntPtr> lpList) → int user32
Retrieves the input locale identifiers (formerly called keyboard layout handles) corresponding to the current set of input locales in the system. The function copies the identifiers to the specified buffer.
GetKeyboardLayoutName(Pointer<Utf16> pwszKLID) → int user32
Retrieves the name of the active input locale identifier (formerly called the keyboard layout) for the system.
GetKeyboardState(Pointer<Uint8> lpKeyState) → int user32
Copies the status of the 256 virtual keys to the specified buffer.
GetKeyboardType(int nTypeFlag) → int user32
Retrieves information about the current keyboard.
GetKeyNameText(int lParam, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int cchSize) → int user32
Retrieves a string that represents the name of a key.
GetKeyState(int nVirtKey) → int user32
Retrieves the status of the specified virtual key. The status specifies whether the key is up, down, or toggled (on, off—alternating each time the key is pressed).
GetLargestConsoleWindowSize(int hConsoleOutput) → COORD kernel32
Retrieves the size of the largest possible console window, based on the current font and the size of the display.
GetLastError() → int kernel32
Retrieves the calling thread's last-error code value. The last-error code is maintained on a per-thread basis. Multiple threads do not overwrite each other's last-error code.
GetLastInputInfo(Pointer<LASTINPUTINFO> plii) → int user32
Retrieves the time of the last input event.
GetLayeredWindowAttributes(int hwnd, Pointer<Uint32> pcrKey, Pointer<Uint8> pbAlpha, Pointer<Uint32> pdwFlags) → int user32
Retrieves the opacity and transparency color key of a layered window.
GetLocaleInfoEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpLocaleName, int LCType, Pointer<Utf16> lpLCData, int cchData) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about a locale specified by name.
GetLocalTime(Pointer<SYSTEMTIME> lpSystemTime) → void kernel32
Retrieves the current local date and time.
GetLogicalDrives() → int kernel32
Retrieves a bitmask representing the currently available disk drives.
GetLogicalDriveStrings(int nBufferLength, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer) → int kernel32
Fills a buffer with strings that specify valid drives in the system.
GetLogicalProcessorInformation(Pointer<SYSTEM_LOGICAL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION> Buffer, Pointer<Uint32> ReturnedLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about logical processors and related hardware.
GetLongPathName(Pointer<Utf16> lpszShortPath, Pointer<Utf16> lpszLongPath, int cchBuffer) → int kernel32
Converts the specified path to its long form.
GetMachineTypeAttributes(int Machine, Pointer<Int32> MachineTypeAttributes) → int kernel32
Queries if the specified architecture is supported on the current system, either natively or by any form of compatibility or emulation layer.
GetMappedFileName(int hProcess, Pointer<NativeType> lpv, Pointer<Utf16> lpFilename, int nSize) → int kernel32
Checks whether the specified address is within a memory-mapped file in the address space of the specified process. If so, the function returns the name of the memory-mapped file.
GetMaximumProcessorCount(int GroupNumber) → int kernel32
Returns the maximum number of logical processors that a processor group or the system can have.
GetMaximumProcessorGroupCount() → int kernel32
Returns the maximum number of processor groups that the system can have.
GetMenu(int hWnd) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the menu assigned to the specified window.
GetMenuBarInfo(int hwnd, int idObject, int idItem, Pointer<MENUBARINFO> pmbi) → int user32
Retrieves information about the specified menu bar.
GetMenuDefaultItem(int hMenu, int fByPos, int gmdiFlags) → int user32
Determines the default menu item on the specified menu.
GetMenuInfo(int param0, Pointer<MENUINFO> param1) → int user32
Retrieves information about a specified menu.
GetMenuItemCount(int hMenu) → int user32
Determines the number of items in the specified menu.
GetMenuItemID(int hMenu, int nPos) → int user32
Retrieves the menu item identifier of a menu item located at the specified position in a menu.
GetMenuItemInfo(int hmenu, int item, int fByPosition, Pointer<MENUITEMINFO> lpmii) → int user32
Retrieves information about a menu item.
GetMenuItemRect(int hWnd, int hMenu, int uItem, Pointer<RECT> lprcItem) → int user32
Retrieves the bounding rectangle for the specified menu item.
GetMenuState(int hMenu, int uId, int uFlags) → int user32
Retrieves the menu flags associated with the specified menu item. If the menu item opens a submenu, this function also returns the number of items in the submenu.
GetMenuString(int hMenu, int uIDItem, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int cchMax, int flags) → int user32
Copies the text string of the specified menu item into the specified buffer.
GetMessage(Pointer<MSG> lpMsg, int hWnd, int wMsgFilterMin, int wMsgFilterMax) → int user32
Retrieves a message from the calling thread's message queue. The function dispatches incoming sent messages until a posted message is available for retrieval.
GetMessageExtraInfo() → int user32
Retrieves the extra message information for the current thread. Extra message information is an application- or driver-defined value associated with the current thread's message queue.
GetMessagePos() → int user32
Retrieves the cursor position for the last message retrieved by the GetMessage function.
GetMessageTime() → int user32
Retrieves the message time for the last message retrieved by the GetMessage function. The time is a long integer that specifies the elapsed time, in milliseconds, from the time the system was started to the time the message was created (that is, placed in the thread's message queue).
GetModuleBaseName(int hProcess, int hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpBaseName, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the base name of the specified module.
GetModuleFileName(int hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpFilename, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the fully qualified path for the file that contains the specified module. The module must have been loaded by the current process.
GetModuleFileNameEx(int hProcess, int hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpFilename, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the fully qualified path for the file containing the specified module.
GetModuleHandle(Pointer<Utf16> lpModuleName) → int kernel32
Retrieves a module handle for the specified module. The module must have been loaded by the calling process.
GetModuleHandleEx(int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpModuleName, Pointer<IntPtr> phModule) → int kernel32
Retrieves a module handle for the specified module and increments the module's reference count unless GET_MODULE_HANDLE_EX_FLAG_UNCHANGED_REFCOUNT is specified. The module must have been loaded by the calling process.
GetModuleInformation(int hProcess, int hModule, Pointer<MODULEINFO> lpmodinfo, int cb) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the specified module in the MODULEINFO structure.
GetMonitorBrightness(int hMonitor, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMinimumBrightness, Pointer<Uint32> pdwCurrentBrightness, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMaximumBrightness) → int dxva2
Retrieves a monitor's minimum, maximum, and current brightness settings.
GetMonitorCapabilities(int hMonitor, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMonitorCapabilities, Pointer<Uint32> pdwSupportedColorTemperatures) → int dxva2
Retrieves the configuration capabilities of a monitor. Call this function to find out which high-level monitor configuration functions are supported by the monitor.
GetMonitorColorTemperature(int hMonitor, Pointer<Int32> pctCurrentColorTemperature) → int dxva2
Retrieves a monitor's current color temperature.
GetMonitorContrast(int hMonitor, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMinimumContrast, Pointer<Uint32> pdwCurrentContrast, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMaximumContrast) → int dxva2
Retrieves a monitor's minimum, maximum, and current contrast settings.
GetMonitorDisplayAreaPosition(int hMonitor, int ptPositionType, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMinimumPosition, Pointer<Uint32> pdwCurrentPosition, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMaximumPosition) → int dxva2
Retrieves a monitor's minimum, maximum, and current horizontal or vertical position.
GetMonitorDisplayAreaSize(int hMonitor, int stSizeType, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMinimumWidthOrHeight, Pointer<Uint32> pdwCurrentWidthOrHeight, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMaximumWidthOrHeight) → int dxva2
Retrieves a monitor's minimum, maximum, and current width or height.
GetMonitorInfo(int hMonitor, Pointer<MONITORINFO> lpmi) → int user32
The GetMonitorInfo function retrieves information about a display monitor.
GetMonitorRedGreenOrBlueDrive(int hMonitor, int dtDriveType, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMinimumDrive, Pointer<Uint32> pdwCurrentDrive, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMaximumDrive) → int dxva2
Retrieves a monitor's red, green, or blue drive value.
GetMonitorRedGreenOrBlueGain(int hMonitor, int gtGainType, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMinimumGain, Pointer<Uint32> pdwCurrentGain, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMaximumGain) → int dxva2
Retrieves a monitor's red, green, or blue gain value.
GetMonitorTechnologyType(int hMonitor, Pointer<Int32> pdtyDisplayTechnologyType) → int dxva2
Retrieves the type of technology used by a monitor.
GetMouseMovePointsEx(int cbSize, Pointer<MOUSEMOVEPOINT> lppt, Pointer<MOUSEMOVEPOINT> lpptBuf, int nBufPoints, int resolution) → int user32
Retrieves a history of up to 64 previous coordinates of the mouse or pen.
GetNamedPipeClientComputerName(int Pipe, Pointer<Utf16> ClientComputerName, int ClientComputerNameLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves the client computer name for the specified named pipe.
GetNamedPipeClientProcessId(int Pipe, Pointer<Uint32> ClientProcessId) → int kernel32
Retrieves the client process identifier for the specified named pipe.
GetNamedPipeClientSessionId(int Pipe, Pointer<Uint32> ClientSessionId) → int kernel32
Retrieves the client process identifier for the specified named pipe.
GetNamedPipeHandleState(int hNamedPipe, Pointer<Uint32> lpState, Pointer<Uint32> lpCurInstances, Pointer<Uint32> lpMaxCollectionCount, Pointer<Uint32> lpCollectDataTimeout, Pointer<Utf16> lpUserName, int nMaxUserNameSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about a specified named pipe. The information returned can vary during the lifetime of an instance of the named pipe.
GetNamedPipeInfo(int hNamedPipe, Pointer<Uint32> lpFlags, Pointer<Uint32> lpOutBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpInBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpMaxInstances) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the specified named pipe.
GetNativeSystemInfo(Pointer<SYSTEM_INFO> lpSystemInfo) → void kernel32
Retrieves information about the current system to an application running under WOW64. If the function is called from a 64-bit application, or on a 64-bit system that does not have an Intel64 or x64 processor (such as ARM64), it is equivalent to the GetSystemInfo function.
GetNearestColor(int hdc, int color) → int gdi32
The GetNearestColor function retrieves a color value identifying a color from the system palette that will be displayed when the specified color value is used.
GetNextDlgGroupItem(int hDlg, int hCtl, int bPrevious) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the first control in a group of controls that precedes (or follows) the specified control in a dialog box.
GetNextDlgTabItem(int hDlg, int hCtl, int bPrevious) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the first control that has the WS_TABSTOP style that precedes (or follows) the specified control.
GetNumberOfConsoleInputEvents(int hConsoleInput, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfEvents) → int kernel32
Retrieves the number of unread input records in the console's input buffer.
GetNumberOfPhysicalMonitorsFromHMONITOR(int hMonitor, Pointer<Uint32> pdwNumberOfPhysicalMonitors) → int dxva2
Retrieves the number of physical monitors associated with an HMONITOR monitor handle. Call this function before calling GetPhysicalMonitorsFromHMONITOR.
GetObject(int h, int c, Pointer<NativeType> pv) → int gdi32
The GetObject function retrieves information for the specified graphics object.
GetOpenClipboardWindow() → int user32
Retrieves the handle to the window that currently has the clipboard open.
GetOpenFileName(Pointer<OPENFILENAME> param0) → int comdlg32
Creates an Open dialog box that lets the user specify the drive, directory, and the name of a file or set of files to be opened.
GetOverlappedResult(int hFile, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfBytesTransferred, int bWait) → int kernel32
Retrieves the results of an overlapped operation on the specified file, named pipe, or communications device. To specify a timeout interval or wait on an alertable thread, use GetOverlappedResultEx.
GetOverlappedResultEx(int hFile, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfBytesTransferred, int dwMilliseconds, int bAlertable) → int kernel32
Retrieves the results of an overlapped operation on the specified file, named pipe, or communications device within the specified time-out interval. The calling thread can perform an alertable wait.
GetParent(int hWnd) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the specified window's parent or owner.
GetPath(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, Pointer<Uint8> aj, int cpt) → int gdi32
The GetPath function retrieves the coordinates defining the endpoints of lines and the control points of curves found in the path that is selected into the specified device context.
GetPerAdapterInfo(int IfIndex, Pointer<IP_PER_ADAPTER_INFO_W2KSP1> pPerAdapterInfo, Pointer<Uint32> pOutBufLen) → int iphlpapi
The GetPerAdapterInfo function retrieves information about the adapter corresponding to the specified interface.
GetPerformanceInfo(Pointer<PERFORMANCE_INFORMATION> pPerformanceInformation, int cb) → int kernel32
Retrieves the performance values contained in the PERFORMANCE_INFORMATION structure.
GetPhysicalCursorPos(Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
Retrieves the position of the cursor in physical coordinates.
GetPhysicallyInstalledSystemMemory(Pointer<Uint64> TotalMemoryInKilobytes) → int kernel32
Retrieves the amount of RAM that is physically installed on the computer.
GetPhysicalMonitorsFromHMONITOR(int hMonitor, int dwPhysicalMonitorArraySize, Pointer<PHYSICAL_MONITOR> pPhysicalMonitorArray) → int dxva2
Retrieves the physical monitors associated with an HMONITOR monitor handle.
GetPixel(int hdc, int x, int y) → int gdi32
The GetPixel function retrieves the red, green, blue (RGB) color value of the pixel at the specified coordinates.
GetPointerCursorId(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> cursorId) → int user32
Retrieves the cursor identifier associated with the specified pointer.
GetPointerFrameInfo(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> pointerCount, Pointer<POINTER_INFO> pointerInfo) → int user32
Gets the entire frame of information for the specified pointers associated with the current message.
GetPointerFrameInfoHistory(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> entriesCount, Pointer<Uint32> pointerCount, Pointer<POINTER_INFO> pointerInfo) → int user32
Gets the entire frame of information (including coalesced input frames) for the specified pointers associated with the current message.
GetPointerFramePenInfo(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> pointerCount, Pointer<POINTER_PEN_INFO> penInfo) → int user32
Gets the entire frame of pen-based information for the specified pointers (of type PT_PEN) associated with the current message.
GetPointerFramePenInfoHistory(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> entriesCount, Pointer<Uint32> pointerCount, Pointer<POINTER_PEN_INFO> penInfo) → int user32
Gets the entire frame of pen-based information (including coalesced input frames) for the specified pointers (of type PT_PEN) associated with the current message.
GetPointerFrameTouchInfo(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> pointerCount, Pointer<POINTER_TOUCH_INFO> touchInfo) → int user32
Gets the entire frame of touch-based information for the specified pointers (of type PT_TOUCH) associated with the current message.
GetPointerFrameTouchInfoHistory(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> entriesCount, Pointer<Uint32> pointerCount, Pointer<POINTER_TOUCH_INFO> touchInfo) → int user32
Gets the entire frame of touch-based information (including coalesced input frames) for the specified pointers (of type PT_TOUCH) associated with the current message.
GetPointerInfo(int pointerId, Pointer<POINTER_INFO> pointerInfo) → int user32
Gets the information for the specified pointer associated with the current message.
GetPointerInfoHistory(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> entriesCount, Pointer<POINTER_INFO> pointerInfo) → int user32
Gets the information associated with the individual inputs, if any, that were coalesced into the current message for the specified pointer. The most recent input is included in the returned history and is the same as the most recent input returned by the GetPointerInfo function.
GetPointerInputTransform(int pointerId, int historyCount, Pointer<INPUT_TRANSFORM> inputTransform) → int user32
Gets one or more transforms for the pointer information coordinates associated with the current message.
GetPointerPenInfo(int pointerId, Pointer<POINTER_PEN_INFO> penInfo) → int user32
Gets the pen-based information for the specified pointer (of type PT_PEN) associated with the current message.
GetPointerPenInfoHistory(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> entriesCount, Pointer<POINTER_PEN_INFO> penInfo) → int user32
Gets the pen-based information associated with the individual inputs, if any, that were coalesced into the current message for the specified pointer (of type PT_PEN). The most recent input is included in the returned history and is the same as the most recent input returned by the GetPointerPenInfo function.
GetPointerTouchInfo(int pointerId, Pointer<POINTER_TOUCH_INFO> touchInfo) → int user32
Gets the touch-based information for the specified pointer (of type PT_TOUCH) associated with the current message.
GetPointerTouchInfoHistory(int pointerId, Pointer<Uint32> entriesCount, Pointer<POINTER_TOUCH_INFO> touchInfo) → int user32
Gets the touch-based information associated with the individual inputs, if any, that were coalesced into the current message for the specified pointer (of type PT_TOUCH). The most recent input is included in the returned history and is the same as the most recent input returned by the GetPointerTouchInfo function.
GetPointerType(int pointerId, Pointer<Int32> pointerType) → int user32
Retrieves the pointer type for a specified pointer.
GetPrinter(int hPrinter, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pPrinter, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded) → int winspool
The GetPrinter function retrieves information about a specified printer.
GetPrinterData(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pValueName, Pointer<Uint32> pType, Pointer<Uint8> pData, int nSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded) → int winspool
The GetPrinterData function retrieves configuration data for the specified printer or print server.
GetPrinterDataEx(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pKeyName, Pointer<Utf16> pValueName, Pointer<Uint32> pType, Pointer<Uint8> pData, int nSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbNeeded) → int winspool
The GetPrinterDataEx function retrieves configuration data for the specified printer or print server. GetPrinterDataEx can retrieve values that the SetPrinterData function stored. In addition, GetPrinterDataEx can retrieve values that the SetPrinterDataEx function stored under a specified key.
GetPrintExecutionData(Pointer<PRINT_EXECUTION_DATA> pData) → int winspool
The GetPrintExecutionData retrieves the current print context.
GetPriorityClipboardFormat(Pointer<Uint32> paFormatPriorityList, int cFormats) → int user32
Retrieves the first available clipboard format in the specified list.
GetProcAddress(int hModule, Pointer<Utf8> lpProcName) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Retrieves the address of an exported function or variable from the specified dynamic-link library (DLL).
GetProcessDpiAwareness(int hprocess, Pointer<Int32> value) → int user32
Retrieves the dots per inch (dpi) awareness of the specified process.
GetProcessHeap() → int kernel32
Retrieves a handle to the default heap of the calling process. This handle can then be used in subsequent calls to the heap functions.
GetProcessHeaps(int NumberOfHeaps, Pointer<IntPtr> ProcessHeaps) → int kernel32
Returns the number of active heaps and retrieves handles to all of the active heaps for the calling process.
GetProcessId(int Process) → int kernel32
Retrieves the process identifier of the specified process.
GetProcessImageFileName(int hProcess, Pointer<Utf16> lpImageFileName, int nSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the name of the executable file for the specified process.
GetProcessShutdownParameters(Pointer<Uint32> lpdwLevel, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwFlags) → int kernel32
Retrieves the shutdown parameters for the currently calling process.
GetProcessTimes(int hProcess, Pointer<FILETIME> lpCreationTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpExitTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpKernelTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpUserTime) → int kernel32
Retrieves timing information for the specified process.
GetProcessVersion(int ProcessId) → int kernel32
Retrieves the major and minor version numbers of the system on which the specified process expects to run.
GetProcessWindowStation() → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the current window station for the calling process.
GetProcessWorkingSetSize(int hProcess, Pointer<IntPtr> lpMinimumWorkingSetSize, Pointer<IntPtr> lpMaximumWorkingSetSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the minimum and maximum working set sizes of the specified process.
GetProductInfo(int dwOSMajorVersion, int dwOSMinorVersion, int dwSpMajorVersion, int dwSpMinorVersion, Pointer<Uint32> pdwReturnedProductType) → int kernel32
Retrieves the product type for the operating system on the local computer, and maps the type to the product types supported by the specified operating system.
GetProp(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpString) → int user32
Retrieves a data handle from the property list of the specified window. The character string identifies the handle to be retrieved. The string and handle must have been added to the property list by a previous call to the SetProp function.
GetQueuedCompletionStatus(int CompletionPort, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfBytesTransferred, Pointer<IntPtr> lpCompletionKey, Pointer<Pointer<OVERLAPPED>> lpOverlapped, int dwMilliseconds) → int kernel32
Attempts to dequeue an I/O completion packet from the specified I/O completion port. If there is no completion packet queued, the function waits for a pending I/O operation associated with the completion port to complete.
GetQueuedCompletionStatusEx(int CompletionPort, Pointer<OVERLAPPED_ENTRY> lpCompletionPortEntries, int ulCount, Pointer<Uint32> ulNumEntriesRemoved, int dwMilliseconds, int fAlertable) → int kernel32
Retrieves multiple completion port entries simultaneously. It waits for pending I/O operations that are associated with the specified completion port to complete.
GetRawInputBuffer(Pointer<RAWINPUT> pData, Pointer<Uint32> pcbSize, int cbSizeHeader) → int user32
Performs a buffered read of the raw input messages data found in the calling thread's message queue.
GetRawInputData(int hRawInput, int uiCommand, Pointer<NativeType> pData, Pointer<Uint32> pcbSize, int cbSizeHeader) → int user32
Retrieves the raw input from the specified device.
GetRawInputDeviceInfo(int hDevice, int uiCommand, Pointer<NativeType> pData, Pointer<Uint32> pcbSize) → int user32
Retrieves information about the raw input device.
GetRawInputDeviceList(Pointer<RAWINPUTDEVICELIST> pRawInputDeviceList, Pointer<Uint32> puiNumDevices, int cbSize) → int user32
Enumerates the raw input devices attached to the system.
GetRegisteredRawInputDevices(Pointer<RAWINPUTDEVICE> pRawInputDevices, Pointer<Uint32> puiNumDevices, int cbSize) → int user32
Retrieves the information about the raw input devices for the current application.
GetRestrictedErrorInfo(Pointer<Pointer<COMObject>> ppRestrictedErrorInfo) → int winrt
Gets the restricted error information object set by a previous call to SetRestrictedErrorInfo in the current logical thread.
GetRValue(int rgb) → int
Retrieves an intensity value for the red component of a red, green, blue (RGB) value.
GetSaveFileName(Pointer<OPENFILENAME> param0) → int comdlg32
Creates a Save dialog box that lets the user specify the drive, directory, and name of a file to save.
GetScaleFactorForMonitor(int hMon, Pointer<Int32> pScale) → int user32
Gets the scale factor of a specific monitor.
GetScrollBarInfo(int hwnd, int idObject, Pointer<SCROLLBARINFO> psbi) → int user32
The GetScrollBarInfo function retrieves information about the specified scroll bar.
GetScrollInfo(int hwnd, int nBar, Pointer<SCROLLINFO> lpsi) → int user32
The GetScrollInfo function retrieves the parameters of a scroll bar, including the minimum and maximum scrolling positions, the page size, and the position of the scroll box (thumb).
GetServiceDisplayName(int hSCManager, Pointer<Utf16> lpServiceName, Pointer<Utf16> lpDisplayName, Pointer<Uint32> lpcchBuffer) → int advapi32
Retrieves the display name of the specified service.
GetServiceKeyName(int hSCManager, Pointer<Utf16> lpDisplayName, Pointer<Utf16> lpServiceName, Pointer<Uint32> lpcchBuffer) → int advapi32
Retrieves the service name of the specified service.
GetShellWindow() → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the Shell's desktop window.
GetShortPathName(Pointer<Utf16> lpszLongPath, Pointer<Utf16> lpszShortPath, int cchBuffer) → int kernel32
Retrieves the short path form of the specified path.
GetSpoolFileHandle(int hPrinter) → int winspool
The GetSpoolFileHandle function retrieves a handle for the spool file associated with the job currently submitted by the application.
GetStartupInfo(Pointer<STARTUPINFO> lpStartupInfo) → void kernel32
Retrieves the contents of the STARTUPINFO structure that was specified when the calling process was created.
GetStdHandle(int nStdHandle) → int kernel32
Retrieves a handle to the specified standard device (standard input, standard output, or standard error).
GetStockObject(int i) → int gdi32
The GetStockObject function retrieves a handle to one of the stock pens, brushes, fonts, or palettes.
GetSubMenu(int hMenu, int nPos) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the drop-down menu or submenu activated by the specified menu item.
GetSysColor(int nIndex) → int user32
Retrieves the current color of the specified display element. Display elements are the parts of a window and the display that appear on the system display screen.
GetSysColorBrush(int nIndex) → int user32
The GetSysColorBrush function retrieves a handle identifying a logical brush that corresponds to the specified color index.
GetSystemDefaultLangID() → int kernel32
Returns the language identifier for the system locale.
GetSystemDefaultLocaleName(Pointer<Utf16> lpLocaleName, int cchLocaleName) → int kernel32
Retrieves the system default locale name.
GetSystemDirectory(Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, int uSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the path of the system directory. The system directory contains system files such as dynamic-link libraries and drivers.
GetSystemDpiForProcess(int hProcess) → int user32
Retrieves the system DPI associated with a given process. This is useful for avoiding compatibility issues that arise from sharing DPI-sensitive information between multiple system-aware processes with different system DPI values.
GetSystemInfo(Pointer<SYSTEM_INFO> lpSystemInfo) → void kernel32
Retrieves information about the current system. To retrieve accurate information for an application running on WOW64, call the GetNativeSystemInfo function.
GetSystemMenu(int hWnd, int bRevert) → int user32
Enables the application to access the window menu (also known as the system menu or the control menu) for copying and modifying.
GetSystemMetrics(int nIndex) → int user32
Retrieves the specified system metric or system configuration setting. Note that all dimensions retrieved by GetSystemMetrics are in pixels.
GetSystemMetricsForDpi(int nIndex, int dpi) → int user32
Retrieves the specified system metric or system configuration setting taking into account a provided DPI.
GetSystemPowerStatus(Pointer<SYSTEM_POWER_STATUS> lpSystemPowerStatus) → int kernel32
Retrieves the power status of the system. The status indicates whether the system is running on AC or DC power, whether the battery is currently charging, how much battery life remains, and if battery saver is on or off.
GetSystemTime(Pointer<SYSTEMTIME> lpSystemTime) → void kernel32
Retrieves the current local date and time.
GetSystemTimeAdjustment(Pointer<Uint32> lpTimeAdjustment, Pointer<Uint32> lpTimeIncrement, Pointer<Int32> lpTimeAdjustmentDisabled) → int kernel32
Determines whether the system is applying periodic time adjustments to its time-of-day clock, and obtains the value and period of any such adjustments.
GetSystemTimes(Pointer<FILETIME> lpIdleTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpKernelTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpUserTime) → int kernel32
Retrieves system timing information. On a multiprocessor system, the values returned are the sum of the designated times across all processors.
GetTabbedTextExtent(int hdc, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int chCount, int nTabPositions, Pointer<Int32> lpnTabStopPositions) → int user32
The GetTabbedTextExtent function computes the width and height of a character string. If the string contains one or more tab characters, the width of the string is based upon the specified tab stops. The GetTabbedTextExtent function uses the currently selected font to compute the dimensions of the string.
GetTempFileName(Pointer<Utf16> lpPathName, Pointer<Utf16> lpPrefixString, int uUnique, Pointer<Utf16> lpTempFileName) → int kernel32
Creates a name for a temporary file. If a unique file name is generated, an empty file is created and the handle to it is released; otherwise, only a file name is generated.
GetTempPath(int nBufferLength, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer) → int kernel32
Retrieves the path of the directory designated for temporary files.
GetTempPath2(int BufferLength, Pointer<Utf16> Buffer) → int kernel32
Retrieves the path of the directory designated for temporary files, based on the privileges of the calling process.
GetTextMetrics(int hdc, Pointer<TEXTMETRIC> lptm) → int gdi32
The GetTextMetrics function fills the specified buffer with the metrics for the currently selected font.
GetThemeMetric(int hTheme, int hdc, int iPartId, int iStateId, int iPropId, Pointer<Int32> piVal) → int uxtheme
Retrieves the value of a metric property.
GetThemePartSize(int hTheme, int hdc, int iPartId, int iStateId, Pointer<RECT> prc, int eSize, Pointer<SIZE> psz) → int uxtheme
Calculates the original size of the part defined by a visual style.
GetThemeRect(int hTheme, int iPartId, int iStateId, int iPropId, Pointer<RECT> pRect) → int uxtheme
Retrieves the value of a RECT property.
GetThemeSysColor(int hTheme, int iColorId) → int uxtheme
Retrieves the value of a system color.
GetThemeSysColorBrush(int hTheme, int iColorId) → int uxtheme
Retrieves a system color brush.
GetThemeSysFont(int hTheme, int iFontId, Pointer<LOGFONT> plf) → int uxtheme
Retrieves the LOGFONT of a system font.
GetThemeSysSize(int hTheme, int iSizeId) → int uxtheme
Retrieves the value of a system size metric from theme data.
GetThreadDesktop(int dwThreadId) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the desktop assigned to the specified thread.
GetThreadDpiAwarenessContext() → int user32
Gets the DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT for the current thread.
GetThreadDpiHostingBehavior() → int user32
Retrieves the DPI_HOSTING_BEHAVIOR from the current thread.
GetThreadId(int Thread) → int kernel32
Retrieves the thread identifier of the specified thread.
GetThreadLocale() → int kernel32
Returns the locale identifier of the current locale for the calling thread.
GetThreadTimes(int hThread, Pointer<FILETIME> lpCreationTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpExitTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpKernelTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpUserTime) → int kernel32
Retrieves timing information for the specified thread.
GetThreadUILanguage() → int kernel32
Returns the language identifier of the first user interface language for the current thread.
GetTickCount() → int kernel32
Retrieves the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since the system was started, up to 49.7 days.
GetTitleBarInfo(int hwnd, Pointer<TITLEBARINFO> pti) → int user32
Retrieves information about the specified title bar.
GetTokenInformation(int TokenHandle, int TokenInformationClass, Pointer<NativeType> TokenInformation, int TokenInformationLength, Pointer<Uint32> ReturnLength) → int advapi32
The GetTokenInformation function retrieves a specified type of information about an access token. The calling process must have appropriate access rights to obtain the information.
GetTopWindow(int hWnd) → int user32
Examines the Z order of the child windows associated with the specified parent window and retrieves a handle to the child window at the top of the Z order.
GetTouchInputInfo(int hTouchInput, int cInputs, Pointer<TOUCHINPUT> pInputs, int cbSize) → int user32
Retrieves detailed information about touch inputs associated with a particular touch input handle.
getTrustLevel(IInspectable object) → TrustLevel
Gets the trust level of the Windows Runtime object.
GetUnpredictedMessagePos() → int user32
Gets pointer data before it has gone through touch prediction processing.
GetUpdatedClipboardFormats(Pointer<Uint32> lpuiFormats, int cFormats, Pointer<Uint32> pcFormatsOut) → int user32
Retrieves the currently supported clipboard formats.
GetUpdateRect(int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> lpRect, int bErase) → int user32
The GetUpdateRect function retrieves the coordinates of the smallest rectangle that completely encloses the update region of the specified window. GetUpdateRect retrieves the rectangle in logical coordinates. If there is no update region, GetUpdateRect retrieves an empty rectangle (sets all coordinates to zero).
GetUpdateRgn(int hWnd, int hRgn, int bErase) → int user32
The GetUpdateRgn function retrieves the update region of a window by copying it into the specified region. The coordinates of the update region are relative to the upper-left corner of the window (that is, they are client coordinates).
GetUserDefaultLangID() → int kernel32
Returns the language identifier of the Region Format setting for the current user.
GetUserDefaultLCID() → int kernel32
Returns the locale identifier for the user default locale.
GetUserDefaultLocaleName(Pointer<Utf16> lpLocaleName, int cchLocaleName) → int kernel32
Retrieves the user default locale name.
GetUserName(Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBuffer) → int advapi32
Retrieves the name of the user associated with the current thread.
GetUserObjectInformation(int hObj, int nIndex, Pointer<NativeType> pvInfo, int nLength, Pointer<Uint32> lpnLengthNeeded) → int user32
Retrieves information about the specified window station or desktop object.
GetVersionEx(Pointer<OSVERSIONINFO> lpVersionInformation) → int kernel32
Gets information about the operating system version.
GetVolumeInformation(Pointer<Utf16> lpRootPathName, Pointer<Utf16> lpVolumeNameBuffer, int nVolumeNameSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpVolumeSerialNumber, Pointer<Uint32> lpMaximumComponentLength, Pointer<Uint32> lpFileSystemFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpFileSystemNameBuffer, int nFileSystemNameSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the file system and volume associated with the specified root directory.
GetVolumeInformationByHandle(int hFile, Pointer<Utf16> lpVolumeNameBuffer, int nVolumeNameSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpVolumeSerialNumber, Pointer<Uint32> lpMaximumComponentLength, Pointer<Uint32> lpFileSystemFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpFileSystemNameBuffer, int nFileSystemNameSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the file system and volume associated with the specified file.
GetVolumeNameForVolumeMountPoint(Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumeMountPoint, Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumeName, int cchBufferLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves a volume GUID path for the volume that is associated with the specified volume mount point (drive letter, volume GUID path, or mounted folder).
GetVolumePathName(Pointer<Utf16> lpszFileName, Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumePathName, int cchBufferLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves the volume mount point where the specified path is mounted.
GetVolumePathNamesForVolumeName(Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumeName, Pointer<Utf16> lpszVolumePathNames, int cchBufferLength, Pointer<Uint32> lpcchReturnLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves a list of drive letters and mounted folder paths for the specified volume.
GetWindow(int hWnd, int uCmd) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to a window that has the specified relationship (Z-Order or owner) to the specified window.
GetWindowDC(int hWnd) → int user32
The GetWindowDC function retrieves the device context (DC) for the entire window, including title bar, menus, and scroll bars. A window device context permits painting anywhere in a window, because the origin of the device context is the upper-left corner of the window instead of the client area.
GetWindowDisplayAffinity(int hWnd, Pointer<Uint32> pdwAffinity) → int user32
Retrieves the current display affinity setting, from any process, for a given window.
GetWindowDpiAwarenessContext(int hwnd) → int user32
Returns the DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT associated with a window.
GetWindowDpiHostingBehavior(int hwnd) → int user32
Returns the DPI_HOSTING_BEHAVIOR of the specified window.
GetWindowExtEx(int hdc, Pointer<SIZE> lpsize) → int gdi32
This function retrieves the x-extent and y-extent of the window for the specified device context.
GetWindowInfo(int hwnd, Pointer<WINDOWINFO> pwi) → int user32
Retrieves information about the specified window.
GetWindowLongPtr(int hWnd, int nIndex) → int user32
Retrieves information about the specified window. The function also retrieves the value at a specified offset into the extra window memory.
GetWindowModuleFileName(int hwnd, Pointer<Utf16> pszFileName, int cchFileNameMax) → int user32
Retrieves the full path and file name of the module associated with the specified window handle.
GetWindowOrgEx(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> lppoint) → int gdi32
The GetWindowOrgEx function retrieves the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the window origin for the specified device context.
GetWindowPlacement(int hWnd, Pointer<WINDOWPLACEMENT> lpwndpl) → int user32
Retrieves the show state and the restored, minimized, and maximized positions of the specified window.
GetWindowRect(int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> lpRect) → int user32
Retrieves the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the specified window. The dimensions are given in screen coordinates that are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen.
GetWindowRgn(int hWnd, int hRgn) → int user32
The GetWindowRgn function obtains a copy of the window region of a window. The window region of a window is set by calling the SetWindowRgn function. The window region determines the area within the window where the system permits drawing. The system does not display any portion of a window that lies outside of the window region.
GetWindowRgnBox(int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> lprc) → int user32
The GetWindowRgnBox function retrieves the dimensions of the tightest bounding rectangle for the window region of a window.
GetWindowText(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int nMaxCount) → int user32
Copies the text of the specified window's title bar (if it has one) into a buffer. If the specified window is a control, the text of the control is copied. However, GetWindowText cannot retrieve the text of a control in another application.
GetWindowTextLength(int hWnd) → int user32
Retrieves the length, in characters, of the specified window's title bar text (if the window has a title bar). If the specified window is a control, the function retrieves the length of the text within the control. However, GetWindowTextLength cannot retrieve the length of the text of an edit control in another application.
GetWindowTheme(int hwnd) → int uxtheme
Retrieves a theme handle to a window that has visual styles applied.
GetWindowThreadProcessId(int hWnd, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwProcessId) → int user32
Retrieves the identifier of the thread that created the specified window and, optionally, the identifier of the process that created the window.
GlobalAlloc(int uFlags, int dwBytes) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Allocates the specified number of bytes from the heap.
GlobalFree(Pointer<NativeType> hMem) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Frees the specified global memory object and invalidates its handle.
GlobalLock(Pointer<NativeType> hMem) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Locks a global memory object and returns a pointer to the first byte of the object's memory block.
GlobalMemoryStatusEx(Pointer<MEMORYSTATUSEX> lpBuffer) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the system's current usage of both physical and virtual memory.
GlobalSize(Pointer<NativeType> hMem) → int kernel32
Retrieves the current size of the specified global memory object, in bytes.
GlobalUnlock(Pointer<NativeType> hMem) → int kernel32
Decrements the lock count associated with a memory object that was allocated with GMEM_MOVEABLE. This function has no effect on memory objects allocated with GMEM_FIXED.
GrayString(int hDC, int hBrush, Pointer<NativeFunction<GRAYSTRINGPROC>> lpOutputFunc, int lpData, int nCount, int X, int Y, int nWidth, int nHeight) → int user32
The GrayString function draws gray text at the specified location. The function draws the text by copying it into a memory bitmap, graying the bitmap, and then copying the bitmap to the screen. The function grays the text regardless of the selected brush and background. GrayString uses the font currently selected for the specified device context.
GUIDFromString(String guid, {Allocator allocator = calloc}) → Pointer<GUID>
HeapAlloc(int hHeap, int dwFlags, int dwBytes) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Allocates a block of memory from a heap. The allocated memory is not movable.
HeapCompact(int hHeap, int dwFlags) → int kernel32
Returns the size of the largest committed free block in the specified heap. If the Disable heap coalesce on free global flag is set, this function also coalesces adjacent free blocks of memory in the heap.
HeapCreate(int flOptions, int dwInitialSize, int dwMaximumSize) → int kernel32
Creates a private heap object that can be used by the calling process. The function reserves space in the virtual address space of the process and allocates physical storage for a specified initial portion of this block.
HeapDestroy(int hHeap) → int kernel32
Destroys the specified heap object. It decommits and releases all the pages of a private heap object, and it invalidates the handle to the heap.
HeapFree(int hHeap, int dwFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpMem) → int kernel32
Frees a memory block allocated from a heap by the HeapAlloc or HeapReAlloc function.
HeapLock(int hHeap) → int kernel32
Attempts to acquire the critical section object, or lock, that is associated with a specified heap.
HeapQueryInformation(int HeapHandle, int HeapInformationClass, Pointer<NativeType> HeapInformation, int HeapInformationLength, Pointer<IntPtr> ReturnLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about the specified heap.
HeapReAlloc(int hHeap, int dwFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpMem, int dwBytes) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Retrieves information about the specified heap.
HeapSetInformation(int HeapHandle, int HeapInformationClass, Pointer<NativeType> HeapInformation, int HeapInformationLength) → int kernel32
Enables features for a specified heap.
HeapSize(int hHeap, int dwFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpMem) → int kernel32
Retrieves the size of a memory block allocated from a heap by the HeapAlloc or HeapReAlloc function.
HeapUnlock(int hHeap) → int kernel32
Releases ownership of the critical section object, or lock, that is associated with a specified heap. It reverses the action of the HeapLock function.
HeapValidate(int hHeap, int dwFlags, Pointer<NativeType> lpMem) → int kernel32
Validates the specified heap. The function scans all the memory blocks in the heap and verifies that the heap control structures maintained by the heap manager are in a consistent state. You can also use the HeapValidate function to validate a single memory block within a specified heap without checking the validity of the entire heap.
HeapWalk(int hHeap, Pointer<PROCESS_HEAP_ENTRY> lpEntry) → int kernel32
Enumerates the memory blocks in the specified heap.
HIBYTE(int w) → int
Retrieves the high-order byte from the specified 16-bit value.
HideCaret(int hWnd) → int user32
Removes the caret from the screen. Hiding a caret does not destroy its current shape or invalidate the insertion point.
HiliteMenuItem(int hWnd, int hMenu, int uIDHiliteItem, int uHilite) → int user32
Adds or removes highlighting from an item in a menu bar.
HIWORD(int l) → int
Retrieves the high-order word from the specified 32-bit value.
HRESULT_FROM_WIN32(int x) → int
Maps a system error code to an HRESULT value.
IIDFromString(Pointer<Utf16> lpsz, Pointer<GUID> lpiid) → int ole32
Converts a string generated by the StringFromIID function back into the original interface identifier (IID).
InflateRect(Pointer<RECT> lprc, int dx, int dy) → int user32
The InflateRect function increases or decreases the width and height of the specified rectangle. The InflateRect function adds -dx units to the left end and dx to the right end of the rectangle and -dy units to the top and dy to the bottom. The dx and dy parameters are signed values; positive values increase the width and height, and negative values decrease them.
initApp(Function winMain) → void
Sets up a WinMain function with all the relevant information.
InitCommonControlsEx(Pointer<INITCOMMONCONTROLSEX> picce) → int comctl32
Ensures that the common control DLL (Comctl32.dll) is loaded, and registers specific common control classes from the DLL. An application must call this function before creating a common control.
InitializeProcThreadAttributeList(Pointer<NativeType> lpAttributeList, int dwAttributeCount, int dwFlags, Pointer<IntPtr> lpSize) → int kernel32
Initializes the specified list of attributes for process and thread creation.
InitiateShutdown(Pointer<Utf16> lpMachineName, Pointer<Utf16> lpMessage, int dwGracePeriod, int dwShutdownFlags, int dwReason) → int advapi32
Initiates a shutdown and restart of the specified computer, and restarts any applications that have been registered for restart.
InSendMessage() → int user32
Determines whether the current window procedure is processing a message that was sent from another thread (in the same process or a different process) by a call to the SendMessage function.
InSendMessageEx(Pointer<NativeType> lpReserved) → int user32
Determines whether the current window procedure is processing a message that was sent from another thread (in the same process or a different process).
InsertMenu(int hMenu, int uPosition, int uFlags, int uIDNewItem, Pointer<Utf16> lpNewItem) → int user32
Inserts a new menu item into a menu, moving other items down the menu.
InsertMenuItem(int hmenu, int item, int fByPosition, Pointer<MENUITEMINFO> lpmi) → int user32
Inserts a new menu item at the specified position in a menu.
IntersectRect(Pointer<RECT> lprcDst, Pointer<RECT> lprcSrc1, Pointer<RECT> lprcSrc2) → int user32
The IntersectRect function calculates the intersection of two source rectangles and places the coordinates of the intersection rectangle into the destination rectangle. If the source rectangles do not intersect, an empty rectangle (in which all coordinates are set to zero) is placed into the destination rectangle.
InvalidateRect(int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> lpRect, int bErase) → int user32
The InvalidateRect function adds a rectangle to the specified window's update region. The update region represents the portion of the window's client area that must be redrawn.
InvalidateRgn(int hWnd, int hRgn, int bErase) → int user32
The InvalidateRgn function invalidates the client area within the specified region by adding it to the current update region of a window. The invalidated region, along with all other areas in the update region, is marked for painting when the next WM_PAINT message occurs.
InvertRect(int hDC, Pointer<RECT> lprc) → int user32
The InvertRect function inverts a rectangle in a window by performing a logical NOT operation on the color values for each pixel in the rectangle's interior.
IpReleaseAddress(Pointer<IP_ADAPTER_INDEX_MAP> AdapterInfo) → int iphlpapi
The IpReleaseAddress function releases an IPv4 address previously obtained through the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
IpRenewAddress(Pointer<IP_ADAPTER_INDEX_MAP> AdapterInfo) → int iphlpapi
The IpRenewAddress function renews a lease on an IPv4 address previously obtained through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
IsApiSetImplemented(Pointer<Utf8> Contract) → int onecore
The IsApiSetImplemented function tests if a specified API set is present on the computer.
IsAppThemed() → int uxtheme
Reports whether the current application's user interface displays using visual styles.
IsChild(int hWndParent, int hWnd) → int user32
Determines whether a window is a child window or descendant window of a specified parent window. A child window is the direct descendant of a specified parent window if that parent window is in the chain of parent windows; the chain of parent windows leads from the original overlapped or pop-up window to the child window.
IsClipboardFormatAvailable(int format) → int user32
Determines whether the clipboard contains data in the specified format.
IsCompositionActive() → int uxtheme
Determines whether Desktop Window Manager (DWM) composition effects are available to the theme.
IsDebuggerPresent() → int kernel32
Determines whether the calling process is being debugged by a user-mode debugger.
IsDialogMessage(int hDlg, Pointer<MSG> lpMsg) → int user32
Determines whether a message is intended for the specified dialog box and, if it is, processes the message.
IsDlgButtonChecked(int hDlg, int nIDButton) → int user32
The IsDlgButtonChecked function determines whether a button control is checked or whether a three-state button control is checked, unchecked, or indeterminate.
IsGUIThread(int bConvert) → int user32
Determines whether the calling thread is already a GUI thread. It can also optionally convert the thread to a GUI thread.
IsHungAppWindow(int hwnd) → int user32
Determines whether the system considers that a specified application is not responding. An application is considered to be not responding if it is not waiting for input, is not in startup processing, and has not called PeekMessage within the internal timeout period of 5 seconds.
IsIconic(int hWnd) → int user32
Determines whether the specified window is minimized (iconic).
IsImmersiveProcess(int hProcess) → int user32
Determines whether the process belongs to a Windows Store app.
IsMenu(int hMenu) → int user32
Determines whether a handle is a menu handle.
IsMouseInPointerEnabled() → int user32
Indicates whether EnableMouseInPointer is set for the mouse to act as a pointer input device and send WM_POINTER messages.
IsNativeVhdBoot(Pointer<Int32> NativeVhdBoot) → int kernel32
Indicates if the OS was booted from a VHD container.
IsProcessDPIAware() → int user32
Determines whether the current process is dots per inch (dpi) aware such that it adjusts the sizes of UI elements to compensate for the dpi setting.
IsProcessInJob(int ProcessHandle, int JobHandle, Pointer<Int32> Result) → int kernel32
Determines whether the process is running in the specified job.
IsRectEmpty(Pointer<RECT> lprc) → int user32
The IsRectEmpty function determines whether the specified rectangle is empty. An empty rectangle is one that has no area; that is, the coordinate of the right side is less than or equal to the coordinate of the left side, or the coordinate of the bottom side is less than or equal to the coordinate of the top side.
IsSystemResumeAutomatic() → int kernel32
Determines the current state of the computer.
IsThemeActive() → int uxtheme
Tests if a visual style for the current application is active.
IsThemeBackgroundPartiallyTransparent(int hTheme, int iPartId, int iStateId) → int uxtheme
Retrieves whether the background specified by the visual style has transparent pieces or alpha-blended pieces.
IsThemeDialogTextureEnabled(int hwnd) → int uxtheme
Reports whether a specified dialog window supports background texturing.
IsThemePartDefined(int hTheme, int iPartId, int iStateId) → int uxtheme
Retrieves whether a visual style has defined parameters for the specified part and state.
IsTouchWindow(int hwnd, Pointer<Uint32> pulFlags) → int user32
Checks whether a specified window is touch-capable and, optionally, retrieves the modifier flags set for the window's touch capability.
IsValidDevmode(Pointer<DEVMODE> pDevmode, int DevmodeSize) → int winspool
The IsValidDevmode function verifies that the contents of a DEVMODE structure are valid.
IsValidDpiAwarenessContext(int value) → int user32
Determines if a specified DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT is valid and supported by the current system.
IsValidLocaleName(Pointer<Utf16> lpLocaleName) → int kernel32
Determines if the specified locale name is valid for a locale that is installed or supported on the operating system.
IsWindow(int hWnd) → int user32
Determines whether the specified window handle identifies an existing window.
IsWindowEnabled(int hWnd) → int user32
Determines whether the specified window is enabled for mouse and keyboard input.
IsWindows10OrGreater() → int version
Indicates if the current OS version matches, or is greater than, the Windows 10 version.
isWindowsRuntimeAvailable() → bool
Detects whether the Windows Runtime (WinRT) is available by attempting to open its core library.
IsWindowsServer() → int version
Indicates if the current OS is a Windows Server release. Applications that need to distinguish between server and client versions of Windows should call this function.
IsWindowsVersionOrGreater(int wMajorVersion, int wMinorVersion, int wServicePackMajor) → int version
Indicates if the current OS version matches, or is greater than, the provided version information. This function is useful in confirming a version of Windows Server that doesn't share a version number with a client release.
IsWindowUnicode(int hWnd) → int user32
Determines whether the specified window is a native Unicode window.
IsWindowVisible(int hWnd) → int user32
Determines the visibility state of the specified window.
IsWow64Message() → int user32
Determines whether the last message read from the current thread's queue originated from a WOW64 process.
IsWow64Process2(int hProcess, Pointer<Uint16> pProcessMachine, Pointer<Uint16> pNativeMachine) → int kernel32
Determines whether the specified process is running under WOW64. Also returns additional machine process and architecture information.
IsZoomed(int hWnd) → int user32
Determines whether a window is maximized.
KillTimer(int hWnd, int uIDEvent) → int user32
Destroys the specified timer.
LineTo(int hdc, int x, int y) → int gdi32
The LineTo function draws a line from the current position up to, but not including, the specified point.
LoadAccelerators(int hInstance, Pointer<Utf16> lpTableName) → int user32
Loads the specified accelerator table.
LoadCursor(int hInstance, Pointer<Utf16> lpCursorName) → int user32
Loads the specified cursor resource from the executable (.EXE) file associated with an application instance. Note: this function has been superseded by the LoadImage function.
LoadCursorFromFile(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName) → int user32
Creates a cursor based on data contained in a file.
LoadIcon(int hInstance, Pointer<Utf16> lpIconName) → int user32
Loads the specified icon resource from the executable (.exe) file associated with an application instance.
LoadImage(int hInst, Pointer<Utf16> name, int type, int cx, int cy, int fuLoad) → int user32
Loads an icon, cursor, animated cursor, or bitmap.
LoadKeyboardLayout(Pointer<Utf16> pwszKLID, int Flags) → int user32
Loads a new input locale identifier (formerly called the keyboard layout) into the system.
LoadLibrary(Pointer<Utf16> lpLibFileName) → int kernel32
Loads the specified module into the address space of the calling process. The specified module may cause other modules to be loaded.
LoadLibraryEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpLibFileName, int hFile, int dwFlags) → int kernel32
Loads the specified module into the address space of the calling process. The specified module may cause other modules to be loaded.
LoadMenu(int hInstance, Pointer<Utf16> lpMenuName) → int user32
Loads the specified menu resource from the executable (.exe) file associated with an application instance.
LoadMenuIndirect(Pointer<NativeType> lpMenuTemplate) → int user32
Creates a cursor based on data contained in a file.
LoadResource(int hModule, int hResInfo) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Retrieves a handle that can be used to obtain a pointer to the first byte of the specified resource in memory.
LoadString(int hInstance, int uID, Pointer<Utf16> lpBuffer, int cchBufferMax) → int user32
Loads a string resource from the executable file associated with a specified module and either copies the string into a buffer with a terminating null character or returns a read-only pointer to the string resource itself.
LOBYTE(int w) → int
Retrieves the low-order byte from the specified 16-bit value.
LocalFree(Pointer<NativeType> hMem) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Frees the specified local memory object and invalidates its handle.
LockFile(int hFile, int dwFileOffsetLow, int dwFileOffsetHigh, int nNumberOfBytesToLockLow, int nNumberOfBytesToLockHigh) → int kernel32
Locks the specified file for exclusive access by the calling process.
LockFileEx(int hFile, int dwFlags, int dwReserved, int nNumberOfBytesToLockLow, int nNumberOfBytesToLockHigh, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Locks the specified file for exclusive access by the calling process. This function can operate either synchronously or asynchronously and can request either an exclusive or a shared lock.
LockResource(Pointer<NativeType> hResData) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Retrieves a pointer to the specified resource in memory.
LockSetForegroundWindow(int uLockCode) → int user32
The foreground process can call the LockSetForegroundWindow function to disable calls to the SetForegroundWindow function.
LockWindowUpdate(int hWndLock) → int user32
The LockWindowUpdate function disables or enables drawing in the specified window. Only one window can be locked at a time.
LockWorkStation() → int user32
Locks the workstation's display. Locking a workstation protects it from unauthorized use.
LogicalToPhysicalPoint(int hWnd, Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
Converts the logical coordinates of a point in a window to physical coordinates.
LogicalToPhysicalPointForPerMonitorDPI(int hWnd, Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
Converts a point in a window from logical coordinates into physical coordinates, regardless of the dots per inch (dpi) awareness of the caller.
LookupIconIdFromDirectory(Pointer<Uint8> presbits, int fIcon) → int user32
Searches through icon or cursor data for the icon or cursor that best fits the current display device.
LookupIconIdFromDirectoryEx(Pointer<Uint8> presbits, int fIcon, int cxDesired, int cyDesired, int Flags) → int user32
Searches through icon or cursor data for the icon or cursor that best fits the current display device.
LOWORD(int l) → int
Retrieves the low-order word from the specified 32-bit value.
MagGetColorEffect(int hwnd, Pointer<MAGCOLOREFFECT> pEffect) → int magnification
Gets the color transformation matrix for a magnifier control.
MagGetFullscreenColorEffect(Pointer<MAGCOLOREFFECT> pEffect) → int magnification
Retrieves the color transformation matrix associated with the full-screen magnifier.
MagGetFullscreenTransform(Pointer<Float> pMagLevel, Pointer<Int32> pxOffset, Pointer<Int32> pyOffset) → int magnification
Retrieves the magnification settings for the full-screen magnifier.
MagGetImageScalingCallback(int hwnd) → Pointer<NativeFunction<MagImageScalingCallback>> magnification
Retrieves the registered callback function that implements a custom transform for image scaling.
MagGetInputTransform(Pointer<Int32> pfEnabled, Pointer<RECT> pRectSource, Pointer<RECT> pRectDest) → int magnification
Retrieves the current input transformation for pen and touch input, represented as a source rectangle and a destination rectangle.
MagGetWindowFilterList(int hwnd, Pointer<Uint32> pdwFilterMode, int count, Pointer<IntPtr> pHWND) → int magnification
Retrieves the list of windows that are magnified or excluded from magnification.
MagGetWindowSource(int hwnd, Pointer<RECT> pRect) → int magnification
Gets the rectangle of the area that is being magnified.
MagGetWindowTransform(int hwnd, Pointer<MAGTRANSFORM> pTransform) → int magnification
Retrieves the transformation matrix associated with a magnifier control.
MagInitialize() → int magnification
Creates and initializes the magnifier run-time objects.
MagSetColorEffect(int hwnd, Pointer<MAGCOLOREFFECT> pEffect) → int magnification
Sets the color transformation matrix for a magnifier control.
MagSetFullscreenColorEffect(Pointer<MAGCOLOREFFECT> pEffect) → int magnification
Changes the color transformation matrix associated with the full-screen magnifier.
MagSetFullscreenTransform(double magLevel, int xOffset, int yOffset) → int magnification
Changes the magnification settings for the full-screen magnifier.
MagSetImageScalingCallback(int hwnd, Pointer<NativeFunction<MagImageScalingCallback>> callback) → int magnification
Sets the callback function for external image filtering and scaling.
MagSetInputTransform(int fEnabled, Pointer<RECT> pRectSource, Pointer<RECT> pRectDest) → int magnification
Sets the current active input transformation for pen and touch input, represented as a source rectangle and a destination rectangle.
MagSetWindowFilterList(int hwnd, int dwFilterMode, int count, Pointer<IntPtr> pHWND) → int magnification
Sets the list of windows to be magnified or the list of windows to be excluded from magnification.
MagSetWindowSource(int hwnd, RECT rect) → int magnification
Sets the source rectangle for the magnification window.
MagSetWindowTransform(int hwnd, Pointer<MAGTRANSFORM> pTransform) → int magnification
Sets the transformation matrix for a magnifier control.
MagShowSystemCursor(int fShowCursor) → int magnification
Shows or hides the system cursor.
MagUninitialize() → int magnification
Destroys the magnifier run-time objects.
MAKEINTRESOURCE(int i) → Pointer<Utf16>
Converts an integer value to a resource type compatible with the resource-management functions.
MAKELONG(int a, int b) → int
Creates a LONG value by concatenating the specified values.
MAKEWORD(int a, int b) → int
Creates a WORD value by concatenating the specified values.
MapDialogRect(int hDlg, Pointer<RECT> lpRect) → int user32
Converts the specified dialog box units to screen units (pixels). The function replaces the coordinates in the specified RECT structure with the converted coordinates, which allows the structure to be used to create a dialog box or position a control within a dialog box.
MapVirtualKey(int uCode, int uMapType) → int user32
Translates (maps) a virtual-key code into a scan code or character value, or translates a scan code into a virtual-key code.
MapVirtualKeyEx(int uCode, int uMapType, int dwhkl) → int user32
Translates (maps) a virtual-key code into a scan code or character value, or translates a scan code into a virtual-key code. The function translates the codes using the input language and an input locale identifier.
MapWindowPoints(int hWndFrom, int hWndTo, Pointer<POINT> lpPoints, int cPoints) → int user32
The MapWindowPoints function converts (maps) a set of points from a coordinate space relative to one window to a coordinate space relative to another window.
mciGetDeviceID(Pointer<Utf16> pszDevice) → int winmm
The mciGetDeviceID function retrieves the device identifier corresponding to the name of an open device.
mciGetDeviceIDFromElementID(int dwElementID, Pointer<Utf16> lpstrType) → int winmm
The mciGetDeviceIDFromElementID function retrieves the MCI device identifier corresponding to an element identifier.
mciGetErrorString(int mcierr, Pointer<Utf16> pszText, int cchText) → int winmm
The mciGetErrorString function retrieves a string that describes the specified MCI error code.
mciSendCommand(int mciId, int uMsg, int dwParam1, int dwParam2) → int winmm
The mciSendCommand function sends a command message to the specified MCI device.
mciSendString(Pointer<Utf16> lpstrCommand, Pointer<Utf16> lpstrReturnString, int uReturnLength, int hwndCallback) → int winmm
The mciSendString function sends a command string to an MCI device. The device that the command is sent to is specified in the command string.
Determines which menu item, if any, is at the specified location.
MessageBox(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpText, Pointer<Utf16> lpCaption, int uType) → int user32
Displays a modal dialog box that contains a system icon, a set of buttons, and a brief application-specific message, such as status or error information. The message box returns an integer value that indicates which button the user clicked.
MessageBoxEx(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpText, Pointer<Utf16> lpCaption, int uType, int wLanguageId) → int user32
Creates, displays, and operates a message box. The message box contains an application-defined message and title, plus any combination of predefined icons and push buttons. The buttons are in the language of the system user interface.
MetaDataGetDispenser(Pointer<GUID> rclsid, Pointer<GUID> riid, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppv) → int winrt
Creates a dispenser class.
midiConnect(int hmi, int hmo, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int winmm
The midiConnect function connects a MIDI input device to a MIDI thru or output device, or connects a MIDI thru device to a MIDI output device.
midiDisconnect(int hmi, int hmo, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int winmm
The midiDisconnect function disconnects a MIDI input device from a MIDI thru or output device, or disconnects a MIDI thru device from a MIDI output device.
midiInAddBuffer(int hmi, Pointer<MIDIHDR> pmh, int cbmh) → int winmm
The midiInAddBuffer function sends an input buffer to a specified opened MIDI input device. This function is used for system-exclusive messages.
midiInClose(int hmi) → int winmm
The midiInClose function closes the specified MIDI input device.
midiInGetDevCaps(int uDeviceID, Pointer<MIDIINCAPS> pmic, int cbmic) → int winmm
The midiInGetDevCaps function determines the capabilities of a specified MIDI input device.
midiInGetErrorText(int mmrError, Pointer<Utf16> pszText, int cchText) → int winmm
The midiInGetErrorText function retrieves a textual description for an error identified by the specified error code.
midiInGetID(int hmi, Pointer<Uint32> puDeviceID) → int winmm
The midiInGetID function gets the device identifier for the given MIDI input device.
midiInGetNumDevs() → int winmm
The midiInGetNumDevs function retrieves the number of MIDI input devices in the system.
midiInMessage(int hmi, int uMsg, int dw1, int dw2) → int winmm
The midiInMessage function sends a message to the MIDI device driver.
midiInOpen(Pointer<IntPtr> phmi, int uDeviceID, int dwCallback, int dwInstance, int fdwOpen) → int winmm
The midiInOpen function opens a specified MIDI input device.
midiInPrepareHeader(int hmi, Pointer<MIDIHDR> pmh, int cbmh) → int winmm
The midiInPrepareHeader function prepares a buffer for MIDI input.
midiInReset(int hmi) → int winmm
The midiInReset function stops input on a given MIDI input device.
midiInStart(int hmi) → int winmm
The midiInStart function starts MIDI input on the specified MIDI input device.
midiInStop(int hmi) → int winmm
The midiInStop function stops MIDI input on the specified MIDI input device.
midiInUnprepareHeader(int hmi, Pointer<MIDIHDR> pmh, int cbmh) → int winmm
The midiInUnprepareHeader function cleans up the preparation performed by the midiInPrepareHeader function.
midiOutCacheDrumPatches(int hmo, int uPatch, Pointer<Uint16> pwkya, int fuCache) → int winmm
The midiOutCacheDrumPatches function requests that an internal MIDI synthesizer device preload and cache a specified set of key-based percussion patches.
midiOutCachePatches(int hmo, int uBank, Pointer<Uint16> pwpa, int fuCache) → int winmm
The midiOutCachePatches function requests that an internal MIDI synthesizer device preload and cache a specified set of patches.
midiOutClose(int hmo) → int winmm
The midiOutClose function closes the specified MIDI output device.
midiOutGetDevCaps(int uDeviceID, Pointer<MIDIOUTCAPS> pmoc, int cbmoc) → int winmm
The midiOutGetDevCaps function queries a specified MIDI output device to determine its capabilities.
midiOutGetErrorText(int mmrError, Pointer<Utf16> pszText, int cchText) → int winmm
The midiOutGetErrorText function retrieves a textual description for an error identified by the specified error code.
midiOutGetID(int hmo, Pointer<Uint32> puDeviceID) → int winmm
The midiOutGetID function retrieves the device identifier for the given MIDI output device.
midiOutGetNumDevs() → int winmm
The midiOutGetNumDevs function retrieves the number of MIDI output devices present in the system.
midiOutGetVolume(int hmo, Pointer<Uint32> pdwVolume) → int winmm
The midiOutGetVolume function retrieves the current volume setting of a MIDI output device.
midiOutLongMsg(int hmo, Pointer<MIDIHDR> pmh, int cbmh) → int winmm
The midiOutLongMsg function sends a system-exclusive MIDI message to the specified MIDI output device.
midiOutMessage(int hmo, int uMsg, int dw1, int dw2) → int winmm
The midiOutMessage function sends a message to the MIDI device drivers. This function is used only for driver-specific messages that are not supported by the MIDI API.
midiOutOpen(Pointer<IntPtr> phmo, int uDeviceID, int dwCallback, int dwInstance, int fdwOpen) → int winmm
The midiOutOpen function opens a MIDI output device for playback.
midiOutPrepareHeader(int hmo, Pointer<MIDIHDR> pmh, int cbmh) → int winmm
The midiOutPrepareHeader function prepares a MIDI system-exclusive or stream buffer for output.
midiOutReset(int hmo) → int winmm
The midiOutReset function turns off all notes on all MIDI channels for the specified MIDI output device.
midiOutSetVolume(int hmo, int dwVolume) → int winmm
The midiOutSetVolume function sets the volume of a MIDI output device.
midiOutShortMsg(int hmo, int dwMsg) → int winmm
The midiOutShortMsg function sends a short MIDI message to the specified MIDI output device.
midiOutUnprepareHeader(int hmo, Pointer<MIDIHDR> pmh, int cbmh) → int winmm
The midiOutUnprepareHeader function cleans up the preparation performed by the midiOutPrepareHeader function.
ModifyMenu(int hMnu, int uPosition, int uFlags, int uIDNewItem, Pointer<Utf16> lpNewItem) → int user32
Changes an existing menu item. This function is used to specify the content, appearance, and behavior of the menu item.
MonitorFromPoint(POINT pt, int dwFlags) → int user32
The MonitorFromPoint function retrieves a handle to the display monitor that contains a specified point.
MonitorFromRect(Pointer<RECT> lprc, int dwFlags) → int user32
The MonitorFromRect function retrieves a handle to the display monitor that has the largest area of intersection with a specified rectangle.
MonitorFromWindow(int hwnd, int dwFlags) → int user32
The MonitorFromWindow function retrieves a handle to the display monitor that has the largest area of intersection with the bounding rectangle of a specified window.
MoveFile(Pointer<Utf16> lpExistingFileName, Pointer<Utf16> lpNewFileName) → int kernel32
Moves an existing file or a directory, including its children.
MoveToEx(int hdc, int x, int y, Pointer<POINT> lppt) → int gdi32
The MoveToEx function updates the current position to the specified point and optionally returns the previous position.
MoveWindow(int hWnd, int X, int Y, int nWidth, int nHeight, int bRepaint) → int user32
Changes the position and dimensions of the specified window. For a top-level window, the position and dimensions are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen. For a child window, they are relative to the upper-left corner of the parent window's client area.
MsgWaitForMultipleObjects(int nCount, Pointer<IntPtr> pHandles, int fWaitAll, int dwMilliseconds, int dwWakeMask) → int user32
Waits until one or all of the specified objects are in the signaled state or the time-out interval elapses. The objects can include input event objects, which you specify using the dwWakeMask parameter.
MsgWaitForMultipleObjectsEx(int nCount, Pointer<IntPtr> pHandles, int dwMilliseconds, int dwWakeMask, int dwFlags) → int user32
Waits until one or all of the specified objects are in the signaled state, an I/O completion routine or asynchronous procedure call (APC) is queued to the thread, or the time-out interval elapses. The array of objects can include input event objects, which you specify using the dwWakeMask parameter.
NetFreeAadJoinInformation(Pointer<DSREG_JOIN_INFO> pJoinInfo) → void netapi32
Frees the memory allocated for the specified DSREG_JOIN_INFO structure, which contains join information for a tenant and which you retrieved by calling the NetGetAadJoinInformation function.
NetGetAadJoinInformation(Pointer<Utf16> pcszTenantId, Pointer<Pointer<DSREG_JOIN_INFO>> ppJoinInfo) → int netapi32
Retrieves the join information for the specified tenant. This function examines the join information for Microsoft Azure Active Directory and the work account that the current user added.
NotifyBootConfigStatus(int BootAcceptable) → int advapi32
Reports the boot status to the service control manager. It is used by boot verification programs. This function can be called only by a process running in the LocalSystem or Administrator's account.
NotifyServiceStatusChange(int hService, int dwNotifyMask, Pointer<SERVICE_NOTIFY_2> pNotifyBuffer) → int advapi32
Enables an application to receive notification when the specified service is created or deleted or when its status changes.
NotifyWinEvent(int event, int hwnd, int idObject, int idChild) → void user32
Signals the system that a predefined event occurred. If any client applications have registered a hook function for the event, the system calls the client's hook function.
NtQuerySystemInformation(int SystemInformationClass, Pointer<NativeType> SystemInformation, int SystemInformationLength, Pointer<Uint32> ReturnLength) → int ntdll
Retrieves the specified system information.
OemKeyScan(int wOemChar) → int user32
Maps OEMASCII codes 0 through 0x0FF into the OEM scan codes and shift states. The function provides information that allows a program to send OEM text to another program by simulating keyboard input.
OffsetRect(Pointer<RECT> lprc, int dx, int dy) → int user32
The OffsetRect function moves the specified rectangle by the specified offsets.
OleInitialize(Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int ole32
Initializes the COM library on the current apartment, and identifies the concurrency model as single-thread apartment (STA). Applications must initialize the COM library before they can call COM library functions other than CoGetMalloc and memory allocation functions.
OleUninitialize() → void ole32
Closes the COM library on the apartment, releases any class factories, other COM objects, or servers held by the apartment, disables RPC on the apartment, and frees any resources the apartment maintains.
OpenClipboard(int hWndNewOwner) → int user32
Opens the clipboard for examination and prevents other applications from modifying the clipboard content.
OpenCommPort(int uPortNumber, int dwDesiredAccess, int dwFlagsAndAttributes) → int kernel32
Attempts to open a communication device.
OpenDesktop(Pointer<Utf16> lpszDesktop, int dwFlags, int fInherit, int dwDesiredAccess) → int user32
Opens the specified desktop object.
OpenEvent(int dwDesiredAccess, int bInheritHandle, Pointer<Utf16> lpName) → int kernel32
Opens an existing named event object.
OpenIcon(int hWnd) → int user32
Restores a minimized (iconic) window to its previous size and position; it then activates the window.
OpenInputDesktop(int dwFlags, int fInherit, int dwDesiredAccess) → int user32
Opens the desktop that receives user input.
OpenJobObject(int dwDesiredAccess, int bInheritHandle, Pointer<Utf16> lpName) → int kernel32
Opens an existing job object.
OpenPrinter(Pointer<Utf16> pPrinterName, Pointer<IntPtr> phPrinter, Pointer<PRINTER_DEFAULTS> pDefault) → int winspool
The OpenPrinter function retrieves a handle to the specified printer or print server or other types of handles in the print subsystem.
OpenPrinter2(Pointer<Utf16> pPrinterName, Pointer<IntPtr> phPrinter, Pointer<PRINTER_DEFAULTS> pDefault, Pointer<PRINTER_OPTIONS> pOptions) → int winspool
Retrieves a handle to the specified printer, print server, or other types of handles in the print subsystem, while setting some of the printer options.
OpenProcess(int dwDesiredAccess, int bInheritHandle, int dwProcessId) → int kernel32
Opens an existing local process object.
OpenProcessToken(int ProcessHandle, int DesiredAccess, Pointer<IntPtr> TokenHandle) → int advapi32
The OpenProcessToken function opens the access token associated with a process.
OpenSCManager(Pointer<Utf16> lpMachineName, Pointer<Utf16> lpDatabaseName, int dwDesiredAccess) → int advapi32
Establishes a connection to the service control manager on the specified computer and opens the specified service control manager database.
OpenService(int hSCManager, Pointer<Utf16> lpServiceName, int dwDesiredAccess) → int advapi32
Opens an existing service.
OpenThemeData(int hwnd, Pointer<Utf16> pszClassList) → int uxtheme
Opens the theme data for a window and its associated class.
OpenThemeDataEx(int hwnd, Pointer<Utf16> pszClassList, int dwFlags) → int uxtheme
Opens the theme data associated with a window for specified theme classes.
OpenThemeDataForDpi(int hwnd, Pointer<Utf16> pszClassList, int dpi) → int uxtheme
A variant of OpenThemeData that opens a theme handle associated with a specific DPI.
OpenThreadToken(int ThreadHandle, int DesiredAccess, int OpenAsSelf, Pointer<IntPtr> TokenHandle) → int advapi32
The OpenThreadToken function opens the access token associated with a thread.
OpenWindowStation(Pointer<Utf16> lpszWinSta, int fInherit, int dwDesiredAccess) → int user32
Opens the specified window station.
OutputDebugString(Pointer<Utf16> lpOutputString) → void kernel32
Sends a string to the debugger for display.
PackageFamilyNameFromFullName(Pointer<Utf16> packageFullName, Pointer<Uint32> packageFamilyNameLength, Pointer<Utf16> packageFamilyName) → int kernel32
Gets the package family name for the specified package full name.
PaintDesktop(int hdc) → int user32
The PaintDesktop function fills the clipping region in the specified device context with the desktop pattern or wallpaper. The function is provided primarily for shell desktops.
PeekConsoleInput(int hConsoleInput, Pointer<INPUT_RECORD> lpBuffer, int nLength, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfEventsRead) → int kernel32
Reads data from the specified console input buffer without removing it from the buffer.
PeekMessage(Pointer<MSG> lpMsg, int hWnd, int wMsgFilterMin, int wMsgFilterMax, int wRemoveMsg) → int user32
Dispatches incoming sent messages, checks the thread message queue for a posted message, and retrieves the message (if any exist).
PeekNamedPipe(int hNamedPipe, Pointer<NativeType> lpBuffer, int nBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpBytesRead, Pointer<Uint32> lpTotalBytesAvail, Pointer<Uint32> lpBytesLeftThisMessage) → int kernel32
Copies data from a named or anonymous pipe into a buffer without removing it from the pipe. It also returns information about data in the pipe.
PhysicalToLogicalPoint(int hWnd, Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
Converts the physical coordinates of a point in a window to logical coordinates.
PhysicalToLogicalPointForPerMonitorDPI(int hWnd, Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
Converts a point in a window from physical coordinates into logical coordinates, regardless of the dots per inch (dpi) awareness of the caller.
Pie(int hdc, int left, int top, int right, int bottom, int xr1, int yr1, int xr2, int yr2) → int gdi32
The Pie function draws a pie-shaped wedge bounded by the intersection of an ellipse and two radials. The pie is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush.
PlaySound(Pointer<Utf16> pszSound, int hmod, int fdwSound) → int winmm
The PlaySound function plays a sound specified by the given file name, resource, or system event.
PolyBezier(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, int cpt) → int gdi32
The PolyBezier function draws one or more Bézier curves.
PolyBezierTo(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, int cpt) → int gdi32
The PolyBezierTo function draws one or more Bézier curves.
PolyDraw(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, Pointer<Uint8> aj, int cpt) → int gdi32
The PolyDraw function draws a set of line segments and Bézier curves.
Polygon(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, int cpt) → int gdi32
The Polygon function draws a polygon consisting of two or more vertices connected by straight lines. The polygon is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode.
Polyline(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, int cpt) → int gdi32
The Polyline function draws a series of line segments by connecting the points in the specified array.
PolylineTo(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, int cpt) → int gdi32
The PolylineTo function draws one or more straight lines.
PolyPolygon(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, Pointer<Int32> asz, int csz) → int gdi32
The PolyPolygon function draws a series of closed polygons. Each polygon is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. The polygons drawn by this function can overlap.
PolyPolyline(int hdc, Pointer<POINT> apt, Pointer<Uint32> asz, int csz) → int gdi32
The PolyPolyline function draws multiple series of connected line segments.
PostMessage(int hWnd, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Places (posts) a message in the message queue associated with the thread that created the specified window and returns without waiting for the thread to process the message.
PostQueuedCompletionStatus(int CompletionPort, int dwNumberOfBytesTransferred, int dwCompletionKey, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Posts an I/O completion packet to an I/O completion port.
PostQuitMessage(int nExitCode) → void user32
Indicates to the system that a thread has made a request to terminate (quit). It is typically used in response to a WM_DESTROY message.
PostThreadMessage(int idThread, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Posts a message to the message queue of the specified thread. It returns without waiting for the thread to process the message.
PrinterProperties(int hWnd, int hPrinter) → int winspool
The PrinterProperties function displays a printer-properties property sheet for the specified printer.
printStruct(Pointer<NativeType> struct, int sizeInBytes) → void
For debugging, print the memory structure of a given struct.
PrintWindow(int hwnd, int hdcBlt, int nFlags) → int user32
The PrintWindow function copies a visual window into the specified device context (DC), typically a printer DC.
PrivateExtractIcons(Pointer<Utf16> szFileName, int nIconIndex, int cxIcon, int cyIcon, Pointer<IntPtr> phicon, Pointer<Uint32> piconid, int nIcons, int flags) → int user32
Creates an array of handles to icons that are extracted from a specified file.
ProgIDFromCLSID(Pointer<GUID> clsid, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> lplpszProgID) → int ole32
Retrieves the ProgID for a given CLSID.
PtInRect(Pointer<RECT> lprc, POINT pt) → int user32
The PtInRect function determines whether the specified point lies within the specified rectangle. A point is within a rectangle if it lies on the left or top side or is within all four sides. A point on the right or bottom side is considered outside the rectangle.
PtInRegion(int hrgn, int x, int y) → int gdi32
The PtInRegion function determines whether the specified point is inside the specified region.
PurgeComm(int hFile, int dwFlags) → int kernel32
Discards all characters from the output or input buffer of a specified communications resource. It can also terminate pending read or write operations on the resource.
QueryDosDevice(Pointer<Utf16> lpDeviceName, Pointer<Utf16> lpTargetPath, int ucchMax) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about MS-DOS device names. The function can obtain the current mapping for a particular MS-DOS device name. The function can also obtain a list of all existing MS-DOS device names.
QueryFullProcessImageName(int hProcess, int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpExeName, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwSize) → int kernel32
Retrieves the full name of the executable image for the specified process.
QueryInformationJobObject(int hJob, int JobObjectInformationClass, Pointer<NativeType> lpJobObjectInformation, int cbJobObjectInformationLength, Pointer<Uint32> lpReturnLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves limit and job state information from the job object.
QueryIoRateControlInformationJobObject(int hJob, Pointer<Utf16> VolumeName, Pointer<Pointer<JOBOBJECT_IO_RATE_CONTROL_INFORMATION>> InfoBlocks, Pointer<Uint32> InfoBlockCount) → int kernel32
Gets information about the control of the I/O rate for a job object.
QueryPerformanceCounter(Pointer<Int64> lpPerformanceCount) → int kernel32
Retrieves the current value of the performance counter, which is a high resolution (<1us) time stamp that can be used for time-interval measurements.
QueryPerformanceFrequency(Pointer<Int64> lpFrequency) → int kernel32
Retrieves the frequency of the performance counter. The frequency of the performance counter is fixed at system boot and is consistent across all processors. Therefore, the frequency need only be queried upon application initialization, and the result can be cached.
QueryServiceConfig(int hService, Pointer<QUERY_SERVICE_CONFIG> lpServiceConfig, int cbBufSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBytesNeeded) → int advapi32
Retrieves the configuration parameters of the specified service. Optional configuration parameters are available using the QueryServiceConfig2 function.
QueryServiceConfig2(int hService, int dwInfoLevel, Pointer<Uint8> lpBuffer, int cbBufSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBytesNeeded) → int advapi32
Retrieves the optional configuration parameters of the specified service.
QueryServiceDynamicInformation(int hServiceStatus, int dwInfoLevel, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppDynamicInfo) → int advapi32
Retrieves dynamic information related to the current service start.
QueryServiceObjectSecurity(int hService, int dwSecurityInformation, Pointer<NativeType> lpSecurityDescriptor, int cbBufSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBytesNeeded) → int advapi32
The QueryServiceObjectSecurity function retrieves a copy of the security descriptor associated with a service object. You can also use the GetNamedSecurityInfo function to retrieve a security descriptor.
QueryServiceStatus(int hService, Pointer<SERVICE_STATUS> lpServiceStatus) → int advapi32
Retrieves the current status of the specified service.
QueryServiceStatusEx(int hService, int InfoLevel, Pointer<Uint8> lpBuffer, int cbBufSize, Pointer<Uint32> pcbBytesNeeded) → int advapi32
Retrieves the current status of the specified service based on the specified information level.
ReadConsole(int hConsoleInput, Pointer<NativeType> lpBuffer, int nNumberOfCharsToRead, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfCharsRead, Pointer<CONSOLE_READCONSOLE_CONTROL> pInputControl) → int kernel32
Reads character input from the console input buffer and removes it from the buffer.
ReadConsoleInput(int hConsoleInput, Pointer<INPUT_RECORD> lpBuffer, int nLength, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfEventsRead) → int kernel32
Reads data from a console input buffer and removes it from the buffer.
ReadFile(int hFile, Pointer<Uint8> lpBuffer, int nNumberOfBytesToRead, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfBytesRead, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Reads data from the specified file or input/output (I/O) device. Reads occur at the position specified by the file pointer if supported by the device.
ReadFileEx(int hFile, Pointer<Uint8> lpBuffer, int nNumberOfBytesToRead, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped, Pointer<NativeFunction<LPOVERLAPPED_COMPLETION_ROUTINE>> lpCompletionRoutine) → int kernel32
Reads data from the specified file or input/output (I/O) device. It reports its completion status asynchronously, calling the specified completion routine when reading is completed or canceled and the calling thread is in an alertable wait state.
ReadFileScatter(int hFile, Pointer<FILE_SEGMENT_ELEMENT> aSegmentArray, int nNumberOfBytesToRead, Pointer<Uint32> lpReserved, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Reads data from a file and stores it in an array of buffers. The function starts reading data from the file at a position that is specified by an OVERLAPPED structure. The ReadFileScatter function operates asynchronously.
ReadPrinter(int hPrinter, Pointer<NativeType> pBuf, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pNoBytesRead) → int winspool
The ReadPrinter function retrieves data from the specified printer.
ReadProcessMemory(int hProcess, Pointer<NativeType> lpBaseAddress, Pointer<NativeType> lpBuffer, int nSize, Pointer<IntPtr> lpNumberOfBytesRead) → int kernel32
ReadProcessMemory copies the data in the specified address range from the address space of the specified process into the specified buffer of the current process. Any process that has a handle with PROCESS_VM_READ access can call the function.
Rectangle(int hdc, int left, int top, int right, int bottom) → int gdi32
The Rectangle function draws a rectangle. The rectangle is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush.
RectInRegion(int hrgn, Pointer<RECT> lprect) → int gdi32
The RectInRegion function determines whether any part of the specified rectangle is within the boundaries of a region.
RedrawWindow(int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> lprcUpdate, int hrgnUpdate, int flags) → int user32
The RedrawWindow function updates the specified rectangle or region in a window's client area.
refCount(IUnknown unk) → int
Returns the current reference count of the COM object.
RegCloseKey(int hKey) → int advapi32
Closes a handle to the specified registry key.
RegConnectRegistry(Pointer<Utf16> lpMachineName, int hKey, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult) → int advapi32
Establishes a connection to a predefined registry key on another computer.
RegCopyTree(int hKeySrc, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int hKeyDest) → int advapi32
Copies the specified registry key, along with its values and subkeys, to the specified destination key.
RegCreateKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult) → int advapi32
Creates the specified registry key. If the key already exists in the registry, the function opens it.
RegCreateKeyEx(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int Reserved, Pointer<Utf16> lpClass, int dwOptions, int samDesired, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwDisposition) → int advapi32
Creates the specified registry key. If the key already exists, the function opens it. Note that key names are not case sensitive.
RegCreateKeyTransacted(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int Reserved, Pointer<Utf16> lpClass, int dwOptions, int samDesired, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult, Pointer<Uint32> lpdwDisposition, int hTransaction, Pointer<NativeType> pExtendedParemeter) → int advapi32
Establishes a connection to a predefined registry key on another computer.
RegDeleteKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey) → int advapi32
Deletes a subkey and its values. Note that key names are not case sensitive.
RegDeleteKeyEx(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int samDesired, int Reserved) → int advapi32
Deletes a subkey and its values from the specified platform-specific view of the registry. Note that key names are not case sensitive.
RegDeleteKeyTransacted(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int samDesired, int Reserved, int hTransaction, Pointer<NativeType> pExtendedParameter) → int advapi32
Deletes a subkey and its values from the specified platform-specific view of the registry as a transacted operation. Note that key names are not case sensitive.
RegDeleteKeyValue(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpValueName) → int advapi32
Removes the specified value from the specified registry key and subkey.
RegDeleteTree(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey) → int advapi32
Deletes the subkeys and values of the specified key recursively.
RegDeleteValue(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpValueName) → int advapi32
Removes a named value from the specified registry key. Note that value names are not case sensitive.
RegDisablePredefinedCache() → int advapi32
Disables handle caching of the predefined registry handle for HKEY_CURRENT_USER for the current process. This function does not work on a remote computer.
RegDisablePredefinedCacheEx() → int advapi32
Disables handle caching for all predefined registry handles for the current process.
RegDisableReflectionKey(int hBase) → int advapi32
Disables registry reflection for the specified key. Disabling reflection for a key does not affect reflection of any subkeys.
RegEnableReflectionKey(int hBase) → int advapi32
Restores registry reflection for the specified disabled key. Restoring reflection for a key does not affect reflection of any subkeys.
RegEnumKey(int hKey, int dwIndex, Pointer<Utf16> lpName, int cchName) → int advapi32
Enumerates the subkeys of the specified open registry key. The function retrieves the name of one subkey each time it is called.
RegEnumKeyEx(int hKey, int dwIndex, Pointer<Utf16> lpName, Pointer<Uint32> lpcchName, Pointer<Uint32> lpReserved, Pointer<Utf16> lpClass, Pointer<Uint32> lpcchClass, Pointer<FILETIME> lpftLastWriteTime) → int advapi32
Enumerates the subkeys of the specified open registry key. The function retrieves information about one subkey each time it is called.
RegEnumValue(int hKey, int dwIndex, Pointer<Utf16> lpValueName, Pointer<Uint32> lpcchValueName, Pointer<Uint32> lpReserved, Pointer<Uint32> lpType, Pointer<Uint8> lpData, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbData) → int advapi32
Enumerates the values for the specified open registry key. The function copies one indexed value name and data block for the key each time it is called.
RegFlushKey(int hKey) → int advapi32
Writes all the attributes of the specified open registry key into the registry.
RegGetValue(int hkey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpValue, int dwFlags, Pointer<Uint32> pdwType, Pointer<NativeType> pvData, Pointer<Uint32> pcbData) → int advapi32
Retrieves the type and data for the specified registry value.
RegisterClass(Pointer<WNDCLASS> lpWndClass) → int user32
Registers a window class for subsequent use in calls to the CreateWindow or CreateWindowEx function.
RegisterClassEx(Pointer<WNDCLASSEX> param0) → int user32
Registers a window class for subsequent use in calls to the CreateWindow or CreateWindowEx function.
RegisterClipboardFormat(Pointer<Utf16> lpszFormat) → int user32
Registers a new clipboard format. This format can then be used as a valid clipboard format.
registerHighDPISupport() → void
Registers a traditional Win32 app process as supporting high-DPI.
RegisterHotKey(int hWnd, int id, int fsModifiers, int vk) → int user32
Defines a system-wide hot key.
RegisterPowerSettingNotification(int hRecipient, Pointer<GUID> PowerSettingGuid, int Flags) → int user32
Registers the application to receive power setting notifications for the specific power setting event.
RegisterRawInputDevices(Pointer<RAWINPUTDEVICE> pRawInputDevices, int uiNumDevices, int cbSize) → int user32
Registers the devices that supply the raw input data.
RegisterServiceCtrlHandler(Pointer<Utf16> lpServiceName, Pointer<NativeFunction<LPHANDLER_FUNCTION>> lpHandlerProc) → int advapi32
Registers a function to handle service control requests.
RegisterServiceCtrlHandlerEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpServiceName, Pointer<NativeFunction<LPHANDLER_FUNCTION_EX>> lpHandlerProc, Pointer<NativeType> lpContext) → int advapi32
Registers a function to handle extended service control requests.
RegisterTouchHitTestingWindow(int hwnd, int value) → int user32
Registers a window to process the WM_TOUCHHITTESTING notification.
RegisterTouchWindow(int hwnd, int ulFlags) → int user32
Registers a window as being touch-capable.
RegisterWindowMessage(Pointer<Utf16> lpString) → int user32
Defines a new window message that is guaranteed to be unique throughout the system. The message value can be used when sending or posting messages.
RegLoadAppKey(Pointer<Utf16> lpFile, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult, int samDesired, int dwOptions, int Reserved) → int advapi32
Loads the specified registry hive as an application hive.
RegLoadKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpFile) → int advapi32
Creates a subkey under HKEY_USERS or HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE and loads the data from the specified registry hive into that subkey.
RegLoadMUIString(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> pszValue, Pointer<Utf16> pszOutBuf, int cbOutBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcbData, int Flags, Pointer<Utf16> pszDirectory) → int advapi32
Loads the specified string from the specified key and subkey.
RegNotifyChangeKeyValue(int hKey, int bWatchSubtree, int dwNotifyFilter, int hEvent, int fAsynchronous) → int advapi32
Notifies the caller about changes to the attributes or contents of a specified registry key.
RegOpenCurrentUser(int samDesired, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult) → int advapi32
Retrieves a handle to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER key for the user the current thread is impersonating.
RegOpenKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult) → int advapi32
Opens the specified registry key.
RegOpenKeyEx(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int ulOptions, int samDesired, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult) → int advapi32
Opens the specified registry key. Note that key names are not case sensitive.
RegOpenKeyTransacted(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int ulOptions, int samDesired, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult, int hTransaction, Pointer<NativeType> pExtendedParemeter) → int advapi32
Opens the specified registry key and associates it with a transaction. Note that key names are not case sensitive.
RegOpenUserClassesRoot(int hToken, int dwOptions, int samDesired, Pointer<IntPtr> phkResult) → int advapi32
Retrieves a handle to the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT key for a specified user. The user is identified by an access token.
RegOverridePredefKey(int hKey, int hNewHKey) → int advapi32
Maps a predefined registry key to the specified registry key.
RegQueryInfoKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpClass, Pointer<Uint32> lpcchClass, Pointer<Uint32> lpReserved, Pointer<Uint32> lpcSubKeys, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbMaxSubKeyLen, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbMaxClassLen, Pointer<Uint32> lpcValues, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbMaxValueNameLen, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbMaxValueLen, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbSecurityDescriptor, Pointer<FILETIME> lpftLastWriteTime) → int advapi32
Retrieves information about the specified registry key.
RegQueryMultipleValues(int hKey, Pointer<VALENT> val_list, int num_vals, Pointer<Utf16> lpValueBuf, Pointer<Uint32> ldwTotsize) → int advapi32
Retrieves the type and data for a list of value names associated with an open registry key.
RegQueryReflectionKey(int hBase, Pointer<Int32> bIsReflectionDisabled) → int advapi32
Determines whether reflection has been disabled or enabled for the specified key.
RegQueryValue(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpData, Pointer<Int32> lpcbData) → int advapi32
Retrieves the data associated with the default or unnamed value of a specified registry key. The data must be a null-terminated string.
RegQueryValueEx(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpValueName, Pointer<Uint32> lpReserved, Pointer<Uint32> lpType, Pointer<Uint8> lpData, Pointer<Uint32> lpcbData) → int advapi32
Retrieves the type and data for the specified value name associated with an open registry key. To ensure that any string values (REG_SZ, REG_MULTI_SZ, and REG_EXPAND_SZ) returned are null-terminated, use the RegGetValue function.
RegRenameKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKeyName, Pointer<Utf16> lpNewKeyName) → int advapi32
Changes the name of the specified registry key.
RegReplaceKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpNewFile, Pointer<Utf16> lpOldFile) → int advapi32
Replaces the file backing a registry key and all its subkeys with another file, so that when the system is next started, the key and subkeys will have the values stored in the new file.
RegRestoreKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpFile, int dwFlags) → int advapi32
Reads the registry information in a specified file and copies it over the specified key. This registry information may be in the form of a key and multiple levels of subkeys.
RegSaveKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpFile, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes) → int advapi32
Saves the specified key and all of its subkeys and values to a new file, in the standard format.
RegSaveKeyEx(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpFile, Pointer<SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES> lpSecurityAttributes, int Flags) → int advapi32
Saves the specified key and all of its subkeys and values to a registry file, in the specified format.
RegSetKeyValue(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpValueName, int dwType, Pointer<NativeType> lpData, int cbData) → int advapi32
Sets the data for the specified value in the specified registry key and subkey.
RegSetValue(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey, int dwType, Pointer<Utf16> lpData, int cbData) → int advapi32
Sets the data for the default or unnamed value of a specified registry key. The data must be a text string.
RegSetValueEx(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpValueName, int Reserved, int dwType, Pointer<Uint8> lpData, int cbData) → int advapi32
Sets the data and type of a specified value under a registry key.
RegUnLoadKey(int hKey, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubKey) → int advapi32
Unloads the specified registry key and its subkeys from the registry.
ReleaseActCtx(int hActCtx) → void kernel32
The ReleaseActCtx function decrements the reference count of the specified activation context.
ReleaseCapture() → int user32
Releases the mouse capture from a window in the current thread and restores normal mouse input processing. A window that has captured the mouse receives all mouse input, regardless of the position of the cursor, except when a mouse button is clicked while the cursor hot spot is in the window of another thread.
ReleaseDC(int hWnd, int hDC) → int user32
The ReleaseDC function releases a device context (DC), freeing it for use by other applications. The effect of the ReleaseDC function depends on the type of DC. It frees only common and window DCs. It has no effect on class or private DCs.
RemoveClipboardFormatListener(int hwnd) → int user32
Removes the given window from the system-maintained clipboard format listener list.
RemoveDirectory(Pointer<Utf16> lpPathName) → int kernel32
Deletes an existing empty directory.
RemoveDllDirectory(Pointer<NativeType> Cookie) → int kernel32
Removes a directory that was added to the process DLL search path by using AddDllDirectory.
RemoveMenu(int hMenu, int uPosition, int uFlags) → int user32
Deletes a menu item or detaches a submenu from the specified menu. If the menu item opens a drop-down menu or submenu, RemoveMenu does not destroy the menu or its handle, allowing the menu to be reused. Before this function is called, the GetSubMenu function should retrieve a handle to the drop-down menu or submenu.
RemoveProp(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpString) → int user32
Removes an entry from the property list of the specified window. The specified character string identifies the entry to be removed.
RemoveWindowSubclass(int hWnd, Pointer<NativeFunction<SUBCLASSPROC>> pfnSubclass, int uIdSubclass) → int comctl32
Removes a subclass callback from a window.
ReOpenFile(int hOriginalFile, int dwDesiredAccess, int dwShareMode, int dwFlagsAndAttributes) → int kernel32
Reopens the specified file system object with different access rights, sharing mode, and flags.
ReplaceText(Pointer<FINDREPLACE> param0) → int comdlg32
Creates a system-defined modeless dialog box that lets the user specify a string to search for and a replacement string, as well as options to control the find and replace operations.
ReplyMessage(int lResult) → int user32
Replies to a message sent from another thread by the SendMessage function.
ReportJobProcessingProgress(int printerHandle, int jobId, int jobOperation, int jobProgress) → int winspool
Reports to the Print Spooler service whether an XPS print job is in the spooling or the rendering phase and what part of the processing is currently underway.
ResetEvent(int hEvent) → int kernel32
Sets the specified event object to the nonsignaled state.
ResetPrinter(int hPrinter, Pointer<PRINTER_DEFAULTS> pDefault) → int winspool
The ResetPrinter function specifies the data type and device mode values to be used for printing documents submitted by the StartDocPrinter function. These values can be overridden by using the SetJob function after document printing has started.
ResizePseudoConsole(int hPC, COORD size) → int kernel32
Resizes the internal buffers for a pseudoconsole to the given size.
RGB(int r, int g, int b) → int
Selects a red, green, blue (RGB) color based on the arguments supplied and the color capabilities of the output device.
RoActivateInstance(int activatableClassId, Pointer<Pointer<COMObject>> instance) → int winrt
Activates the specified Windows Runtime class.
RoGetActivationFactory(int activatableClassId, Pointer<GUID> iid, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> factory) → int winrt
Gets the activation factory for the specified runtime class.
RoGetApartmentIdentifier(Pointer<Uint64> apartmentIdentifier) → int winrt
Gets a unique identifier for the current apartment.
RoGetMetaDataFile(int name, Pointer<COMObject> metaDataDispenser, Pointer<IntPtr> metaDataFilePath, Pointer<Pointer<COMObject>> metaDataImport, Pointer<Uint32> typeDefToken) → int winrt
Locates and retrieves the metadata file that describes the Application Binary Interface (ABI) for the specified typename.
RoInitialize(int initType) → int winrt
Initializes the Windows Runtime on the current thread with the specified concurrency model.
RoIsApiContractMajorVersionPresent(Pointer<Utf16> name, int majorVersion, Pointer<Int32> present) → int winrt
Returns true or false to indicate whether the API contract with the specified name and major version number is present.
RoIsApiContractPresent(Pointer<Utf16> name, int majorVersion, int minorVersion, Pointer<Int32> present) → int winrt
Returns true or false to indicate whether the API contract with the specified name and major and minor version number is present.
RoundRect(int hdc, int left, int top, int right, int bottom, int width, int height) → int gdi32
The RoundRect function draws a rectangle with rounded corners. The rectangle is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush.
RoUninitialize() → void winrt
Closes the Windows Runtime on the current thread.
SaveCurrentMonitorSettings(int hMonitor) → int dxva2
Saves the current monitor settings to the display's nonvolatile storage.
SaveDC(int hdc) → int gdi32
The SaveDC function saves the current state of the specified device context (DC) by copying data describing selected objects and graphic modes (such as the bitmap, brush, palette, font, pen, region, drawing mode, and mapping mode) to a context stack.
SCardAccessStartedEvent() → int winscard
The SCardAccessStartedEvent function returns an event handle when an event signals that the smart card resource manager is started. The event-object handle can be specified in a call to one of the wait functions.
SCardAddReaderToGroup(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReaderName, Pointer<Utf16> szGroupName) → int winscard
The SCardAddReaderToGroup function adds a reader to a reader group.
SCardAudit(int hContext, int dwEvent) → int winscard
The SCardAudit function writes event messages to the Windows application log Microsoft-Windows-SmartCard-Audit/Authentication.
SCardBeginTransaction(int hCard) → int winscard
The SCardBeginTransaction function starts a transaction. The function waits for the completion of all other transactions before it begins. After the transaction starts, all other applications are blocked from accessing the smart card while the transaction is in progress.
SCardCancel(int hContext) → int winscard
The SCardCancel function terminates all outstanding actions within a specific resource manager context. The only requests that you can cancel are those that require waiting for external action by the smart card or user. Any such outstanding action requests will terminate with a status indication that the action was canceled. This is especially useful to force outstanding SCardGetStatusChange calls to terminate.
SCardConnect(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReader, int dwShareMode, int dwPreferredProtocols, Pointer<IntPtr> phCard, Pointer<Uint32> pdwActiveProtocol) → int winscard
The SCardConnect function establishes a connection (using a specific resource manager context) between the calling application and a smart card contained by a specific reader. If no card exists in the specified reader, an error is returned.
SCardControl(int hCard, int dwControlCode, Pointer<NativeType> lpInBuffer, int cbInBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> lpOutBuffer, int cbOutBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpBytesReturned) → int winscard
The SCardControl function gives you direct control of the reader. You can call it any time after a successful call to SCardConnect and before a successful call to SCardDisconnect. The effect on the state of the reader depends on the control code.
SCardDisconnect(int hCard, int dwDisposition) → int winscard
The SCardDisconnect function terminates a connection previously opened between the calling application and a smart card in the target reader.
SCardEndTransaction(int hCard, int dwDisposition) → int winscard
The SCardEndTransaction function completes a previously declared transaction, allowing other applications to resume interactions with the card.
SCardEstablishContext(int dwScope, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved1, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved2, Pointer<IntPtr> phContext) → int winscard
The SCardEstablishContext function establishes the resource manager context (the scope) within which database operations are performed.
SCardForgetCardType(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szCardName) → int winscard
The SCardForgetCardType function removes an introduced smart card from the smart card subsystem.
SCardForgetReader(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReaderName) → int winscard
The SCardForgetReader function removes a previously introduced reader from control by the smart card subsystem. It is removed from the smart card database, including from any reader group that it may have been added to.
SCardForgetReaderGroup(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szGroupName) → int winscard
The SCardForgetReaderGroup function removes a previously introduced smart card reader group from the smart card subsystem. Although this function automatically clears all readers from the group, it does not affect the existence of the individual readers in the database.
SCardFreeMemory(int hContext, Pointer<NativeType> pvMem) → int winscard
The SCardFreeMemory function releases memory that has been returned from the resource manager using the SCARD_AUTOALLOCATE length designator.
SCardGetAttrib(int hCard, int dwAttrId, Pointer<Uint8> pbAttr, Pointer<Uint32> pcbAttrLen) → int winscard
The SCardGetAttrib function retrieves the current reader attributes for the given handle. It does not affect the state of the reader, driver, or card.
SCardGetCardTypeProviderName(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szCardName, int dwProviderId, Pointer<Utf16> szProvider, Pointer<Uint32> pcchProvider) → int winscard
The SCardGetCardTypeProviderName function returns the name of the module (dynamic link library) that contains the provider for a given card name and provider type.
SCardGetDeviceTypeId(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReaderName, Pointer<Uint32> pdwDeviceTypeId) → int winscard
The SCardGetDeviceTypeId function gets the device type identifier of the card reader for the given reader name. This function does not affect the state of the reader.
SCardGetProviderId(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szCard, Pointer<GUID> pguidProviderId) → int winscard
The SCardGetProviderId function returns the identifier (GUID) of the primary service provider for a given card. The caller supplies the name of a smart card (previously introduced to the system) and receives the registered identifier of the primary service provider GUID, if one exists.
SCardGetReaderDeviceInstanceId(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReaderName, Pointer<Utf16> szDeviceInstanceId, Pointer<Uint32> pcchDeviceInstanceId) → int winscard
The SCardGetReaderDeviceInstanceId function gets the device instance identifier of the card reader for the given reader name. This function does not affect the state of the reader.
SCardGetReaderIcon(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReaderName, Pointer<Uint8> pbIcon, Pointer<Uint32> pcbIcon) → int winscard
The SCardGetReaderIcon function gets an icon of the smart card reader for a given reader's name. This function does not affect the state of the card reader.
SCardGetStatusChange(int hContext, int dwTimeout, Pointer<SCARD_READERSTATE> rgReaderStates, int cReaders) → int winscard
The SCardGetStatusChange function blocks execution until the current availability of the cards in a specific set of readers changes. The caller supplies a list of readers to be monitored by an SCARD_READERSTATE array and the maximum amount of time (in milliseconds) that it is willing to wait for an action to occur on one of the listed readers. Note that SCardGetStatusChange uses the user-supplied value in the dwCurrentState members of the rgReaderStatesSCARD_READERSTATE array as the definition of the current state of the readers. The function returns when there is a change in availability, having filled in the dwEventState members of rgReaderStates appropriately.
SCardGetTransmitCount(int hCard, Pointer<Uint32> pcTransmitCount) → int winscard
The SCardGetTransmitCount function retrieves the number of transmit operations that have completed since the specified card reader was inserted.
SCardIntroduceCardType(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szCardName, Pointer<GUID> pguidPrimaryProvider, Pointer<GUID> rgguidInterfaces, int dwInterfaceCount, Pointer<Uint8> pbAtr, Pointer<Uint8> pbAtrMask, int cbAtrLen) → int winscard
The SCardIntroduceCardType function introduces a smart card to the smart card subsystem (for the active user) by adding it to the smart card database.
SCardIntroduceReader(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReaderName, Pointer<Utf16> szDeviceName) → int winscard
The SCardIntroduceReader function introduces a new name for an existing smart card reader.
SCardIntroduceReaderGroup(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szGroupName) → int winscard
The SCardIntroduceReaderGroup function introduces a reader group to the smart card subsystem. However, the reader group is not created until the group is specified when adding a reader to the smart card database.
SCardIsValidContext(int hContext) → int winscard
The SCardIsValidContext function determines whether a smart card context handle is valid.
SCardListCards(int hContext, Pointer<Uint8> pbAtr, Pointer<GUID> rgquidInterfaces, int cguidInterfaceCount, Pointer<Utf16> mszCards, Pointer<Uint32> pcchCards) → int winscard
The SCardListCards function searches the smart card database and provides a list of named cards previously introduced to the system by the user. The caller specifies an ATR string, a set of interface identifiers (GUIDs), or both. If both an ATR string and an identifier array are supplied, the cards returned will match the ATR string supplied and support the interfaces specified.
SCardListInterfaces(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szCard, Pointer<GUID> pguidInterfaces, Pointer<Uint32> pcguidInterfaces) → int winscard
The SCardListInterfaces function provides a list of interfaces supplied by a given card. The caller supplies the name of a smart card previously introduced to the subsystem, and receives the list of interfaces supported by the card.
SCardListReaderGroups(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> mszGroups, Pointer<Uint32> pcchGroups) → int winscard
The SCardListReaderGroups function provides the list of reader groups that have previously been introduced to the system.
SCardListReaders(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> mszGroups, Pointer<Utf16> mszReaders, Pointer<Uint32> pcchReaders) → int winscard
The SCardListReaders function provides the list of readers within a set of named reader groups, eliminating duplicates. The caller supplies a list of reader groups, and receives the list of readers within the named groups. Unrecognized group names are ignored. This function only returns readers within the named groups that are currently attached to the system and available for use.
SCardListReadersWithDeviceInstanceId(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szDeviceInstanceId, Pointer<Utf16> mszReaders, Pointer<Uint32> pcchReaders) → int winscard
The SCardListReadersWithDeviceInstanceId function gets the list of readers that have provided a device instance identifier. This function does not affect the state of the reader.
SCardLocateCards(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> mszCards, Pointer<SCARD_READERSTATE> rgReaderStates, int cReaders) → int winscard
The SCardLocateCards function searches the readers listed in the rgReaderStates parameter for a card with an ATR string that matches one of the card names specified in mszCards, returning immediately with the result.
SCardLocateCardsByATR(int hContext, Pointer<SCARD_ATRMASK> rgAtrMasks, int cAtrs, Pointer<SCARD_READERSTATE> rgReaderStates, int cReaders) → int winscard
The SCardLocateCardsByATR function searches the readers listed in the rgReaderStates parameter for a card with a name that matches one of the card names contained in one of the SCARD_ATRMASK structures specified by the rgAtrMasks parameter.
SCardReadCache(int hContext, Pointer<GUID> CardIdentifier, int FreshnessCounter, Pointer<Utf16> LookupName, Pointer<Uint8> Data, Pointer<Uint32> DataLen) → int winscard
The SCardReadCache function retrieves the value portion of a name-value pair from the global cache maintained by the Smart Card Resource Manager.
SCardReconnect(int hCard, int dwShareMode, int dwPreferredProtocols, int dwInitialization, Pointer<Uint32> pdwActiveProtocol) → int winscard
The SCardReconnect function reestablishes an existing connection between the calling application and a smart card. This function moves a card handle from direct access to general access, or acknowledges and clears an error condition that is preventing further access to the card.
SCardReleaseContext(int hContext) → int winscard
The SCardReleaseContext function closes an established resource manager context, freeing any resources allocated under that context, including SCARDHANDLE objects and memory allocated using the SCARD_AUTOALLOCATE length designator.
SCardReleaseStartedEvent() → void winscard
The SCardReleaseStartedEvent function decrements the reference count for a handle acquired by a previous call to the SCardAccessStartedEvent function.
SCardRemoveReaderFromGroup(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szReaderName, Pointer<Utf16> szGroupName) → int winscard
The SCardRemoveReaderFromGroup function removes a reader from an existing reader group. This function has no effect on the reader.
SCardSetAttrib(int hCard, int dwAttrId, Pointer<Uint8> pbAttr, int cbAttrLen) → int winscard
The SCardSetAttrib function sets the given reader attribute for the given handle. It does not affect the state of the reader, reader driver, or smart card. Not all attributes are supported by all readers (nor can they be set at all times) as many of the attributes are under direct control of the transport protocol.
SCardSetCardTypeProviderName(int hContext, Pointer<Utf16> szCardName, int dwProviderId, Pointer<Utf16> szProvider) → int winscard
The SCardSetCardTypeProviderName function specifies the name of the module (dynamic link library) containing the provider for a given card name and provider type.
SCardStatus(int hCard, Pointer<Utf16> mszReaderNames, Pointer<Uint32> pcchReaderLen, Pointer<Uint32> pdwState, Pointer<Uint32> pdwProtocol, Pointer<Uint8> pbAtr, Pointer<Uint32> pcbAtrLen) → int winscard
The SCardStatus function provides the current status of a smart card in a reader. You can call it any time after a successful call to SCardConnect and before a successful call to SCardDisconnect. It does not affect the state of the reader or reader driver.
SCardTransmit(int hCard, Pointer<SCARD_IO_REQUEST> pioSendPci, Pointer<Uint8> pbSendBuffer, int cbSendLength, Pointer<SCARD_IO_REQUEST> pioRecvPci, Pointer<Uint8> pbRecvBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> pcbRecvLength) → int winscard
The SCardTransmit function sends a service request to the smart card and expects to receive data back from the card.
SCardUIDlgSelectCard(Pointer<OPENCARDNAME_EX> param0) → int winscard
The SCardUIDlgSelectCard function displays the smart card Select Card dialog box.
SCardWriteCache(int hContext, Pointer<GUID> CardIdentifier, int FreshnessCounter, Pointer<Utf16> LookupName, Pointer<Uint8> Data, int DataLen) → int winscard
The SCardWriteCache function writes a name-value pair from a smart card to the global cache maintained by the Smart Card Resource Manager.
ScheduleJob(int hPrinter, int JobId) → int winspool
The ScheduleJob function requests that the print spooler schedule a specified print job for printing.
ScreenToClient(int hWnd, Pointer<POINT> lpPoint) → int user32
The ScreenToClient function converts the screen coordinates of a specified point on the screen to client-area coordinates.
ScrollConsoleScreenBuffer(int hConsoleOutput, Pointer<SMALL_RECT> lpScrollRectangle, Pointer<SMALL_RECT> lpClipRectangle, COORD dwDestinationOrigin, Pointer<CHAR_INFO> lpFill) → int kernel32
Moves a block of data in a screen buffer. The effects of the move can be limited by specifying a clipping rectangle, so the contents of the console screen buffer outside the clipping rectangle are unchanged.
ScrollDC(int hDC, int dx, int dy, Pointer<RECT> lprcScroll, Pointer<RECT> lprcClip, int hrgnUpdate, Pointer<RECT> lprcUpdate) → int user32
The ScrollDC function scrolls a rectangle of bits horizontally and vertically.
ScrollWindow(int hWnd, int XAmount, int YAmount, Pointer<RECT> lpRect, Pointer<RECT> lpClipRect) → int user32
The ScrollWindow function scrolls the contents of the specified window's client area.
ScrollWindowEx(int hWnd, int dx, int dy, Pointer<RECT> prcScroll, Pointer<RECT> prcClip, int hrgnUpdate, Pointer<RECT> prcUpdate, int flags) → int user32
The ScrollWindowEx function scrolls the contents of the specified window's client area.
SelectClipPath(int hdc, int mode) → int gdi32
The SelectClipPath function selects the current path as a clipping region for a device context, combining the new region with any existing clipping region using the specified mode.
SelectObject(int hdc, int h) → int gdi32
The SelectObject function selects an object into the specified device context (DC). The new object replaces the previous object of the same type.
SendDlgItemMessage(int hDlg, int nIDDlgItem, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Sends a message to the specified control in a dialog box.
SendInput(int cInputs, Pointer<INPUT> pInputs, int cbSize) → int user32
Synthesizes keystrokes, mouse motions, and button clicks.
SendMessage(int hWnd, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Sends the specified message to a window or windows. The SendMessage function calls the window procedure for the specified window and does not return until the window procedure has processed the message.
SendMessageCallback(int hWnd, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam, Pointer<NativeFunction<SENDASYNCPROC>> lpResultCallBack, int dwData) → int user32
Sends the specified message to a window or windows. It calls the window procedure for the specified window and returns immediately if the window belongs to another thread. After the window procedure processes the message, the system calls the specified callback function, passing the result of the message processing and an application-defined value to the callback function.
SendMessageTimeout(int hWnd, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam, int fuFlags, int uTimeout, Pointer<IntPtr> lpdwResult) → int user32
Sends the specified message to one or more windows.
SendNotifyMessage(int hWnd, int Msg, int wParam, int lParam) → int user32
Sends the specified message to a window or windows. If the window was created by the calling thread, SendNotifyMessage calls the window procedure for the window and does not return until the window procedure has processed the message. If the window was created by a different thread, SendNotifyMessage passes the message to the window procedure and returns immediately; it does not wait for the window procedure to finish processing the message.
SetActiveWindow(int hWnd) → int user32
Activates a window. The window must be attached to the calling thread's message queue.
SetBkColor(int hdc, int color) → int gdi32
The SetBkColor function sets the current background color to the specified color value, or to the nearest physical color if the device cannot represent the specified color value.
SetBkMode(int hdc, int mode) → int gdi32
The SetBkMode function sets the background mix mode of the specified device context. The background mix mode is used with text, hatched brushes, and pen styles that are not solid lines.
SetCapture(int hWnd) → int user32
Sets the mouse capture to the specified window belonging to the current thread. SetCapture captures mouse input either when the mouse is over the capturing window, or when the mouse button was pressed while the mouse was over the capturing window and the button is still down. Only one window at a time can capture the mouse.
SetCaretBlinkTime(int uMSeconds) → int user32
Sets the caret blink time to the specified number of milliseconds. The blink time is the elapsed time, in milliseconds, required to invert the caret's pixels.
SetCaretPos(int X, int Y) → int user32
Moves the caret to the specified coordinates. If the window that owns the caret was created with the CS_OWNDC class style, then the specified coordinates are subject to the mapping mode of the device context associated with that window.
SetClipboardData(int uFormat, int hMem) → int user32
Places data on the clipboard in a specified clipboard format. The window must be the current clipboard owner, and the application must have called the OpenClipboard function.
SetClipboardViewer(int hWndNewViewer) → int user32
Adds the specified window to the chain of clipboard viewers.
SetCoalescableTimer(int hWnd, int nIDEvent, int uElapse, Pointer<NativeFunction<TIMERPROC>> lpTimerFunc, int uToleranceDelay) → int user32
Creates a timer with the specified time-out value and coalescing tolerance delay.
SetCommBreak(int hFile) → int kernel32
Suspends character transmission for a specified communications device and places the transmission line in a break state until the ClearCommBreak function is called.
SetCommConfig(int hCommDev, Pointer<COMMCONFIG> lpCC, int dwSize) → int kernel32
Sets the current configuration of a communications device.
SetCommMask(int hFile, int dwEvtMask) → int kernel32
Specifies a set of events to be monitored for a communications device.
SetCommState(int hFile, Pointer<DCB> lpDCB) → int kernel32
Configures a communications device according to the specifications in a device-control block (a DCB structure). The function reinitializes all hardware and control settings, but it does not empty output or input queues.
SetCommTimeouts(int hFile, Pointer<COMMTIMEOUTS> lpCommTimeouts) → int kernel32
Sets the time-out parameters for all read and write operations on a specified communications device.
SetConsoleCtrlHandler(Pointer<NativeFunction<PHANDLER_ROUTINE>> HandlerRoutine, int Add) → int kernel32
Adds or removes an application-defined HandlerRoutine function from the list of handler functions for the calling process.
SetConsoleCursorInfo(int hConsoleOutput, Pointer<CONSOLE_CURSOR_INFO> lpConsoleCursorInfo) → int kernel32
Sets the size and visibility of the cursor for the specified console screen buffer.
SetConsoleCursorPosition(int hConsoleOutput, COORD dwCursorPosition) → int kernel32
Sets the cursor position in the specified console screen buffer.
SetConsoleDisplayMode(int hConsoleOutput, int dwFlags, Pointer<COORD> lpNewScreenBufferDimensions) → int kernel32
Sets the display mode of the specified console screen buffer.
SetConsoleMode(int hConsoleHandle, int dwMode) → int kernel32
Sets the input mode of a console's input buffer or the output mode of a console screen buffer.
SetConsoleTextAttribute(int hConsoleOutput, int wAttributes) → int kernel32
Sets the attributes of characters written to the console screen buffer by the WriteFile or WriteConsole function, or echoed by the ReadFile or ReadConsole function. This function affects text written after the function call.
SetConsoleWindowInfo(int hConsoleOutput, int bAbsolute, Pointer<SMALL_RECT> lpConsoleWindow) → int kernel32
Sets the current size and position of a console screen buffer's window.
SetCurrentDirectory(Pointer<Utf16> lpPathName) → int kernel32
Changes the current directory for the current process.
SetCursor(int hCursor) → int user32
Sets the cursor shape.
SetCursorPos(int X, int Y) → int user32
Moves the cursor to the specified screen coordinates. If the new coordinates are not within the screen rectangle set by the most recent ClipCursor function call, the system automatically adjusts the coordinates so that the cursor stays within the rectangle.
SetDefaultCommConfig(Pointer<Utf16> lpszName, Pointer<COMMCONFIG> lpCC, int dwSize) → int kernel32
Sets the default configuration for a communications device.
SetDefaultDllDirectories(int DirectoryFlags) → int kernel32
Specifies a default set of directories to search when the calling process loads a DLL. This search path is used when LoadLibraryEx is called with no LOAD_LIBRARY_SEARCH flags.
SetDefaultPrinter(Pointer<Utf16> pszPrinter) → int winspool
The SetDefaultPrinter function sets the printer name of the default printer for the current user on the local computer.
SetDialogControlDpiChangeBehavior(int hWnd, int mask, int values) → int user32
Overrides the default per-monitor DPI scaling behavior of a child window in a dialog.
SetDialogDpiChangeBehavior(int hDlg, int mask, int values) → int user32
Dialogs in Per-Monitor v2 contexts are automatically DPI scaled. This method lets you customize their DPI change behavior. This function works in conjunction with the DIALOG_DPI_CHANGE_BEHAVIORS enum in order to override the default DPI scaling behavior for dialogs. This function is called on a specified dialog, for which the specified flags are individually saved.
SetDisplayAutoRotationPreferences(int orientation) → int user32
Sets the screen auto-rotation preferences for the current process.
SetDisplayConfig(int numPathArrayElements, Pointer<DISPLAYCONFIG_PATH_INFO> pathArray, int numModeInfoArrayElements, Pointer<DISPLAYCONFIG_MODE_INFO> modeInfoArray, int flags) → int user32
The SetDisplayConfig function modifies the display topology, source, and target modes by exclusively enabling the specified paths in the current session.
SetDlgItemInt(int hDlg, int nIDDlgItem, int uValue, int bSigned) → int user32
Sets the text of a control in a dialog box to the string representation of a specified integer value.
SetDlgItemText(int hDlg, int nIDDlgItem, Pointer<Utf16> lpString) → int user32
Sets the title or text of a control in a dialog box.
SetDoubleClickTime(int param0) → int user32
Sets the double-click time for the mouse. A double-click is a series of two clicks of a mouse button, the second occurring within a specified time after the first. The double-click time is the maximum number of milliseconds that may occur between the first and second clicks of a double-click.
SetEndOfFile(int hFile) → int kernel32
Sets the physical file size for the specified file to the current position of the file pointer.
SetEnvironmentVariable(Pointer<Utf16> lpName, Pointer<Utf16> lpValue) → int kernel32
Sets the contents of the specified environment variable for the current process.
SetErrorMode(int uMode) → int kernel32
Sets the specified event object to the signaled state.
SetEvent(int hEvent) → int kernel32
Sets the specified event object to the signaled state.
SetFileApisToANSI() → void kernel32
Causes the file I/O functions to use the ANSI character set code page for the current process.
SetFileApisToOEM() → void kernel32
Causes the file I/O functions for the process to use the OEM character set code page.
SetFileAttributes(Pointer<Utf16> lpFileName, int dwFileAttributes) → int kernel32
Sets the attributes for a file or directory.
SetFileInformationByHandle(int hFile, int FileInformationClass, Pointer<NativeType> lpFileInformation, int dwBufferSize) → int kernel32
Sets the file information for the specified file.
SetFileIoOverlappedRange(int FileHandle, Pointer<Uint8> OverlappedRangeStart, int Length) → int kernel32
Associates a virtual address range with the specified file handle. This indicates that the kernel should optimize any further asynchronous I/O requests with overlapped structures inside this range. The overlapped range is locked in memory, and then unlocked when the file is closed. After a range is associated with a file handle, it cannot be disassociated.
SetFilePointer(int hFile, int lDistanceToMove, Pointer<Int32> lpDistanceToMoveHigh, int dwMoveMethod) → int kernel32
Moves the file pointer of the specified file.
SetFilePointerEx(int hFile, int liDistanceToMove, Pointer<Int64> lpNewFilePointer, int dwMoveMethod) → int kernel32
Moves the file pointer of the specified file.
SetFileShortName(int hFile, Pointer<Utf16> lpShortName) → int kernel32
Sets the short name for the specified file. The file must be on an NTFS file system volume.
SetFileValidData(int hFile, int ValidDataLength) → int kernel32
Sets the valid data length of the specified file. This function is useful in very limited scenarios.
SetFirmwareEnvironmentVariable(Pointer<Utf16> lpName, Pointer<Utf16> lpGuid, Pointer<NativeType> pValue, int nSize) → int kernel32
Sets the value of the specified firmware environment variable.
SetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableEx(Pointer<Utf16> lpName, Pointer<Utf16> lpGuid, Pointer<NativeType> pValue, int nSize, int dwAttributes) → int kernel32
Sets the value of the specified firmware environment variable and the attributes that indicate how this variable is stored and maintained.
SetFocus(int hWnd) → int user32
Sets the keyboard focus to the specified window. The window must be attached to the calling thread's message queue.
SetForegroundWindow(int hWnd) → int user32
Brings the thread that created the specified window into the foreground and activates the window. Keyboard input is directed to the window, and various visual cues are changed for the user. The system assigns a slightly higher priority to the thread that created the foreground window than it does to other threads.
SetForm(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pFormName, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pForm) → int winspool
The SetForm function sets the form information for the specified printer.
SetGestureConfig(int hwnd, int dwReserved, int cIDs, Pointer<GESTURECONFIG> pGestureConfig, int cbSize) → int user32
Configures the messages that are sent from a window for Windows Touch gestures.
SetHandleInformation(int hObject, int dwMask, int dwFlags) → int kernel32
Sets certain properties of an object handle.
SetInformationJobObject(int hJob, int JobObjectInformationClass, Pointer<NativeType> lpJobObjectInformation, int cbJobObjectInformationLength) → int kernel32
Sets limits for a job object.
SetIoRateControlInformationJobObject(int hJob, Pointer<JOBOBJECT_IO_RATE_CONTROL_INFORMATION> IoRateControlInfo) → int kernel32
Sets I/O limits on a job object.
SetJob(int hPrinter, int JobId, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pJob, int Command) → int winspool
The SetJob function pauses, resumes, cancels, or restarts a print job on a specified printer. You can also use the SetJob function to set print job parameters, such as the print job priority and the document name.
SetKeyboardState(Pointer<Uint8> lpKeyState) → int user32
Copies an array of keyboard key states into the calling thread's keyboard input-state table. This is the same table accessed by the GetKeyboardState and GetKeyState functions. Changes made to this table do not affect keyboard input to any other thread.
SetLayeredWindowAttributes(int hwnd, int crKey, int bAlpha, int dwFlags) → int user32
Sets the opacity and transparency color key of a layered window.
SetMapMode(int hdc, int iMode) → int gdi32
The SetMapMode function sets the mapping mode of the specified device context. The mapping mode defines the unit of measure used to transform page-space units into device-space units, and also defines the orientation of the device's x and y axes.
SetMenu(int hWnd, int hMenu) → int user32
Assigns a new menu to the specified window.
SetMenuDefaultItem(int hMenu, int uItem, int fByPos) → int user32
Sets the default menu item for the specified menu.
SetMenuInfo(int param0, Pointer<MENUINFO> param1) → int user32
Sets information for a specified menu.
SetMenuItemBitmaps(int hMenu, int uPosition, int uFlags, int hBitmapUnchecked, int hBitmapChecked) → int user32
Associates the specified bitmap with a menu item. Whether the menu item is selected or clear, the system displays the appropriate bitmap next to the menu item.
SetMenuItemInfo(int hmenu, int item, int fByPositon, Pointer<MENUITEMINFO> lpmii) → int user32
Changes information about a menu item.
SetMessageExtraInfo(int lParam) → int user32
Sets the extra message information for the current thread. Extra message information is an application- or driver-defined value associated with the current thread's message queue. An application can use the GetMessageExtraInfo function to retrieve a thread's extra message information.
SetMonitorBrightness(int hMonitor, int dwNewBrightness) → int dxva2
Sets a monitor's brightness value. Increasing the brightness value makes the display on the monitor brighter, and decreasing it makes the display dimmer.
SetMonitorColorTemperature(int hMonitor, int ctCurrentColorTemperature) → int dxva2
Sets a monitor's color temperature.
SetMonitorContrast(int hMonitor, int dwNewContrast) → int dxva2
Sets a monitor's contrast value.
SetMonitorDisplayAreaPosition(int hMonitor, int ptPositionType, int dwNewPosition) → int dxva2
Sets the horizontal or vertical position of a monitor's display area. Increasing the horizontal position moves the display area toward the right side of the screen; decreasing it moves the display area toward the left. Increasing the vertical position moves the display area toward the top of the screen; decreasing it moves the display area toward the bottom.
SetMonitorDisplayAreaSize(int hMonitor, int stSizeType, int dwNewDisplayAreaWidthOrHeight) → int dxva2
Sets the width or height of a monitor's display area.
SetMonitorRedGreenOrBlueDrive(int hMonitor, int dtDriveType, int dwNewDrive) → int dxva2
Sets a monitor's red, green, or blue drive value.
SetMonitorRedGreenOrBlueGain(int hMonitor, int gtGainType, int dwNewGain) → int dxva2
Sets a monitor's red, green, or blue gain value.
SetNamedPipeHandleState(int hNamedPipe, Pointer<Uint32> lpMode, Pointer<Uint32> lpMaxCollectionCount, Pointer<Uint32> lpCollectDataTimeout) → int kernel32
Sets the read mode and the blocking mode of the specified named pipe. If the specified handle is to the client end of a named pipe and if the named pipe server process is on a remote computer, the function can also be used to control local buffering.
SetParent(int hWndChild, int hWndNewParent) → int user32
Changes the parent window of the specified child window.
SetPhysicalCursorPos(int X, int Y) → int user32
Sets the position of the cursor in physical coordinates.
SetPixel(int hdc, int x, int y, int color) → int gdi32
The SetPixel function sets the pixel at the specified coordinates to the specified color.
SetPort(Pointer<Utf16> pName, Pointer<Utf16> pPortName, int dwLevel, Pointer<Uint8> pPortInfo) → int winspool
The SetPort function sets the status associated with a printer port.
SetPrinter(int hPrinter, int Level, Pointer<Uint8> pPrinter, int Command) → int winspool
The SetPrinter function sets the data for a specified printer or sets the state of the specified printer by pausing printing, resuming printing, or clearing all print jobs.
SetPrinterData(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pValueName, int Type, Pointer<Uint8> pData, int cbData) → int winspool
The SetPrinterData function sets the configuration data for a printer or print server.
SetPrinterDataEx(int hPrinter, Pointer<Utf16> pKeyName, Pointer<Utf16> pValueName, int Type, Pointer<Uint8> pData, int cbData) → int winspool
The SetPrinterDataEx function sets the configuration data for a printer or print server. The function stores the configuration data under the printer's registry key.
SetProcessAffinityMask(int hProcess, int dwProcessAffinityMask) → int kernel32
Sets a processor affinity mask for the threads of the specified process.
SetProcessDPIAware() → int user32
Sets the process-default DPI awareness to system-DPI awareness.
SetProcessDpiAwareness(int value) → int user32
Sets the process-default DPI awareness level. This is equivalent to calling SetProcessDpiAwarenessContext with the corresponding DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT value.
SetProcessDpiAwarenessContext(int value) → int user32
It is recommended that you set the process-default DPI awareness via application manifest. See Setting the default DPI awareness for a process for more information. Setting the process-default DPI awareness via API call can lead to unexpected application behavior. Sets the current process to a specified dots per inch (dpi) awareness context. The DPI awareness contexts are from the DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT value.
SetProcessPriorityBoost(int hProcess, int bDisablePriorityBoost) → int kernel32
Disables or enables the ability of the system to temporarily boost the priority of the threads of the specified process.
SetProcessWorkingSetSize(int hProcess, int dwMinimumWorkingSetSize, int dwMaximumWorkingSetSize) → int kernel32
Sets the minimum and maximum working set sizes for the specified process.
SetProp(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int hData) → int user32
Adds a new entry or changes an existing entry in the property list of the specified window. The function adds a new entry to the list if the specified character string does not exist already in the list. The new entry contains the string and the handle. Otherwise, the function replaces the string's current handle with the specified handle.
SetRect(Pointer<RECT> lprc, int xLeft, int yTop, int xRight, int yBottom) → int user32
The SetRect function sets the coordinates of the specified rectangle. This is equivalent to assigning the left, top, right, and bottom arguments to the appropriate members of the RECT structure.
SetRectEmpty(Pointer<RECT> lprc) → int user32
The SetRectEmpty function creates an empty rectangle in which all coordinates are set to zero.
SetScrollInfo(int hwnd, int nBar, Pointer<SCROLLINFO> lpsi, int redraw) → int user32
The SetScrollInfo function sets the parameters of a scroll bar, including the minimum and maximum scrolling positions, the page size, and the position of the scroll box (thumb). The function also redraws the scroll bar, if requested.
SetServiceObjectSecurity(int hService, int dwSecurityInformation, Pointer<NativeType> lpSecurityDescriptor) → int advapi32
The SetServiceObjectSecurity function sets the security descriptor of a service object.
SetServiceStatus(int hServiceStatus, Pointer<SERVICE_STATUS> lpServiceStatus) → int advapi32
Updates the service control manager's status information for the calling service.
SetStdHandle(int nStdHandle, int hHandle) → int kernel32
Sets the handle for the specified standard device (standard input, standard output, or standard error).
SetStretchBltMode(int hdc, int mode) → int gdi32
The SetStretchBltMode function sets the bitmap stretching mode in the specified device context.
SetSysColors(int cElements, Pointer<Int32> lpaElements, Pointer<Uint32> lpaRgbValues) → int user32
Sets the colors for the specified display elements. Display elements are the various parts of a window and the display that appear on the system display screen.
SetSystemCursor(int hcur, int id) → int user32
Enables an application to customize the system cursors. It replaces the contents of the system cursor specified by the id parameter with the contents of the cursor specified by the hcur parameter and then destroys hcur.
SetTextColor(int hdc, int color) → int gdi32
The SetTextColor function sets the text color for the specified device context to the specified color.
SetThemeAppProperties(int dwFlags) → void uxtheme
Sets the flags that determine how visual styles are implemented in the calling application.
SetThreadAffinityMask(int hThread, int dwThreadAffinityMask) → int kernel32
Sets a processor affinity mask for the specified thread.
SetThreadDpiAwarenessContext(int dpiContext) → int user32
Set the DPI awareness for the current thread to the provided value.
SetThreadDpiHostingBehavior(int value) → int user32
Sets the thread's DPI_HOSTING_BEHAVIOR. This behavior allows windows created in the thread to host child windows with a different DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT.
SetThreadErrorMode(int dwNewMode, Pointer<Uint32> lpOldMode) → int kernel32
Controls whether the system will handle the specified types of serious errors or whether the calling thread will handle them.
SetThreadExecutionState(int esFlags) → int kernel32
Enables an application to inform the system that it is in use, thereby preventing the system from entering sleep or turning off the display while the application is running.
SetThreadToken(Pointer<IntPtr> Thread, int Token) → int advapi32
The SetThreadToken function assigns an impersonation token to a thread. The function can also cause a thread to stop using an impersonation token.
SetThreadUILanguage(int LangId) → int kernel32
Sets the user interface language for the current thread.
SetTimer(int hWnd, int nIDEvent, int uElapse, Pointer<NativeFunction<TIMERPROC>> lpTimerFunc) → int user32
Creates a timer with the specified time-out value.
SetupComm(int hFile, int dwInQueue, int dwOutQueue) → int kernel32
Initializes the communications parameters for a specified communications device.
SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList(int DeviceInfoSet) → int setupapi
The SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList function deletes a device information set and frees all associated memory.
SetupDiEnumDeviceInfo(int DeviceInfoSet, int MemberIndex, Pointer<SP_DEVINFO_DATA> DeviceInfoData) → int setupapi
The SetupDiEnumDeviceInfo function returns a SP_DEVINFO_DATA structure that specifies a device information element in a device information set.
SetupDiEnumDeviceInterfaces(int DeviceInfoSet, Pointer<SP_DEVINFO_DATA> DeviceInfoData, Pointer<GUID> InterfaceClassGuid, int MemberIndex, Pointer<SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA> DeviceInterfaceData) → int setupapi
The SetupDiEnumDeviceInterfaces function enumerates the device interfaces that are contained in a device information set.
SetupDiGetClassDevs(Pointer<GUID> ClassGuid, Pointer<Utf16> Enumerator, int hwndParent, int Flags) → int setupapi
The SetupDiGetClassDevs function returns a handle to a device information set that contains requested device information elements for a local computer.
SetupDiGetDeviceInstanceId(int DeviceInfoSet, Pointer<SP_DEVINFO_DATA> DeviceInfoData, Pointer<Utf16> DeviceInstanceId, int DeviceInstanceIdSize, Pointer<Uint32> RequiredSize) → int setupapi
The SetupDiGetDeviceInstanceId function retrieves the device instance ID that is associated with a device information element.
SetupDiGetDeviceInterfaceDetail(int DeviceInfoSet, Pointer<SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA> DeviceInterfaceData, Pointer<SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA_> DeviceInterfaceDetailData, int DeviceInterfaceDetailDataSize, Pointer<Uint32> RequiredSize, Pointer<SP_DEVINFO_DATA> DeviceInfoData) → int setupapi
The SetupDiGetDeviceInterfaceDetail function returns details about a device interface.
SetupDiGetDeviceRegistryProperty(int DeviceInfoSet, Pointer<SP_DEVINFO_DATA> DeviceInfoData, int Property, Pointer<Uint32> PropertyRegDataType, Pointer<Uint8> PropertyBuffer, int PropertyBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> RequiredSize) → int setupapi
The SetupDiGetDeviceRegistryProperty function retrieves a specified Plug and Play device property.
SetupDiOpenDevRegKey(int DeviceInfoSet, Pointer<SP_DEVINFO_DATA> DeviceInfoData, int Scope, int HwProfile, int KeyType, int samDesired) → int setupapi
The SetupDiOpenDevRegKey function opens a registry key for device-specific configuration information.
SetUserObjectInformation(int hObj, int nIndex, Pointer<NativeType> pvInfo, int nLength) → int user32
Sets information about the specified window station or desktop object.
SetViewportExtEx(int hdc, int x, int y, Pointer<SIZE> lpsz) → int gdi32
The SetViewportExtEx function sets the horizontal and vertical extents of the viewport for a device context by using the specified values.
SetViewportOrgEx(int hdc, int x, int y, Pointer<POINT> lppt) → int gdi32
The SetViewportOrgEx function specifies which device point maps to the window origin (0,0).
SetVolumeLabel(Pointer<Utf16> lpRootPathName, Pointer<Utf16> lpVolumeName) → int kernel32
Sets the label of a file system volume.
SetWindowDisplayAffinity(int hWnd, int dwAffinity) → int user32
Specifies where the content of the window can be displayed.
SetWindowExtEx(int hdc, int x, int y, Pointer<SIZE> lpsz) → int gdi32
The SetWindowExtEx function sets the horizontal and vertical extents of the window for a device context by using the specified values.
SetWindowLongPtr(int hWnd, int nIndex, int dwNewLong) → int user32
Changes an attribute of the specified window. The function also sets a value at the specified offset in the extra window memory.
SetWindowPlacement(int hWnd, Pointer<WINDOWPLACEMENT> lpwndpl) → int user32
Sets the show state and the restored, minimized, and maximized positions of the specified window.
SetWindowPos(int hWnd, int hWndInsertAfter, int X, int Y, int cx, int cy, int uFlags) → int user32
Changes the size, position, and Z order of a child, pop-up, or top-level window. These windows are ordered according to their appearance on the screen. The topmost window receives the highest rank and is the first window in the Z order.
SetWindowRgn(int hWnd, int hRgn, int bRedraw) → int user32
The SetWindowRgn function sets the window region of a window. The window region determines the area within the window where the system permits drawing. The system does not display any portion of a window that lies outside of the window region
SetWindowsHookEx(int idHook, Pointer<NativeFunction<HOOKPROC>> lpfn, int hmod, int dwThreadId) → int user32
Installs an application-defined hook procedure into a hook chain. You would install a hook procedure to monitor the system for certain types of events. These events are associated either with a specific thread or with all threads in the same desktop as the calling thread.
SetWindowSubclass(int hWnd, Pointer<NativeFunction<SUBCLASSPROC>> pfnSubclass, int uIdSubclass, int dwRefData) → int comctl32
Installs or updates a window subclass callback.
SetWindowText(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpString) → int user32
Changes the text of the specified window's title bar (if it has one). If the specified window is a control, the text of the control is changed. However, SetWindowText cannot change the text of a control in another application.
SetWindowTheme(int hwnd, Pointer<Utf16> pszSubAppName, Pointer<Utf16> pszSubIdList) → int uxtheme
Causes a window to use a different set of visual style information than its class normally uses.
SetWindowThemeAttribute(int hwnd, int eAttribute, Pointer<NativeType> pvAttribute, int cbAttribute) → int uxtheme
Sets attributes to control how visual styles are applied to a specified window.
SetWindowThemeNonClientAttributes(int hwnd, int dwMask, int dwAttributes) → int uxtheme
Sets attributes to control how visual styles are applied to a specified window.
SHCreateItemFromParsingName(Pointer<Utf16> pszPath, Pointer<COMObject> pbc, Pointer<GUID> riid, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppv) → int shell32
Creates and initializes a Shell item object from a parsing name.
SHCreateMemStream(Pointer<Uint8> pInit, int cbInit) → Pointer<COMObject> shell32
Creates a memory stream using a similar process to CreateStreamOnHGlobal.
Shell_NotifyIcon(int dwMessage, Pointer<NOTIFYICONDATA> lpData) → int shell32
Sends a message to the taskbar's status area.
ShellAbout(int hWnd, Pointer<Utf16> szApp, Pointer<Utf16> szOtherStuff, int hIcon) → int shell32
Displays a ShellAbout dialog box.
ShellExecute(int hwnd, Pointer<Utf16> lpOperation, Pointer<Utf16> lpFile, Pointer<Utf16> lpParameters, Pointer<Utf16> lpDirectory, int nShowCmd) → int shell32
Performs an operation on a specified file.
ShellExecuteEx(Pointer<SHELLEXECUTEINFO> pExecInfo) → int shell32
Performs an operation on a specified file.
SHEmptyRecycleBin(int hwnd, Pointer<Utf16> pszRootPath, int dwFlags) → int shell32
Empties the Recycle Bin on the specified drive.
SHFileOperation(Pointer<SHFILEOPSTRUCT> lpFileOp) → int shell32
Copies, moves, renames, or deletes a file system object.
SHFreeNameMappings(int hNameMappings) → void shell32
Frees a file name mapping object that was retrieved by the SHFileOperation function.
SHGetDesktopFolder(Pointer<Pointer<COMObject>> ppshf) → int shell32
Retrieves the IShellFolder interface for the desktop folder, which is the root of the Shell's namespace.
SHGetDiskFreeSpaceEx(Pointer<Utf16> pszDirectoryName, Pointer<Uint64> pulFreeBytesAvailableToCaller, Pointer<Uint64> pulTotalNumberOfBytes, Pointer<Uint64> pulTotalNumberOfFreeBytes) → int shell32
Retrieves disk space information for a disk volume.
SHGetDriveMedia(Pointer<Utf16> pszDrive, Pointer<Uint32> pdwMediaContent) → int shell32
Returns the type of media that is in the given drive.
SHGetFileInfo(Pointer<Utf16> pszPath, int dwFileAttributes, Pointer<SHFILEINFO> psfi, int cbFileInfo, int uFlags) → int shell32
Retrieves information about an object in the file system, such as a file, folder, directory, or drive root.
SHGetFolderPath(int hwnd, int csidl, int hToken, int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> pszPath) → int shell32
Gets the path of a folder identified by a CSIDL value.
SHGetKnownFolderPath(Pointer<GUID> rfid, int dwFlags, int hToken, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> ppszPath) → int shell32
Retrieves the full path of a known folder identified by the folder's KNOWNFOLDERID.
ShowCaret(int hWnd) → int user32
Makes the caret visible on the screen at the caret's current position. When the caret becomes visible, it begins flashing automatically.
ShowCursor(int bShow) → int user32
Displays or hides the cursor.
ShowOwnedPopups(int hWnd, int fShow) → int user32
Shows or hides all pop-up windows owned by the specified window.
ShowWindow(int hWnd, int nCmdShow) → int user32
Sets the specified window's show state.
ShowWindowAsync(int hWnd, int nCmdShow) → int user32
Sets the show state of a window without waiting for the operation to complete.
SHQueryRecycleBin(Pointer<Utf16> pszRootPath, Pointer<SHQUERYRBINFO> pSHQueryRBInfo) → int shell32
Retrieves the size of the Recycle Bin and the number of items in it, for a specified drive.
SizeofResource(int hModule, int hResInfo) → int kernel32
Retrieves the size, in bytes, of the specified resource.
SkipPointerFrameMessages(int pointerId) → int user32
Determines which pointer input frame generated the most recently retrieved message for the specified pointer and discards any queued (unretrieved) pointer input messages generated from the same pointer input frame. If an application has retrieved information for an entire frame using the GetPointerFrameInfo function, the GetPointerFrameInfoHistory function or one of their type-specific variants, it can use this function to avoid retrieving and discarding remaining messages from that frame one by one.
Sleep(int dwMilliseconds) → void kernel32
Suspends the execution of the current thread until the time-out interval elapses.
SleepEx(int dwMilliseconds, int bAlertable) → int kernel32
Suspends the current thread until the specified condition is met. Execution resumes when one of the following occurs: (i) an I/O completion callback function is called; (ii) an asynchronous procedure call (APC) is queued to the thread; (iii) the time-out interval elapses.
SoundSentry() → int user32
Triggers a visual signal to indicate that a sound is playing.
StartDocPrinter(int hPrinter, int Level, Pointer<DOC_INFO_1> pDocInfo) → int winspool
The StartDocPrinter function notifies the print spooler that a document is to be spooled for printing.
StartPagePrinter(int hPrinter) → int winspool
The StartPagePrinter function notifies the spooler that a page is about to be printed on the specified printer.
StartService(int hService, int dwNumServiceArgs, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> lpServiceArgVectors) → int advapi32
Starts a service.
StartServiceCtrlDispatcher(Pointer<SERVICE_TABLE_ENTRY> lpServiceStartTable) → int advapi32
Connects the main thread of a service process to the service control manager, which causes the thread to be the service control dispatcher thread for the calling process.
StretchBlt(int hdcDest, int xDest, int yDest, int wDest, int hDest, int hdcSrc, int xSrc, int ySrc, int wSrc, int hSrc, int rop) → int gdi32
The StretchBlt function copies a bitmap from a source rectangle into a destination rectangle, stretching or compressing the bitmap to fit the dimensions of the destination rectangle, if necessary. The system stretches or compresses the bitmap according to the stretching mode currently set in the destination device context.
StretchDIBits(int hdc, int xDest, int yDest, int DestWidth, int DestHeight, int xSrc, int ySrc, int SrcWidth, int SrcHeight, Pointer<NativeType> lpBits, Pointer<BITMAPINFO> lpbmi, int iUsage, int rop) → int gdi32
The StretchDIBits function copies the color data for a rectangle of pixels in a DIB, JPEG, or PNG image to the specified destination rectangle. If the destination rectangle is larger than the source rectangle, this function stretches the rows and columns of color data to fit the destination rectangle. If the destination rectangle is smaller than the source rectangle, this function compresses the rows and columns by using the specified raster operation.
StringFromCLSID(Pointer<GUID> rclsid, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> lplpsz) → int ole32
Converts a CLSID into a string of printable characters. Different CLSIDs always convert to different strings.
StringFromGUID2(Pointer<GUID> rguid, Pointer<Utf16> lpsz, int cchMax) → int ole32
Converts a globally unique identifier (GUID) into a string of printable characters.
StringFromIID(Pointer<GUID> rclsid, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> lplpsz) → int ole32
Converts an interface identifier into a string of printable characters.
StrokeAndFillPath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The StrokeAndFillPath function closes any open figures in a path, strokes the outline of the path by using the current pen, and fills its interior by using the current brush.
StrokePath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The StrokePath function renders the specified path by using the current pen.
SubtractRect(Pointer<RECT> lprcDst, Pointer<RECT> lprcSrc1, Pointer<RECT> lprcSrc2) → int user32
The SubtractRect function determines the coordinates of a rectangle formed by subtracting one rectangle from another.
SUCCEEDED(int result) → bool
Provides a generic test for success on any status value.
SwapMouseButton(int fSwap) → int user32
Reverses or restores the meaning of the left and right mouse buttons.
SwitchDesktop(int hDesktop) → int user32
Makes the specified desktop visible and activates it. This enables the desktop to receive input from the user. The calling process must have DESKTOP_SWITCHDESKTOP access to the desktop for the SwitchDesktop function to succeed.
SwitchToThisWindow(int hwnd, int fUnknown) → void user32
Switches focus to the specified window and brings it to the foreground.
SymCleanup(int hProcess) → int dbghelp
Deallocates all resources associated with the process handle.
SymEnumSymbols(int hProcess, int BaseOfDll, Pointer<Utf16> Mask, Pointer<NativeFunction<PSYM_ENUMERATESYMBOLS_CALLBACK>> EnumSymbolsCallback, Pointer<NativeType> UserContext) → int dbghelp
Enumerates all symbols in a process.
SymFromAddr(int hProcess, int Address, Pointer<Uint64> Displacement, Pointer<SYMBOL_INFO> Symbol) → int dbghelp
Retrieves symbol information for the specified address.
SymFromToken(int hProcess, int Base, int Token, Pointer<SYMBOL_INFO> Symbol) → int dbghelp
Retrieves symbol information for the specified managed code token.
SymGetExtendedOption(int option) → int dbghelp
Gets whether the specified extended symbol option on or off.
SymInitialize(int hProcess, Pointer<Utf16> UserSearchPath, int fInvadeProcess) → int dbghelp
Initializes the symbol handler for a process.
SymLoadModuleEx(int hProcess, int hFile, Pointer<Utf16> ImageName, Pointer<Utf16> ModuleName, int BaseOfDll, int DllSize, Pointer<MODLOAD_DATA> Data, int Flags) → int dbghelp
Loads the symbol table for the specified module.
SymSetExtendedOption(int option, int value) → int dbghelp
Turns the specified extended symbol option on or off.
SymSetOptions(int SymOptions) → int dbghelp
Sets the options mask.
SymSetParentWindow(int hwnd) → int dbghelp
Sets the window that the caller will use to display a user interface.
SymSetScopeFromAddr(int hProcess, int Address) → int dbghelp
Sets the local scope to the symbol that matches the specified address.
SymSetScopeFromIndex(int hProcess, int BaseOfDll, int Index) → int dbghelp
Sets the local scope to the symbol that matches the specified index.
SymSetScopeFromInlineContext(int hProcess, int Address, int InlineContext) → int dbghelp
Sets the local scope to the symbol that matches the specified address and inline context.
SymSetSearchPath(int hProcess, Pointer<Utf16> SearchPathA) → int dbghelp
Sets the search path for the specified process.
SymUnloadModule(int hProcess, int BaseOfDll) → int dbghelp
Unloads the symbol table.
SymUnloadModule64(int hProcess, int BaseOfDll) → int dbghelp
Unloads the symbol table.
SysAllocString(Pointer<Utf16> psz) → Pointer<Utf16> oleaut32
Allocates a new string and copies the passed string into it.
SysAllocStringByteLen(Pointer<Utf8> psz, int len) → Pointer<Utf16> oleaut32
Takes an ANSI string as input, and returns a BSTR that contains an ANSI string. Does not perform any ANSI-to-Unicode translation.
SysAllocStringLen(Pointer<Utf16> strIn, int ui) → Pointer<Utf16> oleaut32
Allocates a new string, copies the specified number of characters from the passed string, and appends a null-terminating character.
SysFreeString(Pointer<Utf16> bstrString) → void oleaut32
Deallocates a string allocated previously by SysAllocString, SysAllocStringByteLen, SysReAllocString, SysAllocStringLen, or SysReAllocStringLen.
SysReAllocString(Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> pbstr, Pointer<Utf16> psz) → int oleaut32
Reallocates a previously allocated string to be the size of a second string and copies the second string into the reallocated memory.
SysReAllocStringLen(Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> pbstr, Pointer<Utf16> psz, int len) → int oleaut32
Creates a new BSTR containing a specified number of characters from an old BSTR, and frees the old BSTR.
SysReleaseString(Pointer<Utf16> bstrString) → void oleaut32
Decreases the pinning reference count for the specified string by one. When that count reaches 0, the memory for that string is no longer prevented from being freed.
SysStringByteLen(Pointer<Utf16> bstr) → int oleaut32
Returns the length (in bytes) of a BSTR.
SysStringLen(Pointer<Utf16> pbstr) → int oleaut32
Returns the length of a BSTR.
SystemParametersInfo(int uiAction, int uiParam, Pointer<NativeType> pvParam, int fWinIni) → int user32
Retrieves or sets the value of one of the system-wide parameters. This function can also update the user profile while setting a parameter.
SystemParametersInfoForDpi(int uiAction, int uiParam, Pointer<NativeType> pvParam, int fWinIni, int dpi) → int user32
Retrieves the value of one of the system-wide parameters, taking into account the provided DPI value.
SystemTimeToFileTime(Pointer<SYSTEMTIME> lpSystemTime, Pointer<FILETIME> lpFileTime) → int kernel32
Converts a system time to file time format. System time is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
TabbedTextOut(int hdc, int x, int y, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int chCount, int nTabPositions, Pointer<Int32> lpnTabStopPositions, int nTabOrigin) → int user32
The TabbedTextOut function writes a character string at a specified location, expanding tabs to the values specified in an array of tab-stop positions. Text is written in the currently selected font, background color, and text color.
TaskDialog(int hwndOwner, int hInstance, Pointer<Utf16> pszWindowTitle, Pointer<Utf16> pszMainInstruction, Pointer<Utf16> pszContent, int dwCommonButtons, Pointer<Utf16> pszIcon, Pointer<Int32> pnButton) → int comctl32
The TaskDialog function creates, displays, and operates a task dialog. The task dialog contains application-defined message text and title, icons, and any combination of predefined push buttons. This function does not support the registration of a callback function to receive notifications.
TaskDialogIndirect(Pointer<TASKDIALOGCONFIG> pTaskConfig, Pointer<Int32> pnButton, Pointer<Int32> pnRadioButton, Pointer<Int32> pfVerificationFlagChecked) → int comctl32
The TaskDialogIndirect function creates, displays, and operates a task dialog. The task dialog contains application-defined icons, messages, title, verification check box, command links, push buttons, and radio buttons. This function can register a callback function to receive notification messages.
TerminateJobObject(int hJob, int uExitCode) → int kernel32
Terminates all processes currently associated with the job. If the job is nested, this function terminates all processes currently associated with the job and all of its child jobs in the hierarchy.
TerminateProcess(int hProcess, int uExitCode) → int kernel32
Terminates the specified process and all of its threads.
TerminateThread(int hThread, int dwExitCode) → int kernel32
Terminates a thread.
TEXT(String string) → LPWSTR
Converts a Dart string to a natively-allocated string.
TextOut(int hdc, int x, int y, Pointer<Utf16> lpString, int c) → int gdi32
The TextOut function writes a character string at the specified location, using the currently selected font, background color, and text color.
TileWindows(int hwndParent, int wHow, Pointer<RECT> lpRect, int cKids, Pointer<IntPtr> lpKids) → int user32
Tiles the specified child windows of the specified parent window.
ToAscii(int uVirtKey, int uScanCode, Pointer<Uint8> lpKeyState, Pointer<Uint16> lpChar, int uFlags) → int user32
Translates the specified virtual-key code and keyboard state to the corresponding character or characters. The function translates the code using the input language and physical keyboard layout identified by the keyboard layout handle.
ToAsciiEx(int uVirtKey, int uScanCode, Pointer<Uint8> lpKeyState, Pointer<Uint16> lpChar, int uFlags, int dwhkl) → int user32
Translates the specified virtual-key code and keyboard state to the corresponding character or characters. The function translates the code using the input language and physical keyboard layout identified by the input locale identifier.
ToUnicode(int wVirtKey, int wScanCode, Pointer<Uint8> lpKeyState, Pointer<Utf16> pwszBuff, int cchBuff, int wFlags) → int user32
Translates the specified virtual-key code and keyboard state to the corresponding Unicode character or characters.
ToUnicodeEx(int wVirtKey, int wScanCode, Pointer<Uint8> lpKeyState, Pointer<Utf16> pwszBuff, int cchBuff, int wFlags, int dwhkl) → int user32
Translates the specified virtual-key code and keyboard state to the corresponding Unicode character or characters.
TrackPopupMenu(int hMenu, int uFlags, int x, int y, int nReserved, int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> prcRect) → int user32
Displays a shortcut menu at the specified location and tracks the selection of items on the menu. The shortcut menu can appear anywhere on the screen.
TrackPopupMenuEx(int hMenu, int uFlags, int x, int y, int hwnd, Pointer<TPMPARAMS> lptpm) → int user32
Displays a shortcut menu at the specified location and tracks the selection of items on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu can appear anywhere on the screen.
TransactNamedPipe(int hNamedPipe, Pointer<NativeType> lpInBuffer, int nInBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> lpOutBuffer, int nOutBufferSize, Pointer<Uint32> lpBytesRead, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Combines the functions that write a message to and read a message from the specified named pipe into a single network operation.
TranslateAccelerator(int hWnd, int hAccTable, Pointer<MSG> lpMsg) → int user32
Processes accelerator keys for menu commands. The function translates a WM_KEYDOWN or WM_SYSKEYDOWN message to a WM_COMMAND or WM_SYSCOMMAND message (if there is an entry for the key in the specified accelerator table) and then sends the WM_COMMAND or WM_SYSCOMMAND message directly to the specified window procedure. TranslateAccelerator does not return until the window procedure has processed the message.
TranslateMDISysAccel(int hWndClient, Pointer<MSG> lpMsg) → int user32
Processes accelerator keystrokes for window menu commands of the multiple-document interface (MDI) child windows associated with the specified MDI client window. The function translates WM_KEYUP and WM_KEYDOWN messages to WM_SYSCOMMAND messages and sends them to the appropriate MDI child windows.
TranslateMessage(Pointer<MSG> lpMsg) → int user32
Translates virtual-key messages into character messages. The character messages are posted to the calling thread's message queue, to be read the next time the thread calls the GetMessage or PeekMessage function.
TransmitCommChar(int hFile, int cChar) → int kernel32
Transmits a specified character ahead of any pending data in the output buffer of the specified communications device.
UnDecorateSymbolName(Pointer<Utf16> name, Pointer<Utf16> outputString, int maxStringLength, int flags) → int dbghelp
Undecorates the specified decorated C++ symbol name.
UnhookWindowsHookEx(int hhk) → int user32
Removes a hook procedure installed in a hook chain by the SetWindowsHookEx function.
UnionRect(Pointer<RECT> lprcDst, Pointer<RECT> lprcSrc1, Pointer<RECT> lprcSrc2) → int user32
The UnionRect function creates the union of two rectangles. The union is the smallest rectangle that contains both source rectangles.
UnloadKeyboardLayout(int hkl) → int user32
Unloads an input locale identifier (formerly called a keyboard layout).
UnlockFile(int hFile, int dwFileOffsetLow, int dwFileOffsetHigh, int nNumberOfBytesToUnlockLow, int nNumberOfBytesToUnlockHigh) → int kernel32
Unlocks a region in an open file. Unlocking a region enables other processes to access the region.
UnlockFileEx(int hFile, int dwReserved, int nNumberOfBytesToUnlockLow, int nNumberOfBytesToUnlockHigh, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Unlocks a region in the specified file. This function can operate either synchronously or asynchronously.
UnregisterClass(Pointer<Utf16> lpClassName, int hInstance) → int user32
Unregisters a window class, freeing the memory required for the class.
UnregisterHotKey(int hWnd, int id) → int user32
Frees a hot key previously registered by the calling thread.
UnregisterPowerSettingNotification(int Handle) → int user32
Unregisters the power setting notification.
UnregisterTouchWindow(int hwnd) → int user32
Registers a window as no longer being touch-capable.
UpdateLayeredWindowIndirect(int hWnd, Pointer<UPDATELAYEREDWINDOWINFO> pULWInfo) → int user32
Updates the position, size, shape, content, and translucency of a layered window.
UpdateProcThreadAttribute(Pointer<NativeType> lpAttributeList, int dwFlags, int Attribute, Pointer<NativeType> lpValue, int cbSize, Pointer<NativeType> lpPreviousValue, Pointer<IntPtr> lpReturnSize) → int kernel32
Updates the specified attribute in a list of attributes for process and thread creation.
UpdateResource(int hUpdate, Pointer<Utf16> lpType, Pointer<Utf16> lpName, int wLanguage, Pointer<NativeType> lpData, int cb) → int kernel32
Adds, deletes, or replaces a resource in a portable executable (PE) file.
UpdateWindow(int hWnd) → int user32
The UpdateWindow function updates the client area of the specified window by sending a WM_PAINT message to the window if the window's update region is not empty. The function sends a WM_PAINT message directly to the window procedure of the specified window, bypassing the application queue. If the update region is empty, no message is sent.
UserHandleGrantAccess(int hUserHandle, int hJob, int bGrant) → int user32
Grants or denies access to a handle to a User object to a job that has a user-interface restriction. When access is granted, all processes associated with the job can subsequently recognize and use the handle. When access is denied, the processes can no longer use the handle.
ValidateRect(int hWnd, Pointer<RECT> lpRect) → int user32
The ValidateRect function validates the client area within a rectangle by removing the rectangle from the update region of the specified window.
ValidateRgn(int hWnd, int hRgn) → int user32
The ValidateRgn function validates the client area within a region by removing the region from the current update region of the specified window.
VarBstrCat(Pointer<Utf16> bstrLeft, Pointer<Utf16> bstrRight, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> pbstrResult) → int oleaut32
Converts a variant from one type to another.
VarBstrCmp(Pointer<Utf16> bstrLeft, Pointer<Utf16> bstrRight, int lcid, int dwFlags) → int oleaut32
Compares two variants of type BSTR.
VariantChangeType(Pointer<VARIANT> pvargDest, Pointer<VARIANT> pvarSrc, int wFlags, int vt) → int oleaut32
Converts a variant from one type to another.
VariantClear(Pointer<VARIANT> pvarg) → int oleaut32
Clears a variant.
VariantCopy(Pointer<VARIANT> pvargDest, Pointer<VARIANT> pvargSrc) → int oleaut32
Frees the destination variant and makes a copy of the source variant.
VariantInit(Pointer<VARIANT> pvarg) → void oleaut32
Initializes a variant.
VariantTimeToDosDateTime(double vtime, Pointer<Uint16> pwDosDate, Pointer<Uint16> pwDosTime) → int oleaut32
Converts the variant representation of a date and time to MS-DOS date and time values.
VariantTimeToSystemTime(double vtime, Pointer<SYSTEMTIME> lpSystemTime) → int oleaut32
Converts the variant representation of time to system time values.
VerFindFile(int uFlags, Pointer<Utf16> szFileName, Pointer<Utf16> szWinDir, Pointer<Utf16> szAppDir, Pointer<Utf16> szCurDir, Pointer<Uint32> puCurDirLen, Pointer<Utf16> szDestDir, Pointer<Uint32> puDestDirLen) → int version
Determines where to install a file based on whether it locates another version of the file in the system. The values VerFindFile returns in the specified buffers are used in a subsequent call to the VerInstallFile function.
VerifyVersionInfo(Pointer<OSVERSIONINFOEX> lpVersionInformation, int dwTypeMask, int dwlConditionMask) → int kernel32
Compares a set of operating system version requirements to the corresponding values for the currently running version of the system. This function is subject to manifest-based behavior.
VerInstallFile(int uFlags, Pointer<Utf16> szSrcFileName, Pointer<Utf16> szDestFileName, Pointer<Utf16> szSrcDir, Pointer<Utf16> szDestDir, Pointer<Utf16> szCurDir, Pointer<Utf16> szTmpFile, Pointer<Uint32> puTmpFileLen) → int version
Installs the specified file based on information returned from the VerFindFile function. VerInstallFile decompresses the file, if necessary, assigns a unique filename, and checks for errors, such as outdated files.
VerLanguageName(int wLang, Pointer<Utf16> szLang, int cchLang) → int kernel32
Retrieves a description string for the language associated with a specified binary Microsoft language identifier.
VerQueryValue(Pointer<NativeType> pBlock, Pointer<Utf16> lpSubBlock, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> lplpBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> puLen) → int version
Retrieves specified version information from the specified version-information resource. To retrieve the appropriate resource, before you call VerQueryValue, you must first call the GetFileVersionInfoSize function, and then the GetFileVersionInfo function.
VerSetConditionMask(int ConditionMask, int TypeMask, int Condition) → int kernel32
Sets the bits of a 64-bit value to indicate the comparison operator to use for a specified operating system version attribute. This function is used to build the dwlConditionMask parameter of the VerifyVersionInfo function.
VirtualAlloc(Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, int dwSize, int flAllocationType, int flProtect) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Reserves, commits, or changes the state of a region of pages in the virtual address space of the calling process. Memory allocated by this function is automatically initialized to zero.
VirtualAllocEx(int hProcess, Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, int dwSize, int flAllocationType, int flProtect) → Pointer<NativeType> kernel32
Reserves, commits, or changes the state of a region of memory within the virtual address space of a specified process. The function initializes the memory it allocates to zero.
VirtualFree(Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, int dwSize, int dwFreeType) → int kernel32
Releases, decommits, or releases and decommits a region of pages within the virtual address space of the calling process.
VirtualFreeEx(int hProcess, Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, int dwSize, int dwFreeType) → int kernel32
Releases, decommits, or releases and decommits a region of memory within the virtual address space of a specified process.
VirtualLock(Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, int dwSize) → int kernel32
Locks the specified region of the process's virtual address space into physical memory, ensuring that subsequent access to the region will not incur a page fault.
VirtualQuery(Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, Pointer<MEMORY_BASIC_INFORMATION> lpBuffer, int dwLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about a range of pages in the virtual address space of the calling process.
VirtualQueryEx(int hProcess, Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, Pointer<MEMORY_BASIC_INFORMATION> lpBuffer, int dwLength) → int kernel32
Retrieves information about a range of pages within the virtual address space of a specified process.
VirtualUnlock(Pointer<NativeType> lpAddress, int dwSize) → int kernel32
Unlocks a specified range of pages in the virtual address space of a process, enabling the system to swap the pages out to the paging file if necessary.
VkKeyScan(int ch) → int user32
Translates a character to the corresponding virtual-key code and shift state for the current keyboard.
VkKeyScanEx(int ch, int dwhkl) → int user32
Translates a character to the corresponding virtual-key code and shift state. The function translates the character using the input language and physical keyboard layout identified by the input locale identifier.
WaitCommEvent(int hFile, Pointer<Uint32> lpEvtMask, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Waits for an event to occur for a specified communications device. The set of events that are monitored by this function is contained in the event mask associated with the device handle.
WaitForInputIdle(int hProcess, int dwMilliseconds) → int user32
Waits until the specified process has finished processing its initial input and is waiting for user input with no input pending, or until the time-out interval has elapsed.
WaitForSingleObject(int hHandle, int dwMilliseconds) → int kernel32
Waits until the specified object is in the signaled state or the time-out interval elapses.
WaitMessage() → int user32
Yields control to other threads when a thread has no other messages in its message queue. The WaitMessage function suspends the thread and does not return until a new message is placed in the thread's message queue.
waveInAddBuffer(int hwi, Pointer<WAVEHDR> pwh, int cbwh) → int winmm
The waveInAddBuffer function sends an input buffer to the given waveform-audio input device. When the buffer is filled, the application is notified.
waveInClose(int hwi) → int winmm
The waveInClose function closes the given waveform-audio input device.
waveInGetDevCaps(int uDeviceID, Pointer<WAVEINCAPS> pwic, int cbwic) → int winmm
The waveInGetDevCaps function retrieves the capabilities of a given waveform-audio input device.
waveInGetErrorText(int mmrError, Pointer<Utf16> pszText, int cchText) → int winmm
The waveInGetErrorText function retrieves a textual description of the error identified by the given error number.
waveInGetID(int hwi, Pointer<Uint32> puDeviceID) → int winmm
The waveInGetID function gets the device identifier for the given waveform-audio input device.
waveInGetNumDevs() → int winmm
The waveInGetNumDevs function returns the number of waveform-audio input devices present in the system.
waveInGetPosition(int hwi, Pointer<MMTIME> pmmt, int cbmmt) → int winmm
The waveInGetPosition function retrieves the current input position of the given waveform-audio input device.
waveInMessage(int hwi, int uMsg, int dw1, int dw2) → int winmm
The waveInMessage function sends messages to the waveform-audio input device drivers.
waveInOpen(Pointer<IntPtr> phwi, int uDeviceID, Pointer<WAVEFORMATEX> pwfx, int dwCallback, int dwInstance, int fdwOpen) → int winmm
The waveInOpen function opens the given waveform-audio input device for recording.
waveInPrepareHeader(int hwi, Pointer<WAVEHDR> pwh, int cbwh) → int winmm
The waveInPrepareHeader function prepares a buffer for waveform-audio input.
waveInReset(int hwi) → int winmm
The waveInReset function stops input on the given waveform-audio input device and resets the current position to zero.
waveInStart(int hwi) → int winmm
The waveInStart function starts input on the given waveform-audio input device.
waveInStop(int hwi) → int winmm
The waveInStop function stops waveform-audio input.
waveInUnprepareHeader(int hwi, Pointer<WAVEHDR> pwh, int cbwh) → int winmm
The waveInUnprepareHeader function cleans up the preparation performed by the waveInPrepareHeader function. This function must be called after the device driver fills a buffer and returns it to the application. You must call this function before freeing the buffer.
waveOutClose(int hwo) → int winmm
The waveOutClose function closes the given waveform-audio output device.
waveOutGetDevCaps(int uDeviceID, Pointer<WAVEOUTCAPS> pwoc, int cbwoc) → int winmm
The waveOutGetDevCaps function retrieves the capabilities of a given waveform-audio output device.
waveOutGetErrorText(int mmrError, Pointer<Utf16> pszText, int cchText) → int winmm
The waveOutGetErrorText function retrieves a textual description of the error identified by the given error number.
waveOutGetID(int hwo, Pointer<Uint32> puDeviceID) → int winmm
The waveOutGetID function retrieves the device identifier for the given waveform-audio output device.
waveOutGetNumDevs() → int winmm
The waveOutGetNumDevs function retrieves the number of waveform-audio output devices present in the system.
waveOutGetPitch(int hwo, Pointer<Uint32> pdwPitch) → int winmm
The waveOutGetPitch function retrieves the current pitch setting for the specified waveform-audio output device.
waveOutGetPlaybackRate(int hwo, Pointer<Uint32> pdwRate) → int winmm
The waveOutGetPlaybackRate function retrieves the current playback rate for the specified waveform-audio output device.
waveOutGetPosition(int hwo, Pointer<MMTIME> pmmt, int cbmmt) → int winmm
The waveOutGetPosition function retrieves the current playback position of the given waveform-audio output device.
waveOutGetVolume(int hwo, Pointer<Uint32> pdwVolume) → int winmm
The waveOutGetVolume function retrieves the current volume level of the specified waveform-audio output device.
waveOutMessage(int hwo, int uMsg, int dw1, int dw2) → int winmm
The waveOutMessage function sends messages to the waveform-audio output device drivers.
waveOutOpen(Pointer<IntPtr> phwo, int uDeviceID, Pointer<WAVEFORMATEX> pwfx, int dwCallback, int dwInstance, int fdwOpen) → int winmm
The waveOutOpen function opens the given waveform-audio output device for playback.
waveOutPause(int hwo) → int winmm
The waveOutPause function pauses playback on the given waveform-audio output device. The current position is saved. Use the waveOutRestart function to resume playback from the current position.
waveOutPrepareHeader(int hwo, Pointer<WAVEHDR> pwh, int cbwh) → int winmm
The waveOutPrepareHeader function prepares a waveform-audio data block for playback.
waveOutReset(int hwo) → int winmm
The waveOutReset function stops playback on the given waveform-audio output device and resets the current position to zero. All pending playback buffers are marked as done (WHDR_DONE) and returned to the application.
waveOutRestart(int hwo) → int winmm
The waveOutRestart function resumes playback on a paused waveform-audio output device.
waveOutSetPitch(int hwo, int dwPitch) → int winmm
The waveOutSetPitch function sets the pitch for the specified waveform-audio output device.
waveOutSetPlaybackRate(int hwo, int dwRate) → int winmm
The waveOutSetPlaybackRate function sets the playback rate for the specified waveform-audio output device.
waveOutSetVolume(int hwo, int dwVolume) → int winmm
The waveOutSetVolume function sets the volume level of the specified waveform-audio output device.
waveOutUnprepareHeader(int hwo, Pointer<WAVEHDR> pwh, int cbwh) → int winmm
The waveOutUnprepareHeader function cleans up the preparation performed by the waveOutPrepareHeader function. This function must be called after the device driver is finished with a data block. You must call this function before freeing the buffer.
waveOutWrite(int hwo, Pointer<WAVEHDR> pwh, int cbwh) → int winmm
The waveOutWrite function sends a data block to the given waveform-audio output device.
WideCharToMultiByte(int CodePage, int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> lpWideCharStr, int cchWideChar, Pointer<Utf8> lpMultiByteStr, int cbMultiByte, Pointer<Utf8> lpDefaultChar, Pointer<Int32> lpUsedDefaultChar) → int kernel32
Maps a UTF-16 (wide character) string to a new character string. The new character string is not necessarily from a multibyte character set.
WidenPath(int hdc) → int gdi32
The WidenPath function redefines the current path as the area that would be painted if the path were stroked using the pen currently selected into the given device context.
WindowFromDC(int hDC) → int user32
The WindowFromDC function returns a handle to the window associated with the specified display device context (DC). Output functions that use the specified device context draw into this window.
WindowFromPhysicalPoint(POINT Point) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the window that contains the specified physical point.
WindowFromPoint(POINT Point) → int user32
Retrieves a handle to the window that contains the specified point.
WindowsCompareStringOrdinal(int string1, int string2, Pointer<Int32> result) → int winrt
Compares two specified HSTRING objects and returns an integer that indicates their relative position in a sort order.
WindowsConcatString(int string1, int string2, Pointer<IntPtr> newString) → int winrt
Concatenates two specified strings.
WindowsCreateString(Pointer<Utf16> sourceString, int length, Pointer<IntPtr> string) → int winrt
Creates a new HSTRING based on the specified source string.
WindowsDeleteString(int string) → int winrt
Decrements the reference count of a string buffer.
WindowsDeleteStringBuffer(int bufferHandle) → int winrt
Discards a preallocated string buffer if it was not promoted to an HSTRING.
WindowsDuplicateString(int string, Pointer<IntPtr> newString) → int winrt
Creates a copy of the specified string.
WindowsGetStringLen(int string) → int winrt
Gets the length, in Unicode characters, of the specified string.
WindowsGetStringRawBuffer(int string, Pointer<Uint32> length) → Pointer<Utf16> winrt
Retrieves the backing buffer for the specified string.
WindowsIsStringEmpty(int string) → int winrt
Indicates whether the specified string is the empty string.
WindowsPreallocateStringBuffer(int length, Pointer<Pointer<Uint16>> charBuffer, Pointer<IntPtr> bufferHandle) → int winrt
Allocates a mutable character buffer for use in HSTRING creation.
WindowsPromoteStringBuffer(int bufferHandle, Pointer<IntPtr> string) → int winrt
Creates an HSTRING from the specified HSTRING_BUFFER.
WindowsReplaceString(int string, int stringReplaced, int stringReplaceWith, Pointer<IntPtr> newString) → int winrt
Replaces all occurrences of a set of characters in the specified string with another set of characters to create a new string.
WindowsStringHasEmbeddedNull(int string, Pointer<Int32> hasEmbedNull) → int winrt
Indicates whether the specified string has embedded null characters.
WindowsSubstring(int string, int startIndex, Pointer<IntPtr> newString) → int winrt
Retrieves a substring from the specified string. The substring starts at the specified character position.
WindowsSubstringWithSpecifiedLength(int string, int startIndex, int length, Pointer<IntPtr> newString) → int winrt
Retrieves a substring from the specified string. The substring starts at a specified character position and has a specified length.
WindowsTrimStringEnd(int string, int trimString, Pointer<IntPtr> newString) → int winrt
Removes all trailing occurrences of a specified set of characters from the source string.
WindowsTrimStringStart(int string, int trimString, Pointer<IntPtr> newString) → int winrt
Removes all leading occurrences of a specified set of characters from the source string.
WlanAllocateMemory(int dwMemorySize) → Pointer<NativeType> wlanapi
The WlanAllocateMemory function allocates memory. Any memory passed to other Native Wifi functions must be allocated with this function.
WlanCloseHandle(int hClientHandle, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanCloseHandle function closes a connection to the server.
WlanConnect(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<WLAN_CONNECTION_PARAMETERS> pConnectionParameters, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanConnect function attempts to connect to a specific network.
WlanDeleteProfile(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanDeleteProfile function deletes a wireless profile for a wireless interface on the local computer.
WlanDeviceServiceCommand(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<GUID> pDeviceServiceGuid, int dwOpCode, int dwInBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> pInBuffer, int dwOutBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> pOutBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> pdwBytesReturned) → int wlanapi
Allows an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) or independent hardware vendor (IHV) component to communicate with a device service on a particular wireless LAN interface.
WlanDisconnect(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanDisconnect function disconnects an interface from its current network.
WlanEnumInterfaces(int hClientHandle, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_INTERFACE_INFO_LIST>> ppInterfaceList) → int wlanapi
The WlanEnumInterfaces function enumerates all of the wireless LAN interfaces currently enabled on the local computer.
WlanExtractPsdIEDataList(int hClientHandle, int dwIeDataSize, Pointer<Uint8> pRawIeData, Pointer<Utf16> strFormat, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_RAW_DATA_LIST>> ppPsdIEDataList) → int wlanapi
The WlanExtractPsdIEDataList function extracts the proximity service discovery (PSD) information element (IE) data list from raw IE data included in a beacon.
WlanFreeMemory(Pointer<NativeType> pMemory) → void wlanapi
The WlanFreeMemory function frees memory. Any memory returned from Native Wifi functions must be freed.
WlanGetAvailableNetworkList(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, int dwFlags, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_AVAILABLE_NETWORK_LIST>> ppAvailableNetworkList) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetAvailableNetworkList function retrieves the list of available networks on a wireless LAN interface.
WlanGetFilterList(int hClientHandle, int wlanFilterListType, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<DOT11_NETWORK_LIST>> ppNetworkList) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetFilterList function retrieves a group policy or user permission list.
WlanGetInterfaceCapability(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_INTERFACE_CAPABILITY>> ppCapability) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetInterfaceCapability function retrieves the capabilities of an interface.
WlanGetNetworkBssList(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<DOT11_SSID> pDot11Ssid, int dot11BssType, int bSecurityEnabled, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_BSS_LIST>> ppWlanBssList) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetNetworkBssList function retrieves a list of the basic service set (BSS) entries of the wireless network or networks on a given wireless LAN interface.
WlanGetProfile(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> pstrProfileXml, Pointer<Uint32> pdwFlags, Pointer<Uint32> pdwGrantedAccess) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetProfile function retrieves all information about a specified wireless profile.
WlanGetProfileCustomUserData(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Uint32> pdwDataSize, Pointer<Pointer<Uint8>> ppData) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetProfileCustomUserData function gets the custom user data associated with a wireless profile.
WlanGetProfileList(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_PROFILE_INFO_LIST>> ppProfileList) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetProfileList function retrieves the list of profiles in preference order.
WlanGetSecuritySettings(int hClientHandle, int SecurableObject, Pointer<Int32> pValueType, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> pstrCurrentSDDL, Pointer<Uint32> pdwGrantedAccess) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetSecuritySettings function gets the security settings associated with a configurable object.
WlanGetSupportedDeviceServices(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_DEVICE_SERVICE_GUID_LIST>> ppDevSvcGuidList) → int wlanapi
Retrieves a list of the supported device services on a given wireless LAN interface.
WlanHostedNetworkForceStart(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkForceStart function transitions the wireless Hosted Network to the wlan_hosted_network_active state without associating the request with the application's calling handle.
WlanHostedNetworkForceStop(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkForceStop function transitions the wireless Hosted Network to the wlan_hosted_network_idle without associating the request with the application's calling handle.
WlanHostedNetworkInitSettings(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkInitSettings function configures and persists to storage the network connection settings (SSID and maximum number of peers, for example) on the wireless Hosted Network if these settings are not already configured.
WlanHostedNetworkQueryProperty(int hClientHandle, int OpCode, Pointer<Uint32> pdwDataSize, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppvData, Pointer<Int32> pWlanOpcodeValueType, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkQueryProperty function queries the current static properties of the wireless Hosted Network.
WlanHostedNetworkQuerySecondaryKey(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Uint32> pdwKeyLength, Pointer<Pointer<Uint8>> ppucKeyData, Pointer<Int32> pbIsPassPhrase, Pointer<Int32> pbPersistent, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkQuerySecondaryKey function queries the secondary security key that is configured to be used by the wireless Hosted Network.
WlanHostedNetworkQueryStatus(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Pointer<WLAN_HOSTED_NETWORK_STATUS>> ppWlanHostedNetworkStatus, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkQueryStatus function queries the current status of the wireless Hosted Network.
WlanHostedNetworkRefreshSecuritySettings(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkRefreshSecuritySettings function refreshes the configurable and auto-generated parts of the wireless Hosted Network security settings.
WlanHostedNetworkSetProperty(int hClientHandle, int OpCode, int dwDataSize, Pointer<NativeType> pvData, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkSetProperty function sets static properties of the wireless Hosted Network.
WlanHostedNetworkSetSecondaryKey(int hClientHandle, int dwKeyLength, Pointer<Uint8> pucKeyData, int bIsPassPhrase, int bPersistent, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkSetSecondaryKey function configures the secondary security key that will be used by the wireless Hosted Network.
WlanHostedNetworkStartUsing(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkStartUsing function starts the wireless Hosted Network.
WlanHostedNetworkStopUsing(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Int32> pFailReason, Pointer<NativeType> pvReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanHostedNetworkStopUsing function stops the wireless Hosted Network.
WlanIhvControl(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, int Type, int dwInBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> pInBuffer, int dwOutBufferSize, Pointer<NativeType> pOutBuffer, Pointer<Uint32> pdwBytesReturned) → int wlanapi
The WlanIhvControl function provides a mechanism for independent hardware vendor (IHV) control of WLAN drivers or services.
WlanOpenHandle(int dwClientVersion, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Uint32> pdwNegotiatedVersion, Pointer<IntPtr> phClientHandle) → int wlanapi
The WlanOpenHandle function opens a connection to the server.
WlanQueryAutoConfigParameter(int hClientHandle, int OpCode, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Uint32> pdwDataSize, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppData, Pointer<Int32> pWlanOpcodeValueType) → int wlanapi
The WlanQueryAutoConfigParameter function queries for the parameters of the auto configuration service.
WlanQueryInterface(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, int OpCode, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Uint32> pdwDataSize, Pointer<Pointer<NativeType>> ppData, Pointer<Int32> pWlanOpcodeValueType) → int wlanapi
The WlanQueryInterface function queries various parameters of a specified interface.
WlanReasonCodeToString(int dwReasonCode, int dwBufferSize, Pointer<Utf16> pStringBuffer, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanReasonCodeToString function retrieves a string that describes a specified reason code.
WlanRegisterDeviceServiceNotification(int hClientHandle, Pointer<WLAN_DEVICE_SERVICE_GUID_LIST> pDevSvcGuidList) → int wlanapi
Allows user mode clients with admin privileges, or User-Mode Driver Framework (UMDF) drivers, to register for unsolicited notifications corresponding to device services that they're interested in.
WlanRegisterNotification(int hClientHandle, int dwNotifSource, int bIgnoreDuplicate, Pointer<NativeFunction<WLAN_NOTIFICATION_CALLBACK>> funcCallback, Pointer<NativeType> pCallbackContext, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Uint32> pdwPrevNotifSource) → int wlanapi
The WlanRegisterNotification function is used to register and unregister notifications on all wireless interfaces.
WlanRegisterVirtualStationNotification(int hClientHandle, int bRegister, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanRegisterVirtualStationNotification function is used to register and unregister notifications on a virtual station.
WlanRenameProfile(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strOldProfileName, Pointer<Utf16> strNewProfileName, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanRenameProfile function renames the specified profile.
WlanSaveTemporaryProfile(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, Pointer<Utf16> strAllUserProfileSecurity, int dwFlags, int bOverWrite, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSaveTemporaryProfile function saves a temporary profile to the profile store.
WlanScan(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<DOT11_SSID> pDot11Ssid, Pointer<WLAN_RAW_DATA> pIeData, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanScan function requests a scan for available networks on the indicated interface.
WlanSetAutoConfigParameter(int hClientHandle, int OpCode, int dwDataSize, Pointer<NativeType> pData, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetAutoConfigParameter function sets parameters for the automatic configuration service.
WlanSetFilterList(int hClientHandle, int wlanFilterListType, Pointer<DOT11_NETWORK_LIST> pNetworkList, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetFilterList function sets the permit/deny list.
WlanSetInterface(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, int OpCode, int dwDataSize, Pointer<NativeType> pData, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetInterface function sets user-configurable parameters for a specified interface.
WlanSetProfile(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileXml, Pointer<Utf16> strAllUserProfileSecurity, int bOverwrite, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved, Pointer<Uint32> pdwReasonCode) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetProfile function sets the content of a specific profile.
WlanSetProfileCustomUserData(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, int dwDataSize, Pointer<Uint8> pData, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetProfileCustomUserData function sets the custom user data associated with a profile.
WlanSetProfileEapUserData(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, EAP_METHOD_TYPE eapType, int dwFlags, int dwEapUserDataSize, Pointer<Uint8> pbEapUserData, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetProfileEapUserData function sets the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) user credentials as specified by raw EAP data. The user credentials apply to a profile on an interface.
WlanSetProfileEapXmlUserData(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, int dwFlags, Pointer<Utf16> strEapXmlUserData, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetProfileEapXmlUserData function sets the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) user credentials as specified by an XML string. The user credentials apply to a profile on an adapter. These credentials can be used only by the caller.
WlanSetProfileList(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, int dwItems, Pointer<Pointer<Utf16>> strProfileNames, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetProfileList function sets the preference order of profiles for a given interface.
WlanSetProfilePosition(int hClientHandle, Pointer<GUID> pInterfaceGuid, Pointer<Utf16> strProfileName, int dwPosition, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetProfilePosition function sets the position of a single, specified profile in the preference list.
WlanSetPsdIEDataList(int hClientHandle, Pointer<Utf16> strFormat, Pointer<WLAN_RAW_DATA_LIST> pPsdIEDataList, Pointer<NativeType> pReserved) → int wlanapi
The WlanSetPsdIeDataList function sets the proximity service discovery (PSD) information element (IE) data list.
WlanSetSecuritySettings(int hClientHandle, int SecurableObject, Pointer<Utf16> strModifiedSDDL) → int wlanapi
The WlanGetProfileList function sets the security settings for a configurable object.
Wow64SuspendThread(int hThread) → int kernel32
Suspends the specified WOW64 thread.
WriteConsole(int hConsoleOutput, Pointer<NativeType> lpBuffer, int nNumberOfCharsToWrite, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfCharsWritten, Pointer<NativeType> lpReserved) → int kernel32
Writes a character string to a console screen buffer beginning at the current cursor location.
WriteFile(int hFile, Pointer<Uint8> lpBuffer, int nNumberOfBytesToWrite, Pointer<Uint32> lpNumberOfBytesWritten, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Writes data to the specified file or input/output (I/O) device.
WriteFileEx(int hFile, Pointer<Uint8> lpBuffer, int nNumberOfBytesToWrite, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped, Pointer<NativeFunction<LPOVERLAPPED_COMPLETION_ROUTINE>> lpCompletionRoutine) → int kernel32
Writes data to the specified file or input/output (I/O) device. It reports its completion status asynchronously, calling the specified completion routine when writing is completed or canceled and the calling thread is in an alertable wait state.
WriteFileGather(int hFile, Pointer<FILE_SEGMENT_ELEMENT> aSegmentArray, int nNumberOfBytesToWrite, Pointer<Uint32> lpReserved, Pointer<OVERLAPPED> lpOverlapped) → int kernel32
Retrieves data from an array of buffers and writes the data to a file. The function starts writing data to the file at a position that is specified by an OVERLAPPED structure. The WriteFileGather function operates asynchronously.
WritePrinter(int hPrinter, Pointer<NativeType> pBuf, int cbBuf, Pointer<Uint32> pcWritten) → int winspool
The WritePrinter function notifies the print spooler that data should be written to the specified printer.
WriteProcessMemory(int hProcess, Pointer<NativeType> lpBaseAddress, Pointer<NativeType> lpBuffer, int nSize, Pointer<IntPtr> lpNumberOfBytesWritten) → int kernel32
Writes data to an area of memory in a specified process. The entire area to be written to must be accessible or the operation fails.
wsalloc(int wChars) → LPWSTR
Allocates memory for a Unicode string and returns a pointer.
WslConfigureDistribution(Pointer<Utf16> distributionName, int defaultUID, int wslDistributionFlags) → int wslapi
Modifies the behavior of a distribution registered with the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL).
WslGetDistributionConfiguration(Pointer<Utf16> distributionName, Pointer<Uint32> distributionVersion, Pointer<Uint32> defaultUID, Pointer<Int32> wslDistributionFlags, Pointer<Pointer<Pointer<Utf8>>> defaultEnvironmentVariables, Pointer<Uint32> defaultEnvironmentVariableCount) → int wslapi
Retrieves the current configuration of a distribution registered with the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL).
WslIsDistributionRegistered(Pointer<Utf16> distributionName) → int wslapi
Determines if a distribution is registered with the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL).
WslLaunch(Pointer<Utf16> distributionName, Pointer<Utf16> command, int useCurrentWorkingDirectory, int stdIn, int stdOut, int stdErr, Pointer<IntPtr> process) → int wslapi
Launches a Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL) process in the context of a particular distribution.
WslLaunchInteractive(Pointer<Utf16> distributionName, Pointer<Utf16> command, int useCurrentWorkingDirectory, Pointer<Uint32> exitCode) → int wslapi
Launches an interactive Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL) process in the context of a particular distribution.This differs from WslLaunch in that the end user will be able to interact with the newly-created process.
WslRegisterDistribution(Pointer<Utf16> distributionName, Pointer<Utf16> tarGzFilename) → int wslapi
Registers a new distribution with the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL).
WslUnregisterDistribution(Pointer<Utf16> distributionName) → int wslapi
Unregisters a distribution from the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL).
XInputEnable(int enable) → void xinput
Sets the reporting state of XInput.
XInputGetAudioDeviceIds(int dwUserIndex, Pointer<Utf16> pRenderDeviceId, Pointer<Uint32> pRenderCount, Pointer<Utf16> pCaptureDeviceId, Pointer<Uint32> pCaptureCount) → int xinput
Retrieves the sound rendering and sound capture audio device IDs that are associated with the headset connected to the specified controller.
XInputGetBatteryInformation(int dwUserIndex, int devType, Pointer<XINPUT_BATTERY_INFORMATION> pBatteryInformation) → int xinput
Retrieves the battery type and charge status of a wireless controller.
XInputGetCapabilities(int dwUserIndex, int dwFlags, Pointer<XINPUT_CAPABILITIES> pCapabilities) → int xinput
Retrieves the capabilities and features of a connected controller.
XInputGetKeystroke(int dwUserIndex, int dwReserved, Pointer<XINPUT_KEYSTROKE> pKeystroke) → int xinput
Retrieves a gamepad input event.
XInputGetState(int dwUserIndex, Pointer<XINPUT_STATE> pState) → int xinput
Retrieves the current state of the specified controller.
XInputSetState(int dwUserIndex, Pointer<XINPUT_VIBRATION> pVibration) → int xinput
Sends data to a connected controller. This function is used to activate the vibration function of a controller.
ZeroMemory(Pointer<NativeType> destination, int length) → void kernel32
Fills a block of memory with zeros.

Typedefs

ATOM = WORD
BOOL = Uint32
BOOLEAN = BYTE
BYTE = Uint8
CallWndProc = HOOKPROC
CCHookProc = LPCCHOOKPROC
CFHookProc = LPCFHOOKPROC
CHAR = Uint8
COLORREF = DWORD
DlgProc = DLGPROC
DLGPROC = INT_PTR Function(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM)
Application-defined callback function used with the CreateDialog and DialogBox families of functions. It processes messages sent to a modal or modeless dialog box.
DOUBLE = Double
DRAWSTATEPROC = Int32 Function(IntPtr hdc, IntPtr lData, IntPtr wData, Int32 cx, Int32 cy)
Application-defined callback function that renders a complex image for the DrawState function.
DrawStateProc = DRAWSTATEPROC
DrawTextCallback = DTT_CALLBACK_PROC
DTT_CALLBACK_PROC = Int32 Function(HDC hdc, LPWSTR pszText, Int32 cchText, Pointer<RECT> prc, UINT dwFlags, LPARAM lparam)
Application-defined callback function used with the DrawThemeTextEx function. This function is used instead of DrawText.
DWORD = Uint32
DWORD32 = Uint32
DWORD64 = Uint64
DWORD_PTR = ULONG_PTR
DWORDLONG = Uint64
EnumFontFamExProc = FONTENUMPROC
EnumPageFilesProc = PENUM_PAGE_FILE_CALLBACK
EnumResNameProc = ENUMRESNAMEPROC
ENUMRESNAMEPROC = BOOL Function(HMODULE hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpType, Pointer<Utf16> lpName, LONG_PTR lParam)
Application-defined callback function used with the EnumResourceNames and EnumResourceNamesEx functions. It receives the type and name of a resource.
EnumResTypeProc = ENUMRESTYPEPROC
ENUMRESTYPEPROC = BOOL Function(HMODULE hModule, Pointer<Utf16> lpszType, LONG_PTR lParam)
Application-defined callback function used with the EnumResourceTypes and EnumResourceTypesEx functions. It receives resource types.
EnumWindowsProc = WNDENUMPROC
ExcepInfoProc = IntPtr Function(Pointer<EXCEPINFO>)
FLOAT = Float
FONTENUMPROC = Int32 Function(Pointer<LOGFONT> lpelfe, Pointer<TEXTMETRIC> lpntme, DWORD FontType, LPARAM lParam)
Application defined callback function used with the EnumFontFamiliesEx function. It is used to process the fonts.
FRHookProc = LPFRHOOKPROC
GRAYSTRINGPROC = Int32 Function(IntPtr Arg1, IntPtr Arg2, Int32 Arg3)
Application-defined callback function used with the GrayString function. It is used to draw a string.
HANDLE = IntPtr
HandlerRoutine = PHANDLER_ROUTINE
HCALL = DWORD
HDC = IntPtr
HINSTANCE = IntPtr
HKEY = IntPtr
HMIDIIN = IntPtr
HMODULE = IntPtr
HMONITOR = IntPtr
HOOKPROC = LRESULT Function(Int32 nCode, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
An application-defined or library-defined callback function used with the SetWindowsHookEx function. The system calls this function before calling the window procedure to process a message sent to the thread.
HRESULT = LONG
HRGN = IntPtr
HSTRING = IntPtr
HWND = IntPtr
INT = Int32
INT16 = Int16
INT32 = Int32
INT64 = Int64
INT8 = Int8
INT_PTR = IntPtr
LANGID = WORD
LCID = DWORD
LCTYPE = DWORD
LGRPID = DWORD
LONG = Int32
LONG32 = Int32
LONG64 = Int64
LONG_PTR = IntPtr
LONGLONG = Int64
LPARAM = LONG_PTR
LPBYTE = Pointer<BYTE>
LPCCHOOKPROC = UINT_PTR Function(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM)
Application-defined callback function used with the ChooseColor function. Receives messages or notifications intended for the default dialog box procedure of the Color dialog box.
LPCFHOOKPROC = UINT_PTR Function(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM)
Application-defined callback function used with the ChooseFont function. Receives messages or notifications intended for the default dialog box procedure of the Font dialog box.
LPEXCEPFINO_DEFERRED_FILLIN = IntPtr Function(Pointer<EXCEPINFO>)
Application-defined callback function used with the IDispatch::Invoke function to defer filling in bstrDescription, bstrHelpFile, and dwHelpContext fields until they are needed.
LPFRHOOKPROC = UINT_PTR Function(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM)
Application-defined callback function used with the FindText or ReplaceText function. Receives messages or notifications intended for the default dialog box procedure of the Find or Replace dialog box.
LPHANDLER_FUNCTION = Void Function(DWORD dwControl)
Application-defined callback function used with the RegisterServiceCtrlHandler function. A service program can use it as the control handler function of a particular service.
LPHANDLER_FUNCTION_EX = DWORD Function(DWORD dwControl, DWORD dwEventType, LPVOID lpEventData, LPVOID lpContext)
Application-defined callback function used with the RegisterServiceCtrlHandlerEx function. A service program can use it as the control handler function of a particular service.
LphandlerFunction = LPHANDLER_FUNCTION
LphandlerFunctionEx = LPHANDLER_FUNCTION_EX
LPOCNCHKPROC = Int32 Function(IntPtr, IntPtr, Pointer<NativeType>)
Application-defined callback function that provides special verification for smart card searches.
LPOCNCONNPROC = IntPtr Function(IntPtr, Pointer<Utf16>, Pointer<Utf16>, Pointer<NativeType>)
Application-defined callback function that allows callers to perform additional processing to connect to the smart card.
LPOCNDSCPROC = Void Function(IntPtr, IntPtr, Pointer<NativeType>)
Application-defined callback function that can be used for disconnecting smart cards.
LPOFNHOOKPROC = UINT_PTR Function(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM)
Application-defined callback function used with the Explorer-style Open and Save As dialog boxes. Receives notification messages sent from the dialog box. The function also receives messages for any additional controls that you defined by specifying a child dialog template.
LPOVERLAPPED_COMPLETION_ROUTINE = Void Function(DWORD dwErrorCode, DWORD dwNumberOfBytesTransfered, OVERLAPPED lpOverlapped)
Application-defined callback function used with the ReadFileEx and WriteFileEx functions. It is called when the asynchronous input and output (I/O) operation is completed or canceled and the calling thread is in an alertable state (by using the SleepEx, MsgWaitForMultipleObjectsEx, WaitForSingleObjectEx, or WaitForMultipleObjectsEx function with the fAlertable parameter set to TRUE).
LpoverlappedCompletionRoutine = LPOVERLAPPED_COMPLETION_ROUTINE
LPSERVICE_MAIN_FUNCTION = Void Function(DWORD dwNumServicesArgs, Pointer<LPWSTR> lpServiceArgVectors)
Application-defined callback function used as the entry point for a service. The LPSERVICE_MAIN_FUNCTION type defines a pointer to this callback function. ServiceMain is a placeholder for an application-defined function name.
LpserviceMainFunctionw = LPSERVICE_MAIN_FUNCTION
LPSTR = Pointer<Utf8>
LPTHREAD_START_ROUTINE = DWORD Function(Pointer<NativeType> lpParameter)
Application-defined callback function that serves as the starting address for a thread. Specify this address when calling the CreateThread, CreateRemoteThread, or CreateRemoteThreadEx function.
LPVOID = Pointer<NativeType>
LPWSTR = Pointer<Utf16>
LRESULT = LONG_PTR
MagImageScalingCallback = BOOL Function(HWND hwnd, Pointer<NativeType> srcdata, MAGIMAGEHEADER srcheader, Pointer<NativeType> destdata, MAGIMAGEHEADER destheader, RECT unclipped, RECT clipped, HRGN dirty)
Application-defined callback function implements a custom transform for image scaling.
MidiInProc = MIDIINPROC
MIDIINPROC = Void Function(HMIDIIN hMidiIn, UINT wMsg, DWORD_PTR dwInstance, DWORD_PTR dwParam1, DWORD_PTR dwParam2)
Application-defined callback function for handling incoming MIDI messages. MidiInProc is a placeholder for the application-supplied function name. The address of this function can be specified in the callback-address parameter of the midiInOpen function.
MidiOutProc = MIDIOUTPROC
MIDIOUTPROC = Void Function(IntPtr hmo, Uint32 wMsg, IntPtr dwInstance, IntPtr dwParam1, IntPtr dwParam2)
Application-defined callback function for handling outgoing MIDI messages. MidiOutProc is a placeholder for the application-supplied function name. The address of the function can be specified in the callback-address parameter of the midiOutOpen function.
MonitorEnumProc = MONITORENUMPROC
MONITORENUMPROC = Int32 Function(IntPtr hMonitor, IntPtr hDC, Pointer<NativeType> lpRect, IntPtr lParam)
Application-defined callback function used with the EnumDisplayMonitors function. It receives display monitors in the calculated enumeration set.
NTSTATUS = Int32
OFNHookProc = LPOFNHOOKPROC
OpenCardCheckProc = LPOCNCHKPROC
OpenCardConnProc = LPOCNCONNPROC
OpenCardDisconnProc = LPOCNDSCPROC
OutputProc = GRAYSTRINGPROC
PENUM_PAGE_FILE_CALLBACK = BOOL Function(PVOID pContext, Pointer<ENUM_PAGE_FILE_INFORMATION> pPageFileInfo, LPWSTR lpFilename)
Application-defined callback function used with the EnumPageFiles function.
PFN_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_EX = Int32 Function(Pointer<NativeType> pvParam, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_PARAMS> pAuthCallbackParams)
Application-defined callback function used with the BluetoothRegisterForAuthenticationEx function.
PFN_BLUETOOTH_ENUM_ATTRIBUTES_CALLBACK = BOOL Function(ULONG uAttribId, LPBYTE pValueStream, ULONG cbStreamSize, LPVOID pvParam)
Application-defined callback function that is called once for each attribute found in the pSDPStream parameter passed to the BluetoothSdpEnumAttributes function call.
PFN_DEVICE_CALLBACK = BOOL Function(LPVOID pvParam, Pointer<BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_INFO> pDevice)
Application-defined callback function used in association with selecting Bluetooth devices. The PFN_DEVICE_CALLBACK function can be set to NULL if no specialized filtering is required.
PFN_SC_NOTIFY_CALLBACK = PVOID Function(PVOID pParameter)
Application-defined callback function that receives a pointer to the SERVICE_NOTIFY structure provided by the caller.
PfnAuthenticationCallbackEx = PFN_AUTHENTICATION_CALLBACK_EX
PFNBLUETOOTH_GATT_EVENT_CALLBACK = Void Function(Int32 EventType, Pointer<NativeType> EventOutParameter, Pointer<NativeType> Context)
Application-defined callback function used with profile drivers to implement a Bluetooth GATT event callback to be called whenever the value of a specific characteristic changes.
PfnBluetoothEnumAttributesCallback = PFN_BLUETOOTH_ENUM_ATTRIBUTES_CALLBACK
PfnbluetoothGattEventCallback = PFNBLUETOOTH_GATT_EVENT_CALLBACK
PfnDeviceCallback = PFN_DEVICE_CALLBACK
PfnScNotifyCallbackFunction = PFN_SC_NOTIFY_CALLBACK
PFTASKDIALOGCALLBACK = IntPtr Function(IntPtr hwnd, Uint32 uMsg, IntPtr wParam, IntPtr lParam, IntPtr lpRefData)
Application-defined callback function used with the TaskDialogIndirect function. It receives messages from the task dialog when various events occur.
PHANDLER_ROUTINE = BOOL Function(DWORD dwCtrlType)
Application-defined callback function used with the SetConsoleCtrlHandler function. A console process uses this function to handle control signals received by the process. When the signal is received, the system creates a new thread in the process to execute the function.
PSTR = Pointer<Utf8>
PSYM_ENUMERATESYMBOLS_CALLBACK = Int32 Function(Pointer<SYMBOL_INFO> pSymInfo, Uint32 SymbolSize, Pointer<NativeType> UserContext)
Application-defined callback function used with the SymEnumSymbols, SymEnumTypes, and SymEnumTypesByName functions.
PVOID = Pointer<NativeType>
PWSTR = Pointer<Utf16>
QWORD = Uint64
SENDASYNCPROC = Void Function(IntPtr, Uint32, IntPtr, IntPtr)
Application-defined callback function used with the SendMessageCallback function. The system passes the message to the callback function after passing the message to the destination window procedure. The SENDASYNCPROC type defines a pointer to this callback function. SendAsyncProc is a placeholder for the application-defined function name.
SendAsyncProc = SENDASYNCPROC
SHORT = Int16
SIZE_T = ULONG_PTR
SPNOTIFYCALLBACK = Void Function(WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
SpNotifyCallback = SPNOTIFYCALLBACK
SubclassProc = SUBCLASSPROC
SUBCLASSPROC = LRESULT Function(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, UINT_PTR uIdSubclass, DWORD_PTR dwRefData)
Application-defined callback function used with the RemoveWindowSubclass and SetWindowSubclass functions.
SymEnumSymbolsProc = PSYM_ENUMERATESYMBOLS_CALLBACK
TaskDialogCallbackProc = PFTASKDIALOGCALLBACK
ThreadProc = LPTHREAD_START_ROUTINE
TimerProc = TIMERPROC
TIMERPROC = Void Function(IntPtr, Uint32, Pointer<Uint32>, Int32)
Application-defined callback function that processes WM_TIMER messages.
UCHAR = Uint8
UINT = Uint32
UINT16 = Uint16
UINT32 = Uint32
UINT64 = Uint64
UINT8 = Uint8
UINT_PTR = IntPtr
ULONG = Uint32
ULONG32 = Uint32
ULONG64 = Uint64
ULONG_PTR = IntPtr
ULONGLONG = Uint64
USHORT = Uint16
VTablePointer = Pointer<Pointer<IntPtr>>
Type alias that represents a Pointer to the COM v-table.
WCHAR = Uint16
WindowProc = WNDPROC
WLAN_NOTIFICATION_CALLBACK = Void Function(Pointer<L2_NOTIFICATION_DATA>, Pointer<NativeType>)
Application-defined callback function that is used by an application to register and unregister notifications on all wireless interfaces.
WlanNotificationCallback = WLAN_NOTIFICATION_CALLBACK
WNDENUMPROC = BOOL Function(HWND hwnd, LPARAM lParam)
Application-defined callback function used with the EnumChildWindows function. It receives the child window handles.
WNDPROC = LRESULT Function(HWND hwnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
Application-defined callback function that processes messages sent to a window.
WORD = Uint16
WPARAM = UINT_PTR

Exceptions / Errors

COMException
Generic COM Exception
WindowsException
Generalized Windows exception